Boat Information Book 34' Seaark

BOAT INFORMATION BOOK
FOR
34-FOOT PATROL BOAT

S9008-GL-BIB-010
S9008-GL-BIB-010
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
CHAPTER 3 - SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER 5 - HULL SPECIFICATIONS AND REPAIR
CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 7 - EMERGENCY AND DAMAGE CONTROL
CHAPTER 8 - MISCELLANEOUS
Foreword-1/(Foreword-2 blank)
S9008-GL-BIB-010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Paragraph Title Page
1. GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................................................................. 1-1
Section I. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 1-1
1-1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................ 1-1

1-2 PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................ 1-1
Section II. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................. 1-3
1-3 HULL STRUCTURE FEATURES ................................................................... 1-3

1-4 OPERATIONAL SYSTEMS ............................................................................ 1-3
1-4.1 PROPULSION SYSTEM ................................................................................. 1-3
1-4.2 FUEL SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 1-3
1-4.3 ENGINE COOLANT AND PREHEATER SYSTEMS .................................. 1-3
1-4.4 SEAWATER COOLING SYSTEM .................................................................. 1-3
1-4.5 ENGINE COMBUSTION AIR AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS ....................... 1-4
1-4.6 FAST LUBE OIL CHANGE SYSTEM ........................................................... 1-4
1-4.7 BILGE PUMPING SYSTEM ........................................................................... 1-4
1-4.8 STEERING SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 1-4
1-4.9 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ........... 1-4
1-4.10 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ............................................................................... 1-4
1-4.10.1 24Vdc-12Vdc Electrical System ........................................................................ 1-4
1-4.10.2 120Vac Electrical System .................................................................................. 1-4
1-4.10.3 220Vac Electrical System .................................................................................. 1-4
1-4.11 COMMUNICATION, NAVIGATION, AND FORCE PROTECTION
(SECURITY) SYSTEM .................................................................................... 1-5
1-4.12 SANITATION SYSTEM .................................................................................. 1-5
1-4.13 TRAILER .......................................................................................................... 1-5
1-5 LABEL PLATES AND MARKINGS .............................................................. 1-5
Section III. SUPPORT DATA ............................................................................................. 1-6
1-6 ONBOARD TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION .......................................... 1-6

1-7 OTHER DOCUMENTATION ......................................................................... 1-6
1-8 METRIC CONVERSION FACTORS ............................................................. 1-20
Section IV. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................... 1-21
1-9 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................... 1-21
2. GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS ............................................................................................. 2-1
2-1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 2-1

2-2 EXTERIOR ARRANGEMENT ....................................................................... 2-1
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued
2. GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS - Continued
2-2.1 FOREDECK ...................................................................................................... 2-1

2-2.2 WELL DECK .................................................................................................... 2-1
2-2.3 WALKWAYS .................................................................................................... 2-5
2-2.4 CREW CABIN EXTERIOR ARRANGEMENT ............................................. 2-5
2-2.5 AFT DECK ....................................................................................................... 2-7
2-2.6 TRANSOM ....................................................................................................... 2-9
2-2.7 HULL ................................................................................................................ 2-9
2-3 INTERIOR ARRANGEMENT ........................................................................ 2-10
2-3.1 CREW CABIN INTERIOR ............................................................................. 2-10
2-3.2 UPPER SECTION ............................................................................................ 2-10
2-3.3 CONTROL CONSOLE .................................................................................... 2-10
2-3.4 COMMUNICATION CONSOLE .................................................................... 2-11
2-3.5 CREW SEATING .............................................................................................. 2-12
2-3.6 CABIN INTERIOR EQUIPMENT AND FITTINGS ..................................... 2-12
2-3.7 FORWARD CREW CABIN ............................................................................. 2-13
2-4 BELOW DECK COMPARTMENTS .............................................................. 2-15
2-4.1 ANCHOR LOCKER ........................................................................................ 2-15
2-4.2 WELL DECK STORAGE COMPARTMENT ................................................ 2-15
2-4.3 FORWARD CREW CABIN VOID ................................................................. 2-16
2-4.4 CREW CABIN STORAGE COMPARTMENT .............................................. 2-16
2-4.5 ENGINE COMPARTMENT INTERIOR ........................................................ 2-16
3. SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS ......................................................................... 3-1
Section I. GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-1
3-1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 3-1
Section II. PROPULSION SYSTEM ................................................................................. 3-2
3-2 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-2

3-3 PROPULSION ENGINE ................................................................................. 3-2
3-3.1 ENGINE, MARINE GEAR, AND REVERSE BUCKET CONTROLS ........ 3-2
3-3.2 ENGINE INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS .................................. 3-4
3-4 MARINE GEAR ............................................................................................... 3-7
3-5 AQUADRIVES ................................................................................................ 3-7
3-6 WATERJET DRIVES ....................................................................................... 3-7
3-6.1 COMPONENTS ............................................................................................... 3-7
3-6.2 OPERATION .................................................................................................... 3-7
3-6.3 CONTROLS ...................................................................................................... 3-8
3-7 BOAT TRIM TABS .......................................................................................... 3-8
ii
3. SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS - Continued
Section II. PROPULSION SYSTEM - Continued
3-7.1 TRIM TAB ACTUATORS ............................................................................... 3-8

3-7.2 TRIM TAB CONTROLS ................................................................................. 3-8
Section III. FUEL SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 3-10
3-8 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-10

3-9 FUEL TANK ..................................................................................................... 3-10
3-10 FUEL STRIPPING PUMP ............................................................................... 3-10
3-11 FUEL FILTER AND WATER REMOVAL ...................................................... 3-12
3-12 FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR ............................................................ 3-13
3-12.1 ENGINE FUEL FILTER ................................................................................... 3-13
3-13 ENGINE FUEL SUPPLY ................................................................................. 3-13
3-13.1 FUEL TRANSFER PUMP ............................................................................... 3-13
3-13.2 FUEL INJECTION PUMP ............................................................................... 3-13
3-14 FUEL RETURN SYSTEM ............................................................................... 3-13
3-14.1 FUEL BLOCK CONNECTION ...................................................................... 3-13
3-14.2 FUEL OIL COOLER ........................................................................................ 3-16
3-15 RECOMMENDED FUEL ................................................................................ 3-16
3-15.1 FUEL LUBRICITY AND VISCOSITY .......................................................... 3-16
3-15.2 FUEL CETANE NUMBER .............................................................................. 3-16
3-15.3 LOW TEMPERATURE OPERATION ............................................................ 3-16
3-15.4 RECOMMENDED DIESEL FUEL ................................................................. 3-16
Section IV. ENGINE COOLANT AND PREHEATER SYSTEMS .................................. 3-18
3-16 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-18

3-16.1 ENGINE COOLANT SYSTEM ...................................................................... 3-18
3-16.2 COOLANT SYSTEM FLOW .......................................................................... 3-19
Section V. SEAWATER COOLING SYSTEM .................................................................. 3-20
3-17 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-20

3-17.1 SEAWATER SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 3-20
3-17.2 SEAWATER SYSTEM FLOW ......................................................................... 3-20
Section VI. ENGINE COMBUSTION AIR AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS ....................... 3-22
3-18 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-22

3-19 ENGINE COMBUSTION AIR INTAKE SYSTEM ....................................... 3-22
3-19.1 INTAKE SYSTEM OPERATION ................................................................... 3-22
iii
Section VI. ENGINE COMBUSTION AIR AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS - Continued
3-19.2 AIR INTAKE PREHEATER ............................................................................ 3-22

3-20 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM ....................................................................... 3-22
Section VII. FAST LUBE OIL CHANGE SYSTEM ........................................................... 3-23
3-21 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-23

3-21.1 PUMP ................................................................................................................ 3-23
3-21.2 VALVES ............................................................................................................ 3-23
3-21.3 DISCHARGE FITTINGS ................................................................................. 3-23
3-21.4 CONTROLS ...................................................................................................... 3-23
Section VIII. BILGE PUMPING AND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS ........................................ 3-24
3-22 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-24

3-22.1 ELECTRIC BILGE PUMP .............................................................................. 3-24
3-22.2 BILGE PUMP CONTROLS ............................................................................ 3-24
3-22.3 MANUAL BILGE PUMP ................................................................................ 3-24
3-22.4 DRAINAGE ...................................................................................................... 3-25
Section IX. STEERING SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 3-26
3-23 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-26

3-23.1 HELM UNIT ..................................................................................................... 3-26
3-23.2 STEERING CYLINDER .................................................................................. 3-26
3-23.3 STEERING LINKAGE ..................................................................................... 3-26
Section X. HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ........... 3-28
3-24 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-28

3-24.1 CONTROL PANEL .......................................................................................... 3-28
3-24.2 AIR CONDITIONING ..................................................................................... 3-28
3-24.3 HEATING .......................................................................................................... 3-28
3-24.4 VENTILATION ................................................................................................ 3-28
3-24.5 HEATER/DEFROSTER ................................................................................... 3-29
Section XI. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ............................................................................... 3-31
3-25 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-31

3-25.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................... 3-31
3-25.2 CONNECTIONS .............................................................................................. 3-31
iv
Section XI. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - Continued
3-25.3 ELECTRICAL LABEL PLATES AND MARKINGS ..................................... 3-31

3-26 DC ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ........................................................................... 3-32
3-26.1 DC POWER SOURCES .................................................................................. 3-32
3-26.2 DC POWER DISTRIBUTION ........................................................................ 3-32
3-26.3 DC CONTROL COMPONENTS .................................................................... 3-32
3-26.4 DC EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................. 3-35
3-26.5 DC GROUND SYSTEM .................................................................................. 3-35
3-27 AC ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ........................................................................... 3-36
3-27.1 AC POWER SOURCES .................................................................................. 3-36
3-27.2 AC DISTRIBUTION ........................................................................................ 3-36
3-27.3 AC CONTROL COMPONENTS .................................................................... 3-37
3-27.4 OTHER AC CONTROL COMPONENTS ...................................................... 3-37
3-27.5 AC EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................. 3-41
3-27.6 GROUNDING ................................................................................................... 3-42
3-28 PROPULSION ENGINE STARTING, INSTRUMENTATION,
AND ALARMS ................................................................................................ 3-42
Section XII. COMMUNICATION, NAVIGATION, AND FORCE PROTECTION

(SECURITY) PACKAGE ................................................................................ 3-43
3-29 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-43

3-30 COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 3-43
3-30.1 VHF RADIO ..................................................................................................... 3-43
3-31 NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT ......................................................................... 3-44
3-31.1 RADAR ............................................................................................................. 3-44
3-31.2 COMPASS ........................................................................................................ 3-44
3-31.3 BOAT HORN .................................................................................................... 3-44
3-31.4 NAVIGATION LIGHTS ................................................................................... 3-44
3-32 FORCE PROTECTION (SECURITY) PACKAGE ....................................... 3-44
3-32.1 STROBE LIGHTBAR ...................................................................................... 3-44
3-32.2 SIREN/PA ......................................................................................................... 3-44
3-32.3 SEARCHLIGHT ............................................................................................... 3-45
Section XIII. DAMAGE CONTROL AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT .................................. 3-46
3-33 DAMAGE CONTROL AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT .................................. 3-46

3-34 FIRE FIGHTING .............................................................................................. 3-46
3-34.1 ENGINE COMPARTMENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ..................... 3-46
v
Section XIII. DAMAGE CONTROL AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT - Continued
3-34.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ............................................................ 3-46

3-35 DEWATERING ................................................................................................. 3-46
3-36 SAFETY EQUIPMENT ................................................................................... 3-46
3-36.1 BOATHOOK .................................................................................................... 3-46
3-36.2 RING BUOY .................................................................................................... 3-46
Section XIV. SANITATION SYSTEM .................................................................................. 3-48
3-37 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-48
Section XV. TRAILER .......................................................................................................... 3-49
3-38 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-49
4. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................. 4-1
Section I. GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 4-1
4-1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 4-1
Section II. PREPARATION FOR USE .............................................................................. 4-2
4-2 PREOPERATIONAL CHECKOUT ................................................................ 4-2

4-3 FUEL SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 4-5
4-3.1 FUEL TANK ..................................................................................................... 4-5
4-3.2 FUEL TANK STRIPPING ............................................................................... 4-5
4-3.3 FUEL FILLING PROCEDURE ....................................................................... 4-5
4-3.4 FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR ............................................................ 4-6
4-3.4.1 Drain the Fuel Filter/Water Separator ............................................................... 4-6
4-3.4.2 Fuel Element Inspection ..................................................................................... 4-7
4-4 FLUID LEVELS ............................................................................................... 4-7
4-4.1 ENGINE LUBE OIL ........................................................................................ 4-7
4-4.1.1 Checking the Oil in the Engine ........................................................................... 4-7
4-4.1.2 Adding Lube Oil to the Engine ........................................................................... 4-7
4-4.2 CHECKING THE LUBE OIL IN THE MARINE GEAR .............................. 4-7
4-4.3 ADDING FRESHWATER COOLANT TO THE ENGINE ............................ 4-7
4-5 SEAWATER SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 4-9
4-5.1 SEAWATER STRAINER ................................................................................. 4-9
4-5.2 SEAWATER SUPPLY ...................................................................................... 4-9
4-6 BILGE PUMPING SYSTEMS ......................................................................... 4-9
vi
4. BOAT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - Continued
Section II. PREPARATION FOR USE - Continued
4-6.1 ELECTRIC BILGE PUMP .............................................................................. 4-9

4-6.2 HAND-OPERATED BILGE PUMP ............................................................... 4-10
4-7 STEERING SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 4-10
4-8 INFLATABLE COLLAR ................................................................................. 4-10
4-9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM .................................................................................. 4-10
4-9.1 BATTERY BANK VOLTAGE AND GAUGE LIGHTING ............................ 4-10
4-9.2 NAVIGATION LIGHTS AND HORN ............................................................ 4-11
4-9.3 SHORE POWER .............................................................................................. 4-11
4-10 ELECTRONICS AND FORCE PROTECTION
(SECURITY) PACKAGE ................................................................................ 4-11
4-11 RADIO SETUP ................................................................................................ 4-11
4-11.1 LAMP ADJUSTING ......................................................................................... 4-11
4-11.2 LCD CONTRAST ............................................................................................ 4-11
4-11.3 TIME OFFSET .................................................................................................. 4-11
4-11.4 TIME LOCATION ............................................................................................ 4-12
4-11.5 TRUE AND MAGNETIC CHANGE .............................................................. 4-12
4-11.6 PRIORITY CHANNEL SET ............................................................................ 4-13
4-11.7 SCAN TYPE ..................................................................................................... 4-13
4-11.8 SCAN RESUME TIME .................................................................................... 4-13
4-11.9 KEY BEEP ........................................................................................................ 4-14
4-11.10 WX ALERT ....................................................................................................... 4-14
4-11.11 CHANNEL NAME CHANGE ......................................................................... 4-15
4-11.12 NAVNET DISPLAY UNIT .............................................................................. 4-15
4-11.12.1 Keypad ............................................................................................................... 4-16
4-11.12.2 Soft Keys ........................................................................................................... 4-17
4-11.12.3 ENTER Knob .................................................................................................... 4-20
4-11.12.4 Cursor Pad ......................................................................................................... 4-20
4-11.12.5 Chart Plot ........................................................................................................... 4-20
4-11.12.6 Remote Controller .............................................................................................. 4-20
4-11.13 MAGENTIC COMPASS .................................................................................. 4-20
4-11.14 SIREN/PA SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 4-20
4-11.15 STROBE LIGHT BAR ..................................................................................... 4-20
4-11.16 SEARCHLIGHT ............................................................................................... 4-20
Section III. OPERATIONS .................................................................................................. 4-21
4-12 NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURES ......................................................... 4-21

4-12.1 ENGINE STARTING ........................................................................................ 4-21
4-12.2 DRIVE SYSTEM CHECK ............................................................................... 4-22
4-12.3 STARTING THE DIESEL VIEW .................................................................... 4-22
vii
4. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - Continued
Section III. OPERATIONS - Continued
4-12.3.1 Diesel View Home Page ................................................................................... 4-23

4-12.3.2 Data Display Screen .......................................................................................... 4-23
4-12.3.3 Propulsion Data Screens .................................................................................... 4-23
4-12.3.4 Vessel Data Screen ........................................................................................... 4-25
4-12.3.5 System Directory ............................................................................................... 4-25
4-12.4 SMARTCRAFT TACHOMETER DISPLAY ................................................. 4-25
4-12.4.1 Displays ............................................................................................................. 4-25
4-12.4.2 Controls .............................................................................................................. 4-25
4-12.4.3 Alarms and Warnings ........................................................................................ 4-26
4-13 BOAT HANDLING .......................................................................................... 4-26
4-13.1 CASTING OFF ................................................................................................. 4-26
4-13.2 THROTTLE AND DIRECTIONAL CONTROL ........................................... 4-26
4-13.3 STEERING ........................................................................................................ 4-27
4-13.4 ASTERN OPERATION ................................................................................... 4-27
4-13.5 ZERO SPEED OPERATION ........................................................................... 4-27
4-13.6 DOCKING ........................................................................................................ 4-27
4-13.7 REVERSE BUCKET STOPS .......................................................................... 4-27
4-13.8 MOORING ........................................................................................................ 4-27
4-13.9 ANCHORING ................................................................................................... 4-27
4-13.10 WEIGH ANCHOR ........................................................................................... 4-28
4-14 BILGE DRAINING .......................................................................................... 4-28
4-14.1 BILGE DRAIN VALVES ................................................................................. 4-28
4-14.2 BILGE PUMPS ................................................................................................. 4-28
4-14.2.1 Electric Bilge Pumps .......................................................................................... 4-28
4-14.2.2 Manual Bilge Pump ........................................................................................... 4-28
4-14.3 BILGE DRAIN PLUGS ................................................................................... 4-28
4-15 TRIM TABS ...................................................................................................... 4-28
4-16 SUBFREEZING CONDITIONS ...................................................................... 4-29
4-16.1 ENGINE SEAWATER DRAINING ................................................................. 4-29
4-16.2 ENGINE COOLANT SYSTEM DRAINAGE ................................................ 4-31
4-16.3 BILGE PUMP PIPING DRAINAGE .............................................................. 4-31
4-17 HVAC SYSTEM OPERATION ....................................................................... 4-31
4-17.1 COOLING OPERATION ................................................................................. 4-31
4-17.2 HEATING OPERATION .................................................................................. 4-32
4-17.3 DEHUMIDIFYING OPERATION .................................................................. 4-32
4-17.4 VENTILATING OPERATION ........................................................................ 4-33
4-18 HEATING/DEFROSTING OPERATION ....................................................... 4-33
4-19 COMMUNICATION AND NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT ........................... 4-34
4-20 VHF RADIO OPERATION ............................................................................. 4-34
4-20.1 VHF RADIO RECEPTION ............................................................................. 4-34
viii
4. BOAT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - Continued
4-20.2 VHF RADIO TRANSMISSION ...................................................................... 4-34

4-20.3 TRANSMIT TIME-OUT TIMER (TOT) ........................................................ 4-34
4-20.4 SIMPLEX/DUPLEX CHANNEL USE ............................................................ 4-34
4-20.5 INTERNATIONAL, USA, AND CANADA MODE ...................................... 4-34
4-20.6 NOAA WEATHER CHANNEL ...................................................................... 4-35
4-20.6.1 NOAA Weather Alert ........................................................................................ 4-35
4-20.6.2 NOAA Weather Alert Testing ........................................................................... 4-35
4-20.7 EMERGENCY CHANNEL USE ..................................................................... 4-35
4-20.8 CALLING ANOTHER VESSEL ..................................................................... 4-36
4-20.9 MAKING TELEPHONE CALLS .................................................................... 4-36
4-20.10 OPERATING ON CHANNELS 13 AND 67 ................................................... 4-36
4-20.11 DUAL WATCH (TO PRIORITY CHANNEL) ............................................... 4-36
4-20.12 SCANNING ...................................................................................................... 4-37
4-20.12.1 Selecting the Scan Type ..................................................................................... 4-37
4-20.12.2 Memory Scanning (M-SCAN) .......................................................................... 4-37
4-20.12.3 Priority Scanning (P-SCAN) ............................................................................. 4-38
4-20.13 NAVIGATION INDICATION ......................................................................... 4-38
4-21 DIGITAL SELECTIVE CALLING .................................................................. 4-38
4-21.1 MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE IDENTITY (MMSI) .................................. 4-38
4-21.1.1 MMSI ................................................................................................................ 4-38
4-21.1.2 Programming the MMSI .................................................................................... 4-39
4-21.2 DSC DISTRESS CALL .................................................................................... 4-39
4-21.2.1 Transmitting a DSC Distress Call ...................................................................... 4-39
4-21.2.2 Transmitting a DSC Distress Call with Nature of Distress Call ........................ 4-40
4-21.2.3 Cancel a DSC Distress Call .............................................................................. 4-40
4-21.2.4 Receiving a DSC Distress Call .......................................................................... 4-41
4-21.3 ALL SHIPS CALL ........................................................................................... 4-41
4-21.3.1 Transmitting an All Ships Call ............................................................................ 4-41
4-21.3.2 Receiving an All Ships Call ................................................................................ 4-42
4-21.4 INDIVIDUAL CALL ....................................................................................... 4-42
4-21.4.1 Setting up the Individual/Position Call Directory ................................................ 4-42
4-21.4.2 Setting up Individual Reply ................................................................................. 4-43
4-21.4.3 Setting up the Individual/Group Call Ringer ....................................................... 4-44
4-21.4.3.1 Turning OFF The Call Ringer ............................................................................ 4-44
4-21.4.4 Transmitting an Individual Call ........................................................................... 4-44
4-21.4.4.1 Preprogramming Call ......................................................................................... 4-44
4-21.4.4.2 Manual Calling ................................................................................................... 4-45
4-21.4.5 Receiving an Individual Call ............................................................................... 4-46
4-21.4.6 Setup Up the Call Waiting Function ................................................................... 4-46
ix
4-21.5 GROUP CALL .................................................................................................. 4-47

4-21.5.1 Setting up a Group Call ...................................................................................... 4-47
4-21.5.2 Transmitting a Group Call .................................................................................. 4-48
4-21.5.2.1 Preprogramming Call ......................................................................................... 4-48
4-21.5.2.2 Manual Calling ................................................................................................... 4-48
4-21.5.3 Receiving a Group Call ...................................................................................... 4-49
4-21.6 POSITION REQUEST ..................................................................................... 4-49
4-21.6.1 Setting Up Position Reply .................................................................................. 4-49
4-21.6.1.1 Position Request Ringer ..................................................................................... 4-50
4-21.6.2 Transmitting a Position Request to Another Vessel ........................................... 4-50
4-21.6.2.1 Preprogramming Request .................................................................................. 4-50
4-21.6.2.2 Manual Request ................................................................................................. 4-51
4-21.6.3 Receiving a Position Request ............................................................................ 4-51
4-21.6.3.1 Automatically Reply ........................................................................................... 4-51
4-21.6.3.2 Manually Reply .................................................................................................. 4-51
4-21.7 POSITION SEND ............................................................................................. 4-52
4-21.7.1 Setting up a Position Send Ringer ...................................................................... 4-52
4-21.7.2 Transmitting a DSC Position Send Call ............................................................. 4-52
4-21.7.2.1 Preprogrammable Calling .................................................................................. 4-52
4-21.7.2.2 Manual Calling ................................................................................................... 4-53
4-21.7.3 Receiving a DSC Position Send Call ................................................................. 4-53
4-21.8 MANUAL INPUTTING OF THE GPS LOCATION (LAT/LONG) .............. 4-53
4-21.9 SIREN/PA ......................................................................................................... 4-53
4-21.9.1 Siren/PA ............................................................................................................. 4-53
4-21.10 NAVNET SETUP AND OPERATION ............................................................ 4-55
4-21.10.1 Radar Picture ..................................................................................................... 4-55
4-21.10.2 Plotter Display ................................................................................................... 4-58
4-21.10.3 Compass Display Screen ................................................................................... 4-59
4-21.10.4 Highway Display Screen ................................................................................... 4-60
4-21.10.5 Nav Data Display .............................................................................................. 4-61
4-21.10.6 Plotter Display Operation .................................................................................. 4-61
4-21.10.7 Plotter Alarms .................................................................................................... 4-64
4-21.10.8 Network Sounder ............................................................................................... 4-65
4-21.10.9 Sounder Display Data ........................................................................................ 4-65
4-21.10.10 Depth Sounder Displays .................................................................................... 4-66
4-21.10.11 Automatic Operation .......................................................................................... 4-67
4-21.10.12 Manual Operation .............................................................................................. 4-67
4-21.10.13 Remote Control .................................................................................................. 4-67
4-21.11 MAGNETIC COMPASS .................................................................................. 4-67
x

4-21.12 SIREN/PA SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 4-67
4-21.13 STROBE LIGHT BAR ..................................................................................... 4-67
4-21.14 SEARCHLIGHT ............................................................................................... 4-68
4-22 SANITATION SYSTEM OPERATION .......................................................... 4-68
4-22.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 4-68
4-22.2 PREPARING TOILET FOR OPERATION .................................................... 4-68
4-22.3 TOILET OPERATION ..................................................................................... 4-69
4-22.4 EMPTYING THE HOLDING TANK ............................................................. 4-69
Section IV. SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES ........................................................................ 4-71
4-23 NORMAL SHUTDOWN ................................................................................. 4-71

4-23.1 PROPULSION ENGINE SHUTDOWN ......................................................... 4-71
4-23.2 FUEL SYSTEM SHUTDOWN ........................................................................ 4-71
4-23.3 BILGE SYSTEM SHUTDOWN ...................................................................... 4-71
4-23.4 COMMUNICATION AND NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN
(RADAR, GPS, VHF RADIO, SIREN/PA) .................................................... 4-71
4-23.5 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SHUTDOWN ......................................................... 4-72
4-23.6 BATTERY CHARGING ................................................................................... 4-72
4-23.6.1 Charging Batteries From A 110Vac Source ....................................................... 4-72
4-23.6.2 Charging The Batteries From A 220Vac Source ............................................... 4-72
4-24 COLD WEATHER SHUTDOWN ................................................................... 4-73
4-25 SUBFREEZING CONDITIONS ...................................................................... 4-73
Section V. EMERGENCY UNDERWAY PROCEDURES ............................................... 4-74
4-26 EMERGENCY STOPPING .............................................................................. 4-74

4-27 REVERSING BUCKET HYDRAULIC FAILURE ........................................ 4-74
4-27.1 MANUALLY RAISING THE REVERSING BUCKETS ............................... 4-74
4-27.2 MANEUVERING WITH A DEFECTIVE REVERSING BUCKET ............. 4-74
4-28 ENGINE FAILURE .......................................................................................... 4-74
4-28.1 ONE ENGINE BREAKDOWN ....................................................................... 4-74
4-28.2 TWO ENGINE FAILURE ................................................................................ 4-75
4-29 FUEL SYSTEM CONTAMINATION ............................................................. 4-75
4-30 PORTABLE DEWATERING PUMP ............................................................... 4-76
4-31 TOWING OPERATIONS ................................................................................. 4-76
4-32 ENGINE/WATERJET FAILURE ..................................................................... 4-77
4-33 MANUAL BILGE PUMP ................................................................................ 4-77
4-34 TOWING OPERATIONS ................................................................................. 4-77
4-34.1 TOWING ANOTHER BOAT ........................................................................... 4-77
4-34.2 BEING TOWED ............................................................................................... 4-78
4-35 MAN OVERBOARD (MOB) FUNCTION .................................................... 4-78
xi
Section V. EMERGENCY UNDERWAY PROCEDURES - Continued
4-36 DISTRESS CALL ............................................................................................. 4-79
Section VI. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................. 4-80
4-37 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 4-80

4-38 ENGINE FAULT INFORMATION ................................................................. 4-100
5. HULL SPECIFICATIONS AND REPAIR ............................................................................. 5-1
Section I. DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................ 5-1
5-1 HULL CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ 5-1

5-2 PAINTING ........................................................................................................ 5-1
5-2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION ............................................................................ 5-2
5-2.2 PAINT SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 5-2
5-3 CATHODIC PROTECTION ............................................................................ 5-2
Section II. REPAIR ............................................................................................................. 5-3
5-4 REPAIR ............................................................................................................. 5-3

5-4.1 WELDING ........................................................................................................ 5-3
5-4.2 INFLATABLE COLLAR ................................................................................. 5-3
5-5 SOIL REMOVAL FROM ALUMINUM .......................................................... 5-3
6. MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................... 6-1
Section I. PLANNED MAINTENANCE ......................................................................... 6-1
6-1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 6-1
Section II. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES .............................................. 6-2
6-2 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 6-2

6-3 FUEL SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 6-2
6-3.1 FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR ............................................................ 6-2
6-3.1.1 Purging Excess Water From Separator ............................................................. 6-2
6-3.1.2 Fuel Filter/Water Separator Filter Element Replacement .................................. 6-2
6-3.2 ENGINE-MOUNTED FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT .............................. 6-3
6-3.3 FUEL TANK STRIPPING ............................................................................... 6-4
xii
6. MAINTENANCE - Continued
Section II. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES - Continued
6-4 CHANGE OIL .................................................................................................. 6-5

6-4.1 CHANGING ENGINE LUBE OIL .................................................................. 6-5
6-4.2 CHANGING MARINE GEAR LUBE OIL ..................................................... 6-7
6-5 SEAWATER STRAINER ................................................................................. 6-8
6-5.1 SEAWATER STRAINER CLEANING ............................................................ 6-8
6-5.2 WINTERIZATION ........................................................................................... 6-8
6-6 BILGE PUMPS ................................................................................................. 6-9
6-6.1 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED BILGE PUMP .............................................. 6-9
6-7 STEERING SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 6-9
6-7.1 FILLING ............................................................................................................ 6-9
6-7.2 PURGING ......................................................................................................... 6-10
6-7.3 FINAL SYSTEM CHECK AND PURGING ................................................... 6-10
6-8 CORROSION PROTECTION ......................................................................... 6-11
6-8.1 HULL ZINCS .................................................................................................... 6-11
6-8.2 WATERJET DRIVE .......................................................................................... 6-11
6-8.3 ENGINE ZINC PLUGS .................................................................................... 6-11
6-9 COMMUNICATION ........................................................................................ 6-11
6-9.1 VHF RADIO CLEANING ............................................................................... 6-11
6-9.2 VHF RADIO INSPECTION ............................................................................ 6-11
6-10 NAVIGATION .................................................................................................. 6-12
6-10.1 RADAR DISPLAY UNIT ................................................................................ 6-12
6-10.1.1 Cleaning the Radar Display ............................................................................... 6-12
6-10.2 RADAR DISPLAY INSPECTION .................................................................. 6-12
6-10.3 LCD CLEANING ............................................................................................. 6-12
6-11 FORCE PROTECTION (SECURITY) PACKAGE ....................................... 6-13
6-11.1 SIREN/PA ......................................................................................................... 6-13
6-11.1.1 Siren/PA Control Head Cleaning ....................................................................... 6-13
6-11.1.2 Siren/PA Control Head Inspection ..................................................................... 6-13
6-11.1.3 Siren/PA Speaker Inspection ............................................................................. 6-13
6-11.1.4 Siren/PA Speaker Inspection ............................................................................. 6-13
6-11.2 SEARCHLIGHT ............................................................................................... 6-14
6-11.2.1 Searchlight Bulb Replacement ........................................................................... 6-14
6-11.2.2 Searchlight Cleaning .......................................................................................... 6-14
6-11.2.3 Searchlight Inspection ........................................................................................ 6-14
6-12 ENGINE AND CONSOLE INSTRUMENTS ................................................. 6-14
6-12.1 DIESEL VIEW DISPLAY UNIT ..................................................................... 6-14
6-12.1.1 Diesel View Display Unit Cleaning ................................................................... 6-14
xiii
6. MAINTENANCE - Continued
Section II. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES - Continued
6-12.1.2 Diesel View Display Unit Inspection ................................................................. 6-14

6-12.2 CONSOLE INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS .......................................... 6-15
6-12.2.1 Console Instruments and Controls Cleaning ...................................................... 6-15
6-12.2.2 Console Instruments and Controls Inspection .................................................... 6-15
6-13 SAFETY ............................................................................................................ 6-15
6-13.1 ENGINE COMPARTMENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ..................... 6-15
6-13.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS .................................................................................. 6-15
6-14 MISCELLANEOUS ......................................................................................... 6-15
6-14.1 ANCHOR, ANCHOR RODE, AND ANCHOR LINE ................................... 6-15
6-14.2 INFLATABLE HYBRID COLLAR ................................................................ 6-15
6-14.2.1 Cleaning The Collar ........................................................................................... 6-15
6-14.2.2 Inspecting The Collar ......................................................................................... 6-16
6-14.2.3 Cleaning Collar Valves ....................................................................................... 6-16
6-14.3 WATERJET DRIVE .......................................................................................... 6-16
Section III. LUBRICATION .................................................................................................... 6-17
6-15 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 6-17

6-16 DRIVE SHAFT ................................................................................................. 6-17
Section IV. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT .................. 6-18
6-17 GENERAL FOR VHF RADIO, RADAR DISPLAY, AND

SIREN/PA SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 6-18
6-17.1 VHF RADIO REMOVAL ................................................................................ 6-18
6-17.2 VHF RADIO REINSTALLATION .................................................................. 6-18
6-17.3 RADAR DISPLAY REMOVAL ...................................................................... 6-18
6-17.4 RADAR DISPLAY REINSTALLATION ....................................................... 6-19
6-17.5 SIREN/PA SYSTEM CONTROL HEAD REMOVAL ................................... 6-19
6-17.6 SIREN/PA SYSTEM CONTROL HEAD REINSTALLATION ..................... 6-19
6-18 PROPULSION ENGINE, MARINE GEAR, AND DRIVE SHAFT ............. 6-20
6-18.1 PROPULSION ENGINE, MARINE GEAR, AND DRIVE SHAFT
REMOVAL ....................................................................................................... 6-20
6-18.2 PROPULSION ENGINE, MARINE GEAR, AND DRIVE SHAFT
INSTALLATION .............................................................................................. 6-21
6-19 WATERJET DRIVE .......................................................................................... 6-22
6-19.1 EXTERNAL WATERJET COMPONENT REMOVAL .................................. 6-22
6-19.2 INTERNAL WATERJET REMOVAL ............................................................. 6-24
6-19.3 INTERNAL WATERJET INSTALLATION .................................................... 6-24
6-19.4 EXTERNAL WATERJET COMPONENT REINSTALLATION ................... 6-24
xiv
7. EMERGENCY AND DAMAGE CONTROL ........................................................................ 7-1
7-1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 7-1

7-2 FIRE FIGHTING .............................................................................................. 7-1
7-2.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 7-1
7-2.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ............................................................ 7-1
7-2.3 INSTALLED FIRE EXTINGUISHER ............................................................. 7-1
7-2.3.1 Automatic System Discharge ............................................................................ 7-1
7-2.3.2 System Override ................................................................................................ 7-2
7-3 LIFESAVING EQUIPMENT ........................................................................... 7-2
7-4 ROUGH WEATHER ........................................................................................ 7-2
7-5 DAMAGE CONTROL ..................................................................................... 7-2
7-5.1 HULL DAMAGE AND EMERGENCY REPAIRS ........................................ 7-3
7-5.2 DEWATERING ................................................................................................. 7-3
7-6 LOSS OF ELECTRICAL POWER .................................................................. 7-4
7-7 LOSS OF ENGINE-DRIVEN ALTERNATOR ............................................... 7-5
7-8 ABANDONING THE BOAT ........................................................................... 7-5
7-9 EMERGENCY SIGNALING ........................................................................... 7-5
8. MISCELLANEOUS ................................................................................................................ 8-1
Section I. HOISTING AND DOCKING .......................................................................... 8-1
8-1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 8-1

8-2 HOISTING SLING DESCRIPTION ............................................................... 8-1
8-3 HOISTING ........................................................................................................ 8-1
8-4 DOCKING BY CRANE ................................................................................... 8-4
8-5 LAUNCHING BY TRAILER .......................................................................... 8-4
8-6 RECOVERY BY TRAILER ............................................................................. 8-5
Section II. SHIPPING AND STORAGE ........................................................................... 8-7
8-7 SHIPPING ......................................................................................................... 8-7

8-8 LAYUP PROCEDURES .................................................................................. 8-7
8-9 STORAGE ......................................................................................................... 8-7
8-9.1 PRESERVATION FOR SHORT-TERM STORAGE ....................................... 8-7
8-9.2 PRESERVATION FOR LONG-TERM STORAGE ........................................ 8-7
8-9.3 DEPRESERVATION AND REACTIVATION ................................................ 8-7
Section III. ALLOWANCE PARTS LIST ........................................................................... 8-8
8-10 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 8-8
xv
8. MISCELLANEOUS - Continued
Section IV. ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN ....................................................... 8-9
8-11 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN ....................................................... 8-9
xvi
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Title Page
1-1 34-Foot Patrol Boat ............................................................................................................ 1-1

2-1 34-Foot Patrol Boat, Exterior Profile ................................................................................ 2-2
2-2 34-Foot Patrol Boat, Plan Exterior View ......................................................................... 2-3
2-3 34-Foot Patrol Boat, Transom View ................................................................................. 2-4
3-1 Propulsion System ............................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2 Cummins Diesel Engine QSB5.9M ................................................................................... 3-4
3-3 Engine Instrument and Control Panel ............................................................................... 3-5
3-4 SmartCraft Tachometer ..................................................................................................... 3-5
3-5 SmartCraft Diesel View Display ...................................................................................... 3-5
3-6 Control Console Instruments and Controls ...................................................................... 3-6
3-7 AquaDrive Coupling ........................................................................................................... 3-7
3-8 Trim Tab Control Panel ...................................................................................................... 3-8
3-9 Trim Tab Position Indicator Panel .................................................................................... 3-9
3-10 Fuel System Diagram ......................................................................................................... 3-11
3-11 Fuel Stripping Pump ............................................................................................................ 3-12
3-12 Fuel Filter/Water Separator ............................................................................................... 3-14
3-13 Engine Fuel Supply Diagram ............................................................................................. 3-15
3-14 Engine Cooling Systems Flow Diagram ........................................................................... 3-18
3-15 Seawater Strainer ............................................................................................................... 3-20
3-16 Seawater Suction System .................................................................................................. 3-21
3-17 Fast Lube Oil Change System (FLOCS) ......................................................................... 3-23
3-18 Electric Bilge Pump ............................................................................................................ 3-24
3-19 Electric Bilge Pump Controls ............................................................................................ 3-24
3-20 Manual Bilge Pump ............................................................................................................ 3-25
3-21 Steering System Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-27
3-22 HVAC System Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-29
3-23 Heater/Defroster System Diagram ................................................................................... 3-30
3-24 24Vdc Panel C .................................................................................................................... 3-34
3-25 24Vdc Panel D ................................................................................................................... 3-34
3-26 12Vdc Panel A ................................................................................................................... 3-35
3-27 12Vdc Panel B .................................................................................................................... 3-35
3-28 Link 2000 Display ............................................................................................................... 3-35
3-29 Shore Master Breaker Panel ............................................................................................. 3-37
3-30 110Vac/60Hz Shore Power Panel .................................................................................... 3-38
3-31 220Vac/60Hz Shore Power Panel .................................................................................... 3-39
3-32 Inverter 110Vac Load Panel ............................................................................................. 3-40
3-33 VHF Radio .......................................................................................................................... 3-43
3-34 Strobe Lightbar ................................................................................................................... 3-44
3-35 Siren/PA Control Panel ...................................................................................................... 3-44
3-36 Siren/PA Speaker ............................................................................................................... 3-45
3-37 Engine Compartment Fire Suppression System ............................................................... 3-47
4-1 Radio Setup Menu .............................................................................................................. 4-11
4-2 Dimmer Menu ..................................................................................................................... 4-11
xvii
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued
Figure Title Page
4-3 Dimmer Contrast ................................................................................................................ 4-11

4-4 Time Set .............................................................................................................................. 4-12
4-5 Time Offset Display ........................................................................................................... 4-12
4-6 Time Display ....................................................................................................................... 4-12
4-7 Time Display UTC ............................................................................................................. 4-12
4-8 Local Mode Display ........................................................................................................... 4-12
4-9 UTC Mode Display ............................................................................................................ 4-12
4-10 Magnetic Display ................................................................................................................ 4-12
4-11 Magnetic ON Display ......................................................................................................... 4-13
4-12 Priority Channel .................................................................................................................. 4-13
4-13 Priority Channel Selection ................................................................................................. 4-13
4-14 Scan Type ........................................................................................................................... 4-13
4-15 Priority Scan Type .............................................................................................................. 4-13
4-16 Scan Resume ...................................................................................................................... 4-14
4-17 Scan Resume Off ............................................................................................................... 4-14
4-18 Beep Beep Display ............................................................................................................. 4-14
4-19 Key Beep On/Off ............................................................................................................... 4-14
4-20 WX Alert Display ............................................................................................................... 4-14
4-21 WX Alert OFF .................................................................................................................... 4-15
4-22 Channel Name Menu .......................................................................................................... 4-15
4-23 Channel Name SHIP-SHIP ............................................................................................... 4-15
4-24 Channel Name Vertex ....................................................................................................... 4-15
4-25 NavNet Display Unit .......................................................................................................... 4-16
4-26 NavNet Display Control Panel .......................................................................................... 4-16
4-27 Diesel View Display Start-Up Screens ............................................................................ 4-22
4-28 Diesel View Display Home Page ..................................................................................... 4-23
4-29 Diesel View Data Display Screen .................................................................................... 4-23
4-30 Diesel View Engine RPM/Speed Screen ......................................................................... 4-24
4-31 Diesel View Peak Speed at RPM Screen ........................................................................ 4-24
4-32 Diesel View Engine Data Screens .................................................................................... 4-24
4-33 Diesel View Vessel Status Screen ................................................................................... 4-25
4-34 SmartCraft Tachometer ..................................................................................................... 4-25
4-35 HVAC System Control Panel ........................................................................................... 4-32
4-36 Heater/Defroster Control Panel ........................................................................................ 4-33
4-37 Busy Indicator ..................................................................................................................... 4-34
4-38 TX Indicator ........................................................................................................................ 4-34
4-39 Dual Watch ......................................................................................................................... 4-37
4-40 Scan Type ........................................................................................................................... 4-37
4-41 Priority or Memory Menu .................................................................................................. 4-37
4-42 Memory Scan Indication .................................................................................................... 4-37
4-43 M-SCAN Menu .................................................................................................................. 4-37
4-44 P-SCAN Menu ................................................................................................................... 4-38
4-45 Position Display .................................................................................................................. 4-38
4-46 No Position Display ............................................................................................................ 4-38
4-47 DSC SETUP Menu ............................................................................................................ 4-39
xviii
Figure Title Page
4-48 MMSI USER ....................................................................................................................... 4-39

4-49 Distress Menu ..................................................................................................................... 4-39
4-50 Distress Signal Display ...................................................................................................... 4-39
4-51 Distress Signal Sent Display .............................................................................................. 4-39
4-52 DSC Acknowledgment ....................................................................................................... 4-40
4-53 Acknowledgment Received ............................................................................................... 4-40
4-54 Nature Of Distress ............................................................................................................. 4-40
4-55 Distress Call Cancel ........................................................................................................... 4-41
4-56 Received Distress Acknowledgment ................................................................................ 4-41
4-57 Vessel in Distress ............................................................................................................... 4-41
4-58 Distress Undesignate ......................................................................................................... 4-41
4-59 DSC Operation Menu ......................................................................................................... 4-41
4-60 All Ships Call ....................................................................................................................... 4-41
4-61 Urgency Call ....................................................................................................................... 4-42
4-62 All Ships Call Transmitting ................................................................................................ 4-42
4-63 All Ships Call Transmitted ................................................................................................. 4-42
4-64 All Ships Call Received ...................................................................................................... 4-42
4-65 All Ships Call Transmitted ................................................................................................. 4-42
4-66 Individual Directory Menu ................................................................................................. 4-42
4-67 Add Individual Directory Menu ......................................................................................... 4-43
4-68 MMSI Number Menu ......................................................................................................... 4-43
4-69 Individual Reply .................................................................................................................. 4-43
4-70 Auto Individual Reply ......................................................................................................... 4-43
4-71 Individual Ring .................................................................................................................... 4-44
4-72 Individual Ring Default ...................................................................................................... 4-44
4-73 DSC Beep ........................................................................................................................... 4-44
4-74 Individual DSC Beep .......................................................................................................... 4-44
4-75 Individual OFF ..................................................................................................................... 4-44
4-76 DSC Operation Menu ......................................................................................................... 4-45
4-77 Individual Directory Manual .............................................................................................. 4-45
4-78 Individual Directory Vertex ............................................................................................... 4-45
4-79 Intership Channel ................................................................................................................ 4-45
4-80 Send Individual Call ............................................................................................................ 4-45
4-81 Send Individual Vertex Call ............................................................................................... 4-45
4-82 Manual MMSI Input ........................................................................................................... 4-46
4-83 Selecting An Operating Channel ....................................................................................... 4-46
4-84 Individual Call Transmit ..................................................................................................... 4-46
4-85 Individual Call Received .................................................................................................... 4-46
4-86 Individual Acknowledgment .............................................................................................. 4-47
4-87 Individual Acknowledgment Able ..................................................................................... 4-47
4-88 Group Directory Menu ....................................................................................................... 4-47
4-89 Group Directory Add .......................................................................................................... 4-47
4-90 Name and MMSI Entry ...................................................................................................... 4-47
4-91 DSC Group Menu ............................................................................................................... 4-48
4-92 Standard Group Call ........................................................................................................... 4-48
4-93 Group Call Transmitting ..................................................................................................... 4-48
xix
Figure Title Page
4-94 Group Call Standard ........................................................................................................... 4-48

4-95 MMSI Number Entry ......................................................................................................... 4-49
4-96 Select Channel .................................................................................................................... 4-49
4-97 Received Group Routine .................................................................................................... 4-49
4-98 POS Reply ........................................................................................................................... 4-49
4-99 Auto POS Reply ................................................................................................................. 4-50
4-100 DSC Beep ........................................................................................................................... 4-50
4-101 POS Request ....................................................................................................................... 4-50
4-102 POS Request Off ............................................................................................................... 4-50
4-103 Individual POS Request ..................................................................................................... 4-50
4-104 Vertex No Reply Call ......................................................................................................... 4-51
4-105 MMSI Number No Reply .................................................................................................. 4-51
4-106 POS Request Received ...................................................................................................... 4-51
4-107 Urgency Reply .................................................................................................................... 4-52
4-108 POS Send ........................................................................................................................... 4-52
4-109 POS Send OFF ................................................................................................................... 4-52
4-110 Group POS Send ................................................................................................................. 4-52
4-111 POS Send ........................................................................................................................... 4-52
4-112 POS Input ........................................................................................................................... 4-53
4-113 UTC Time Entry ................................................................................................................. 4-53
4-114 Radar Display ..................................................................................................................... 4-56
4-115 Full-Screen Plotter Display ................................................................................................ 4-58
4-116 Compass Display ................................................................................................................ 4-59
4-117 Highway Display ................................................................................................................ 4-60
4-118 Full-Screen Nav Data Display .......................................................................................... 4-61
4-119 Half-Screen Nav Data Display ......................................................................................... 4-61
4-120 Mark Shapes ....................................................................................................................... 4-62
4-121 Single Frequency Depth Display ....................................................................................... 4-66
4-122 Remote Control ................................................................................................................... 4-68
4-123 MOB Function ..................................................................................................................... 4-78
6-1 Helm Filling Unit ................................................................................................................. 6-9
7-1 Dewatering With Seawater Pump .................................................................................... 7-4
8-1 Hoisting Diagram, Profile View ........................................................................................ 8-2
8-2 Hoisting Diagram, Plan View ............................................................................................ 8-3
8-3 Seawater Strainer (Sheet 1 of 2) ...................................................................................... 8-10
8-3 Seawater Strainer (Sheet 2 of 2) ...................................................................................... 8-11
8-4 FLOCS Pump (Sheet 1 of 2) ............................................................................................. 8-12
8-4 FLOCS Pump (Sheet 2 of 2) ............................................................................................. 8-13
8-5 Steering System (Sheet 1 of 2) ......................................................................................... 8-14
8-5 Steering System (Sheet 2 of 2) ......................................................................................... 8-15
8-6 Sea Cock ........................................................................................................................... 8-16
FO-1 DC Electrical ...................................................................................................................... FP-1
FO-2 24Vdc Electrical (Sheet 1 of 3) ........................................................................................ FP-3
FO-3 AC Electrical ...................................................................................................................... FP-9
xx
LIST OF TABLES
Number Title Page
1-1 Principal Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 1-2

1-2 Technical Manuals ............................................................................................................... 1-6
1-3 Construction Drawings ........................................................................................................ 1-18
1-4 Technical Authorities .......................................................................................................... 1-19
1-5 Metric Conversion Factors ................................................................................................. 1-20
3-1 Propulsion System Characteristics ..................................................................................... 3-3
3-2 Fuel System Characteristics ............................................................................................... 3-12
3-3 Fuel Lubricity Additive ........................................................................................................ 3-17
3-4 Low Ambient Operations Acceptable Engine Fuel .......................................................... 3-17
3-5 Coolant System Performance Data ................................................................................... 3-19
3-6 Steering System Characteristics ........................................................................................ 3-26
3-7 12Vdc Battery Characteristics ........................................................................................... 3-32
3-8 24Vdc Distribution Panel Circuit Breakers ....................................................................... 3-33
3-9 24Vdc Panel C ..................................................................................................................... 3-34
3-10 24Vdc Panel D ..................................................................................................................... 3-34
3-11 12Vdc Panel A ..................................................................................................................... 3-35
3-12 12Vdc Panel B ..................................................................................................................... 3-35
3-13 Link 2000 Display Functions ............................................................................................... 3-36
3-14 Shore Power Panel 110V/60Hz .......................................................................................... 3-37
3-15 Shore Power Panel 220V/60Hz .......................................................................................... 3-38
3-16 Inverter 110Vac Panel ........................................................................................................ 3-38
3-17 Trailer Characteristics ......................................................................................................... 3-49
4-1 Preoperational Checklist ..................................................................................................... 4-2
4-2 Fluid Level Requirements ................................................................................................... 4-8
4-3 Acceptable Fluids ................................................................................................................ 4-8
4-4 Pressure, Temperatures, and Fluid Requirements ............................................................ 4-8
4-5 Battery Bank Selector Switch Settings .............................................................................. 4-10
4-6 Screen Type and Display Screens ..................................................................................... 4-17
4-7 Radar Function Soft Keys ................................................................................................... 4-19
4-8 Plotter Function Soft Keys ................................................................................................. 4-20
4-9 Boat Operating Trim Conditions ........................................................................................ 4-30
4-10 Siren/PA Fault Diagnostics ................................................................................................. 4-55
4-11 Remote Control Functions ................................................................................................... 4-70
4-12 Coolant Mixtures .................................................................................................................. 4-73
4-13 Troubleshooting Guide ......................................................................................................... 4-80
4-14 Diesel View Major Fault Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 4-100
4-15 Diesel View Minor Fault Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 4-101
5-1 Tube Repair Kit Contents ................................................................................................... 5-4
8-1 Boat APLs ........................................................................................................................... 8-8
8-2 List of Illustrated Parts Breakdown .................................................................................. 8-9
xxi
SAFETY SUMMARY
GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES
The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in this
manual. General and specific precautions must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance. The
Commanding Officer or other authority will issue orders as deemed necessary for any situation not covered in the
general and specific safety precautions.
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS
Operating personnel must observe all safety regulations at all times. Do not replace components, make adjust-
ments, or perform internal equipment maintenance without first securing electrical power. Dangerous potential
may exist when the electrical power is in the “OFF” position because of charges retained by capacitors. Before
touching, always secure electrical power and discharge the circuit by shorting through a load to ground with a
shorting probe.
DO NOT REPAIR OR ADJUST ALONE
Under no circumstances should any person reach into or enter equipment enclosures for the purpose of servicing
or adjusting equipment except in the presence of personnel capable of rendering aid.
FIRST AID
An injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immedi-
ately.
ENERGIZED EQUIPMENT
Before working on energized equipment, ensure against grounding. If possible, make repairs/adjustments with
one hand, leaving the other hand clear of the equipment. Never work alone.
MOVING EQUIPMENT
If equipment must be repaired/adjusted while in motion, a safety watch shall be posted. The safety watch must
have a full view of the repair/adjustment operation and immediate access to controls that can stop the equipment
in motion.
SPECIFIC SAFETY NOTICES
The specific safety warnings and cautions summarized below appear in appropriate chapters of this manual.
Each is referenced to the text page on which it appears.
A WARNING is an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condition or statement which, if not strictly
observed, could result in injury or death to personnel.
A CAUTION is an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condition or statement which, if not strictly
observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of, equipment or loss of mission effectiveness. The following
warnings and cautions appear in the text of this volume and are repeated here for emphasis.
xxii
WARNING
To prevent injury or death, secure the smoking lamp before stripping fuel. Ensure no flame-
producing equipment readily available. All fuel spills must be cleared up immediately. (Page
4-5)
Before taking on fuel, secure the smoking lamp. Ensure no flame-producing equipment is oper-
ating within 50 feet of the fueling area. Have fire fighting equipment readily available. All fuel
spills must be cleaned up immediately. (Page 4-5)
To prevent injury or death, ensure appropriate fire fighting equipment is available. Take all
necessary safety precautions before commencing fuel stripping operations. Do not smoke or
allow any open flame in the vicinity of stripping operations. (Page 4-6)
Never open the cap on the engine freshwater cooling system when the engine is hot or has been
recently run. The system may be pressurized and contain coolant at temperatures which will
cause severe burns. (Page 4-9)
The NavNet display unit is a navigator tool that must be used in conjunction with current charts
for the area of operation, visual check, and common safe navigation tools and aids could result in
damage to the boat, other boats and injury to personnel. (Page 4-15)
To prevent injury when starting the engine while the boat is in a boat skid or on the trailer, ensure
personnel are clear of the exhaust outlet at the stern of the boat. (Page 4-21)
To prevent injury or death from an explosion, do not use starting aids, such as ether. (Page 4-21,
4-76)
Alert crew and passengers to expect movement of the boat prior to initiating a drive system
check. (Page 4-22)
Never lower the waterjet reversing bucket when the boat is planing. Doing so will cause imme-
diate and violent reverse thrust which may cause injury to personnel and/or damage to equip-
ment. (Page 4-26)
Personnel must be seated and informed prior to performing an emergency bucket stop. This is a
violent emergency maneuver which can result in death or injury to personnel and damage to
equipment. (Page 4-27, 4-74)
xxiii
WARNING - Continued
To prevent personnel injury or death, exercise caution that legs and feet do not become en-
tangled in anchor line while line is paying out. (Page 4-28)
The NavNet simulation mode does not provide real time navigation data. Operating the NavNet
in simulation mode could cause damage to the boat and injury to personnel. (Page 4-55)
Deodorant may be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Avoid breathing of vapors for prolonged or
repeated periods. Contact with skin, eyes, and mucous membranes should be avoided. Allergic
reaction may result from prolonged or repeat contact with the skin. (Page 4-68)
Personnel must be seated informed prior to performing a reverse bucket stop. This is a maneu-
ver which can result in death or injury to personnel and damage to equipment. (Page 4-74)
To protect personnel from possible injury or death, never secure towing lines to lifelines, hand-
rails, grab rails, or other deck hardware not designed for towing purposes. (Page 4-75, 4-77)
To prevent personnel injury or death, take all necessary precautions prior to taking on fuel or
performing maintenance or repairs on any portion of the fuel system. Do not smoke or allow any
type of hot work or open flame in the vicinity. Ensure appropriate firefighting equipment is
available. (Page 4-75)
The portable pump must be secured to the boat’s structure before use if it is removed from its
mounting brackets while the boat is underway. The pump is heavy and can cause injury to
personnel and damage to the boats equipment if left unsecured on deck in a seaway. (Page 4-76)
In the event the boat has sustained a catastrophic hull failure, to prevent injury or death, all hands
should don lifesaving equipment, contact the appropriate authority, then commence/continued
with emergency procedures. (Page 4-76)
Towing procedures can be very hazardous, particularly in a seaway or in adverse weather. All
personnel must work with caution and remain alert for unsafe conditions. All boat personnel
shall wear life jackets. Additional safety precautions may be dictated by the situation. (Page
4-76)
To prevent injury or death, ensure all personnel remain clear of the bow or stern while conduct-
ing towing operations. When being towed or towing, the towing line is subject to heavy strain
and can part. (Page 4-77)
In the event the vessel has catastrophic hull failure, all-hands should don lifesaving equipment,
contact the appropriate authority, then commence/continue with emergency procedures as re-
quired. (page 4-77)
To prevent injury or death, all personnel must remain clear of the bow or stern while conducting
towing operations. When being towed or while towing, the tow line is subject to strain and
may part. (Page 4-77)
xxiv
WARNING - Continued
All personnel must move into the cabin or to the forward deck when towing another craft with
the aft cabin door closed. (Page 4-77)
To prevent personnel injury or death, all personnel must move into the cabin or to the aft deck
while being towed. (Page 4-78)
Prior to cleaning aluminum, Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE) must be worn. Wear
protective glasses or goggles to protect the eyes from a solution spray or splash. Protective
clothing should also be worn. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. (Page
5-3)
Before purging the fuel filter/water separator secure the smoking lamp. Ensure no flame-
producing equipment is operating within 50-feet of the fuel area. Have fire fighting equipment
readily available. All fuel spills, must be cleaned up immediately. (Page 6-2)
Before replacing the filter element secure the smoking lamp. Ensure no flame-producing equip-
ment is operating within 50-feet of the fuel area. Have fire fighting equipment readily available.
All fuel spills, must be cleaned up immediately. (Page 6-3)
Before replacing the engine-mounted fuel filter secure the smoking lamp. Ensure no flame-
producing equipment is operating within 50-feet of the fuel area. Have fire fighting equipment
readily available. All fuel spills, must be cleaned up immediately. (Page 6-4)
Before commencing with the fuel tank stripping operation secure the smoking lamp. Ensure no
flame-producing equipment is operating within 50-feet of the fuel area. Have fire fighting equip-
ment readily available. All fuel spills must be cleaned up immediately. (Page 6-5)
Failure to tag out power supply switches to searchlight could result in equipment damage or
injury to personnel. (Page 6-14)
Failure to tag out power supply switches to the VHF radio could result in damaging equipment or
injuring personnel. (Page 6-18)
Failure to tag out power supply switches to the radar system could result in damaging equipment
or injuring personnel. (Page 6-18)
Failure to tag out power supply switches to the siren/PA system control head could result in
damaging equipment or injuring personnel. (Page 6-19)
To prevent injury or death, ensure the engine is shut down and tagged “OUT-OF-SERVICE”
prior to commencing removal. (Page 6-20, 6-22)
To prevent injury or death, ensure extreme care and proper lifting devices are used during
handling. The equipment is heavy. (Page 6-20, 6-21, 6-22, 6-23, 6-24, 6-25)
xxv
WARNING - Continued
To avoid injury to personnel and damages to equipment, secure the flanged ends of the AquaDrive
together when lifting. (Page 6-20, 6-21)
Do not allow the fire extinguisher to touch energized electrical equipment while fighting an
electrical fire. (Page 7-1)
To prevent personnel injury or death, in the event of an engine compartment fire, immediately
shut down the engine to permit the fire suppression agent to extinguish the fire. (Page 7-2)
Do not restart the engines until the fire is completely out. (Page 7-2)
To prevent personnel injury or death, maintain a watch on the engine compartment following a
fire suppression system discharge. (Page 7-2)
To prevent death or injury to personnel, never hook a boathook into clothing to retrieve a person
from the water. If the boathook inadvertently catches the collar, strangulation can occur. Sud-
den movement of the boat or the person can cause injury. If the boathook is used to retrieved a
person from the water, allow him to grasp the hook on his own. (Page 7-2)
To prevent personnel injury or death, ensure only the boat sling supplied with the boat is used for
sling operations. (Page 8-1)
Never stand under a lifted load. (Page 8-4)
xxvi
! CAUTION
To prevent equipment damage, fuel stripping should be done on a daily basis; before running the
engines and before filling the tanks. Failure to remove water and sediment can cause engine
damage. (Page 4-5)
To prevent damage to equipment, do not drain the fuel filter/water separator while the engine is
running. Draining of the fuel filter/water separator while the engine is running can cause an
airlock in the fuel system, which could stop the engine. (Page 4-6)
The engine shall not be running when checking/adding coolant to the engine freshwater cooling
system. (Page 4-9)
The seawater strainer and hose to the engine seawater pump should be full of water whenever
the boat is launched and the engine is started prior to reaching the water. A continuous supply of
water should flow through the engine whenever it is operating. (Page 4-9)
The inflatable collar must be properly inflated at all times; if not damage to the inflatable collar
can result from over or under inflation. Do not use a pressurized system; a manual tube inflation
pump must be the only means used to inflate the port and starboard collar compartments. (Page
4-10)
The throttle selector shall be in the IDLE and NEUTRAL position prior to any attempt to start
the engines. (Page 4-21)
Do not engage the waterjet while the boat is in a boat skid or on the trailer to avoid damage to the
drive unit. (Page 4-21)
Ensure the engine is receiving freshwater coolant through the freshwater hose connection when
starting the boat in the boat skid or on the trailer. (Page 4-21)
Do not rapidly increase engine speed immediately after starting. Cold oil will not flow rapidly
and oil starvation to critical engine components may result. (Page 4-21)
Avoid sudden increase in engine speed when operating at slow speed in shallow water. Avoid
sharp turns when operating in shallow water. Reduce engine speed when traveling through
floating debris. (Page 4-26)
The marine gear control must be placed in the ahead position for boat steerage. (Page 4-26)
All vessels must observe NO-WAKE and speed restricted zones to minimize damage to vessels
and marinas while transiting sensitive areas. Coordinate with the U.S. Coast Guard, local offi-
cials, and/or other affected parties if it is necessary to conduct wake generating events in down-
town harbors, restricted inland waters, or waterfront communities. (Page 4-26)
In very shallow water, the waterjet unit can ingest sand, mud, stones, etc. resulting in impeller
and bearing damage. Navigate in shallow water with extreme caution and only at idle speed.
(Page 4-27)
xxvii
! CAUTION - Continued
Do not overrun anchor line while lowering anchor. To do so may foul the anchor. (Page 4-28)
In the event the boat is holed or a catastrophic hull failure occurs, it is imperative all drain
valves remain closed to prevent total vessel flooding. (Page 4-28)
Use only the prescribed antifreeze in the engine. Specific fluid type information is provided in the
planned maintenance documentation for the boat. The use of any other antifreeze can have a
damaging effect on nonmetallic components of the cooling system or change the desired boiling
point of the fluid. (Page 4-31)
The ball valve on the outboard side of the port engine marked CONDENSER must be placed
into the open position before operating the air conditioning system. Failure to open the valve will
lead to excessive cycling of the compressor and may result in premature compressor failure.
(Page 4-31)
The guard alarm should not be relied upon as the sole means for detecting possible collision
situations. (Page 4-57)
Never add holding tank deodorant to the waste holding tank by pouring directly into the toilet
bowl. (Page 4-68)
Always allow the engines to idle for a minimum of three to five minutes before shutdown.
Serious engine damage can result from shutting down an engine before it is allowed to cool.
(Page 4-71)
To prevent equipment damage, do not place the bilge pump switches in the OFF position if the
boat remains waterborne unless other provisions are made to periodically pump the bilges. (Page
4-72)
To prevent equipment damage, do not shut the battery disconnect switches off until the engines
are secured. (Page 4-72)
To prevent damage to equipment, maintain the antifreeze concentration per PMS requirements.
(Page 4-73)
Use only the prescribed antifreeze in the engine. Specific fluid types and testing requirements
are provided in the planned maintenance documentation for the boat. The use of any other type
of antifreeze can have a damaging effect on nonmetallic components of the cooling system or
the desired boiling point of the fluid. (Page 4-73)
To prevent damage to equipment, maintain the antifreeze concentration between 30 and 67%.
Solutions of less than 30% concentration do not provide sufficient corrosion protection. Concen-
trations greater than 67% adversely affect freezing point, boiling point, and heat transfers. (Page
4-73)
Do not allow the drive shaft connected to the disabled engine to rotate while underway. Severe
damage to the marine gear can result. (Page 4-74)
xxviii
Do not crank the starting motor in excess of 30 seconds. Allow a 2-minute interval before
cranking is resumed. (Page 4-76)
The engine must have adequate oil pressure within 15 seconds after starting to prevent engine
damage. (Page 4-76)
When towing, the engine and marine gear are subject to overheating. If the engine coolant or
marine gear oil temperature rises above safe limits, reduce speed until the lube oil temperature is
acceptable. (Page 4-77)
Do not allow the drive shafts to rotate while the boat is being towed. Severe damage to the
marine gear can result. (Page 4-78)
Mercury or mercury based compounds will result in severe corrosion of this aluminum hull.
Mercury in bilge will result in extreme corrosion. Do not paint this hull with either mercury or
copper based paints. Do not paint areas purposely left unpainted. Keep mercury filled instru-
ments, such as thermometers, batteries, or ammunition having fulminate of mercury primers off
the boat. Be certain that no item brought on board or used for repair or painting contains mercury
or mercuric compounds. (Page 5-1)
Do not leave the drain open too long to prevent draining excessive amounts of fuel. (Page 6-2)
If the engine is running when the filter element is replaced, air will be drawn into the fuel
system. (Page 6-2)
Exercise care when removing the filter element to ensure that fuel does not leak into the bilge.
(Page 6-3, 6-4)
To prevent equipment damage, ensure the engines are shut down and tagged "OUT-OF-SER-
VICE." Engine operation without lube oil will result in severe damage to the engines. (Page
6-5)
To prevent equipment damage, ensure the oil change manifold valve for equipment not being
drained is in the CLOSED position. If the valve is not completely closed, unintended removal of
lubricating oil from other equipment can result. (Page 6-5, 6-7)
To prevent an accidental spill of waste oil, maintain control of the discharge hose at all times
during removal of waste oil. (Page 6-6, 6-7)
To prevent equipment damage, ensure the dipstick is replaced in the same engine it was removed
from. The engines have dipsticks of unequal length. Interchanging dipsticks may result in incor-
rect engine lube oil levels and severe engine damage. (Page 6-6, 6-7)
To prevent equipment damage, ensure the engines are shut down and tagged "OUT-OF-SER-
VICE." Marine gear operation without lube oil will result in severe damage to the marine gears.
(Page 6-7)
xxix
Sea cock must be closed prior to servicing the seawater strainer. There is danger of sinking if left
open. (Page 6-8, 6-9)
Exercise care when removing the cover to ensure that the gasket is not damaged or lost. (Page
6-8)
Do not use vise grips or pliers to stop the cylinder rod from moving. Damage to the cylinder will
result. (Page 6-10)
Metal filings can inhibit the effectiveness of the anodes. Do not use steel or metal tools to clean
anodes. (Page 6-11)
To prevent flooding, close the sea cock and tag CLOSED before removing any zinc plugs. (Page
6-11)
Be certain that the air pressure used to clear valves does not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa). Always
wear safety glasses when performing this procedure. (Page 6-16)
To prevent damage to equipment, ensure the neoprene seal between the center deck section and
the aft deck frame is in good condition and in proper position when installing the center deck
section. (Page 6-22)
It is particularly important to properly bleed the coolant system. Failure to do so can result in
engine damage. (Page 6-22)
To prevent flooding the boat must be removed from the water prior to removing the waterjet
components. (Page 6-23)
To prevent equipment damage, ensure the seawater pump supply hose is submerged in water
during the entire emergency dewatering procedure. The engine-driven seawater pump impeller
will fail and the engine will overheat without a constant supply of seawater. (Page 7-3)
To prevent equipment damage, ensure no foreign object is allowed to enter or block the hose.
The engine-driven seawater pump impeller will fail and the engine will overheat without a con-
stant supply of seawater. (Page 7-4)
Ensure the launch ramp has adequate water to float the boat. (Page 8-4, 8-5)
Ensure the tow vehicle is sized correctly for the boat weight. If the vehicle is under sized it may
not be able to launch or recover the boat in a safe manner. (Page 8-5)
Do not disconnect the winch cable from the boat bow eye until the boat floats free from the
trailer. (Page 8-5)
Block the wheels of the tow vehicle, to prevent it from being pulled into the water as the boat
backs down. (Page 8-5)
xxx
Back down slowly to prevent water from building up and coming over the transom. (Page 8-5)
Tie down strap must pass over the boat just forward of the transom to safely trailer the boat.
(Page 8-7)
xxxi/(xl blank)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Section I. INTRODUCTION
1-1 DESCRIPTION. vides a brief description of the hull structure and oper-
ating systems, as well as support data and safety pre-
The 34-Foot Patrol Boat (PB) (figure 1-1) is a highly cautions.
maneuverable, welded aluminum boat powered by twin
diesel engines connected to waterjet units through di- 1-2 PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS.
rect-drive marine gears. Normally operated by a crew
of six, the boat can perform a variety of patrol, surveil- Table 1-1 lists the principal characteristics of the boat.
lance, and security-related functions. This chapter pro-
Figure 1-1. 34-Foot Patrol Boat
1-1
Table 1-1. Principal Characteristics
Data Item
Length (overall; including transom platform) ................................................ 38-ft 2-in. (11.64 m)

Beam (overall; including collar) .................................................................... 11-ft 11-in. (3.63 m)
Crew ............................................................................................................. 6
Displacement
Dry weight ................................................................................................. 16,730 lb (7,589 kg)
Crew, Equipment, Fuel .............................................................................. 2,000 lb (907.2 kg)
Full load (approx.) ..................................................................................... 21,000 lb (9,525 kg)
Speed (builders trial) ..................................................................................... 38 kts
Fuel Capacity ................................................................................................ 1 tank; 200 gal (757 L)
Engine
Manufacturer ............................................................................................ Cummins Engine Company, Inc.
Model ........................................................................................................ QSB5.9-425 GS
Propulsion Engine Rating .......................................................................... 420 bhp@ 3,000 engine rpm
Marine Gear
Manufacturer ............................................................................................ Twin Disc
Model ........................................................................................................ MG5075SC
Waterjet
Manufacturer ............................................................................................ Hamilton
Model ........................................................................................................ HJ-292
Construction
Hull ............................................................................................................ Deep vee, welded aluminum alloy
Collar ......................................................................................................... Air-Foam Hybrid, 2.2-lb
Ethafoam with Urethane Sheath
Electrical System (nominal)

Main .......................................................................................................... 24Vdc
Secondary .................................................................................................. 12Vdc
Shore Power .............................................................................................. 120Vac
1-2
Section II.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1-3 HULL STRUCTURE FEATURES. k. Communication, Navigation, and Force Protection

(Security) System.
The boat's welded hull, deck, crew cabin, fuel tank,
and engine compartment are fabricated from alumi- l. Damage Control and Safety Equipment.
num.
m. Sanitation System.
The cabin design accommodates six crew. A center
walking area extends from the aft cabin door to the n. Trailer.
forward cabin door. A set of steps at the forward end
of the center walking area leads to a small forward 1-4.1 PROPULSION SYSTEM. The propulsion sys-
area which includes seating and the head enclosure. tem consists of two Cummins turbocharged,
The forward cabin door leads to the well deck. The aftercooled, 6-cylinder diesel engines. The engines are
coxswain's position is located forward on the starboard connected to Twin Disc marine gears and coupled to
side of the cabin. The boat commander's position is Hamilton waterjet drives through AquaDrive couplings.
forward on the port side. Individual seats for two crew Engine instrument and control panels are located in the
are located directly aft of these positions. A bench- cabin on the control console. The engine throttle levers
type seat on the port side forward accommodates two and waterjet reversing bucket control levers are lo-
additional crew. cated on the control console at the coxswain's station.
The marine gear directional control levers are located
1-4 OPERATIONAL SYSTEMS. directly above the throttle and bucket controls on the
console.
The following operational systems are provided on the
boat. These systems, with their associated machinery 1-4.2 FUEL SYSTEM. The fuel system removes
and equipment, are briefly described in the following water and impurities from the diesel fuel and supplies
paragraphs and in detail in chapter 3. diesel fuel to the engine. Fuel is supplied from a single
200-gallon (757-liter) centerline fuel tank mounted be-
a. Propulsion System. low the main deck. An 8-inch diameter quick-acting
access plate, located in the afterdeck immediately to
b. Fuel System. the rear of the cabin, provides accessibility to the tank
fill and vent connections and the tank level sounding
c. Engine Coolant and Preheater Systems. cap. There is also a centerline 8-inch X 18-inch (20.3
cm X 45.7 cm) quick-acting hatch located in the after
d. Seawater Cooling System. portion of the aft deck immediately forward of the en-
gine compartment for access to a manual fuel strip-
e. Engine Combustion Air and Exhaust Systems. ping pump and fuel tank shutoff valves.
f. Fast Lube Oil Change System (FLOCS). 1-4.3 ENGINE COOLANT AND PREHEATER
SYSTEMS. Engine coolant is used to cool the engine
g. Bilge Pumping System. block, engine lube oil system, the engine exhaust mani-
fold, and the turbocharger casing. An engine coolant
h. Steering System. preheater is installed in the system for cold weather
starting.
i. Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
System. 1-4.4 SEAWATER COOLING SYSTEM. The
seawater cooling system furnishes seawater, which is
j. Electrical Systems. used to cool fuel oil passing through the fuel oil heat
1-3
exchangers and coolant passing through the freshwa- driven air conditioning compressor is mounted on the
ter heat exchangers. Additionally, exhaust gasses are port engine and the condensing unit is located on the
silenced and cooled by the seawater overboard dis- port outboard side of the engine compartment. The
charge. heating system utilizes circulating engine coolant. Sys-
tem capacity is 24,000 BTU (cooling) and 30,000 BTU
1-4.5 ENGINE COMBUSTION AIR AND EX- (heating). The control panel for the HVAC system is
HAUST SYSTEMS. The diesel engine air intake sys- located on a panel on the port fore and aft bulkhead
tem uses a turbocharger to provide a source of pres- adjacent to the steps leading to the forward part of the
surized combustion air directly to the engine's intake crew cabin. There are three controls on the HVAC
system. This permits more fuel to be burned in each panel.
combustion cycle, thus increasing the power output of
the engine. The hot exhaust gases are routed to the 1-4.10 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. There are four
turbocharger through the exhaust manifold. The ex- separate systems in the boat’s electrical system: 24Vdc,
haust gas then enters the exhaust elbow where it is 12Vdc, 120Vac, and 220Vac.
mixed with seawater discharged from the exhaust
manifold which cools and silences the exhaust. 1-4.10.1 24Vdc-12Vdc Electrical System. The primary
electrical system is a 24Vdc/12Vdc, 2-wire, negative
1-4.6 FAST LUBE OIL CHANGE SYSTEM. The ground system. Normal electrical power is supplied
Fast Lube Oil Change System (FLOCS) provide for through either the port or starboard battery banks. Each
the safe and efficient removal of used or contaminated 24Vdc bank consists of two 12Vdc, 750 Cold Crank-
lube oil from the engine oil pans and from the marine ing Amps (CCA), group 34 batteries that are connected
gear oil sumps and the discharge of the waste oil into a in series. Either bank or both banks in parallel may be
suitable container. used to start the engines or to power the electrical ac-
cessories. The batteries may be charged by the en-
1-4.7 BILGE PUMPING SYSTEM. The bilge pump- gine-driven 24Vdc alternators or by the 120Vac shore
ing system consists of two 24Vdc bilge pumps with power battery charger. A 24Vdc converter provides
float switches that are controlled from the coxswain 12Vdc power for the cabin lights, console lights, cabin
station. The pumps are located in the engine compart- fans, the VHF radio, the loud-hailer, and the installed
ment bilge immediately forward of the transom, port automatic fire extinguisher alarm panel.
and starboard of the waterjet drive intake tunnel. A
manual bilge pump is mounted on the starboard side Distribution of the 24Vdc and 12Vdc electrical power
forward in the engine compartment. The manual pump is controlled by the battery selector switches and main
is accessible and can be operated when the engine circuit breakers located in the engine compartment and
compartment hatch is open. the 28-gang circuit breaker panel located on the con-
trol console.
1-4.8 STEERING SYSTEM. The hydraulic steering
system consists of a steering wheel/helm assembly, a 1-4.10.2 120Vac Electrical System. The secondary
steering cylinder, and related lines and hoses. The steer- electrical system is a 120Vac, single-phase, 2-wire
ing system is operated from the coxswain station steer- grounded system. Power is provided through a shore
ing wheel which controls the position of the waterjet power connection and cable to the 120Vac control cen-
discharge nozzle. ter breaker panel located on the port side of the control
console. The 120Vac system powers the 24Vdc bat-
1-4.9 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR tery charger and cabin and engine compartment Ground
CONDITIONING SYSTEM. The cabin air condi- Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) electrical outlets. The
tioning and heating are provided by a fan coil unit. Air receptacle for the 120Vac shore power cable is mounted
is circulated through ducting by a 24-volt blower fan on the starboard forward side of the cabin exterior.
and discharged through two console-mounted grilles
which act as windshield defrosters and two grilles on 1-4.10.3 220Vac Electrical System. 220Vac power is
the bottom outboard sides of the console. The belt- available for the engine coolant preheaters, the battery
1-4
chargers, and the cabin and engine compartment out- Law enforcement audio and visual identification is
lets when the boat is connected to a shore-based power accomplished by a blue strobe light mounted on the
supply. mast and a Raymarine loud-hailer horn mounted on
the cabin top. The loud-hailer provides a YELP audio
1-4.11 COMMUNICATION, NAVIGATION, AND signal. Both devices are operated from the coxswain
FORCE PROTECTION (SECURITY) SYSTEM. station.
Communications are provided by a Very High Fre-
quency (VHF) radio (ICOM, model IC-M502). The 1-4.12 SANITATION SYSTEM. The sanitation
radio is mounted on the top of the control console above system consists of a portable, self-contained toilet and
the dc circuit breaker panel. A Raytheon SL70C radar a privacy curtain.
display is mounted in the cabin overhead above the
console. There is a bracket-mounted, 4-inch Ritchie 1-4.13 TRAILER. The boat is equipped with its own
magnetic compass on the forward console top directly double axle, bunk-style trailer for storage and trans-
in front of the coxswain. A Whelen Siren/PA control port.
panel activates the cabin exterior, top-mounted siren
and Public Address (PA) speaker horn. The control 1-5 LABEL PLATES AND MARKINGS.
panel and microphone are located in the control con-
sole below the dc control panel. An electrically-con- The builder’s boat identification plate and the hoist test
trolled searchlight is mounted in the center of the masts’ data plate are mounted at the operator’s console. Mer-
middle platform. The searchlight is controlled by the cury and oil pollution warning plates are located on the
console-mounted remote control switch pads located inside of the cabin door. Other warning plates are lo-
both at the coxswain and boat captain stations. Only cated adjacent to applicable equipment. A label plate
one station is activated at a time by placing the station is mounted adjacent to each electrical circuit breaker.
control selector switch in the PORT or STBD posi- In addition, nameplates for valves, switches, controls,
tion. This switch is located at the coxswain station, and equipment are attached to the applicable item. Stow-
directly under the searchlight remote control switch age compartments are marked with label plates.
pad.
1-5
Section III.
SUPPORT DATA
1-6 ONBOARD TECHNICAL DOCUMEN- 1-3 contains a summary of all applicable construction
TATION. drawings.
Onboard technical documentation consists of construc- 1-7 OTHER DOCUMENTATION.

tion drawings, this Boat Information Book, equipment
manuals and parts list. Table 1-2 contains a listing of Table 1-4 lists the technical authorities for the boat.
applicable technical manuals and data sheets. Table
Table 1-2. Technical Manuals
Equipment/Ordering Address Manual Number

34-Foot Patrol Boat Owner's Manual Owner's Manual
Sea Ark Marine Date 04/11/00
P.O. Box 210
Monticello, AR 71657 Aluminum Boat Limited Warranty
(Phone: 870-367-9755) Date: 02/02/03
Anchor (Fortress) Anchor Selection Guide

Fortress Marine Anchors
1386 West McNab Road Instruction Sheet
Fort Lauderdale, FL 33309-1109
(Phone: 954-978-9988)
Antenna, Broadband (Shakespeare, SF 3512/VRC) Specification and Installation Sheet

Shakespeare Electronic Products Group 35-90-1225-00
3801 Westmore Drive
Columbia, SC 29223 Assembly Instructions, Diplexer Kit
(Phone: 803-227-1590) 35-90-1227-00
Antenna, VHF (Shakespeare, Style 5202) Installation Instructions

Shakespeare Electronic Products Group 35-90-1092-00
3801 Westmore Drive Date: December 2003
Columbia, SC 29223
(Phone: 803-227-1590)
Antenna Ratchet Mount (Shakespeare, model 4187) Installation Instructions

Shakespeare Electronic Products Group Form I4187
3801 Westmore Drive Date: September 1998
Columbia, SC 29223
(Phone: 803-227-1590)
Aquadrive Antivibration System (Aquadrive, model CV42) Technical Information and Installation
Svenska Uni-Cardan AB Instructions
P.O. Box 3100 CV/607/0005-T1/PL
SE 127 03
Skarholmen, Sweden
(Phone: 46-86039700)
1-6
Table 1-2. Technical Manuals - Continued
Batteries (Optima, model D-34M) Technical Data Sheet and Safety

Optima Batteries, Inc. Precautions
17500 E. 22nd Avenue Date: August 2004
Aurora, CO 80011
(Phone: 303-340-7440)
Battery Charger (Protech 4, model 2425) Owner's Manual & Installation Guide
Professional Mariner, LLC Rev. D
PO Box 968 Date: January 2006
Rye, NH 03870
(Phone: 603-433-4440)
Battery Switch (Guest, models 2300A and 2304A) Battery Selector Switch & Battery
The Guest Company Isolator Installation Instructions
95 Research Parkway
Meriden, CT 06450 Battery Switch Installation Instructions
(Phone: 203-235-4421) PN#200956 Rev 01
Battery Isolator (Marinco, model 2432) Battery Isolator Connection Instructions

Marinco I-23280 Rev. E
2655 Napa Valley Corporate Drive
Napa, CA 94558
(Phone: 707-767-8541)
Bilge Pump, Manual (Beckson, model 519CG) Specifications and Parts

Beckson Marine, Inc.
165 Holland Avenue
Bridgeport, CT 06605
(Phone: 203-333-1412)
Bilge Pump Float Switch (Ultra, model UPS-2) Installation Instructions and Owner's
Ultra Safety Systems, Inc. Manual
3755 Fiscal Court
Riviera Beach, FL 33404
(Phone: 800-433-2628)
Bilge Pump Control Panel (Rule, model No. 42) Installation and Operating Instructions
Rule Industries M-1563
Cape Ann Industrial Park Date: November 1999
Gloucester, MA 01930
(Phone: 978-281-0440)
1-7

Cable Deck Fitting (Blue Sea, Cable Clam) Specifications and Installation
Blue Sea Systems Instructions
425 Sequoia Drive PN 1003
Bellingham, WA 98226
(Phone: 360-738-8230)
Carbon Monoxide Detector (XINTEX, model CMD-3M) Information and Operation Manual
Fireboy-Xintex Form No. CMD-3M
O-379 Lake Michigan Drive NW
Grand Rapids, MI 49534
(Phone: 616-735-9380)
Compass (Ritchie Helmsman) Installation, Compensation, and

Ritchie Navigation Maintenance Instructions
243 Oak Street HL-0032 Rev. F
Pembroke, MA 02359 Date: February 2006
(Phone: 781-826-5131)
Adapter Kit Instructions
SH-0126 Rev C
Date: November 2000
Deck Plate (Bomar, model C4808) Installation and Cleaning Instructions

Pompanette, LLC
7712 Cheri Court
Tampa, FL 33634
(Phone: 813-885-2182)
Deck Ventilator (Vetus, model UFO) Specification Sheet

Vetus den Ouden, Inc 8.0201 I.UFO/TR
P.O. Box 8712 Date: January 2000
Baltimore, MD 21240-0712
(Phone: 410-712-0740)
Depth Sounder (Furuno ETR-6/10N) Operator's Manual

Furuno, Inc. Pub. No. OME-20240
4400 NW Pacific Rim Boulevard. Date: March 2001
Camas, WA 98607-9408
(Phone: 360-834-9300)
Depth Sounder Transducer (AIRMAR) Owner's Guide and Installation

AIRMAR Technology Corp. Instructions
35 Meadowbrook Drive
Milford, NH 03055
(Phone: 603-673-9570)
1-8

Engine Mounts (Metalastik, Cushyfloat) Specification Sheet
Trelleborg Industrial AVS USA
200 Veterans Boulevard
Suite 3
South Haven, MI 49090
(Phone: 269-639-9891)
Engines, Main (Cummins, model QSB5.9)

Cummins, Inc. Owner's Manual
P. O. Box 3005 QSB5.9 Marine Engines
Columbus, IN 47202-3005 Bulletin 4021482-00
(Phone: 800-343-7357) Date: February 2004
Parts Catalogue 6BTA5.9ME

Bulletin 4056553
Date: November 2004
B-Series Technical File

Bulletin 3381981
Revision 002
Date: May 2002
Fan, Crew Cabin (Guest, model 900)
The Guest Company Use and Maintenance Instructions
95 Research Parkway 1-21559 Rev. D
Meriden, CT 06450
(Phone: 203-235-4421)
Fire Extinguishers
Amerex Corp. Owner's Manual
P. O. Box 81 P/N 00914
Trussville, AL 35173-0081 Date: June 2002
(Phone: 205-655-3271)
Fire Suppression System (Fireboy, model CG2-600)

Fireboy-Xintex Clean Agent FE241 Owners Manual
O-379 Lake Michigan Drive NW & Installation Instruction
Grand Rapids, MI 49534 Rev. 1
(Phone: 616-735-9380) Date: January 2004
Engine Shutdown/Override System

Installation and Owners Manual
Date: June 1999
1-9
FLOCS (Jabsco, Model 17820-0024) Installation, Operation, and Service

Jabsco Instructions
1485 Dale Way Form 43000-0705
Costa Mesa, CA 92628-2158 Date: November 2001
(Phone: 949-859-8251)
Fuel Fill and Vent (Perko, model 577 DOO CHR) Installation and Operation Instructions
Perko, Inc. 540INS2
16490 NW 13th Avenue Date: March 2004
Miami, FL 33169-5707
(Phone: 305-621-7525)
Fuel Filter/Water Separator (Racor, model 1000MA) 900MA and 1000MA Fuel Filter/Water
Parker Hannifin Corp. Separator
Racor Division Installation Instructions
P.O. Box 3208 Part Number 19526
Modesto, CA 95353 Date: October 2002
(Phone: 209-521-7860)
Fuel Stripping Pump (TAT, model 410-900-3/8) Instruction Sheet

TAT Engineering Corp. Date: September 15, 2004
P.O. Box 268
Logan, OH 43138-0268
(Phone: 800-243-2526)
Fuel Tank Level Sender (Livorsi, model GIFL) Installation Instructions

Livorsi Marine, Inc.
10 Livorsi Drive
Grayslake, IL 60030
(Phone: 847-548-5900)
Galvanic Isolator (Quicksilver, 888557T01) Installation Instructions

Mercury Marine 90-857558
W6250 Pioneer Road Date: September 2002
Fon du Lac, WI 54936-1939
Galvanic Isolator Monitor Kit (Quicksilver, 888541Q01) Installation Instructions

Mercury Marine 90-889499001
W6250 Pioneer Road Date: September 2002
Fon du Lac, WI 54936-1939
(Phone: 920-929-5040)
GFCI Receptacles Installation and Testing a GFCI

Cooper Wiring Devices Receptacle
43-51 Court Square 150RS-N Rev.C
Long Island City, NY 11101
(Phone: 866-853-4293)
1-10
GPS Receiver (Furuno GP320-B) Operator's Manual

Furuno, Inc. Pub. No. OME-44220
4400 NW Pacific Rim Boulevard Date: July 3, 2002
Camas, WA 98607-9408
(Phone: 360-834-9300)
Gun Rack (TUFLOC) Installation Instructions

Esmet, Inc.
1406 Fifth Street, SW
Canton, OH
(Phone: 330-452-9132)
Heater, Crew Cabin (Heater Craft, model 317H4B) Installation Instructions

Heatercraft Marine Products
6672 Boekel Road
Rathdrum, ID 83858
(Phone: 208-687-4400)
HVAC System (Arctic Wolf, K-340-C) Operation Manual

Hammond Air Conditioning Ltd.
125 Samnah Crescent
Ingersoll, Ontario N5C 3J7
(Phone: 800-267-2665)
HVAC Condensate Pump Instruction Sheet

Rule Industries
Cape Ann Industrial Park
Gloucester, MA 01930
(Phone: 978-281-0440)
Hydraulic Steering (SeaStar) Installation Instructions and Owners

Teleflex Marine Manual
1 Sierra Place 070323 2000 Rev. R
Litchfield, IL 62056-3029 Date: July 2006
Supplemental Installation Instructions

865928 6000 Rev. L
Date: December 2004
Advisory Notice
764610, Rev. A
Inflatable Collar (Wing Inflatables Hybrid) Maintenance and Repair Instructions

Wing Inflatables RIB SEA ARK FOAM AIR HY
1162 Samoa Boulevard. P.O. Box 279 BRID Rev. D
Arcata, CA 95521 Date: 1/21/03
(Phone: 707-826-2887)
1-11
Inspection and Repair of Inflatable Tube Assembly S9008-CK-MAN-010
Intercom System (Gentex, LVIS) Radio Interface Cable Installation

Gentex Corp. Instructions
Electro-Acoustic Products FM100658-00 REV
5 Tinkham Avenue A DCN 3526
Derry, NH 03038
(Phone: 603-434-0311) Tactical Communications Helmet Fitting
Instructions and Illustrated Parts
List
TP0238 REV.1
Date: August 2005
Inverter Controller (Xantrex, Link 2000) Owner's Manual

Xantrex Technology, Inc. 445-0198-01-01
8999 Nelson Way
Burnaby, BC
Canada V5A 4B5
(Phone: 604-422-8595)
Inverter/Charger (Heart, Freedom 25) Installation Guide

Heart Interface Corp. HI2882IN
21440 68th Avenue South Date: December 1996
Kent, WA 98032-2416
(Phone: 253-872-3412) Owner's Manual
Part No. 90-0113-00
Date: March 1997
Marine Gear (Twin Disc, model 5075SC) Marine Transmission Owner's Manual
Twin Disc, Incorp. No. 1016313 Revision 4
1328 Racine Street Date: May, 2004
Racine, WI 53403
(Phone: 262-554-2488) North American Sales and
Service Directory
Marine Transmission Service and

Installation Manual
Part Number 1020871
Date: September 2002
Navigation Lights (Perko LED Series) Installation Instructions

Perko, Inc. #0170INS1
16490 NW 13th Avenue Date: October 2003
Miami, Fl 33169-5707
(Phone: 305-621-7525)
1-12
Network Sounder Transducer (AIRMAR, model B744-V) Owner's Guide & Installation
AIRMAR Technology Corp. Instructions
35 Meadowbrook Drive 17-118-03 rev.03
Milford, NH 03055 Date: November 2003
(Phone: 603-673-9570)
NavNet (Furuno Navigation Network) Installation Guide

Furuno, Inc. Version 1.06
4400 NW Pacific Rim Boulevard Date: 11/16/01
Camas, WA 98607-9408
(Phone: 360-834-9300)
Parts and Accessories Catalogue Parts and Accessories Catalogue

Sea Ark Marine PAC 96-01
P.O. Box 210
Monticello, AR 71657
(Phone: 870-367-9755)
Power Distribution Panel (Blue Sea) Specification and Instruction Sheet

Blue Sea Systems
425 Sequoia Drive
Bellingham, WA 98226 USA
(Phone: 360-738-8230)
Radar (Furuno 1833CNT) Installation Manual

Furuno, Inc. Pub No IME-35030-K
4400 NW Pacific Rim Boulevard Date: January 21, 2003
Camas, WA 98607-9408
(Phone: 360-834-9300) Operator's Manual
Pub No OME-35030
Date: January 21, 2003
Safety Brochures Carbon Monoxide Poisoning

U. S. Coast Guard Electrical Shock Hazards
Office of Boating Safety (G-OPB-3)
2100 Second Street SW
Washington, DC 20593-0001
(Phone: 800-368-5647)
Sanitation System (SeaLand, Sanipottie) Owner's Manual

Dometic Corp. 600340798
13128 State Road 226 Date: 6/04
PO Box 38
Big Prairie, OH 44611
(Phone: 800-321-9886)
1-13
Searchlight (Jabsco, model 62040-4006) Mounting Instructions and Parts List

Jabsco Form 43000-0494
1485 Dale Way Date: May 2003
Costa Mesa, CA 92628-2158
(Phone: 949-859-8251) Secondary Remote Control Kit
Mounting Instructions
Form 43000-0583
Date: November 1999
Seats (Bostrom 910SC) Operation and Service Parts Manual

Bostrom Seating, Inc. Rev. E
Vigo Road Date: March 2003
P. O. Box 566
Piedmont, AL 36272
(Phone: 256-447-9051)
Seawater Strainer (Perko, 493-009PLB) Installation and Operating Instructions

Perko, Inc. 0493INS1
16490 NW 13th Avenue Date: October 2004
Miami, FL 33169-5707
(Phone: 305-621-7525)
Shock Mount Kit, Tactical Radio (Harris, RF-5870-VM001) Instruction Sheet

Harris Corp. RF-P-856
RF Communications Division
1680 University Avenue
Rochester, NY 14610
(Phone: 585-244-5830)
Shore Power Cordset, 120Vac (Marinco 50-PCM) Instruction Sheet

Marinco 100404
2655 Napa Valley Corporate Drive Date: Feb. 1994
Napa, CA 94558
(Phone: 707-767-8541)
Shore Power Inlet (Marinco 304EL-B) Installation Guide

Marinco 102627
2655 Napa Valley Corporate Drive Date: January 2001
Napa, CA 94558
(Phone: 707-767-8541)
Siren/PA (Whelen 295HFSA1) Installation Guide

Whelen Engineering Company, Inc. Form No. 13379F
Route 145, Winthrop Road Date: January 15, 2004
Chester, CT 06412
(Phone: 860-526-9504)
1-14
Siren/PA (Whelen 295HFSA1) - Continued Final Assembly Drawing

Whelen Engineering Company, Inc. Drawing 82418A
Date: 3/14/93
Slings, Safety Instructions Inspection, Care, and Use of Synthetic

Web Sling and Tie Down Association Web Slings
2105 Laurel Bush Road WSTDA-WSWS-02
Suite 200 Date: 2002
Bel Air, MD 21015
(Phone: 443-640-1070)
SmartCraft (Cummins Mercruiser, DieselView) Configuration and Operation Manual

Cummins, Inc. Version 1.0
P. O. Box 3005 CMD-4081893/90-865708
Columbus, In 47202-3005 Date: January, 2004
(Phone: 800-343-7357)
Static Dissipater (LPS, Inc. ALS-100) General Mounting Instructions

Lightning Prevention Systems, Inc.
424-A Kelley Drive P.O. Box 353
West Berlin, NJ 08091
(Phone: 856-767-7806)
Strobe Lightbar (Whelan, Ultra 44") Installation Guide

Whelen Engineering Company, Inc. Form No. 13523E
Route 145, Winthrop Road Date: January 27, 2003
Chester, CT 06412
(Phone: 860-526-9504) Lightbar Mounting Guide
Form No. 13775A
Date: October 18, 2004
Tachometer (Cummins MerCruiser Diesel) System Speedometer and

Cummins MerCruiser Diesel Marine LLC Tachometer Operation Manual
4500 Leeds Avenue Bulletin 4081961
Charleston, SC 29405 Date: August 2004
(Phone: 843-745-1620)
Throttle and Shift Controls (Mercury, Zero Effort) Zero Effort Control Quadrants
Mercury Marine Installation Instructions
W6250 Pioneer Road 90-849131R1
Fon du Lac, WI 54936-1939 December 2001
(Phone: 920-929-5040)
1-15
Trailer (Boat Master, model 3436-HDH-24) Operations Manual

J.D.C.I. Enterprises, Inc. Date: March 2004
12301 Metro Parkway
Ft. Myers, FL 33912
(Phone: 239-768-6389)
Trim Tabs (Dana, model HP-900) Trim Tab Assembly Installation

Dana Marine Products Instructions
1821 Railroad Street
Corona, CA 92880
(Phone: 951-279-5005)
Trim Tab Indicator (Livorsi) Installation Instructions

Livorsi Marine, Inc.
10 Livorsi Drive
Grayslake, IL 60030
(Phone: 847-548-5900)
Ventilator Fan (Vetus, Permanent Ventilator Fan) Instruction Sheet

VETUS DEN OUDEN, Inc. Date: March 1999
P.O Box 8712
Baltimore, MD 21240-0712
(Phone: 410-712-0740)
VHF Coaxial Cable Connector (Shakespeare PL-259) Installation Instructions

Shakespeare Electronic Products Group Form PL-259-RG58
3801 Westmore Drive Date: January 2002
Columbia, SC 29223
(Phone: 803-227-1590)
VHF Radio (Standard Horizon Quest-X GX1500S) Owner's Manual

Vertex Standard USA 0310?-0Y
Standard Horizon Marine Division Date: 2003
10900 Walker Street
Cypress, CA 90630
(Phone: 714-827-7600)
Voltage Converter (Analytic Systems, model VTC1015-24-12) Installation and Operation Manual
Analytic Systems Date: April 2005
#207 12448 82nd Avenue
Surrey, BC V3W 3E9
Canada
(Phone: 604-543-7378)
1-16
Waterjet Drive (Hamilton, model HJ 292) Product Manual, HJ 292

Hamilton Jet, Inc. Part Number 89292
1111 NW Ballard Way Amendment 37
Seattle, WA 98107 Date: January 27, 2006
(Phone: 206-784-8400)
Product Manual, HSRC Controls
Part Number 89003
Amendment 25
Date: June 1, 2006
Windshield Washer (Denso, model 160200-5200) Installation Instructions

Denso International America LWW-016B
24777 Denso Drive
P.O. Box 5047
Southfield, MI 48033-5244
(Phone: 248-350-7500)
Windshield Wiper (Ongaro, model 30992) Wiper Sweep Adjustment Instructions

Ongaro Marine Ltd.
P.O. Box 5217
800 Coopertown Road
Delanco, NJ 08075
(Phone: 1-800-340-2399)
1-17
Table 1-3. Construction Drawings
Title Sea Ark Marine Drawing Number
Profile and Arrangement ....................................................................................1772-101

Inboard Profile ...................................................................................................1772-102
Fuel Tank Construction ......................................................................................1772-206
Thru Hull Penetration ........................................................................................1772-209
Cabin and Pilot House Construction ..................................................................1772-303
Bilge Piping ........................................................................................................1772-401
Fuel Piping .........................................................................................................1772-402
Steering System .................................................................................................1772-404
Machinery Installation ........................................................................................1772-405
Exhaust Piping ...................................................................................................1772-407
Heating and Air ..................................................................................................1772-409
Engine Cooling ...................................................................................................1772-416
AC Electrical .....................................................................................................1772-501
DC Electrical .....................................................................................................1772-502
Communication Electronics ...............................................................................1772-503
Label Plates .......................................................................................................1772-629
Master Parts List ...............................................................................................1772-BOM
Lifting Slings ......................................................................................................1772-706
1-18
Technical Manual Maintenance Activity (TMMA)
Boat and Craft Program Manager
Builder’s Yard
1-19
1-8 METRIC CONVERSION FACTORS.
Table 1-5 lists the metric conversion factors for the

boat.
Table 1-5. Metric Conversion Factors
Mc X F = Cf
Measurement to be Converted (Mc) Factor (F) Converted Measurement (Cf)
Meters (m) X 39.37 = Inches (in.)

Meters (m) X 3.281 = Feet (ft)
Meters (m) X 1.094 = Yards (yd)
Inches (in.) X 25.40 = Millimeters (mm)
Inches (in.) X 2.54 = Centimeters (cm)
Inches (in.) X 0.0254 = Meters (m)
Inches (in.) X 25400 = Micrometers (µm)
Feet (ft) X 0.305 = Meters (m)
Square feet (ft2) X 0.093 = Square meters (m2)
Foot-Pounds (ft-lb) X 1.35582 = Newton-meters (N-m)
Newton-meters (N-m) X 0.73756 = Foot-Pounds (ft-lb)
Yards (yd) X 0.914 = Meters (m)
Square yards (yd2) X 0.836 = Square meters (m2)
Square Inches (in2) X 6.452 = Square Centimeters (cm2)
Cubic Inches (in3) X 16.39 = Cubic Centimeters (cm3)
Cubic Centimeters (cm3) X 0.061 = Cubic Inches (in3)
Cubic Feet (ft3) X 0.028 = Cubic Meters (cm3)
Gallons (gal) X 3.785 = Liters (L)
Liters (L) X 0.2642 = Gallons (gal)
Kilometers (km) X 0.5397 = Nautical miles (nmi)
Meters (m) X 0.0005397 = Nautical miles (nmi)
Nautical miles (nmi) X 1.853 = Kilometers (km)
Fluid Ounces (oz) X 29.574 = Milliliters (mL)
Pounds (lb) X 0.4536 = Kilograms (kg)
Kilograms (kg) X 2.2046 = Pounds (lb)
Kilopascals (kPa) X 0.145 = Pounds per Square Inch (psi)
Pounds per Square Inch (psi) X 6.895 = Kilopascals (kPa)
Degrees Centigrade (°C) (°C x 1.8) + 32 = Degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Degrees Fahrenheit (°F) (°F-32) ÷ 1.8 = Degrees Centigrade (°C)
Bar X 14.5 = Pounds per Square Inch (psi)
Pounds per Square Inch (psi) X 0.06894 = Bar
Horsepower (hp) X 0.746 = Kilowatt (kW)
Kilowatt (kW) X 1.341 = Horsepower (hp)
1-20
Section IV.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1-9 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. contained in chapter 4; during performance of mainte-

nance in chapter 6; during launching and recovery in
Safety of personnel operating, maintaining, and han- chapter 8. All general and specific safety precautions
dling the boat is of paramount importance. Safety pre- and warnings are contained in the Safety Summary,
cautions are included in various chapters of this manual. located in the front matter of this manual.
Precautions to be observed during boat operation are
1-21/(1-22 blank)
1-21
CHAPTER 2
GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS
2-1 INTRODUCTION. 2-2.2 WELL DECK. The well deck is located be-
tween the foredeck and the forward side of the crew
This chapter describes the exterior and interior arrange- cabin and is below the level of the foredeck and side
ments of the boat. walkways. The well deck incorporates mounted fix-
tures and features as follows:
2-2 EXTERIOR ARRANGEMENT.
a. There is a raised coaming surrounding the forward,
The following paragraphs describe the exterior arrange- port, and starboard sides of the well deck. A 1 1/4-inch
ment of the boat (figures 2-1 through 2-3). Information (3.2-cm) welded pipe handrail is mounted on the tops
on lifesaving and safety equipment is also included. of the port and starboard side coamings. The rails ex-
tend the full length of the two outboard coamings.
2-2.1 FOREDECK. The foredeck of the boat extends
from the bow to the forward side of the well deck. The b. There is a foundation for a MK16, MOD 8 weapon
foredeck incorporates mounted fixtures and features mount 37-inches (94-cm) high installed at the forward
as follows: end of the well deck on centerline. The mount is welded
to the top of a 4-inch (10.2-cm) pipe section. The mount
a. A 4-inch (10.2-cm) mooring bitt, 11-inches (28- is reinforced by a vertical web connecting it to the for-
cm) high with a 1 1/4-inch (3.2-cm) crossbar 12-inches ward well deck bulkhead and by a horizontal gusset at
(30.5-cm) long, is mounted at the forward side of the the top of the pipe section.
foredeck on centerline. The bitt is welded to the for-
ward lifting eye structure and to a doubler plate welded c. There are 3-inch (7.6-cm) high-density foam cush-
to the foredeck. ions 12-inches (30.5-cm) wide installed with snap fas-
teners to the outboard bulkheads immediately below
b. A 3-inch (7.62-cm) lifting eye is located at the aft the level of the handrails. The cushions extend from
base of the forward mooring bitt. The lifting eye plate the forward bulkhead to the aft bulkhead of the well
is fabricated from 1 1/4-inch (3.2-cm) aluminum plate deck.
7 1/2-inches (19-cm) wide which extends 35 1/2 inches
(90 cm) below the foredeck. The lifting eye plate is d. There is a crew connection box (Gentex, LVIS)
welded to the forward bitt and to a doubler plate welded for the boat's intercom system mounted at the forward
to the foredeck. end of the port bulwark below the cushion.
c. There is a quick-acting, 15-inch X 24-inch (31.5- e. At the aft end of the well deck there is a horizon-
cm X 61-cm) oval anchor stowage compartment hatch tal shelf between the crew cabin windshield and the
(Freeman, model 1524HAALR) installed in the well deck. The shelf extends the width of the deck. A
foredeck. The hatch is mounted on centerline and is head compartment ventilator (Vetus, UFO) is installed
hinged on the forward side. in the shelf on the starboard side. The forward side of
the shelf acts as a drip lip above the watertight door
d. There are two 12-inch polished stainless steel opening.
mooring cleats (Suncor, model S3142-0000) mounted
on the outboard sides of the foredeck aft of the anchor f. There is a 21-inch (53.3-cm) wide watertight door
stowage compartment hatch. 39-inches (99-cm) high installed in the aft well deck
bulkhead on centerline. The door is hinged to star-
e. All walking surfaces on the foredeck have anti- board and has two dogs on the port side. The door has
skid coating applied. a 3-inch (7.62-cm) high-density foam cushion installed
with snap fasteners across the top forward face of the
door. The door has a hasp for a padlock installed.
2-1
2-2
STATIC DISSIPATER
ANCHOR/MASTHEAD
LIGHT SEARCHLIGHT (P & S)
MAST SIREN/PA SPEAKER
HANDRAIL RADAR
CANVAS CANOPY (4 PLACES)
GPS ANTENNA
CANOPY PIPE LIFELINE TACTICAL ANTENNA (P & S)
FRAME (4 PLACES) STROBE BEACON
NYLON STRAP NAVIGATION HORN
(4 PLACES)
SIDE LIGHT (P & S)
WEAPON MOUNT AND
STANCHION (3 PLACES) SHORE POWER CONNECTION
( 2 PLACES)
MOORING BITT (P & S)
HANDRAIL (P & S) WEAPON MOUNT
LIFTING EYE HANDRAIL AND STANCHION
(2 PLACES)
LIFTING EYE
WATERJET
DRIVE GUARD
MOORING
BITT
BOW EYE
AIR INTAKE
WATERJET DRIVE (4 PLACES)
(2 PLACES) WELL DECK SCUPPER
HANDRAIL DRAIN (P & S)
(P & S)
TIE-DOWN WALKWAY MOORING CLEAT SLIDING WINDOW (P & S)
FITTING (P & S) (4 PLACES)
(6 PLACES)
Figure 2-1. 34-Foot Patrol Boat, Exterior Profile

MOORING CLEAT
VHF ANTENNA (4 PLACES)
HANDRAIL ON CABIN TACITICAL RADIO

ENGINE ROOM TOP (P & S) ANTENNA (P & S)
VENTILATION (P & S) SEARCHLIGHT SIDELIGHT HORN
(P & S)
LIFTING EYE
MASTHEAD HAND RAIL
(P & S)
LIGHT (P & S)
STOWAGE ACCESS
HATCH
ENGINE ROOM
WELL DECK
VENTILATION (2 PLACES)
AMMUNITION BOX
(5 PLACES)
WATERJET DRIVE ANCHOR

GUARD STOWAGE
HATCH
MOORING
WATERJET DRIVE BITT
(2 PLACES)
LIFTING EYE
ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
WEAPON MOUNT AND
SOFT PATCH
STANCHION
RADAR WATERTIGHT
MOORING HEAD DOOR
BITT (P & S) VENT
AMMUNITION HANDRAIL SEARCHLIGHT
CUSHIONS
(P & S) STROBE
BOXES (4 PLACES)
BEACON
GPS ANTENNA
ENGINE
COMPARTMENT MAST
ACCESS HATCH
FUEL TANK HANDRAIL (P & S)
SOFT PATCH
Figure 2-2. 34-Foot Patrol Boat, Plan Exterior View

2-3
WATERJET
DRIVE (P & S) HULL NUMBER
ENGINE EXHAUST STARBOARD DECK
(P & S) DRAIN
HVAC OVERBOARD
DISCHARGE AFT BILGE PUMP
DISCHARGE
34PB0601
PORT DECK BUILDERS

DRAIN PLATE
TRIM TAB
(P & S) MID BILGE
PUMP
DISCHARGE
Figure 2-3. 34-Foot Patrol Boat, Transom View
2-4
g. There are 3-inch (7.62-cm) high-density foam b. A vented fuel fill deck fitting (Perko, 0577D00CHR)
cushions 12-inches (30.5-cm) high installed with snap is installed in the port walkway at the aft end of the
fasteners on the aft bulkhead on the port and starboard crew cabin.
side of the watertight door.
c. The walking surfaces of the walkways have an
h. A folding seat (Alumax, Series 300) is bracket- antiskid coating applied.
mounted on the starboard side of the aft bulkhead. The
cushion mounted to the bulkhead above the seat serves 2-2.4 CREW CABIN EXTERIOR ARRANGE-
as a backrest. MENT. The crew cabin is a fabricated aluminum struc-
ture welded to the main deck. All communication and
i. There are five ammunition box stowage bins lo- navigation equipment is mounted on the cabin top and
cated at the forward side of the well deck. Two bins on the top-mounted mast. The cabin top is extended on
are mounted on the deck on the port side of the weapon the forward side to provide shade for the forward win-
mount foundation and three are mounted on the deck dows. The cabin top has anti-skid material applied to
on the starboard side. The stowage bins have drain all walking surfaces. The aft center of the cabin top is
holes in the aft sides. raised to provide a base for the folding mast structure.
There is 1-inch aluminum round bar welded to the pe-
j. There is a 19-inch X 43 1/2-inch (48.2-cm X 110.5- rimeter of the cabin top. The following fixtures and
cm) rectangular hatch in the deck. The hatch is hinged fittings are located on the crew cabin exterior:
on the forward side. The hatch cover has two hex-
head, turning-type latches at the aft side and a recessed a. There are two 33-inch high X 36-inch wide (84-
lifting handle on centerline. A latching safety support cm X 91.4-cm) windshields installed in the forward
on the starboard side of the hatch supports the hatch bulkhead of the crew cabin.
cover when it is in the open position. The hatch has
rubber sealing gaskets all around. The hatch gutter has b. Windshield wipers are mounted at the top of the
overboard drains in the two aft corners. forward crew cabin bulkhead above each windshield.
The wiper arms (Ongaro Marine, model 39824) are
k. There are 4-inch X 4-inch (10.2-cm X 10.2-cm) adjustable, parallel-arm type with 22-inch wiper blades
scuppers installed at deck level in the outboard sides of (Ongaro, model 30522). A windshield washer spray
the aft bulkhead. nozzle is mounted in the bulkhead inboard of each wiper
arm.
l. The walking surface of the well deck is overlaid
with vinyl flooring with a molded nonskid pattern and a c. Port and starboard forward side windows (Wynne,
resilient shock-absorbing backing. The flooring is in- model 220) are installed in the cabin sides. The win-
stalled in interlocking sections for ease of removal and dows are 24-inches (61-cm) high and consist of 34-
to facilitate cleaning the well deck. inch (86.3-cm) fixed forward windows and sliding 21-
inch (53.3-cm) aft windows mounted in tracks. The
2-2.3 WALKWAYS. Walkways extend between the sliding windows have positive-locking handles installed
foredeck and the aft deck outboard of the well deck on the forward side.
and the crew cabin. The following fixtures and fittings
are located on the walkways: d. There are two 24-inch X 34-inch (61-cm X 86.3-
cm) fixed side windows installed in the cabin sides aft
a. There are two 12-inch polished stainless steel of the forward side windows.
mooring cleats (Suncor, model S3142-0000) mounted
on the outboard sides of the walkways near the aft end e. There are 1 1/2-inch welded pipe handrails on each
of the crew cabin. side of the crew cabin which extend from bases on the
shelf forward of the windshields to bases on the cabin
sides aft of the fixed windows.
2-5
f. Shore power receptacles are installed in the star- etrates the cabin top through a cable deck fitting
board cabin side below the forward windows. The up- (BlueSea, CableClam) inboard and aft of the horn.
per fitting (Marinco, 303SSEL-B) is a 30-amp, 125Vac
shore power receptacle. The lower fitting (Marinco, n. The 12-Vdc LED navigation side lights (Perko,
6371EL-BX) is a 32-amp, 220Vac shore power recep- 0170BPODP3 and 0170BSDDP3) are mounted on
tacle. brackets welded to the cabin top and handrails at the
forward ends.
g. An engine ambient air temperature sensor is
mounted on the forward end of the port cabin side be- o. A strobe bar (Whelan, 9U244000) is mounted on
low the forward side window. a welded bracket in the center of the cabin top inboard
of the navigation horn and the navigation side lights.
h. There are two 18-inch X 24-inch (45.7-cm X 61- The power and control cable for the strobe bar pen-
cm) fixed windows on the aft cabin bulkhead on either etrates the cabin top through a cable deck fitting for-
side of the cabin door. ward of the strobe bar.
i. A watertight door is mounted in the aft bulkhead p. A tactical radio broadband antenna (Shakespeare,
of the cabin on centerline. The door frame is welded SFB 3512D/VRC) is mounted on a 6-inch pipe base
into the aft cabin bulkhead 3-inches (7.62-cm) above welded to the starboard outboard side of the cabin top
deck level. The door is hinged to starboard and is se- aft of the strobe bar.
cured by two dogs on the port side. There is a single
19-inch X 24-inch (48.3-cm X 61-cm) window in the q. An adjustable, tilting antenna base (Shakespeare,
center of the door. A rubber bumper used in mast stow- 4289-W NVIS) for a 16-foot tactical antenna is
age operations is mounted in the center of the door mounted to a fabricated aluminum enclosure welded
below the window. There is an eye installed on the to the port outboard side of the cabin top, aft of the
upper starboard corner of the door used to hold the strobe bar.
door in the open position. The door has a hasp for a
padlock installed on the port side. r. A fabricated aluminum electronic equipment en-
closure with a removable cover is attached to the base
j. A life ring (Cal-June, GO-24) is mounted in a stain- of the port tactical antenna mount. The enclosure is
less steel rack on the port aft cabin bulkhead beneath located directly aft of the antenna base. The cover of
the fixed window. the equipment enclosure is secured with pan head
machine screws. A bracket for securing the VHF an-
k. There are two 1-inch welded pipe handrails tenna in the stowed position is mounted on the port
mounted on the outboard sides of the cabin top which side of the enclosure.
run aft to the end of the cabin top and then turn down-
wards to the aft deck. The cabin side plating extends s. A GPS antenna/receiver unit (Furuno, BBWGPS)
aft beyond the aft bulkhead and is welded to the verti- on a ratcheting antenna mount (Shakespeare, model
cal sections of the rail. Cut outs in the upper portions 4187) is bracket-mounted in the aft port corner of the
of the plating form vertical handrails. Stainless steel cabin top. The power and antenna cable for the GPS
ring bolts for securing the mast when it is stowed and penetrates the cabin top through a cable deck fitting
for attaching lifelines are through-fastened to the ver- inboard of the antenna.
tical rails.
t. A VHF antenna (Shakespeare, Style 5202) on a
l. There are four 1-inch (2.54-cm) drainage holes in ratcheting antenna mount (Shakespeare, model 4187)
the cabin top at each corner. is bracket-mounted in the aft starboard corner of the
cabin top. The cable for the antenna penetrates the
m. A 24Vdc dual-trumpet navigation horn (Marinco, cabin top through a cable deck fitting inboard of the
10018XL) is bracket-mounted on the forward port side antenna.
of the cabin top. The power cable for the horn pen-
2-6
u. The boat's mast is mounted on a raised structure 2-2.5 AFT DECK. The aft deck of the boat extends
at the aft end of the cabin top. The mast is hinged at from the aft cabin bulkhead to the transom and pro-
the aft end and is secured on the forward end by two vides approximately 80 square feet (7.4 square meters)
stainless steel bolts. There are two machined alumi- of working area with access to the cabin exterior, the
num stops through-bolted to the lower mast base hinges port and starboard sides of the boat, and to the tran-
to prevent the mast from traveling past stowage posi- som and transom-mounted equipment. The aft deck
tion. There are three platform levels on the mast for incorporates mounted fixtures and features as follows:
mounting various pieces of equipment. The lower and
mid platforms have wings which extend outboard on a. There are welded pipe handrails with mid-rails and
both sides of the mast. The mast is painted flat black. lower rails installed on the outboard sides of the aft
The mast has the following installed equipment: deck which extend from the aft end of the fuel tank
access soft patch to the aft end of the engine access
1. A 24-inch radome (Furuno, 1834C) is mounted hatches. The handrails are welded to the deck and to
on the lower platform on the forward side of the mast. gussets on the outboard sides of the weapon mount
The power and antenna cable for the radome penetrates stanchions. The middle and lower rails are also welded
the forward face of the mast through a cable deck to the outboard engine compartment ventilation boxes.
fitting aft of the radome. There are sockets for the aft deck canopy frame legs
welded to the vertical sections of the handrails on the
2. A combination siren and loud-hailer speaker forward and aft ends. The sockets have machined plas-
(Whelan, SA340TS) is mounted on the starboard plat- tic bushings installed and bolts to secure the canopy
form wing on the mast aft of the radome. The electri- frame legs in the sockets. There are ring bolt attach-
cal cable for the speaker penetrates the port side of ments for lifeline gates installed on the forward and aft
the mast through a cable deck fitting inboard of the ends of the handrails. The forward lifeline gates are
speaker. attached to the forward eyes on the handrails.
3. A searchlight (Jabsco, 62040-4006) is mounted b. There is a 30-inch X 79-inch (76-cm X 200-cm)

in the center of the middle platform on the forward fuel tank access soft patch in the aft deck immediately
side of the mast. aft of the aft cabin bulkhead. There is a 1 1/2-inch
sounding tube fitting (Perko, 520-DPD-CHR) mounted
4. There are two stainless steel ring bolts for se- in the forward side of the soft patch immediately aft of
curing the mast in the stowed position mounted on the the cabin door. The walking surface of the soft patch
upper side of the middle mast platform outboard of the has antiskid coating applied.
searchlight.
c. There are two 30-inch X 73-inch (76-cm X 185-
5. The anchor light (Watermark, SL05) is mounted cm) engine access hatches located in the aft deck aft
in the center of a small platform at the top of the mast. of the fuel tank access soft patch. The hatches are
The platform acts as a screen for the anchor light. hinged on the outboard sides and are secured by two
latches with hex head actuators on the inboard sides.
6. A static dissipation device (LPS, ALS 100SS) There are recessed lifting handles at the forward and
is mounted on the platform at the top of the mast aft of aft ends of the hatches on the inboard side. There are
the anchor light on centerline. two gas springs (Attwood Marine, SL120) mounted on
the outboard underside of each hatch to facilitate open-
7. There is a welded ear for rigging a flag hal- ing. Latching safety supports on the aft side of the
yard on the aft side of the mast immediately beneath hatches support the hatches when they are in the open
the platform at the top of the mast. position. The walking surfaces of the hatches have anti-
skid coating applied.
8. There is a flag halyard cleat welded to the aft
face of the mast below the level of the lower platform.
2-7
d. The fuel tank sounding rod is mounted in clips on of the outboard handrails are welded to the ventilation
the inboard coaming of the starboard engine access boxes. There is a crew connection box (Gentex, LVIS)
hatch. for the boat's intercom system mounted in a fabricated
aluminum enclosure on the forward side of each venti-
e. There is a 26-inch X 47-inch (66-cm X 119-cm) lation box beneath the ammunition stowage bin.
engine compartment access hatch located in the aft
deck between the engine access hatches aft of the j. There are two engine compartment ventilation
fuel tank access soft patch. The hatch is hinged on the boxes located at the transom on each side of centerline.
aft side and is secured by a latch with a hex head ac- The boxes are oriented athwartships and incorporate
tuator on the port forward side. There is a recessed louvered grilles on the forward sides. There are two-
lifting handle at the forward end of the hatch in the compartment ammunition stowage bins installed on the
center. There is a gas spring (Attwood Marine, SL36- tops of each ventilation box. Welded pipe handrails are
40-1) mounted on the forward underside of the hatch mounted on the upper aft sides of the ventilation boxes.
to facilitate opening. A quick pin is attached to the star- Stainless steel lifelines are attached to the handrails on
board hatch hinge to lock the hatch in the open posi- the outboard sides. There is a crew connection box
tion. The upper surface of the hatch has antiskid coat- (Gentex, LVIS) for the boat's intercom system mounted
ing applied. in a recess in the inboard side of the starboard ventila-
tion box.
f. There is a 26-inch X 26-inch (66-cm X 66-cm)
removable deck section located between the two en- k. There are two 1 1/2-inch (3.8-cm) lifting eyes
gine hatches aft of the engine compartment access welded to the outboard corners of the aft deck on dou-
hatch. bler plates. The lifting eye plates are fabricated from
3/4-inch (1.9-cm) aluminum plate 4-inches (10.2-cm)
g. There are two foundations for MK16, MOD 8 wide and extend approximately 18 inches (45.7 cm)
weapon mounts installed on 4-inch pipe stanchions 37- below deck level where they are welded to the inboard
inches (94-cm) high on the port and starboard sides of side of the transom.
the aft deck near the forward sides of the engine ac-
cess hatches. The stanchions are welded to the deck l. There are two 3-inch (7.62-cm) mooring bitts
on doubler plates and have gussets welded to their out- mounted on doubler plates welded to the outboard sides
board sides which also serve as reinforcement for the of the aft deck forward of the lifting eyes.
outboard pipe railings.
m. A removable canopy with a welded pipe frame is
h. A foundation for a MK16, MOD 8 weapon mount installed above the aft deck. The legs of the frame
is installed on a 4-inch pipe stanchion 37-inches (94- mount in sockets welded to the vertical sections of the
cm) high on the centerline of the aft deck at the tran- handrails on the forward and aft ends. Each leg is se-
som. The stanchion is welded to the deck on a doubler cured in the socket by a plastic bushing and two
plate and has two gussets welded to the aft side at through-bolts. The canvas cover is laced to the pipe
deck level. There is a 1 1/4-inch (3.2-cm) cross bar frame around the perimeter using grommets in the
welded to the stanchion above the gussets which per- cover. Welded eyes on the forward and aft outboard
mits the stanchion to be used as a towing point. corners of the pipe frame permit securing the frame to
the cabin top and to the aft handrails with nylon straps.
i. There are two engine compartment ventilation There is a removable center forward section of the
boxes mounted immediately aft of the weapon mount canopy which is hinged on the aft end to allow the
stanchions on the outboard sides of the aft deck. The mast to be stowed for transport without removing the
boxes are oriented fore and aft and incorporate lou- entire canopy.
vered grilles on the inboard sides. There are three-
compartment ammunition stowage bins installed on the n. All walking surfaces on the aft deck have anti-
tops of the ventilation boxes. The mid and lower rails skid coating applied.
2-8
2-2.6 TRANSOM. The transom of the boat incorpo- g. There are two 1 1/2-inch (3.8-cm) engine access
rates mounted fixtures and fittings as follows: hatch gutter drain discharge fittings mounted in the tran-
som. The port hatch gutter drain is located on the port
a. The waterjet drive units (Hamilton, model HJ-292) side of the transom immediately above the waterjet
are mounted in the transom near the bottom of the hull drive guard bracket. The starboard hatch gutter drain
on each side of centerline. The drive units are through- discharge is located on the starboard side of the tran-
bolted to aluminum doubler plates welded to the transom above and outboard of the engine exhaust.
som.
h. The 1 1/2-inch (3.8-cm) mid and aft bilge pump
b. There are two tracks for attaching the hybrid foam discharge fittings are located above each other on the
collar at the upper corners of the transom and two at starboard side of the transom immediately above the
the point where the upper chine meets the transom. starboard waterjet drive guard bracket. The upper fit-
ting is for the aft bilge and the lower fitting is for the
c. There are two 6-inch (15.2-cm) engine exhaust mid bilge.
tubes mounted in the transom above the waterjet drive
units. The exhaust tubes have rubber backflow i. There is a 1-inch (2.54-cm) bilge drain plug in-
preventer flaps (Salisbury, EG600B) installed with hose stalled at the bottom of the transom on the port side of
clamps. centerline.
d. A removable collision protection guard fabricated j. There are two zinc anodes (Canmet, AZ3B) bolted
from welded aluminum pipe is installed on the transom to welded brackets on the transom below the water-
above the waterjet drive units. The guard consists of line between the waterjet drive units.
two sections of 1 1/2-inch (38-cm) aluminum pipe above
one another which extend from the transom above the k. The hull number of the boat is painted on the tran-
waterjet drives, which act as a crash bar for the som above the starboard engine exhaust.
waterjet drives. There is a brace in the center of the
guard which runs from the center of the lower pipe l. The builder's number is stamped on a raised alu-
section to the bottom of the transom on centerline. The minum plate welded to the upper starboard side of the
guard and the brace are welded to vertical sections of transom.
square stock which mount in sections of channel
welded to the transom. The guard is secured to the m. There is a vertical aluminum plate mounted at each
transom fittings with stainless steel through bolts. side of the transom which secures the aft ends of the
hybrid foam collar to the transom. The bars are in-
e. Trim tabs (Dana, model HP-900) are mounted to stalled on the transom with stainless steel machine
the transom on the outboard sides of the waterjet drive screws.
units. The tabs are mounted about one inch (2.54-cm)
above the flange at the bottom of the hull. There are 2-2.7 HULL. The hull of the boat is constructed of
two zinc anodes (Electro Guard, model 275) mounted welded aluminum and incorporates the following fix-
on the upper sides of each tab. Hydraulic actuating tures and penetrations:
cylinders are mounted to the tabs and to the transom.
The actuating cylinders have push-pull type cables a. An inflatable D-shaped hybrid foam collar (Wing
mounted on them which transmit the cylinders' piston Inflatables, #9060) is installed and mechanically fas-
rod position to the console trim tab position indicators. tened to the hull by means of two attachment tracks
The cables penetrate the transom near deck level which spread load and impact pressure over a large
through watertight compression fittings. surface area. The upper and lower capture tracks pre-
vent the tube from movement during rough seas or
f. The 3/4-inch (1.9-cm) air conditioning seawater high speed operations. The inflatable hybrid collar com-
and condensate overboard discharge is located on the bines 2-pound density polyethylene foam with a small,
port side of the transom immediately above the port self-contained air bladder. When inflated to operating
hatch gutter drain discharge. pressure, the air bladder thrusts outward and forces
2-9
the foam to float off the hull. Interaction between the i. There is a 3-inch (7.62-cm) keel on centerline
air bladder and the hull provides better shock absorb- which extends from mid-hull to the transom.
ing capability than with a foam collar or air collar alone.
There is an air fill valve and air relief valve located in a j. The hull bottom plating extends 2 inches (5.1 cm)
recess on the aft outboard side of each collar. The aft beyond the transom.
collars have a ribbed rubbing strake 8-inches (20.3-
cm) wide on the outboard sides which runs the length 2-3 INTERIOR ARRANGEMENTS.
of the collar.
2-3.1 CREW CABIN INTERIOR. The crew cabin
b. A bow eye for the trailer winch cable is welded to interior is divided into two sections. The upper aft cabin
the stem below the hybrid collar. A smaller eye for the section is about 24 inches (61 cm) below main deck
trailer safety cable is welded to the lower forward side level and contains the control console, crew seating,
of the main eye. and communication and navigation equipment. The
lower forward section is located about 27 inches (68.5
c. There are three 8-inch X 8 1/2-inch (20.3-cm X cm) below the level of the crew cabin deck and ap-
21.6-cm) recessed tiedown fittings installed in the hull proximately 25 inches (63.5 cm) below the level of the
sides between the hybrid collar and the chine on each well deck. The lower section includes the head, seat-
side of the boat. The forward tiedown fittings are lo- ing, electrical panels, communications equipment, elec-
cated in the area of the forward well deck bulkhead. trical equipment, and access to the well deck through a
The mid tiedown points are located forward of the watertight door.
cleats mounted on the outboard walkways. The aft tie-
down points are located in the area of the aft side deck 2-3.2 UPPER SECTION: The upper section of the
weapon positions. crew cabin has a centerline walking area 32 1/2-inches
(82.5-cm) wide which extends 84 inches (2.13 m) fore
d. Well deck scupper drains penetrate the forward and aft. Crew seating is on raised platforms 10-inches
hull on the port and starboard sides at the aft end of the (25.4-cm) high and 21-inches (53.3-cm) wide located
well deck. outboard of the walking area. There is an 21-inch X
25-inch (53.3-cm X 63.5-cm) area forward of each
e. Well deck hatch gutter drains penetrate the hull seating platform which is at the level of the walking
between the forward recessed tiedown points and the area. The upper aft section of the crew cabin contains
well deck scupper drains. the following fixtures and equipment:
f. There are two 12-inch X 24-inch (30.5-cm X 61- 2-3.3 CONTROL CONSOLE. The control console
cm) openings for the waterjet drive intake tunnels pen- is located at the forward starboard side of the cabin
etrating the hull bottom on the port and starboard sides forward of the coxswain's position. The control con-
immediately forward of the transom. CRES intake sole incorporates the following equipment:
grates are mounted over the openings.
a. The steering wheel (Gem, model 149902) and helm
g. There are two 4-inch (10.2-cm) engine seawater pump unit (Teleflex, Sea Star) are mounted in the cen-
intakes in the bottom of the hull located 9 inches (22.8 ter of the lower face of the console.
cm) outboard of the boat's centerline. The intakes are
located in the general area of the aft side deck weapon b. A fuel level gauge (Livorsi, model GIFL) is lo-
positions. Each intake is fitted with a removable screen cated on the port side of the helm above the fire sup-
which is held in place by four machine bolts. pression system control panel.
h. A depth transducer (Airmar) is installed in the hull c. A fire suppression system control panel (Fireboy)
bottom in a watertight enclosure on the port side of is mounted on the port side of the helm below the fuel
centerline. The transducer is located in the general area gauge.
of the forward end of the aft deck outboard handrail.
2-10
d. A 12Vdc receptacle (Marinco, model 21046) is j. There is a trim tab control panel with two toggle
located on the port side of the helm on the inboard side switches mounted on the upper face of the console
of the fire suppression system control panel. below the waterjet indicator lights.
e. There are two bilge pump control panels (Rule, k. There is a heating/defrosting discharge louver lo-
model 42) with 3-way switches and indicator lights cated inboard of the compass on the horizontal portion
mounted on the starboard side of the helm. of the console immediately aft of the windshield.
f. The 24Vdc control panel is located below the helm l. A navigation display (Furuno, model 1834C/NT)
and extends the width of the console. The panel in- is mounted on the horizontal portion of the console in-
cludes 15 circuit breaker/switches for 24Vdc equip- board of the engine instrument panels and directly above
ment and a master circuit breaker for the panel. The the steps leading to the forward part of the cabin. The
panel also incorporates the navigation horn switch and screen is mounted at an angle oriented towards the
a rotary dimmer for the console instrument lights. coxswain's position.
g. There are two engine instrument panels located m. A navigation compass is located directly forward
forward of the helm on the upper face of the console. of the helm and forward of the engine instrument pan-
Each panel contains the following equipment: els.
1. A SmartCraft tachometer is located in the cen- n. There is a narrow console section outboard of the
ter of the panel. main control console. This section incorporates the fol-
lowing controls and indicators:
2. An engine oil pressure gauge is located in the
upper right quadrant of the panel. 1. Marine gear control levers are located on the
upper section of the console.
3. A black engine STOP pushbutton is located on
the right side of the panel. 2. A trim tab position indicator is located inboard
of the marine gear control levers.
4. A marine gear oil pressure gauge is located in
the lower right quadrant of the panel. 3. Two sets of control levers are located next to
each other aft of the marine gear control levers. The
5. An engine power switch labeled IGN is lo- two inboard levers control the waterjet drive reversing
cated at the bottom center of the panel. bucket positions and the two outboard levers control
the engine throttle settings.
6. A voltmeter is located in the lower left quad-
rant of the panel. o. The aft vertical face of the console has a folding
foot rest (Garelick, model 27315) mounted directly for-
7. A red engine START pushbutton is located on ward of the coxswain's seat.
the left side of the panel.
p. There is a duplex 120Vac GFCI receptacle
8. An engine coolant temperature gauge is lo- mounted in the aft vertical face of the console inboard
cated in the upper left quadrant of the panel. of the foot rest.
h. There is a rudder angle indicator located to star- 2-3.4 COMMUNICATION CONSOLE. The com-
board of the engine instrument panels on the upper munication console is located at the forward port side
face of the console. of the upper section of the crew cabin forward of the
navigator's position. The control console incorporates
i. There are two waterjet hydraulic overpressure the following equipment:
indicator lights mounted below the rudder angle indica-
tor.
2-11
a. There are removable shock mounts for two tacti- 2-3.6 CABIN INTERIOR EQUIPMENT AND FIT-
cal radios installed in the console directly forward of TINGS. The upper crew cabin has the following equip-
the navigator's seat. ment and fixtures installed:
b. There is a 12-inch X 26-inch (30.5-cm X 66-cm) a. There is a crew intercom connection box (Gentex,
flush access panel installed above the mounts for the model LVIS) mounted on the forward inboard side of
tactical radios. The panel is hinged on the forward side each seat riser box immediately below the seat.
and is secured in place by three flat head machine
screws. b. There are four vertical 2 1/2-inch X 5-inch (6.35-
cm X 12.7-cm) HVAC ducts located on the outboard
c. There is a raised, welded aluminum enclosure im- sides of the seating platforms forward of each seat.
mediately forward of the tactical radio access panel Adjustable air discharge louvers are installed in the ducts
which contains the following instruments and fittings: 34 inches (86.4 cm) above seating platform level.
1. There is a SmartCraft DieselView display c. There are two 3-inch (7.62-cm) air return grilles
mounted in the aft face of the enclosure on the port mounted immediately above deck level on the outboard
side. bulkheads forward of the coxswain and navigator seats.
2. A battery monitor panel (Xantrex, Link 2000) d. There are two 6-pound, 3A:40B:C, portable, dry-
is mounted in the aft face of the enclosure on the star- chemical fire extinguishers (Amerex, model B443)
board side. bracket-mounted between the forward and aft seats
on the port and starboard outboard cabin bulkheads.
3. There is a heating/defrosting discharge louver
mounted on the forward side of the enclosure immedi- e. A telescoping 8-foot (2.4-m) aluminum boathook
ately aft of the windshield. (Garelick, model 55170) is mounted in clips outboard
of the starboard aft crew seat.
d. The aft vertical face of the console has a folding
foot rest mounted directly forward of the navigator's f. The walking area of the cabin deck is overlaid
seat. with a vinyl flooring with a molded nonskid pattern and
a resilient shock-absorbing backing. The flooring is in-
2-3.5 CREW SEATING. There are four adjustable stalled in interlocking sections for ease of removal and
air-cushion seats (Bostrom, model 910SC) mounted on to facilitate cleaning the deck.
the outboard sides of the center walking area. The seats
are through-bolted to 14-inch (35.5-cm) high welded g. There is a horizontal 1-inch (2.54-cm) welded pipe
aluminum riser boxes with 16-inch X 16-inch (40.6-cm handrail installed on the port outboard bulkhead imme-
X 40.6-cm) bases. A 12-inch X 8 1/2-inch (30.5-cm X diately forward of the navigator's seat.
47-cm) opening on the inboard side of each riser box
provides access to stowage beneath the seats. The h. A hatch dog socket wrench is mounted in rubber
seat riser boxes have 1-inch (2.54-cm) welded pipe clips on the port outboard bulkhead adjacent to the
handrails welded to their inboard and outboard sides. navigator's seat.
The two forward seat riser boxes have a folding foot
rest mounted on the aft sides directly forward of the i. There are two vertical 1-inch (2.54-cm) welded
aft seats. The seats and riser boxes are mounted on pipe hand rails 18-inches (45.7-cm) long installed on
10-inch (25.4-cm) high platforms 26-inches (66-cm) each side of the aft cabin door frame.
wide. The platforms are 60-inches (1.52-m) long and
extend from the aft cabin bulkhead to a point 25-inches j. There is a 28-inch X 36-inch (71-cm X 91.5-cm)
(63.5-cm) aft of the vertical console panel. There are soft patch installed in the crew cabin deck between
5-inch (12.7-cm) storage drawers 56-inches (1.42-m) the two aft crew seats.
wide and 21 1/2-inches (54.6-cm) deep installed in the
inboard face of each platform.
2-12
k. There is a 15-inch X 24-inch (31.5 cm X 61 cm) radio's microphone is mounted in a clip immediately
quick-acting, lift-out, oval storage compartment hatch beneath the radio on the port side.
(Freeman, model 1524AALR) installed in the soft patch
in the crew cabin deck. 3. The port remote searchlight control panel
(Jabsco, 62040-4006) is mounted immediately beneath
l. There is an 18-inch (45.7-cm) wide step mounted the VHF radio inboard of the VHF radio's microphone.
12-inches (30.5-cm) above the crew cabin deck on the
aft bulkhead below the aft door opening. The walking 4. The 12Vdc main distribution panel is mounted
surface on the step has antiskid material applied. in the center of the console above the centerline walk-
way. The panel incorporates the boat's 12Vdc circuit
m. There are four 12Vdc dome lights (Guest, model breakers and a rotary dimmer for the compass and
801952R-B) with selector switches for red or white fuel gauge lights.
illumination mounted on the crew cabin overhead above
each crew seat. 5. A siren and strobe bar control head (Whelen,
model HFS295S4) is flush-mounted in the console
n. There are two 5-inch wiring access plates (Vi- panel. The microphone is mounted in a clip immedi-
king, model 1057) mounted in the crew cabin overhead ately beneath the unit.
forward of the forward dome light.
6. There is a searchlight switch panel mounted
o. There are two 12Vdc oscillating ventilation fans on the panel on the starboard side of the siren/PA/
(Marinco, model 900) mounted to the overhead at the storbe bar control head.
forward corners of the cabin.
7. The starboard remote searchlight control panel
p. There are two speakers (Harris, model RF5980- is mounted immediately beneath the searchlight switch
SA001) mounted at the tops of the outboard bulkheads panel.
between the side windows.
8. There are two windshield wiper/washer
q. A removable wireway access panel forms a part switches mounted on the overhead panel outboard of
of the overhead in the crew cabin. The panel extends the starboard searchlight control panel.
from the electronic equipment panel in the overhead to
the aft cabin bulkhead. The panel is held in place with t. There are two windshield wiper motors (Ongaro,
machine screws with trim buttons covering the heads. model 30992) installed in the forward bulkhead above
the two windshields.
r. There are two 1-inch (2.54-cm) welded pipe hand-
rails mounted fore and aft in the overhead on each side 2-3.7 FORWARD CREW CABIN. The lower sec-
of the wireway access panel. tion of the crew cabin is located forward of the upper
section and extends from the consoles to the forward
s. An electronics and communications console is cabin bulkhead. The area consists of the space be-
mounted to the overhead at the forward end of the tween the two consoles on the upper cabin level, a
cabin. The panel on the console where the equipment standing area forward of the consoles, a head, bench
is mounted faces aft. The console incorporates the fol- seating, electrical panels, communications equipment,
lowing equipment: electrical equipment, and access to the well deck
through a watertight door. Deck level of the lower sec-
1. A radio selector rotary switch (Gentex, model tion is 27 inches (68.6 cm) below the upper deck level
N100618-00) for the intercom system is mounted on and the height between the deck and the overhead is
the port outboard side of the console panel. 59 inches (1.5 meters). The lower section of the crew
cabin includes the following fixtures and equipment:
2. A VHF marine radio (Standard Horizon, model
GX1500S) is flush-mounted in the console panel. The
2-13
a. There are two steps leading from the upper sec- 2. There is a 24Vdc circuit breaker panel located
tion of the crew cabin to the lower, forward section. on the aft side of the port bulkhead immediately below
The steps are 22-inches (55.9-cm) wide and are lo- the 12Vdc circuit breaker panel. The panel has a
cated between fore-and-aft bulkheads on the inboard plexiglas guard installed to prevent unintended opera-
sides of the two upper cabin consoles. The steps have tion of the circuit breakers.
antiskid material applied to the treads.
3. The boat's HVAC control panel is located at
b. The following equipment is installed on the star- the bottom of the panel.
board fore-and-aft bulkhead adjacent to the steps:
4. The boat's 12Vdc carbon monoxide monitor
1. A control panel for the defroster (Heatercraft, (Fireboy, model CMD-4M) is mounted on the forward
model 317-H4-B) is mounted at the top of the bulk- end of the bulkhead forward of the 12Vdc circuit
head in the center. breaker panel.
2. There is a galvanic isolator monitor (Quicksil- d. There is a 22-inch (55.8-cm) wide bench seat with
ver, model 888541Q01) located on the upper forward a padded backrest installed forward of the bulkhead
side of the panel. electrical panel on the port outboard side of the lower
cabin.
3. There is a shore power selector switch panel
located on the forward side of the panel. The panel e. There is an access door mounted at the aft side of
has a plexiglas guard installed to prevent unintended the bench seat which is hinged on the outboard side
operation of the selector switches. and has a turn latch on the inboard side. The door pro-
vides access to a compartment which extends aft to
4. A 120Vac inverter panel is located on the up- the crew cabin storage area bulkhead and from the
per aft side of the panel. The panel contains an amme- port outboard bulkhead to the bulkhead on the port side
ter, a volt meter, and circuit breakers for AC equip- of the steps and is open to the bilges. The compart-
ment. The panel has a plexiglas guard installed to pre- ment provides access the following equipment:
vent unintended operation of the circuit breakers.
1. The backs of the electrical panels mounted on
5. A 120Vac shore power panel is located on the the port inboard bulkhead.
mid aft side of the panel. The panel contains an amme-
ter, a volt meter, and circuit breakers for AC equip- 2. The connection boxes for the boat's intercom
ment. The panel has a plexiglas guard installed to pre- system is mounted on the compartment's aft bulkhead.
vent unintended operation of the circuit breakers. Unused lengths of the system's connection cables are
coiled and mounted on the bulkhead below the con-
6. A 220Vac/50Hz shore power panel is located nection boxes.
on the upper aft side of the panel. The panel contains
an ammeter, a volt meter, and circuit breakers for AC 3. The depth sounder (Furuno, model ETR-
equipment. The panel has a plexiglas guard installed to 6710N) is mounted on the forward bulkhead of the
prevent unintended operation of the circuit breakers. compartment below the door opening.
c. The following equipment is installed on the port 4. There are two engine wiring harness junction
fore-and-aft bulkhead adjacent to the steps: blocks mounted on the forward bulkhead of the com-
partment below the depth sounder.
1. There is a 12Vdc circuit breaker panel located
at the aft top of the port bulkhead. The panel has a 5. There is a 12Vdc dome light (Guest, model
plexiglas guard installed to prevent unintended opera- 801952R-B) with a selector switch for red or white
tion of the circuit breakers. illumination mounted on the outboard bulkhead of the
compartment.
2-14
6. The connection to the engine ambient air tem- door is hinged on the starboard side and is secured by
perature sensor is located on the upper side of the out- two dogs on the port side. There is a 1 1/4-inch (3.2-
board bulkhead. cm) welded pipe grab rail 16-inches (40.6-cm) long
mounted horizontally above the door.
f. There is an open area above the access door which
provides access to the connections on the two tactical i. There are two 1-inch (2.54-cm) welded pipe steps
radios. 12-inches (30.5-cm) wide mounted on the forward bulk-
head immediately below the forward watertight door.
g. There is a head/weapons locker forward of the The steps have antiskid coating applied. The lower step
bulkhead panels on the starboard side of the lower has a rubber bumper for the head door installed on the
cabin. The locker has a door which is hinged on the starboard aft corner.
forward side and is secured by a knob and lockset.
The locker contains the following equipment and fix- j. There is an 8-inch (20.3-cm) diameter aluminum
tures: lift-out deck plate located on centerline immediately
aft of the pipe steps on the forward bulkhead below
1. A locking weapons rack (Esmet, TUFLOC) the watertight door.
for four long guns is mounted on the forward bulkhead
of the compartment. 2-4 BELOW DECK COMPARTMENTS.
2. A portable toilet (Thetford Porta Potti, model 2-4.1 ANCHOR LOCKER. The anchor locker is lo-
135/735) is mounted on the deck on the aft side of the cated in the bow of the boat and is accessed through a
compartment. quick-acting oval hatch installed in the foredeck. The
hatch is mounted on centerline and is hinged on the
3. There is a head ventilation fan (Vetus, model forward side. The compartment's aft bulkhead is wa-
196406) mounted in the overhead in the starboard out- tertight and acts as the boat's collision bulkhead. The
board corner of the compartment. anchor (Fortress, model FX-16) is bracket-mounted on
the aft compartment bulkhead. The compartment has
4. There is a 12Vdc dome light (Guest, model a 1-inch (2.54-cm) drain fitting mounted at the bottom
801952R-B) a with selector switch for red or white of the aft bulkhead. The drain is isolated by means of a
illumination mounted in the compartment overhead. ball valve at the forward compartment bulkhead in the
well deck storage compartment.
5. There is an access door in the aft compart-
ment bulkhead which is hinged on the outboard side 2-4.2 WELL DECK STORAGE COMPART-
and is secured by a turn latch. The door provides ac- MENT. The well deck storage compartment extends
cess to the underside of the control console as well as from the anchor locker to the crew cabin and is ac-
the fire suppression system automatic engine shutdown cessed through a rectangular hatch in the well deck.
unit (Fireboy, model ES3000-01). There is a 12Vdc The hatch is hinged on the forward side and has two
dome light mounted on the aft compartment bulkhead. hex head turning-type latches at the aft side and a re-
cessed lifting handle at the aft end on centerline. A
6. A removable hatch cover (Bomar, model latching safety support on the starboard side of the
81020) is mounted on the compartment outboard bulk- hatch supports the hatch when it is in the open posi-
head. The hatch cover is hinged on the forward side tion. The hatch gutters have 1 1/4-inch (3.2-cm) drains
and is secured by two turn latches. The hatch opening installed at the aft outboard corners. Hoses connect
provides access to two windshield washer units (Denso, the drain fittings to the overboard fittings in the hull
model 160200-5200) and steering piping. sides through check valves. There is a 1-inch ball valve
mounted at the bottom of the forward bulkhead for
h. There is a watertight door mounted in the center draining the anchor locker. The locker is drained by
of the lower cabin forward bulkhead 27 inches (68.6 limber holes in the aft bulkhead adjacent to longitudinal
cm) above the level of the forward cabin deck. The structural members.
2-15
2-4.3 FORWARD CREW CABIN VOID. The for- HVAC unit. A 3/4-inch (1.9-cm) discharge hose from
ward cabin void is beneath the deck area forward of the sump leads through a 3/4-inch check valve on the
the steps and extends from the forward cabin bulk- forward compartment bulkhead and from there runs
head aft to the bulkhead at the forward end of the aft along the port compartment bulkhead to a penetra-
crew cabin storage compartment. Access through the tion in the aft compartment bulkhead immediately be-
deck is via an 8-inch (20.3-cm) diameter aluminum lift- low deck level.
out deck plate located on centerline immediately aft of
the vertical ladder on the forward bulkhead below the e. A bilge pump (Rule, model 12) and float switch
watertight door. The void area is open to the electrical (Ultra Safety Systems, model UPS 06) are mounted
cabinet in the head and the compartment above the on a plate in the bilge on the starboard side of centerline
port seating area. The void area is drained by a 1-inch at the aft compartment bulkhead. The pump discharges
ball valve mounted at the bottom of the forward bulk- through a 1 1/2-inch (3.8-cm) hose which leads up-
head in the crew cabin storage compartment. wards and across the aft bulkhead to a bulkhead pen-
etration immediately below deck level on the starboard
2-4.4 CREW CABIN STORAGE COMPART- side.
MENT. The crew cabin storage compartment is lo-
cated beneath the deck of the crew cabin and is ac- f. There is a 24Vdc light mounted in the compart-
cessed through a quick-acting, lift-out, oval hatch in- ment overhead on the port side of the access hatch.
stalled in the crew cabin deck. The compartment ex-
tends from the well deck storage compartment water- g. There is a 1-inch ball valve mounted at the bottom
tight bulkhead to the engine room bulkhead. The com- of the forward bulkhead on the port side of centerline.
partment has four welded pipe stanchions mounted The valve isolates the bilge drain for the well deck
between frames and the compartment overhead. The storage compartment and the forward crew cabin void.
following equipment is installed in the compartment:
h. There is a 1-inch ball valve mounted at the bottom
a. The HVAC evaporator unit (Arctic Wolf, model of the aft bulkhead on the port side of centerline. The
K-340-C) is mounted on the forward compartment bulk- valve isolates the bilge drain for the compartment.
head on centerline. There are four air supply hoses
and two air return hoses connected to the unit which 2-4.5 ENGINE COMPARTMENT INTERIOR. The
lead upward through the overhead. There is a conden- engine compartment extends from the transom to the
sate drain at the bottom of the evaporator unit which midships bulkhead. The compartment is ventilated
leads to a collection sump mounted in the compart- though four trunks located at the transom and the out-
ment bilge. board bulkheads which rise into the four ventilation
structures mounted on the aft deck. The compartment
b. The heater/defroster unit (HeaterCraft, model 317- overhead has insulation sheeting installed. The engine
H4-B) is mounted on the forward compartment bulk- compartment has the following major equipment in-
head on the starboard side of the HVAC unit. There stalled.
are two air discharge hoses connected to the unit which
lead upwards through the overhead. Engine coolant a. There is an access hatch installed in the main deck
hose connections and electrical connections are located above each engine. The hatch covers are hinged on
on the starboard side of the unit. the outboard sides and have gas springs to assist with
opening. The hatch covers have hex head turning-type
c. The 24Vdc-120Vac inverter (Xantrex, Freedom latches on the inboard sides. Latching safety supports
25) is mounted on a welded aluminum shelf at the aft on the aft sides of the hatches support the hatches
bulkhead on the port side. when they are in the open position. The hatches have
rubber sealing gaskets installed all around. The hatch
d. There is a HVAC condensate collection sump gutters have 1 1/4-inch (3.8-cm) drains installed at the
(Rule, model 98) mounted on an aluminum plate in the aft outboard corners. Hoses connect the drain fittings
bilge at the forward end of the compartment below the to the overboard fittings in the transom.
2-16
b. There is an engine compartment access hatch on i. The waterjet drive units (Hamilton, model HJ292)
centerline located between the engine access hatches. are installed at the transom in line with the engines and
The hatch is hinged on the aft side and is secured by a marine gears. They are connected to the marine gear
latch with a hex head actuator on the port side. There by AquaDrive couplings. Fabricated aluminum guards
is a recessed lifting handle at the forward side of the are installed over the AquaDrives. The waterjet tiller
hatch. There is a gas spring mounted on the forward arms are connected by a tie rod which extends across
underside of the hatch to facilitate opening. the transom.
c. A removable welded aluminum engine compart- j. There is an installed fire suppression system
ment access ladder 48-inches (122-cm) high and 8- (Fireboy, model CG2-600) mounted in a fabricated
inches (20.3-cm) wide is installed at the forward side bracket forward of the transom on the starboard side
of the center access hatch. The ladder has three 1- of centerline.
inch (2.54-cm) pipe rungs and is mounted with quick
pins at the top and bottom. k. A bilge pump (Rule, model 12) and float switch
(Ultra Safety Systems, model UPS 06) is mounted on
d. A SmartCraft DieselView display unit is installed a plate in the bilge forward of the transom on the port
in a welded aluminum enclosure mounted on the outside of centerline adjacent to the fire suppression sys-
board side of the starboard engine access hatch open- tem. Power to the pump is supplied through a water-
ing at the forward end. tight junction box mounted on a StarBoard plate on the
transom. The pump discharges through 1 1/2-inch (3.8-
e. There are two throttle position senders mounted cm) hose which leads upwards and across the inner
on a plate in the forward compartment overhead on transom to an elbow and the transom discharge fitting
the starboard side. Push-pull cables from the senders above and outboard of the starboard exhaust tube.
lead forward through the forward engine compartment
bulkhead. l. A 200-gallon (757-liter) rectangular diesel fuel tank
is installed at the forward bulkhead in the engine com-
f. The main propulsion engines (Cummins, model partment. The tank is fabricated from 1/4-inch welded
QSB5.9 425-GS), and the marine gears (TwinDisc, aluminum plate. There are two slosh baffles installed
model 5075) are mounted on either side of centerline in the tank. The tank is secured in place by six welded
in the engine compartment and occupy most of the tie-down tabs at the bottom sides which are bolted to
space in the compartment. Engine coolant overflow the boat's longitudinal frames with neoprene gaskets
bottles are mounted on brackets welded to the over- installed between the tiedown tabs and the frames. The
head on the aft outboard sides of the engines. The fuel tank has the following fittings and connections:
24Vdc-12Vdc converters for the engine ECMs are
mounted on the forward side of the starboard com- 1. A 2-inch (5.1-cm) fuel fill hose is connected to
partment bulkhead. a fitting on the port side of the tank top. The fill fitting
enters the tank top at an oblique angle from the port
g. The boat's air conditioning compressor and two side. The fill hose is connected to the fuel fill/vent fit-
engine coolant ball valves for the heating system are ting on the port outboard walkway.
mounted on the port engine. The refrigerant compres-
sor is mounted on the front of the engine. The engine 2. A 5/8-inch (1.6-cm) vent hose is connected to a
coolant ball valves are installed on the inboard side of fitting on the tank top inboard of the fuel fill fitting. The
the engine. The condenser is mounted on the port en- vent hose is connected to the fuel fill/vent fitting on the
gine room bulkhead near the front of the engine. port outboard walkway.
h. Two engine coolant ball valves for the heating and 3. A 1/2-inch (1.3-cm) fuel return hose is con-
defrosting system are installed on the outboard side of nected to a fitting on the tank top aft and inboard of the
the starboard engine. fuel fill fitting.
2-17
4. A 1 1/2-inch (3.8-cm) sounding hose is con- p. A watertight housing for the depth sounder trans-
nected to a fitting in the center of the tank top. The ducer is located on centerline between the two fuel
hose is connected to the sounding access plate installed filter/water separators. The housing has a removable
on the aft deck immediately aft of the cabin door. lid fastened with machine screws. The housing is pen-
etrated fore and aft by an aluminum pipe section which
5. A fuel tank level sender (Livorsi, model GIFL) allows for the unobstructed flow of bilge water through
is installed in the center of the tank top aft of the sound- the housing.
ing hose connection.
q. Hydraulic power units for the trim tabs are mounted
6. There is a 3/4-inch (1.9-cm) fuel supply con- on StarBoard panels on the outboard sides of the tran-
nection and ball valve mounted in the center of the aft som. There are two through-hull hydraulic fittings for
face of the fuel tank at the bottom side. the trim tabs located immediately below the hydraulic
power units.
7. There is a 3/4-inch (1.9-cm) fuel stripping con-
nection and ball valve mounted in the aft face of the r. There are two 12Vdc ship service batteries (Ul-
fuel tank at the bottom side to starboard of the fuel tima, model D34M) installed in welded aluminum bat-
supply connection and valve. tery boxes mounted on a tray forward of the starboard
engine. The tray is raised off the deck on supporting
8. All hose connections on the fuel tank fittings legs.
are secured with double CRES hose clamps.
s. The starboard engine and marine gear FLOCS
9. There is a removable inspection plate on the aft pump and manifold is mounted on a plate under the
side of the tank to permit inspection and cleaning. The ship service battery tray. The discharge hose is per-
plate is secured in place with hex head machine bolts. manently connected to the pump and is stowed on the
starboard battery tray in a retaining clip.
10. A fuel stripping pump (TAT, model 410-900-3/
8) is mounted on a bracket welded to the fuel tank t. There are two 12Vdc engine starting batteries (Ul-
inspection plate. The pump's 3/8-inch discharge hose tima, model D34M) installed in welded aluminum bat-
terminates in a ball valve and a hose barb. The dis- tery boxes mounted on a tray forward of the port en-
charge hose is permanently connected to the pump and gine. The tray is raised off the deck on supporting legs.
is stowed on the starboard side of the bracket.
u. The port engine and marine gear FLOCS pump
m. There are two fuel filter/water separators (Racor, and manifold are mounted on a plate under the engine
model 900MA2) bracket-mounted to hull structural starting battery tray. The discharge hose is permanently
members on the inboard forward sides of the engines. connected to the pump and is stowed on the port bat-
The fuel filter/water separators are equipped with ball tery tray in a retaining clip.
valves on the supply sides.
v. There are two FLOCS switch panels mounted in
n. There are 4-inch (10.2-cm) aluminum pipe sea the engine compartment overhead forward of the port
chests installed in the hull bottom inboard of the en- and starboard engines.
gines and 6 inches (15.2 cm) outboard of the centerline.
There are 2-inch sea cocks (Sharpe, 50M76) installed w. The main dc distribution panel is mounted in the
above the sea chests. engine compartment overhead forward of the access
hatch.
o. Seawater strainers (Perko, 493-009PLB) are lo-
cated on the inboard sides of the engines. The strain- x. The battery isolator (Guest, model 2432) is mounted
ers incorporate valves and hose connections on the in the engine compartment overhead forward of the dc
intake sides for fresh water flushing of the seawater distribution panel.
system.
2-18
y. A battery charger (ProMariner, ProTech-4) is in- ab. A duplex 120Vac GFCI receptacle is mounted in
stalled on the starboard bulkhead outboard of the fuel the engine compartment overhead forward of the tran-
tank. som on centerline.
z. There are two 24Vdc - 12Vdc voltage converters ac. A 1-inch (2.54-cm) drain fitting is installed in the
(Analytic Systems, model VTC1015d-24-12) installed forward engine compartment bulkhead on the port side
on the starboard bulkhead outboard of the ship service of centerline beneath the fuel tank. The drain is iso-
battery bank and aft of the battery charger. lated by means of a ball valve located at the aft bulk-
head in the crew cabin storage compartment.
aa. There are three 24Vdc lights (Perko, model 1087)
mounted in the engine compartment overhead forward
of the transom on centerline.
2-19
2-19/(2-20 blank)
CHAPTER 3
SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
Section I.
GENERAL
3-1 INTRODUCTION. f. Fast Lube Oil Change System (FLOCS).
This chapter provides a detailed description of the ma- g. Bilge Pumping and Drainage.
jor systems that make up the boat. Descriptions are
intended to familiarize personnel with the basic con- h. Steering System.
cepts of the system and to provide an overview of how
the system achieves the desired purpose. Additional i. Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
information on these systems and their individual com- System.
ponents can be obtained in the applicable technical
manuals listed in table 1-2. Functional descriptions are j. Electrical Systems.
provided for the following boat systems:
k. Communication, Navigation, and Force Protection
a. Propulsion System. (Security) Package.
b. Fuel System. l. Damage Control and Safety Equipment.
c. Engine Coolant and Preheater Systems. m. Sanitation System.
d. Seawater Cooling System. n. Trailer.
e. Engine Combustion Air and Exhaust Systems.
3-1
Section II.
PROPULSION SYSTEM
3-2 GENERAL. The propulsion system is controlled by manual push-
pull cables using an electronic throttle control. The
The boat’s propulsion system (figure 3-1) consists of wet exhaust system is not fitted with a muffler. The
two sets of diesel engines which power waterjet pro- engine shaft rotation is counterclockwise when viewed
pulsion units through marine gears and AquaDrive cou- from the transom looking forward. All engine bearings
plings. Principal characteristics of the propulsion sys- and gears are lubricated and cooled by oil. The oil is
tem are listed in table 3-1. cooled using engine coolant through an engine-mounted
cooler. Returned fuel oil to the fuel oil tank is cooled
3-3 PROPULSION ENGINE. using a seawater cooler. The engine freshwater (cool-
ant) system is cooled by the engine-mounted seawater
The inboard propulsion 6 cylinder, electronic fuel con- heat exchanger. An AquaDrive marine gear connects
trolled, turbocharged, and seawater-aftercooled diesel the output to the waterjet drive unit.
engine, model QSB5.9M (figure 3-2), is manufactured
by Cummins Engine Company, Inc. The engine is rated 3-3.1 ENGINE, MARINE GEAR, AND REVERSE
for Government Service (GS), 425 mhp at 3,000 rpm. BUCKET CONTROLS. The propulsion system con-
trol levers are all mounted on the starboard side of the
The 5.9-liter (359-inches3) displacement engine con- control console. The engine throttle and reverse bucket
tains four valves per cylinder. A high-pressure com- control levers are paired and are located aft of the
mon-rail fuel system supplies fuel to the six fuel injec- marine gear control levers.
tors. The engine performance is compliant with both
EPA Tier 2 and IMO emission standards. Engine in-
strumentation is provided by a SmartCraft digital dis-
play and console gauges.
AQUADRIVE
COUPLING
DIESEL ENGINE
WATERJET
DRIVE
TRANSOM
REVERSING BUCKET INTAKE GRATE HULL
Figure 3-1. Propulsion System
3-2
Table 3-1. Propulsion System Characteristics
Item Data
Propulsion Engine
Manufacturer .................................................................................. Cummins Engine Company, Inc
Type ................................................................................................ Turbocharged 4-cycle diesel
Model .............................................................................................. QSB5.9-425 GS
Rating ............................................................................................. Government Service
Cylinders ......................................................................................... 6 in-line
Bore and Stroke .............................................................................. 4.02 in. X 4.72 in. (102 mm X 110 mm)
Compression Ratio .......................................................................... 16.7:1
Displacement .................................................................................. 359 in3 (5.9 liters)
Rotation (Viewed From Flywheel, Looking Forward) .................... CCW
Dry Weight (With Heat Exchangers) .......................................... 1,350 lb (612 kg)
Idle Speed .................................................................................... 600 rpm
Rated Rpm .................................................................................. 3,000
Maximum Governed Rpm ........................................................... 3,075
Power Rating @ 3,000 rpm ............................................................ 420 bhp/425 mhp (313 kW)
Peak Engine Torque @2,000 rpm ................................................... 908 ft-lbs (1,231 Nm)
Performance Curve ..................................................................... M-91633
Fuel System ................................................................................. High Pressure Common Rail (HPCR)
Aspiration .................................................................................... Turbocharged
Drive Shaft
Manufacturer .................................................................................. AquaDrive
Part Number ................................................................................... CV 42
Length ............................................................................................. 10.79 in. (274 mm)
Marine Gear
Manufacturer .................................................................................. Twin Disc
Model .............................................................................................. MG5075SC
Ratio ............................................................................................... 1.16:1
Oil Type .......................................................................................... SAE 40
Oil Quantity .................................................................................... 5.28 qt (5.0 l)
Operating Oil Temperature ............................................................. 150°F - 185°F (65°C - 85C°C)
Waterjet
Manufacturer .................................................................................. C.W.F. Hamilton & Co.
Model .............................................................................................. HJ292
Impeller ........................................................................................... 15.5 kW, 5-blade
Impeller Material ............................................................................ Stainless Steel
3-3
S
I N
M
M
U
C
Figure 3-2. Cummins Diesel Engine QSB5.9M

a. Throttle Control Levers. The throttle control le- ment and is only used for back-flushing the waterjet
vers are located outboard of the bucket control levers. drive unit. The marine gear controls have neutral safety
The port lever controls the port engine throttle and the switches which prevent the engines from being started
starboard lever controls the starboard engine throttle. in the ahead or astern positions. The control levers must
The levers are connected to throttle position sending be in the neutral position in order to start the engines.
units located in the starboard engine compartment over-
head by stainless steel push-pull cables. The sending c. Waterjet Bucket Control Levers. The waterjet
units convert the mechanical movement of the cables drive reversing bucket controls are located on the in-
into dc electrical signals which are used by the engine board side of the throttle control levers on the lower
ECMs to adjust the electronically-controlled fuel injec- face of the console. When the control levers are in the
tion systems. When the throttle control levers are in fully forward position, the reversing buckets are com-
the fully aft position, the engines are at idle speed (600 pletely raised up out of the water streams, resulting in
rpm). Moving the throttle levers forward increases the forward movement of the boat. When the control le-
engine speed. Full throttle (3,075 rpm) is reached when vers are in the fully aft position, the reversing buckets
the levers are moved approximately 90° to the fully are completely lowered into the water streams, result-
forward position. Moving the throttle levers aft de- ing in aft motion of the boat. When the control levers
creases the engine speeds. The throttle control levers are in a vertical position midway between the forward
operate independently of the marine gear control le- and aft positions, the forward and aft thrust of the water
vers. streams are balanced, and there is no movement of the
boat. This is referred to as the neutral bucket or zero-
b. Marine Gear Control Levers. The marine gear con- speed bucket position.
trol levers are located on the upper face of the control
console forward of the other control levers. The levers 3-3.2 ENGINE INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL
have three positions: neutral, forward, and flush. When PANELS. A control and instrument panel (figure 3-3)
the control levers are in the neutral position, no power for each engine is located forward of the helm on the
is delivered to the waterjet drive units. Moving the con- upper console face. The panels include engine instru-
trol levers forward from the NEUTRAL position to ments and the controls for starting and stopping the
the FORWARD position engages the drives and pro- engines. A DieselView display is mounted in a housing
vides propulsive thrust. Moving the control levers aft on the port side navigation console.
from the NEUTRAL position to the FLUSH position
does not produce any propulsive thrust or vessel move-
3-4
b. DieselView Display. The boat is equipped with a
o
F
psi
40
MerCruiser SmartCraft Diesel View display, version
150
60
80
o
C
100
200
20 2 bar
3
60
1.00 (figure 3-5). The system is a comprehensive boat
information center. The DieselView system continu-
4
1
5
40 120
100 250 0
ously monitors operational data, engine parameters and

0 80
22
24
26
provides engine fault information. The Diesel View
20 VOLT 28 displays detailed information in the following catego-
30 ries:
16 32
STOP START
22
24
26
psi
ARROW
20 VOLT 28
200 20
bar
400
TRACKPAD
10 30
18 30
0 40 SELECT
16 32 0 600
IGN SELECT
HOME
Figure 3-3. Engine Instrument and Control Panel HOME
a. Engine Instrument Panels. Each engine instrument

panel includes the following gauges and displays:
Figure 3-5. SmartCraft Diesel View Display
1. An engine coolant temperature gauge.
1. Propulsion information as follows:
2. An engine oil pressure gauge.
(a) Engine RPM.
3. A marine gear oil pressure gauge.
(b) Engine coolant temperature.
4. An engine alternator output voltmeter.
(c) Engine oil pressure.
5. A SmartCraft display/tachometer. A Cummins
(d) Engine oil temperature.
SmartCraft multifunctional display/tachometer (figure
3-4) is mounted in the center of the engine instrument
(e) Battery voltage.
package. The instrument has an LCD window located
in the bottom half of the face which provides informa-
(f) Engine intake manifold temperature.
tion for the SmartCraft DieselView display which can
be accessed by means of touch controls on the display
(g) Instantaneous fuel flow.
face. The display also provides various warning alarms
for unsafe engine operating conditions.
(h) Engine turboboost pressure.
(i) Percent throttle commanded.
(j) Percent engine load.
(k) Ambient air pressure.
(l) Marine gear oil pressure.
(m) Marine gear oil temperature.
Figure 3-4. SmartCraft Tachometer
3-5
2. Vessel information as follows: c. Engine Controls. The console panel (figure 3-6)
includes an engine power switch labeled IGN and two
(a) Fuel intake level. pushbuttons for starting and stopping the engines. The
IGN switches control the power to the engine instru-
(b) Total engine hours. ments on the panels, the DieselView display, the en-
gine ECM starting circuits, and the fuel lift pump. The
(c) Total fuel consumed. START and STOP switches are momentary contact
pushbuttons enclosed in protective rubber boots. The
3. Alarm, diagnostic and maintenance history in- engine starting circuits are routed through the neutral
formation as follows: safety switches in the marine gear control heads which
prevent the engines from starting unless the control
(a) Displays alarms and helpful information levers are in the NEUTRAL position. To start the en-
concerning alarm causes. gines, the black START pushbutton is depressed. To
stop the engines, the red STOP pushbutton is depressed.
(b) Automatic maintenance reminders and log
recorded for periodic propulsion maintenance.
NAVIGATION
ENGINE INSTRUMENT COMPASS STEERING NOZZLE
AND CONTROL PANEL DIRECTION INDICATOR
(2 PLACES) TRIM TAB POSITION
INDICATOR
o
psi psi VDO
MARINE GEAR
CONTROL LEVERS
o
F 40 F 40
150 80 200 3 150 80 200 3

20 2 bar 2
o
C o
C
20 bar
60 100 4
60 60 100 60 TABS
1 4
1
UP
5 5
40 120 40 120
100 250 0 100 250 0 1
0 80 0 80
2
3
24 24 4
22 26 22 26
5
20 VOLT 28 20 VOLT 28 6
7
30 30
8
16 32 16 32 JET ALARMS DN
HELM UNIT
STOP START STOP START
PORT STBD
24 psi 24 psi
26
(STEERING WHEEL
22 22 26
200 20
400 200 400
VOLT 20
20 28 bar 20 VOLT 28 bar
10 30 10 30
18 30
0 40
18 30
0 40
TABS
16 32 0 600 16 32 0 600
PORT STBD
NOT SHOWN) IGN IGN
WATERJET OVERPRESSURE
1/2
BILGE PUMP
E F
A
M
ALARM (2 PLACES)
U
FUEL LEVEL A
RULE T
N
O OFF
24VDC
BILGE PUMP
A
M
U
A
CONTROL PANEL
RULE T
N
O OFF
TRIM TAB CONTROL

PANEL
REVERSING BUCKET
CONTROL LEVERS
THROTTLE CONTROL
LEVERS
BILGE PUMP
CONTROL PANEL
(2 PLACES)
Figure 3-6. Control Console Instruments and Controls
3-6
3-4 MARINE GEAR. 3-6 WATERJET DRIVES.
Each marine gear transmits the engine output to the The two transom-mounted, single-stage, axial-flow
waterjet driveshaft via an AquaDrive shaft. The ma- waterjet drives draw in seawater through intakes in
rine gear has forward, neutral, and reverse operations the bottom of the boat at the transom and discharge it
which are selected by means of a hydraulic control in high velocity streams to provide propulsive thrust. A
valve. When the forward or reverse position is selected, waterjet drive is either engaged and pumping water or
the control valve directs high pressure oil through in- disengaged. It does not have forward and reverse thrust
ternal passages in the gear housing to pistons which in the same manner as a conventional propeller. The
engage the forward and reverse clutch packs. The reaction to the movement of the high velocity water
control valve allows only one clutch pack to be en- stream is the propulsive force that causes the boat to
gaged at a time. The control valve is actuated via a move.
push-pull type cable by movement of the control head
lever on the console. Oil is pumped through the system 3-6.1 COMPONENTS. The transom-mounted
by a gear-type pump. The oil is taken from the sump waterjet drive unit consists of the intake ducting, the
through a strainer by the pump and discharged through pump unit, a discharge nozzle, a steering nozzle, and a
the heat exchanger to the control valve. Oil not used reversing bucket together with hydraulic equipment to
for hydraulic functions is returned to the sump for lu- operate the steering nozzle and the reversing bucket.
brication use. The marine gear utilizes SAE 40W oil. The thrust bearing assembly mounted in the drive unit
Draining the marine gear oil for renewal is accom- transfers all of the drive's thrust to the transom and
plished with the FLOCS pump which is further de- hull structure and not to the engine or marine gear.
scribed in section VII. Corrosion protection for the exterior components of
the waterjet drive units is provided by zinc anodes
3-5 AQUADRIVES. mounted on the reversing buckets, the steering nozzles,
and the main bodies of the drive units.
The Aquadrive units are installed between the marine
gear output flanges and the waterjet drive input shaft 3-6.2 OPERATION. Seawater is drawn in through
flanges. The AquaDrives (figure 3-7) consists of two the intake duct in the bottom of the hull at the transom.
constant-velocity joints connected by a variable length The intakes are protected from foreign object intrusion
drive shaft. The units correct any misalignment be- by CRES intake grates. The intake grates are remov-
tween the engine and marine gear and the waterjet able for cleaning when the boat is not waterborne. The
drive shaft. They also allow the engines to be sup- pump units are driven by the engines through the ma-
ported on softer engine mounts and result in less noise rine gears and use impellers to accelerate water through
and vibration than a rigid drive system. the units. The CRES impellers are mounted on central
shafts which are coupled to the marine gears through
the AquaDrives. The aft ends of the pump shafts are
supported by water-lubricated, cutlass-type rubber
bearings. The forward ends of the shafts transmit thrust
from the pumps to journal bearings at the forward sides
of the drive units in the engine compartment.
Single-piece discharge nozzles at the aft ends of the

units reduce the diameter of the streams and further
accelerates them to produce increased thrust. Steer-
Figure 3-7. AquaDrive Coupling ing nozzles are mounted at the aft ends of the discharge
nozzles. The nozzles swivel from side to side and de-
3-7
flect the water streams which produce the side thrust are deflected downward, the water flow creates up-
necessary to steer the boat. Reversing buckets are ward pressure on the tabs, lifting the stern and reduc-
mounted aft of the steering nozzles which allow the ing hull resistance through the water. When properly
operator to reverse some of the water streams in or- adjusted, the trim tabs increase speed, reduce fuel con-
der to stop or reverse the boat. sumption, compensate for uneven loads, reduce pound-
ing, eliminate porposing, reduce wake size, improve han-
In normal underway operation, the reversing buckets dling, and improve forward visibility. Because trim tabs
are raised above the water streams and have no ef- are mounted on both sides of the vessel's stern and
fect. When reduced forward thrust is desired, the re- can be operated independently, the boat's side-to-side
versing buckets can be lowered into the water streams. trim may be controlled by deflecting one tab more than
This forces a portion of the water streams through the other.
curved channels in the reversing buckets until it exits
in a forward and slightly downward direction. When 3-7.1 TRIM TAB ACTUATORS. A trim tab actua-
roughly half of the streams are deflected forward be- tor is mounted on each trim tab. The actuators are
low the boat, a balance point is reached that results in hydraulic cylinders which are operated by the hydrau-
no forward or aft movement of the boat. This is the lic power units in the engine compartment. The hy-
neutral bucket position. When the reversing buckets draulic hoses for the cylinders penetrate the transom
are lowered to the full down position, approximately 60 through the assembly's mounting plate. The hoses have
percent of the thrust is reversed and the boat moves a stainless steel spiral wrap to protect them from dam-
astern. age. The outboard end of each hydraulic cylinder rod
has a push-pull cable fitting attached. The cables en-
3-6.3 CONTROLS: The waterjet steering nozzles are ter the boat through transom fittings and terminate un-
controlled by a hydraulically actuated steering system der the dashboard at the coxswain's station, where they
further described in section IX. The reversing buckets transmit movement of the trim tabs to an indicator panel.
are controlled by hydraulic cylinders mounted on the
sides of the units and are actuated by control levers on 3-7.2 TRIM TAB CONTROLS. The trim tab con-
the console. The dual-lever reversing bucket controls trol panel (figure 3-8) is mounted on the console on the
actuate hydraulic control valves mounted on the drive starboard side of the helm. The panel incorporates two
units by means of push-pull cables. The system is Full switches which electrically actuate the hydraulic power
Follow-Up (FFU) and the buckets move in direct pro- units to move the tabs up or down. An indicator panel
portion to the position of the levers. The boat does not (figure 3-9) on the starboard side of the control con-
have reversing bucket position indicators. When the sole shows the position of each trim tab.
console-mounted control levers are in the vertical po-
sition, the reversing buckets are in an approximate neu-
tral bucket position. When the levers are moved fully TABS
aft the buckets are in the DOWN position and when PORT STBD
moved fully forward the buckets are in the UP position
3-7 BOAT TRIM TABS.
The boat's trim tabs consist of two independently ad-

justable hinged 1/2-inch thick aluminum plates mounted
at the transom of the boat on the outboard sides. Each
Figure 3-8. Trim Tab Control Panel
tab is operated by a hydraulic power unit mounted on
the transom in the engine compartment. The trim tabs
move up and down as commanded by the control panel
switches mounted on the console. The trim tabs assist
the boat to get on a plane faster and allow the boat to
continue planing at intermediate speeds. When the tabs
3-8
TABS
UP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DN
Figure 3-9. Trim Tab Position Indicator Panel
3-9
Section III.
FUEL SYSTEM
3-8 GENERAL. c. A 1/2-inch fuel return hose is connected to a fit-

ting on the tank top, aft and inboard of the fuel fill fit-
The boat's fuel storage system consists of a fuel oil ting.
tank, a stripping pump with a cutout valve and dis-
charge hose, and a tank level sounding rod. The boat's d. A 1 1/2-inch sounding hose is connected to a fit-
fuel supply system consists of a fuel tank, cutout valves, ting in the center of the tank top. The hose is con-
fuel supply lines, fuel filter/water separators, engine- nected to the sounding access plate installed on the aft
mounted secondary fuel filters, fuel lift pumps, High- deck, immediately aft of the cabin door.
Pressure Common Rail (HPCR) fuel injection pumps,
fuel supply manifolds, and electronically-controlled fuel e. A fuel tank level sender (Livorsi, model GIFL) is
injectors. installed in the center of the tank top, aft of the sound-
ing hose connection.
The fuel return systems consists of low pressure fuel
return manifolds, fuel oil coolers, and return lines to the f. There is a 3/4-inch fuel supply connection and ball
tank. Table 3-2 provides the fuel system characteris- valve mounted in the center of the aft face of the fuel
tics. Figure 3-10 provides and overall system diagram. tank at the bottom.
3-9 FUEL TANK. g. There is a 3/4-inch fuel stripping connection and

ball valve mounted in the aft face of the fuel tank at
A 200-gallon (757-liter) rectangular diesel fuel tank is the bottom, to starboard of the fuel supply connection
mounted at the forward bulkhead in the engine com- and valve.
partment. The tank is secured in place by six welded
tiedown tabs at the bottom sides which are bolted to h. All hose connections on the fuel tank fittings are
the boat's longitudinal frames with neoprene gaskets secured with double CRES hose clamps.
installed between the tiedown tabs and the frames. The
tank is fabricated from 1/4-inch welded aluminum plate. i. There is a removable inspection plate on the aft
There are two slosh baffles installed in the tank. The side of the tank to permit inspection and cleaning. The
tank can be removed from the engine compartment plate is secured in place with hex head machine bolts.
through the soft patch in the aft deck. The fuel tank
has the following fittings and connections: 3-10 FUEL STRIPPING PUMP.
a. A 2-inch fuel fill hose is connected to a fitting on The hand-operated fuel stripping pump (figure 3-11) is
the port side of the tank top. The fill fitting enters the used to remove water and contaminants from the fuel
tank top at an oblique angle from the port side. The fill tank prior to engine operation and before refueling. The
hose is connected to the fuel fill/vent fitting on the port pump is mounted on a bracket welded to the fuel tank
outboard walkway. inspection plate. The pump suction line connects to a
3/8-inch threaded tank fitting and a 3/8-inch cutout ball
b. A 5/8-inch vent hose is connected to a fitting on valve mounted at the bottom of the aft side of the tank.
the tank top, inboard of the fuel fill fitting. The vent The pump's 3/8-inch discharge hose terminates in a
hose is connected to the fuel fill/vent fitting on the port ball valve and a hose barb. The discharge hose is per-
outboard walkway. manently connected to the pump and is stowed on the
starboard side of the pump mounting bracket. Fuel is
discharged from the pump into a suitably sized con-
tainer.
3-10
FUEL FILL
VENT
DECK
FUEL SOUNDING
TUBE
FUEL RETURN
FROM ENGINE
BALL
FUEL SUPPLY VALVE
HOSE
FUEL TANK
BALL
FUEL VALVE
HOSE
HOSE
BARB
BALL
VALVE
FUEL MANUAL
HOSE STRIPPING
PUMP
FUEL SUPPLY
TO ENGINE
FUEL FILTER/WATER
SEPARATOR (2 PLACES)
Figure 3-10. Fuel System Diagram
3-11
Table 3-2. Fuel System Characteristics
Item Data
Diesel Fuel Marine (DFM),F-76

Fuel Tank
Quantity ............................................................................................ 1 tank
Capacity of Tank .............................................................................. 200 gallons (757.1 liters)
Material ............................................................................................ Aluminum
Fuel Filter/Water Separator

Manufacturer .................................................................................... Parker Hannifin Corp; RACOR
Model ................................................................................................ 900MA-10
Filter Element (10-micron, with seals) Part Number ........................ 2040 TM-OR
Fuel Tank Stripping Pump

Manufacturer .................................................................................... TAT Engineering Corp.
Model ................................................................................................ 410-900-3/8
Fuel Filter, Engine-Mounted

Manufacturer .................................................................................... Fleetguard
Part Number (Fleetguard) ................................................................ FF5488
Part Number (Cummins) .................................................................. 3959612
Type ................................................................................................ Spin-On Canister
Filter Rating ...................................................................................... 2 micron
ROTARY
HANDLE 3-11 FUEL FILTER AND WATER REMOVAL.
PUMP
BODY The diesel engines cannot tolerate dirt or water in the
IN OUT
fuel systems due to the extremely small tolerances in
the fuel injection nozzles. Typically the internal parts
of the nozzle are matched to a diametrical clearance
BALL
FROM FUEL
TANK VALVE of 60 millionths of an inch to prevent leakage during
the injection cycle.
HOSE
BARB
Figure 3-11. Fuel Stripping Pump
3-12
3-12 FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR. and fire-resistant hoses. The fuel supply system dia-
gram is provided by figure 3-13.
There are two fuel filter/water separators (Racor, model
900MA) (figure 3-12) bracket-mounted to hull struc- 3-13.1 FUEL TRANSFER PUMP. The transfer pump
tural members on the inboard forward sides of the receives the gravity flow fuel from the fuel tank through
engines. The separators remove water and solid con- the fuel filters. The pump, located on the port side of
taminants from the fuel prior to fuel flow to the engine- the engine, behind the ECM, increases the fuel supply
mounted fuel filters. The fuel filter/water separators pressure and aids in venting any air in the fuel supply
are equipped with ball valves on fuel supply lines to the piping. Air in the supply piping can cause the engine to
engines. stop or run rough. Fuel flow from the transfer pump is
approximately 50 gallon/hour (189 liter/hour). The low-
Each separator includes a 10-micron replaceable filter pressure fuel is then routed from the transfer pump at
element, a see-through body and metal collection bowl. 11 psi (76 kPa) to the high pressure fuel injection pump.
The separators are fitted with a drain plug to facilitate
removal of small amounts of water and sediment. A 3-13.2 FUEL INJECTION PUMP. The gear-driven
water-in-fuel sensor is installed in the collection bowls, fuel injection pump is electronically-controlled to opti-
which are connected to the SmartCraft display unit mize fuel pressure and provides fuel at high pressure
and warning indicator. 20,885 psi (143,997 kPa) to the HPCR.
The fuel filter/water separators operate in three stages: The maximum allowable fuel temperature to the pump
is 140°F (60°C). The highly pressurized fuel in the rail
a. Separation. Fuel enters the inlet assembly moving flows through the high-pressure lines from the rail to
through the centrifuge where solids and water drop- the six individual, electronically-controlled injectors.
lets, which are heavier than fuel, spin off and fall to the The electronic control module precisely controls the
bottom of the collection bowl. fuel injection permitting fuel to be introduced more than
once in each power stroke. With very high pressure to
b. Coalescing. Small water droplets bead-up on the the injector tip, even at low speeds, the higher pressure
surface of the conical baffle and the 10-micron car- atomizes the fuel as it enters the combustion cylinders,
tridge element. When heavy enough, they fall to the creating a fine fuel mist that burns more completely.
bottom of the collection bowl. These micro bursts spread out the combustion process
over a very short time and result in a more complete
c. Filtration. A proprietary Aquabloc II disposable, burn at a higher combustion ratio of 16.7:1.
10-micron cartridge element repels water and removes
contaminants from the fuel. The Aquabloc II cartridge 3-14 FUEL RETURN SYSTEM.
is waterproof and is effective longer than a water-ab-
sorbing cartridge. The fuel oil supply system provides approximately 60%
more fuel than is used by the engine at rated rpm in
3-12.1 ENGINE FUEL FILTER. The spin-on, auto- order to ensure that a constant flow of air-free fuel is
motive-type, 2 micron, canister fuel filters remove any maintained in the fuel injection pump. Approximately
remaining sediment from the fuel supply to the engines. 30 gallon/hour (113 liter/hour) of fuel is returned from
The filters are bracket-mounted to the front of the en- the engine to the fuel oil tank through fire-resistant
gine. hoses, piping, and CRES fittings.
3-13 ENGINE FUEL SUPPLY. 3-14.1 FUEL BLOCK CONNECTION. The fuel
block connection receives excess fuel oil from the fuel
Fuel is supplied to the engine through a 3/8-inch fuel injection pump and from the discharge of the fuel relief
tank CRES cutout ball valve and CRES fittings, piping, valve on the fuel injection pump.
3-13
T-HANDLE O-RING COVER O-RING
▼
a PRIMARY STAGE SEPARATION
▼
b
▼
SECONDARY STAGE COALESCING
▼
c FINAL STAGE FILTRATION
c c
▼ ▼
REPLACEABLE
FILTER ELEMENT
▼ ▼
▼
▼
▼ ▼
▼ ▼
OUT IN
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
SEDIMENT BOWL b
O-RING
INTERNAL CHECK BALL TO
▼
b PREVENT BLEED-BACK
▼
TURBINE CENTRIFUGE
PROVIDES CENTRIFUGAL WATER
▼
a AND DIRT REMOVAL

METAL FIRE
▼
▼ ▼
▼
DEFLECTOR IMPACT-RESISTANT
BOWL
▼
WATER BOWL
SENSOR DRAIN PLUG
▼
PROBE ASSEMBLY
Figure 3-12. Fuel Filter/Water Separator
3-14
200-GALLON (757 LITER) FUEL TANK
FROM FUEL TANK RETURN TO FUEL TANK
FUEL FILTER/ FUEL SUPPLY STRIPPING PUMP CUTOUT

WATER SEPARATOR CUTOUT VALVE VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED)
(NORMALLY OPEN)
FUEL STRIPPING PUMP FUEL OIL
COOLER
STRIPPING PUMP DISCHARGE VALVE
SUPPLY (NORMALLY CLOSED)
MANIFOLD
ENGINE
ECM
OPERATING SEAWATER
SENSORS COOLING
SYSTEM
12VDC LIFT PUMP
SPIN-ON FUEL FILTER ECM

COOLER
PLATE TO FUEL
FUEL INJECTOR -
PRESSURE (TYPICAL) (6PL)
SENSOR
ELECTRONIC FUEL
CONTROL ACTUATOR FUEL COMMON FUEL RAIL (HPCR)
PRESSURE
RELIEF
VALVE
FUEL RETURN LINE

FROM CYLINDER HEAD
HIGH-PRESSURE
FUEL PUMP FUEL RETURN
MANIFOLD
Figure 3-13. Engine Fuel Supply Diagram

3-15
3-14.2 FUEL OIL COOLER. The temperature of the 3-15.3 LOW TEMPERATURE OPERATION. Low
returning fuel from the engine is approximately 150°F temperature engine operation is affected by the grade
(66°C). To prevent an increase in temperature of the of diesel fuel used since diesel fuels contain paraffin
fuel oil in the tank, the return fuel is routed through a waxes that become solid at ambient wintertime tem-
seawater-cooled fuel oil cooler located on the port side peratures. When this happens, the wax may plug the
of each engine, forward of the aftercooler. Cooling of fuel filter or may completely gel the fuel, making it
the fuel oil is required to prevent an unacceptable rise impossible for the fuel system to deliver fuel to the
in the temperature of the fuel in the supply tank and a engine. The return fuel oil system aids in reducing the
subsequent loss of engine efficiency. High fuel tank fuel waxing by heating the fuel in the tank, but only
temperature may also lead to excessive fuel vaporiza- after the engine has started.
tion, which would result in a fire hazard.
a. The most practical way to lower the cloud point
3-15 RECOMMENDED FUEL. of the fuel, the temperature at which wax just begins
to precipitate and the fuel becomes cloudy, is to add a
3-15.1 FUEL LUBRICITY AND VISCOSITY. The lower temperature additive. Refer to NSTM S9086-
diesel fuel oil injection equipment (injection pump, in- HB-STM-010/CH-233 and the applicable PMS for the
jectors, and transfer pump) has a reliance on the diesel approved low temperature operability polymer addi-
fuel as a lubricant since the fuel lubricates the moving tive for the grade of fuel being used.
parts as it flows through this equipment rather than by
engine lube oil. The lubricity of the fuel is its ability to b. Dilution of the fuel with a lower wax content fuel
reduce the friction between surfaces that are under is an alternative method to reduce the fuel cloud point.
load. This ability reduces the wear or scarring that However, lighter fuels can reduce fuel economy of the
can be caused by two metal parts covered with the engine.
fuel as they come in contact with each other. Low
lubricity fuel may cause high wear. The viscosity of 3-15.4 RECOMMENDED DIESEL FUEL.
the fuel provides an indication of the fuel’s lubrication
properties. The QSB5.9M engine requires fuel with a a. fuel for the QSB5.9M
minimum viscosity of 1.3 centistokes at 104°F (40°C). engine is F-76, (also referred to as NFD or
A single tank full of fuel with extremely low lubricity DFM), meets the specification
can cause the fuel pump to fail catastrophically.
b. When F-76 or NFD fuel is not available, or oper-
Generally, diesel fuels that are obtained sources ating temperatures are below 30°F (1°C), aviation tur-
meet the specifications of EN 590 or ASTM D975 bine fuel JP-5 meeting specification MIL-DTL-5624
and are treated with the required additives to ( F-44) may be used as a substitute fuel. A lu-bricity
provide the required lubricity. additive or a fuel lubricity filter must be used with
JP-5. Refer to table 3-3 for bottled fuel lubricity
3-15.2 FUEL CETANE NUMBER. The fuel’s igni- additive information.
tion performance is measured by the fuel cetane num-
ber. Fuel with a high cetane number starts to burn c. The recommended diesel fuel should have a sul-
shortly after it is injected into the cylinder and has a fur content of less than .05% (500 ppm). The use of
short ignition delay period. As the compression tem- either F-76 or number 2-D diesel fuel will re-sult in
perature is reduced by variables like lower compres- optimum engine performance. At ambient tem-
sion pressure, lower ambient temperature, and lower peratures below 32°F (0°C), acceptable performance
coolant temperature the engine requires an increas- can be obtained by using a winter blend of number
ingly higher cetane number to start easily. The DL1 diesel fuel and number DL2 diesel fuel. Table
QSB5.9M engine requires a minimum cetane rating of 3-4 provides a list of acceptable substitute fuels and
40 at ambient temperatures above 32°F (0°C). A ce- pertinent fuel specification requirements.
tane rating of at least 45 is recommended at ambient
temperatures below 32°F (0°C).
3-16
Acceptable fuels include the 15 ppm ultra-low sulfur tion that the fuel was made to at the refinery. It may
diesel fuels, provided the lubricity tests meet the crite- be necessary to have the supplier provide a fuel prop-
ria specified in table 3-4. Typically a local fuel supplier erty/analysis report in order to determine if the fuel is
will not be able to quote the specific ASTM specifica- suitable for use.
Table 3-3. Fuel Lubricity Additive
Cummins Part No. Additive Quantity Gallons of Fuel

CC2598 1 Pint 62.5
CC2597 1 Quart 125
CC2589 1 Gallon 500
Note: An untreated, freshly filled fuel tank to 95% capacity (190 gallons) uses 3 pints of the Cummins, Fleetguard’s
Fleet-tech Asphaltene conditioner.
Table 3-4. Low Ambient Operations Acceptable Engine Fuel
Fuel Grade Code and Description Acceptable Fuel Criteria
DF2 (Diesel, Regular Grade 2-D) These fuels may be used when DFM F-76)
DL2 (Diesel, Low-sulfur, Regular Grade 2-D) fuel is not available or when operating
DLS (Diesel, Low-sulfur, Regular Grade 2-D) during low ambient temperatures. These
DLW (Diesel, Low-sulfur, Regular Grade 2-D) fuels meet the specifications of ASTM
LSS (Diesel, Low-sulfur, Regular Grade 2-D) D975. Meeting the required lubricity
LSW (Diesel, Low-sulfur, Regular Grade 2-D properties may require the addition of
DS2 (Diesel, Ultra Low-sulfur, Regular Grade 2-D (S15)) lubricity additives.
JP-5 (NATO F-44) MIL-DTL-5624
DLA (Diesel, Low-sulfur, Arctic) These fuels are acceptable provided they meet
DS1 (Diesel, Ultra Low-sulfur, Regular Grade 1-D (S15)) the following lubricity test minimum criteria:
DF1 (Diesel, Winter) 1. The balloon Cylinder Lubricity Evaluator
DFW (Naval Distillate, Winter) (BOCLE) number is 3,100 or greater (ASTM
DL1 (Diesel, Low-sulfur, Winter) D6078).
MGO (Marine Gas Oil) 2. The High Frequency Reciprocating Rig
(HFRR) wear scar diameter is 450 micro-
meters or less (ASTM D 6079).
3-17
Section IV.
ENGINE COOLANT AND PREHEATER SYSTEMS
3-16 GENERAL. Excessive concentration of antifreeze lowers the cool-

ing efficiency of the coolant and the engine may be-
Engine coolant is used to cool the engine block, engine come overheated. Inadequate concentration of the an-
lube oil system, the engine exhaust manifold, and the tifreeze can result in major corrosive or freeze dam-
turbocharger casing. An engine coolant preheater is age to the engine.
installed in the system for cold weather starting.
b. The engine coolant system, includes the coolant
3-16.1 ENGINE COOLANT SYSTEM. The heat exchanger (which is seawater cooled), freshwa-
Cummins QSB5.9M coolant system (figure 3-14) has ter pump, thermostat, exhaust manifold, expansion tank,
an approximate 5.7 gallon (21.6-liter) capacity includ- overflow bottle, temperature sensors, vent lines, and
ing the integral expansion tank. Table 3-5 provides the piping.
performance data for the coolant system.
c. The coolant system maintains the correct engine
a. The engine coolant consists of a mixture of ap- operational temperature by providing a means to transfer
proximately 50% fresh water with the remainder anti- heat from the engine block, cylinder head, exhaust
freeze (ethylene glycol with corrosion inhibitors). Re- manifold, lube oil cooler and turbocharger turbine cas-
fer to NSTM and PMS for the appropriate antifreeze ing, to the coolant heat exchanger. Heat is removed
type and mixture ratio of antifreeze to fresh water for from the coolant in the heat exchanger by the seawa-
the expected operational ambient temperature range. ter cooling system.
RECOVERY COOLANT
BOTTLE EXPANSION
TANK
LUBE OIL
COOLER ENGINE-DRIVEN
ENGINE COOLANT FRESHWATER
CONNECTIONS T PUMP
(TYPICAL)
QSB5.9M
TURBOCHARGER ENGINE
ENGINE-DRIVEN
AFTERCOOLER SEAWATER
TRANSOM PUMP
FRESHWATER FUEL
HOSE OIL COOLER
CONNECTOR
OVERBOARD
DISCHARGE
FLAPPER EXHAUST
ELBOW
SEA COCK
SEAWATER
STRAINER
HULL
SEAWATER
SCOOP
COOLANT STRAINER
EXHAUST
Figure 3-14. Engine Cooling Systems Flow Diagram
3-18
Table 3-5. Coolant System Performance Data
Item Data
Engine Only Capacity ................................................................................. 2.6 gal (10 L)

Engine with Heat Exchanger and Expansion Tank .................................... 5.7 gal (21.6 L)
Coolant Makeup Capacity, Minimum ......................................................... 0.4 gal (1.5 L)
Pressure Drop (External System Circuit), Maximum ................................. 5 psi (34 kPa)
Block System Pressure, Maximum ............................................................ 50 psi (345 kPa)
Expansion Space, Minimum ........................................................................ 0.33 gal (1.25 L)
Pressure Cap Recommendation ................................................................. 15 psi (103 kPa)
Flow to Engine Heat Exchanger ................................................................. 67 gal/min (254 L/min)
Thermostat
Starts to Open ......................................................................................... 165°F (74°C)
Full Open ................................................................................................. 185°F (85°C)
Heat Rejection to Engine Coolant .............................................................. 14,700 btu/hr (258 kW)
d. The freshwater coolant circulating pump is belt- system. To prevent the engine from overheating and
driven by the main drive belt crankshaft pulley at the subsequent component damage, the expansion tank
front of the engine. The pump is internal to the engine, must always be full of coolant.
mounted on the starboard side, below the alternator.
3-16.2 COOLANT SYSTEM FLOW. The coolant
e. The coolant expansion tank is located on the star- flow (figure 3-14) circulates through the engine and
board top of the engine. Steam and entrained air in the associated components as follows:
coolant system vent to the expansion tank. The ex-
pansion tank also functions as a reservoir for the cool- a. Coolant output from the freshwater pump is routed
ant. A coolant pressure filler cap, located on the top of into the oil cooler cavity of the cylinder block, which
the expansion tank, prevents the coolant from boiling. provides cooling to the lube oil heat exchanger cooling
plates.
f. The expansion tank is connected to a transparent
recovery bottle located forward of the engine. The b. The coolant circulates around each cylinder and
coolant level in the recovery bottle will rise and fall crosses the cylinder block to the fuel injection pump
depending upon the coolant system temperature and side of the engine, where some of the flow is routed to
pressure. the turbocharger aftercooler.
The recovery bottle is connected to the expansion tank c. The remainder of the flow is routed to the exhaust
filler pressure cap. This arrangement prevents loss of manifold cooling ports that encase the exhaust cham-
coolant from the system by condensing steam and serv- ber.
ing as a reservoir for coolant vented from the expan-
sion tank filler cap. When the engine is at rated load d. As the coolant flows through the cylinder head,
the coolant temperature and pressure are at maximum engine block and exhaust manifold, toward the ther-
and the excess coolant expands and flows to the re- mostat cavity, it provides cooling for the fuel injection
covery bottle. When the engine load is reduced and nozzle.
the coolant temperature falls, the pressure in the ex-
pansion tank is lowered. This reduces pressure which e. When the engine is below operating temperature,
activates the retraction valve in the filler cap causing the thermostat is closed. Coolant flow bypasses the
the cooler water in the recovery bottle to return to the heat exchanger. Any air that is trapped in the system
expansion tank. The recovery bottle provides a con- goes to the water pump inlet via drilled passages in the
venient means to monitor the amount of coolant in the block and head and then vents to the expansion tank.
3-19
Section V.
SEAWATER COOLING SYSTEM
3-17 GENERAL.
The seawater cooling system furnishes seawater,

which is used to cool fuel oil passing through the fuel
oil heat exchangers and coolant passing through the
freshwater heat exchangers. Additionally, exhaust gas-
ses are silenced and cooled by the seawater overboard
discharge.
3-17.1 SEAWATER SYSTEM. The seawater sys-

tem for each engine consists of a hull intake strainer, a
sea cock with thru-hull connection, a seawater strainer,
an engine-mounted seawater pump, an engine heat ex-
changer, a freshwater flushing connection, and an over-
board discharge.
a. Heat Exchangers. All heat exchangers in the sea-

water system are tube and shell type with seawater
flowing through the tubes. The fluid being cooled (i.e.
fuel oil, coolant) is flowing around the tubes at a higher
pressure than the seawater. If a tube leak should oc-
Figure 3-15. Seawater Strainer
cur, the fluid being cooled would leak into the seawater
system. This prevents seawater from leaking into other
3-17.2 SEAWATER SYSTEM FLOW. A seawater
systems, which could result in contamination and cor-
system flow diagram is provided by figure 3-14. The
rosion.
suction portion of the seawater system is detailed in
figure 3-16. When an engine is started, the belt-driven
b. Valves. There are two ball valves installed in each
seawater pump draws seawater through the hull in-
seawater system. A 2-inch ball valve (sea cock) is
take scoop strainer (on the exterior bottom of the hull),
installed to the thru-hull fitting after the hull-mounted
through the sea cock and the seawater strainer to the
seawater intake. A 3/4-inch ball valve with a hose
seawater pump. The pump provides seawater to the
connection is located on the inlet side of the seawater
fuel oil cooler, the turbocharger combustion air
strainer and is used to supply fresh water to the sea-
aftercooler and the engine heat exchanger. A saltwa-
water system. Fresh water is used to flush the seawa-
ter discharge nozzle is installed in the exhaust piping
ter system in preparation for a layup condition or to
prior to entry into the aluminum overboard 5-inch dis-
provide cooling water for operation of the engine when
charge tube. The combined seawater and exhaust
the boat is out of the water.
gases pass through the exhaust tube and are then dis-
charged overboard through the flapper on the transom.
c. Strainer. The seawater strainers (figure 3-15) have
removable top covers sealed by neoprene gaskets. The
A freshwater flush connection and valve are installed
body of each strainer consists of a high-impact plastic
on the inlet side of each seawater strainer. The valve
cylinder held in place between the top and bottom bronze
connection is threaded to receive a standard garden
castings by four brass rods. Upper and lower castings
hose. The freshwater flush connection provides a
with neoprene gaskets seal the plastic cylinder. The
means to supply cooling water to the engine whenever
strainer baskets are made of nonmagnetic, type 316
operation is required while the boat is out of the water.
stainless steel screen with a screen hole size diameter
The connection also serves to flush seawater from the
of 0.077 inches.
3-20
system. An absence of water will degrade the engine
and turbocharger components and cause the impeller
in the engine seawater pump to seize up.
FRESHWATER
FLUSH CONNECTION
PIPE
TO ENGINE HOOK-UP
HOSE
SEAWATER
STRAINER
BALL
VALVE
PETCOCK
PIPE
SEA CHEST
STRAINER
PLATE
Figure 3-16. Seawater Suction System
3-21
Section VI.
ENGINE COMBUSTION AIR AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
3-18 GENERAL. b. The air exits the compressor into the aftercooler
where the heat from compression is removed. Cooler
The engines are four-cycle marine diesels. For every air is denser and contains more air molecules than
two revolutions of the crankshaft, or two complete up- warmer air. The result is a denser charge of air result-
and-down movements of a piston, a complete combus- ing in more efficient combustion, which creates reduced
tion cycle takes place. The first (downward) stroke of emissions and more usable power.
the piston draws clean combustion air into the cylin-
der; the second (upward) stroke of the piston com- c. The cooled combustion air is then routed to the
presses the air. Fuel is injected into the air which has engine air intake manifold for delivery to the cylinders
been heated by compression to over 900°F (482°C). via the cylinder head intake valves.
The resulting combustion powers the third (downward)
stroke of the piston and the fourth (upward) stroke of 3-19.2 AIR INTAKE PREHEATER. An air intake
the piston drives the exhaust gases from the cylinder. preheater for engine starting in cold weather is not re-
quired. The electronic fuel injection system automati-
3-19 ENGINE COMBUSTION AIR INTAKE cally compensates for low ambient temperatures.
SYSTEM.
3-20 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM.
The diesel engine air intake system uses a turbocharger
to provide a source of pressurized combustion air di- a. On the cylinder's exhaust stroke, the combustion
rectly to the engine's intake system. This permits more gases are forced through the exhaust valves in the cyl-
fuel to be burned in each combustion cycle, thus in- inder head and expand as they enter the exhaust mani-
creasing the power output of the engine. The turbo- fold.
charger is mounted at the rear of the engine on the
starboard side and consists of a turbine section and a b. The hot gases are routed to the turbocharger
compressor section which contain an exhaust turbine through the exhaust manifold which incorporates cool-
wheel and a compressor wheel connected by a com- ant passages containing circulating engine coolant. The
mon shaft. Expelled exhaust gases from combustion water jacket cools the gases and protects engine com-
drive the turbine wheel and compressor wheel. The ponents and engine compartment equipment from ex-
turbine housing is water jacketed and is cooled by cir- cessive heat.
culating engine coolant. The turbocharger journal bear-
ings are lubricated by pressurized engine lubricant and c. The high velocity gas enters the turbocharger
return to the engine lube oil sump via a drain line. The through a nozzle ring where it is directed onto the tur-
aftercooler is a heat exchanger that removes heat from bine blades which drive the turbine wheel and the com-
the pressurized air using seawater rather than engine pressor wheel at high speeds.
coolant, since it has a lower temperature and is ca-
pable of removing more heat from the air. d. The exhaust gas then enters the exhaust elbow
where it is mixed with seawater discharged from the
3-19.1 INTAKE SYSTEM OPERATION. exhaust manifold which cools and silences the exhaust.
The mixture is then discharged overboard via the
a. Combustion air is drawn into the turbocharger 5-inch exhaust tube through a transom flapper valve
through a reusable air cleaner element and silencer which prevents backflow.
assembly and enters the compressor where it is com-
pressed and accelerated to high velocity by the ex-
haust-driven turbine wheel.
3-22
Section VII.
FAST LUBE OIL CHANGE SYSTEM
3-21 GENERAL. 3-21.4 CONTROLS. There are two FLOCS system
switch panels installed in the engine compartment over-
The Fast Lube Oil Change System (FLOCS) (figure head at the forward ends of the engines. Both panels
3-17) consists of a permanently installed electrically- have an on-off switch for each FLOCS pump. Addi-
operated impeller pump, a suction manifold, isolation tionally, each FLOCS unit has a center-off directional
valves, and hose connections installed in a single en- switch mounted on the top of the housing.
closed unit for each engine/marine gear set. The sys-
tems provide for the safe and efficient removal of used
or contaminated lube oil from the engine oil pans and HOSE BARB
from the marine gear oil sumps and the discharge of
the waste oil into a suitable container. The FLOCS unit
for each engine/marine gear set is mounted between HOSE
24VDC MOTOR
the battery tray and the forward side of the engine.
IMPELLER
3-21.1 PUMP. Each FLOCS pump (Jabsco, model PUMP
17820-24) is a self-priming impeller pump driven by a
24Vdc motor. There is a double-throw, center-off
switch on the top of the unit which is protected by
guards against unintended operation. The pump is re-
versible and operates in the direction the switch handle
is moved.
3-21.2 VALVES. Each unit has two 1/2-inch ball

valves installed on the aft side beneath a removable
cover. The valves cannot be turned to the open posi- BALL VALVE
(4 PLACES)
tion unless the cover is removed in order to prevent
unintended operation. There is one valve for the con-
nection to the engine oil pan and one valve for the con-
nection to the marine gear lube oil sump.
3-21.3 DISCHARGE FITTINGS. Each unit has a ENGINE LUBE MARINE GEAR
OIL SUMP LUBE OIL SUMP
1/2-inch hose fitted to the pump discharge which has a
ball valve with a hose nipple at the end. The hose is Figure 3-17. Fast Lube Oil Change System (FLOCS)
secured by means of a clip mounted to the inboard side
of the respective battery box tray above the FLOCS
unit.
3-23
Section VIII.
BILGE PUMPING AND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
3-22 GENERAL. side. The hose then leads aft along the starboard en-
gine compartment bulkhead and through a 1 1/2-inch
To provide a means for removing water from the bilge, fitting in the transom immediately above the starboard
the boat is equipped with electric bilge pumps with float waterjet drive guard bracket and the engine compart-
switches and console mounted control panel switches, ment bilge discharge. Access to the pump is through
and a manual bilge pump. The pumps operate indepen- the centerline lift-out access hatch in the walking area
dently of one another. of the upper crew cabin.
3-22.1 ELECTRIC BILGE PUMP. There are two 3-22.2 BILGE PUMP CONTROLS. There are two
3,700-gallons per hour electric bilge pumps (figure 3-way switches (figure 3-19) on the console which con-
3-18) mounted in the bilges. The 24Vdc pumps are trol the electric bilge pumps. The switches allow the
submersible and are equipped with strainers. operator to select the desired mode of operation; MAN,
OFF, or AUTO. In the Manual (MAN) mode, the
switch must be held in the MAN position. The switch
is spring-loaded to OFF to protect the pump. In the
Automatic (AUTO) mode, the pump is energized when
bilge water rises above a preset level and activates the
float switch. When water drops below a preset level
the pump will shut down. A lamp is provided on the
switch panel to indicate that power is available to the
pump. The lamp does not indicate pump operation.
Power for the pumps come directly from the port bat-
tery bank through independent 50-amp circuit break-
ers mounted on the battery selector switch panel in the
engine compartment. To assure safety of the vessel,
power to the bilge pumps can only be secured from the
bilge pump 3-way control panel switches. Whenever
the boat is in the water, the bilge pump switches should
remain in the AUTO position.
Figure 3-18. Electric Bilge Pump
BILGE PUMP
The engine compartment bilge pump and float switch
is mounted on a plate in the bilge at the transom imme-
A
diately to port of centerline. The pump discharges U
M
A
through a 1 1/2-inch fitting in the transom immediately RULE T
N
O
above the starboard waterjet drive guard bracket and OFF
the crew cabin storage compartment bilge discharge.

Access to the pump is through the centerline engine Figure 3-19. Electric Bilge Pump Controls
compartment access hatch in the aft deck.
3-22.3 MANUAL BILGE PUMP. The boat is
The crew cabin storage compartment bilge pump is equipped with a diaphragm-type, portable bilge pump
mounted on a plate in the bilge on the starboard side of (Beckson, model 519CG) (figure 3-20) which can be
centerline at the aft compartment bulkhead. The pump used in an emergency to remove water from any of
discharges through a 1 1/2-inch hose which leads up- the boat's compartments. The pump is capable of trans-
wards and across the aft bulkhead to a bulkhead pen- ferring 22 gallons (liters) per minute at 66 strokes per
etration immediately below deck level on the starboard minute. The pump's suction and discharge is through
attached hoses.
3-24
1. The well deck hatch gutter has two 1 1/4-inch
drains located at the aft outboard sides. The drains
lead outboard through hoses which connect the drain
fittings to the overboard fittings in the hull sides through
check valves.
2. The two engine access hatch gutters each have

a 1 1/4-inch drain located at the aft outboard corner.
The port hatch gutter drain discharges through the port
side of the transom immediately above the waterjet
drive guard bracket. The starboard hatch gutter drain
discharges through the starboard side of the transom
above and outboard of the engine exhaust.
c. Natural Drainage. Various areas of the interior and

exterior of the boat are drained by gravity.
1. The well deck storage compartment is drained

by limber holes in the aft bulkhead adjacent to longitu-
dinal structural members. Access to the limber holes is
through the well deck storage compartment hatch and
Figure 3-20. Manual Bilge Pump through the 8-inch deck plate located on centerline
immediately aft of the pipe steps on the forward bulk-
3-22.4 DRAINAGE. The boat is designed with sev- head in the forward crew cabin.
eral different means of draining water to either of the
bilge pumps or overboard. 2. The well deck has two 4-inch X 4-inch (10.2-
cm X 10.2-cm) freeing ports installed at deck level in
a. Bulkhead Drainage Valves. Ball valves are in- the outboard sides of the aft bulkhead. The ports lead
stalled at the lower sides of three of the boat's water- aft and outboard through the hull sides slightly below
tight bulkheads. A one-inch ball valve which drains the deck level.
anchor locker is installed in the well deck storage com-
partment forward bulkhead. The valve is accessed 3. There is a drainage tube in the engine com-
through the well deck hatch. partment which runs fore and aft on the port side of
centerline through the watertight housing for the depth
There are two 1-inch ball valves installed in the bulk- sounder transducer. The tube allows the unobstructed
heads of the crew cabin storage compartment. The flow of bilge water aft through the housing to the bilge
forward valve drains the void area beneath the for- pump.
ward crew cabin and the well deck storage compart-
ment. The aft valve drains the crew cabin storage area. 4. There are four 1-inch (2.54-cm) drain holes in
The valves are accessed through the centerline lift-out the corners of the cabin top overhang which prevent
access hatch in the walking area of the upper crew standing water accumulation.
cabin.
5. All ready ammunition stowage bins have drain
b. Hatch Gutter Drains. The well deck hatch and holes at the bottom to facilitate drainage.
the engine access hatches are maintained watertight
by means of rubber gaskets fitted to the hatch covers.
3-25
Section IX.
STEERING SYSTEM
3-23 GENERAL. of two fire-resistant hoses. The hoses run aft under
the starboard gunwale to the waterjet discharge nozzle
The hydraulic steering system consists of a steering steering cylinder located on the after starboard side
wheel, helm unit, and hydraulic steering cylinder of the engine compartment. The helm requires
connected through mechanical linkages to the waterjet 2-3/4 turns to move the waterjet steering/discharge
discharge nozzle. Clockwise rotation of the steering nozzle from hard over in one direction to hard over
wheel moves the bow of the boat to starboard; coun- in the opposite direction.
terclockwise moves it to port. The system is a closed
loop hydraulic system with the helm unit acting as a 3-23.2 STEERING CYLINDER. The steering cylin-
pump to provide the hydraulic pressure to operate the der is a double rod-ended hydraulic cylinder operated
system. Refer to table 3-6 for steering system char- by hydraulic pressure from the helm unit. Hydraulic
acteristics and figure 3-21 for a system diagram. fluid ported to either end of the cylinder activates the
rod.
Steering is achieved by deflecting the waterjet stream
and directing the steering nozzle to port or starboard. 3-23.3 STEERING LINKAGE. The inboard steering
With increased throttle the steering effect increases; cylinder rod end is attached by a clevis to a lever arm
equally, with decreased throttle steering ability is re- mounted on the steering shaft. The steering shaft ex-
duced. If the engine is stopped or the marine gear is tends aft through a watertight fitting in the transom
placed into neutral, there is no waterjet flow and there- and parallel with the starboard side of the exterior
fore no steering ability. If the throttle is reduced during waterjet drive unit. A similar lever arm on the out-
a turn, the boat tends to continue in a straight line. To board end of the shaft is connected by a linkage rod to
negotiate turns, maintain the throttle, or if a tighter turn the steering nozzle tiller arm at the aft end of the drive
is required, increase the throttle. unit. Movement of the hydraulic cylinder rod causes
the shaft to rotate and transmits the movement through
3-23.1 HELM UNIT. The helm unit includes a the linkage to the nozzle tiller arm. This movement of
positive-displacement hydraulic pump that provides the tiller arm causes the steering nozzle to swivel and
hydraulic fluid to the steering cylinder. The steering deflect the water stream, which changes the direction
wheel is connected directly to the helm unit. The helm of thrust and results in a change in the boat's course.
unit is connected to the steering cylinder by means
Table 3-6. Steering System Characteristics
Item Data
Helm Unit
Manufacturer ......................................................................................... Teleflex Hydraulic
Model No. .............................................................................................. Seastar 2; 2.4 inch3 (P/N: HH5272)
Cylinder
Manufacturer ......................................................................................... Teleflex Hydraulic
Model No. .............................................................................................. BA125-3ATM (P/N: HC5303)
3-26
CONSOLE
FILL PORT
HELM PUMP
STEERING WHEEL
STEERING CYLINDER
BLEEDER VALVE
(2 PLACES)
CYLINDER ROD
CLEVIS TIE BAR
CLEVIS PIN
(2 PLACES) TILLER ARM
(P & S)
STEERING ROD
CONNECTION TO
WATERJET
Figure 3-21. Steering System Diagram
3-27
Section X.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
3-24 GENERAL. 3-24.2 AIR CONDITIONING. The engine-mounted

air conditioning compressor is fitted with an electro-
Cabin air conditioning and heating are provided by magnetic clutch which is engaged when the console
a fan coil unit located under the port side of the console pushbutton switch is actuated. The compressor circu-
at deck level. Air is circulated through ducting by a lates the refrigerant which has been heated by com-
24Vdc blower fan and discharged through two pression through the engine compartment condensing
console-mounted grilles which act as windshield unit where it is cooled by seawater. Seawater is sup-
defrosters and two grilles on the bottom outboard sides plied by the engine seawater pump located on the port
of the console. The belt-driven air conditioning side of the engine. The seawater passes through the
compressor (Sanden model U4862FLX7) is mounted condenser and is discharged overboard at the port side
on the port engine and the condensing unit is located of the transom. The refrigerant is then piped to the fan
on the port outboard side of the engine compartment. coil unit beneath the console. The blower in the fan
The heating system utilizes circulating engine coolant. coil unit forces cabin air through the radiator coil cooled
The engine must be operating in order for either system by the expanding refrigerant and discharges it through
to function. System capacity is 24,000 BTU (cooling) ductwork and adjustable grilles, into the cabin. Con-
and 30,000 BTU (heating). Air may be circulated densate from the coil is routed to a collection sump
through the cabin utilizing the blower without the heater (Rule, model 98) mounted on an aluminum plate in the
or air conditioner functions being engaged. An overall bilge at the forward end of the compartment below the
system diagram is provided in figure 3-22. HVAC unit. A 3/4-inch discharge hose from the sump
leads through a 3/4-inch check valve on the forward
3-24.1 CONTROL PANEL. The control panel for compartment bulkhead and from there runs aft along
the HVAC system is located on a panel on the port the port compartment bulkhead to a penetration in the
fore-and aft bulkhead adjacent to the steps leading to aft compartment bulkhead immediately below deck
the forward part of the crew cabin. There are three level. The discharge hose runs aft along the port en-
controls on the HVAC panel whose functions are as gine compartment bulkhead to the transom where it
follows: joins the air conditioning condenser seawater overboard
discharge.
a. Heater Control. The rotary knob on the left side
of the control panel regulates the temperature of the 3-24.3 HEATING. The heating system diverts circu-
air when the heater unit is operating. Turning the knob lating engine coolant from a port in the engine block on
clockwise increases the heat; turning the knob coun- the inboard side of the port engine through hoses to the
terclockwise until it stops turns the heat completely fan coil unit. The engine coolant is conducted back to
off. the engine cooling system through a return hose. The
blower in the fan coil unit forces cabin air through a
b. Blower Control Switch. The rotary selector switch separate radiator coil containing the hot engine coolant
on the right side of the panel is a 4-position blower and discharges the warmed air through the ductwork
switch which selects three blower speeds in addition and adjustable grilles into the cabin. Heating is con-
to the off position. The blower switch must be placed trolled by means of the heater control knob on the con-
in one of the three operating positions in order for the trol panel which operates a valve regulating the amount
air conditioner or heater to work. of hot engine coolant entering the system.
c. A/C Switch. The switch marked A/C engages the 3-24.4 VENTILATION. There are four vertical HVAC
electromagnetic clutch on the engine-driven air condi- ducts located on the outboard sides of the seating plat-
tioning compressor. forms forward of each seat. Adjustable air discharge
3-28
louvers are installed in the ducts 34-inches above the 3-24.5 HEATER/DEFROSTER. The boat is equipped
seating platform level. The grilles have adjustable vanes with a heater/defroster system (figure 3-23) which is
which permit directional air flow. The vanes may also controlled from a panel on the starboard bulkhead ad-
be completely closed to direct all of the circulating air joining the forward steps. The system utilizes circulat-
to the open grilles. Natural ventilation is provided by ing engine coolant from the starboard engine. The star-
opening the two sliding side windows, the aft cabin board engine must be operating in order for the system
door, and the forward cabin door. There are two oscil- to function properly. The control panel consists of a
lating 12Vdc fans mounted to the cabin overhead which rotary blower control switch which provides three
provide cabin air circulation. The heater/defroster unit blower speeds and an OFF position. The system di-
may also be used without heat to circulate cabin air. rects air onto the port and starboard windshields through
louvers mounted in the console tops.
HEATER
COIL
A/C
EVAPORATOR 24VDC
COIL BLOWER
CHECK VALVE
CONDENSATE
PAN
HVAC DUCT
(4 PLCS)
ENGINE COOLANT HOSES

REFRIGERANT LINES
BILGE PUMP AND

FLOAT SWITCH
BELT-DRIVEN
REFRIGERANT
CONDENSATE COMPRESSOR
SUMP ENGINE
SEAWATER
PUMP
PORT
MAIN
ENGINE BALL VALVE
(2 PLCS)
CHECK VALVE
TRANSOM
COOLING WATER AND CONDENSATE

OVERBOARD DISCHARGE
Figure 3-22. HVAC System Diagram
3-29
LOUVERED DISCHARGE
CONSOLE TOP GRILLE (P & S)
CREW CABIN DECK
HEATER COIL
24VDC
FAN (2 PLCS)
ENGINE COOLANT HOSES
STBD
MAIN
ENGINE BALL VALVE (2 PLCS)
Figure 3-23. Heater/Defroster System Diagram
3-30
Section XI.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3-25 GENERAL. 3-25.2 CONNECTIONS. Cable and wire connections

are made within electrical equipment enclosures or junc-
The boat's electrical system consists of a 24Vdc sys- tion boxes. Connections within equipment enclosures
tem, a 12Vdc system, a 110Vac shore power system, or junction boxes are made on wiring device terminals
a 220Vac shore power system, and a 110Vac onboard provided for that purpose. Wiring device terminals are
inverter system. The 24Vdc system provides power of screw, spade, pin, stud, or setscrew pressure type.
for electrical equipment, electronics, engine starting, Terminal lugs are installed on each conductor termi-
electrical senders and instrumentation, the HVAC sys- nating on a screw or stud terminal. Terminal lugs are
tems, the NavNet system, the windshield wiper mo- of the tinned, solderless crimp type with ring ends. Ring
tors and washer pumps, and the force protection equip- ends are the same nominal size as the screw or stud on
ment. The 12Vdc system provides power to the VHF which they are installed. The barrels of terminal lugs
radio, the tactical radios, the siren/PA system, the strobe are insulated or a short length of insulation sleeving is
beacon, cabin and aft deck lighting, and the cabin ven- installed over the barrel. No more than four conduc-
tilation fans. tors are connected to any one terminal screw or stud;
except barrier type terminal strips, where no more than
The DC system is a two-wire isolated ground system. two conductors are installed on any one terminal screw
This means that the power source, distribution system, or stud. Where more than the allowed number of con-
and control components are insulated from ground with ductors are connected, two or more terminals are con-
no electrical return path through the hull or other metal nected by jumpers.
parts of the boat. The insulated components include
conductors and components from the power source to 3-25.3 ELECTRICAL LABEL PLATES AND
terminal overload protection devices (i.e. circuit break- MARKINGS.
ers) that protect the branch circuits. The propulsion
engine electrical installation is modular through the use a. Electrical Label Plates and Markings. Electrical
of electrical harnesses. Conductors for all propulsion equipment is fitted with label plates. The information
engine electrical controls, contractors, switches, send- label plates contain the following minimum information
ers, sensors, and pickup units are routed from the en- (as applicable):
gines to the instrument panel through these harnesses.
110Vac and 220Vac power is available for the engine 1. Name of equipment.
coolant preheaters, the battery chargers, and the cabin
and engine compartment outlets when the boat is con- 2. Manufacturer name, model, type designation,
nected to a shore-based power supply. An inverter and part number.
supplies 110Vac power to the cabin and engine com-
partment outlets when the boat is underway or not con- 3. Power consumption or output in watts.
nected to shore power.
4. Kind of rating (continuous, intermittent).
3-25.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. Personnel shall
follow all applicable electrical safety precautions prior 5. Revolutions per minute at rated load.
to working on any electrical circuit. Applicable safety
precautions are found in Naval Ship's Technical Manu- 6. Amperes at rated load.
als (NSTM) for specific systems to be worked on, as
well as manufacturer's manuals, bulletins, and com- 7. Voltage.
mand generated procedures such as the use of Dan-
ger/Caution tags. Failure to follow safety precautions b. Switch and Receptacle Labeling. Each circuit
can result in damage to equipment, loss of vessel, and breaker and switch has information label plates desig-
injury or death to personnel. nating the ON position, OFF position, and the equip-
3-31
ment that it controls or other switch functions. Each 3-26 DC ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
receptacle is labeled to indicate the circuit voltage and,
when applicable, identifies its purpose. 3-26.1 DC POWER SOURCES. DC power is sup-
plied by two banks of two 12Vdc batteries each, con-
c. Cable Identification Tags. Each cable and connected in series, which are maintained in a state of
ductor designation is unique. Where machinery or equip- charge by the propulsion engine alternators when run-
ment makes tracking of cable runs difficult, additional ning, and by a 110Vac battery charger when connected
tags are provided. Where a change from the boat num- to shore power. The alternators are rated for 80 amps
bering and numbering system of the equipment pro- and have internal regulators. In normal configuration,
vided by the equipment manufacturer occurs, each the port battery bank is dedicated to engine starting
conductor is identified on each side of the change over and electrical power and the starboard battery bank is
point. Individual conductors are marked by yellow heat- dedicated to providing power for the 24Vdc electrical
shrinkable tubing with mechanically applied markings. and electronic equipment on the boat. Power for the
boat’s 12Vdc electrical and electronic equipment is pro-
d. DC Conductor Markings. In addition to the mark- vided by two 24Vdc-12Vdc solid sate converters in
ing required, each conductor in direct current power the engine compartment. Battery characteristics are
and lighting circuits is identified with designations and/ described in table 3-7. Diagrams of the boat’s dc power
or as follows: system are provided in FO-1 and FO-2.
1. Positive polarity conductors are designated 3-26.2 DC POWER DISTRIBUTION. DC electri-

POS. cal power from the batteries and the 12Vdc-24Vdc
converters is distributed to the boat's electrical and elec-
2. Negative polarity conductors are designated tronic components through wires, cables, switches, cir-
NEG. cuit breakers, distribution and control panels, and other
devices.
e. AC Conductor Markings. Each ungrounded con-
ductor in the 110Vac and 220Vac circuits are identified 3-26.3 DC CONTROL COMPONENTS. The boat's
with 110 and 220 designations and as follows: dc control components include rotary switches which
connect the batteries to branch circuits and circuit
1. Line Load Conductor - HOT. breakers which protect the branch circuits from over-
loads and short circuits. Specialized components such
2. Neutral Conductor - NEU. as battery isolators function automatically to keep the
battery banks charged and separated from each other.
3. Grounding Conductor - GND. There are two 24Vdc-12Vdc converters which pro-
vide 12Vdc to electrical and electronic equipment.
Table 3-7. 12Vdc Battery Characteristics
Item Data
Manufacturer ........................................................................................................ Optima

Model ................................................................................................................ D34M
Voltage ............................................................................................................... 12Vdc
Cold Cranking Amps @ 0°F .............................................................................. 750
Cold Cranking Amps @ 32°F ............................................................................ 870
Reserve Capacity .............................................................................................. 120 minutes
Capacity ............................................................................................................ 55 Amp-hr
Internal Resistance ............................................................................................ .0028 ohms
BCI Group ......................................................................................................... 34
3-32
a. Engine Compartment DC Panel. The engine com- manually. Table 3-8 provides a list of the circuit break-
partment DC switch and circuit breaker panel is ers on the engine compartment 24Vdc panel and their
mounted on an enclosure in the engine compartment values.
overhead at the forward end of the engine compart-
ment access hatch. The panel controls all of the boat's b. 24Vdc Panel C. The boat's 24Vdc electrical equip-
24Vdc power. The panel has five battery switches ment is primarily controlled from the 24Vdc panel (fig-
(Guest, model 2300A and model 2304A) and eleven ure 3-24) located below the helm on the control con-
pushbutton-type circuit breakers (Klixon, SDLM se- sole. The panel receives power through the 150-amp
ries) mounted on the aft face of the enclosure. circuit breaker on the engine compartment 24Vdc
panel. The panel has sixteen circuit breaker/switches
1. Battery Switches. The five battery switches which protect and operate the connected electrical
on the engine compartment 24Vdc panel control all equipment, a momentary contact horn switch, and a
DC power to the boat with the exception of the two dimmer for the console instrument lighting. Table 3-9
electric bilge pumps. The five battery switches on the provides a list of the circuit breaker/switches on 24Vdc
DC distribution panel in the engine compartment iso- panel C and their values.
late the engine battery bank from the engine starter
motors, provide a means to parallel the engine starting c. 24Vdc Panel D. There is a small 24Vdc circuit
battery bank with the ship's service battery bank, dis- breaker/switch panel (figure 3-25) located on the port
connect the ship's service dc power, and isolate the bulkhead adjoining the forward steps, immediately be-
110Vac inverter. Table 3-8 provides a list of the battery low the 12Vdc circuit breaker panel B. The panel has
switches on the engine compartment 24Vdc panel and a plexiglas guard installed to prevent unintended op-
their functions. eration of the circuit breakers. The panel receives
power through the 150-amp circuit breaker on the en-
Table 3-8. 24Vdc Distribution Panel Circuit Breakers
gine compartment 24Vdc panel. The circuit breakers/
Circuit Breaker/Switch Rating (amps) switches on the panel protect the tactical speakers and
the antenna coupler. Table 3-10 provides a list of the
FLOCS Pump Reset 50 circuit breaker/switches on 24Vdc panel D and their
Port ECM 50 values.
Stbd ECM 50
Trim Reset 50 d. 12Vdc Panel A. The boat's 12Vdc electrical equip-
Port Battery Charger 50 ment is primarily controlled from the 12Vdc panel (fig-
Ship Service Battery ure 3-26) located on the overhead console above the
Charger 50 center walking area in the cabin. The panel receives
24V Ship Service 150 its power from the two 24Vdc-12Vdc converters in
12V Main Converter 150 the engine compartment via the 12Vdc common bus
12V Aux Converter 150 located under the starboard console. The circuit break-
Fwd Bilge Pump 50 ers/switches on the panel protect the boat's lighting
Aft Bilge Pump 50 circuits, the loud-hailer, and the VHF radio. The panel
also includes a dimmer control for the compass light.
2. Circuit Breakers. The eleven circuit breakers Table 3-11 provides a list of the circuit breaker/switches
mounted on the engine compartment 24Vdc panel pro- on 12Vdc panel A and their values.
vide overload and short circuit protection for the boat's
24Vdc service, the trim tab pumps, the bilge pumps, e. 12Vdc Panel B. There is a small 12Vdc circuit
the 24Vdc-12Vdc converters, the battery charger out- breaker/switch panel (figure 3-26) located on the port
puts, and the engine ECMs. The circuit breakers are bulkhead adjoining the forward steps immediately above
thermally actuated and the reset button pops up to pro- the 24Vdc circuit breaker panel D. The panel has a
vide a visual indication that the breaker has tripped. plexiglas guard installed to prevent unintended opera-
The circuit breakers are reset by pushing the button in tion of the circuit breakers. The panel receives its power
3-33
from the two 24Vdc-12Vdc converters in the engine f. Link 2000 Control Panel. The Link 2000 control
compartment via the 12Vdc common bus located un- panel (figure 3-28) is mounted on the top of the port
der the starboard console. The circuit breakers/switches console on the starboard side of a raised enclosure.
on the panel protect the tactical radios, the LVIS inter- The control panel acts as a battery monitor and con-
com system, and the seats. Table 3-11 provides a list trols the inverter and battery charging functions of the
of the circuit breaker/switches on 12Vdc panel B and inverter/battery charger mounted in the crew cabin stor-
their values. age compartment. Table 3-13 provides a list of the con-
trols and displays on the panel and their functions. Refer
to the manufacturer's manual listed in table 1-2 for com-
plete setup and operating instructions.
24VDC PANEL C DIMMER

HORN
MAIN
OFF ON
20A 10A HEAT/ 10A 20A 10A

REMOTE PORT WIPER SPARE HORN
24P-1 24P-4 DEFROSTER 24P-7 24P-10 24P-13
SEARCH LT
10A 10A 20A 20A 10A

SPARE STBD WIPER 24P-5 A/C BLOWER SPARE SPARE 24P-14
24P-2 24P-8 24P-11
10A 10A 10A 20A DEPTH 5A

ER LIGHT SPARE 24P-6 SPARE NAVNET 24P-15
24P-3 24P-9 24P-12 SOUNDER
Figure 3-24. 24Vdc Panel C
Table 3-9. 24Vdc Panel C

Circuit Breaker/Switch Rating (amps) OFF ON OFF ON
Main 100 PA COUPLER AMP 10A SPARE 10A

Remote Searchlight 20
Spare 10
ER Lights 10
Port Wiper 10 SPEAKERS 10A SPARE 5A
Stbd Wiper 10
Spare 10
Heat/Defrost 10
Figure 3-25. 24Vdc Panel D
A/C Blower 20
Spare 10
Spare 20 Table 3-10. 24Vdc Panel D
Spare 20 Circuit Breaker/Switch Rating (amps)
Navnet 20
PA Coupler/Amp 10
Horn 10
Speakers 10
Spare 10
Spare 10
Depth Sounder 5
Spare 5
3-34
DIMMER COMPASS FUEL GAUGE
SPARE 30A LOUD HAILER 20A COCKPIT LTS 15A 12V POWER POINT 15A
12VDC PANEL A
MAIN
OFF ON VHF RADIO 10A STROBE LIGHT 20A CABIN LTS 15A NAV LIGHTS 10A
SPARE 10A SPARE 10A CABIN FAN 10A ANCHOR LIGHT 5A
Figure 3-26. 12Vdc Panel A
Table 3-11. 12Vdc Panel A LINK 2000 XANTREX

Circuit Breaker/Switch Rating (amps)
CONTROL BATTERY
Main 100 # LOW BAT RESET TO
13.30
# OL FACTORY
Spare 30 DEFAULT
FLASH ALL
VHF Radio 10 SOFTWARE
INFO LEDS &
SEGMENTS
Spare 10
Loud Hailer 20 SETUP
Strobe Light 20 ! EQUALIZE

Spare 10
Cockpit Lights 15
Cabin Fan 10 STATUS: AC IN CHARGE ACCEPT FLOAT
12V Power Point 15

Nav Lights 10 Figure 3-28. Link 2000 Display
Anchor Light 5
3-26.4 DC EQUIPMENT. The boat is equipped with
the following dc electrical equipment.
OFF ON OFF ON a. Battery Isolator. The battery isolator allows the

TACT RADIO 1 10A GENTEX 10A
engine alternators to connect to both banks of batter-
ies for independent battery charging. The isolator also
prevents a battery bank with a higher charge from dis-
charging into a battery bank with a lower charge by
TACT RADIO 2 10A SEATS 30A
keeping both battery banks electrically isolated from
each other.
b. DC - DC Converters. The two 24Vdc-12Vdc con-

Figure 3-27. 12Vdc Panel B verters provide power to the boat's 12Vdc components
including the VHF radio, the tactical radios, the inter-
Table 3-12. 12Vdc Panel B com system, the loud-hailer, the strobe beacon, light-
ing, cabin seating, and the cabin fans. The converter
Circuit Breaker/Switch Rating (amps) outputs connect to a common 12Vdc main bus.
Tact Radio 1 10
Tact Radio 2 10 3-26.5 DC GROUND SYSTEM. All 24Vdc and 12
Gentex 10 Vdc electrical components on the boat are connected
Seats 30 to a common grounding system with the 110Vac elec-
trical system.
3-35
Table 3-13. Link 2000 Display Functions
Control/Display Function
Invert Turns inverter on and off.
Charger Turns battery charger on and off.
Setup Selects various functions and values.
Battery 1 Selects battery bank #1
Battery 2 Selects battery bank #2
Volts Displays the voltage of the selected battery bank.
Amps Displays the charging and discharging amperage of the selected battery bank.
A hrs Displays amp-hours consumed from the selected battery bank.
Time Displays remaining time of operation of load with remaining battery capacity.
AC In Green LED is on when ac current is present.
Charge Red LED is on when the charger is in bulk charge mode.
Red LED is flashing when the charger is in equalize mode.
Accept Orange LED is on when the charger is in acceptance mode.
Float Green LED is on when the charger is in float mode.
3-27 AC ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. 60Hz, 110Vac up to 1,000 watts. A surge power circuit
enables the inverter to momentarily provide over 3,000
3-27.1 AC POWER SOURCES. The boat has three watts for starting electric motors. A low-voltage sens-
sources of ac power: a 110Vac shore connection, a ing circuit secures the unit when the input voltage drops
220Vac shore connection, and ac power from an on- below 20 volts. When the connected 110Vac equip-
board inverter. Diagrams of the boat's ac power sys- ment is secured, an idle circuit reduces 24Vdc power
tem are provided in FO-3. consumption and the inverter does not produce ac
power. When the inverter senses a load, it automati-
a. 110Vac Shore Power Connection. The 30-amp cally resumes producing ac power.
110Vac shore power receptacle is located on the star-
board forward side of the crew cabin above the 220Vac The inverter also functions as a backup 110Vac power
shore power receptacle. supply. When the unit senses that shore power is avail-
able, it secures the inverter function. When the unit
b. 220Vac Shore Power Connection. The 30-amp senses that shore power is interrupted or not connected,
220Vac shore power receptacle is located on the star- it provides 60Hz, 110Vac current to the 110Vac inverter
board forward side of the crew cabin below the 110Vac panel and to the 110Vac shore power panel through
shore power receptacle. the panel's TRANSFER circuit breaker.
c. 24Vdc-110Vac Inverter. The boat is equipped with When 110Vac shore power is connected and the
a solid-state inverter which supplies 60Hz, 110Vac to TRANSFER circuit breaker on the 110Vac shore power
the GFCI outlets in the crew cabin and in the engine panel is in the ON position, the inverter/charger trans-
compartment when the boat is not connected to shore fer switch provides power to the 110Vac inverter panel
power. The inverter receives 24Vdc power from the and operates the battery charger function of the unit.
port battery bank through a 300-amp fuse mounted on A power sharing feature reduces the output of the bat-
the port engine compartment bulkhead and is connected tery charger if the combined loads of the battery
to the 110Vac inverter panel through the 110Vac shore charger and other connected equipment exceeds 30-
power panel on the starboard bulkhead adjoining the amps.
forward steps.
3-27.2 AC DISTRIBUTION. AC electrical power
The microprocessor-controlled unit automatically trans- from shore power and the 24Vdc-110Vac inverter is
forms 24Vdc from the port battery bank into regulated distributed to the boat's electrical and electronic com-
3-36
ponents through wires, cables, switches, circuit break- the inverter/battery charger, and two spare breakers.
ers, distribution and control panels, and other devices. There is a voltmeter and an ammeter mounted at the
top of the panel. Table 3-14 provides a list of the 110
3-27.3 AC CONTROL COMPONENTS. The boat's Vac circuit breakers and their values.
ac control components are located on the starboard
bulkhead adjoining the forward steps and include Table 3-14. Shore Power Panel 110V/60Hz
switches which select ac power sources and circuit
breaker/switches which control and protect the distri- Circuit Breaker/Switch Rating (amp)
bution panels and branch circuits from overloads and Main 30
short circuits. Specialized components such as a bat- Transfer 20
tery charger, a battery isolator, and an inverter/battery Spare 15
charger function automatically to keep the battery banks Port Engine Preheater 20
charged and separated from each other. A galvanic Starboard Engine Preheater 20
isolator functions automatically to protect the alumi- Spare 10
num hull and other underwater metals from electro-
lytic corrosion. AC control components on the boat c. Shore Power Panel 220Vac/50Hz. The 220Vac
include: shore power panel (figure 3-31) receives power from
the shore master breaker panel. The panel has a 30-
a. Shore Master Breaker Panel. The shore master amp master circuit breaker/switch and five branch cir-
breaker panel (figure 3-29) controls shore power input cuit breaker/switches. The panel controls the battery
through two 30-amp double-pole circuit breakers. The charger, two unused engine compartment branch cir-
circuit breakers protect the 110Vac system and the cuits, and two spare breakers. There is a voltmeter
220Vac system from overloads and short circuits. A and an ammeter mounted at the top of the panel. Table
sliding interlock prevents the operation of both circuit 3-15 provides a list of the 220Vac circuit breakers and
breakers simultaneously. The panel has a reverse po- their values.
larity indicator light for each shore power source.
d. Inverter 110Vac Panel. The 110Vac inverter power
panel (figure 3-32) receives power from the inverter/
SHORE 1 POWER battery charger. The panel has a 30-amp master cir-
OFF ON AVAILABLE cuit breaker/switch and five branch circuit breaker/
REVERSED
switches. The panel controls the GFCI outlets in the
POLARITY crew cabin and in the engine compartment and three
spare breakers. There is a voltmeter and an ammeter
SHORE 2 mounted at the top of the panel. Table 3-16 provides a
POWER AVAILABLE
list of the inverter panel 110Vac circuit breakers and
REVERSED their values.
POLARITY
3-27.4 OTHER AC CONTROL COMPONENTS.
a. Galvanic Isolator. The galvanic isolator is an auto-

matic solid state device that is series connected in line
Figure 3-29. Shore Master Breaker Panel
with the boat's 110Vac and 220Vac grounding leads
through a common bus ahead of all grounding connec-
b. Shore Power Panel 110V/60Hz. The 110Vac shore
tions on the boat. The device functions as a filter, block-
power panel (figure 3-30) receives power from the
ing the flow of destructive low voltage (dc) currents
shore master breaker panel. The panel has a 30-amp
while maintaining the integrity of the safety grounding
master circuit breaker/switch and five branch circuit
circuit. The galvanic isolator is mounted inside the elec-
breaker/switches. The panel controls the engine cool-
trical cabinet in the head.
ant preheaters, the transfer of ac power to and from
3-37
Table 3-15. Shore Power Panel 220V/50Hz Table 3-16. Inverter 110Vac Panel
Circuit Breaker/Switch Rating (amp) Circuit Breaker/Switch Rating (amp)
Main 30 Main 30
Battery Charger 20 Pilot House Outlet 15
Spare 10 Engine Compartment Outlet 15
Spare 10 Spare 10
Spare 20 Spare 10
Spare 20 Spare 10
SHORE POWER PANEL

110V/60Hz
100 200 300

0 10 20 30 40
0 50
VOLTS AMPS
MAIN PREHEAT
TRANSFER PREHEAT
SPARE
SPARE
Figure 3-30. 110Vac/60Hz Shore Power Panel
3-38
SHORE POWER PANEL 220V/50Hz
100 200 300

0 10 20 30 40
0 50
VOLTS AMPS
MAIN SPARE
BATTERY CHARGER SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Figure 3-31. 220Vac/50Hz Shore Power Panel
3-39
INVERER 110V LOAD PANEL
100 200 300

0 10 20 30 40
0 50
VOLTS AMPS
MAIN SPARE
OUTLETS PILOT
HOUSE SPARE
OUTLETS LAZARETTE
SPARE
Figure 3-32. Inverter 110Vac Load Panel
3-40
b. Galvanic Isolator Monitor. The galvanic isolator 4. Equalizing Charge. During the equalizing
monitor is a microprocessor-controlled, solid state de- charge, 32.6Vdc is applied to the batteries to remove
vice which tests the integrity of the galvanic isolator residual sulfates from the battery plates, to bring all
and the grounding leads of the 110Vac and 220 Vac battery cells to the same potential, and to mix the elec-
systems. The monitor is mounted on the starboard bulk- trolyte so that it is evenly distributed in the battery cells.
head adjoining the forward steps above the shore mas- Equalizing the batteries is done after they are fully
ter breaker panel and has a reference diagram mounted charged. This function is engaged manually through
below it. Upon power-up, the monitors perform a self- the Link 2000 control panel. When the charger is in
test. The red and green LEDs momentarily blink along equalizing mode, the red LED on the Link 2000 display
with the audible alarm. The test is completed when the panel is blinking.
red light turns off and the green light stays on.
Refer to the manufacturer's manual in table 1-2 for
3-27.5 AC EQUIPMENT. The following ac electri- further information.
cal equipment is installed in the boat:
b. Battery Charger. There is a fully automatic 4-step
a. Inverter/Battery Charger. The inverter/battery marine battery charger/power supply installed on the
charger installed in the crew cabin storage compart- starboard engine compartment bulkhead.
ment receives its ac power through the 20-amp
TRANSFER circuit breaker on the 110Vac shore power The charger receives its power through the 50Hz,
panel. The unit also acts as a 24Vdc power supply in 220Vac panel on the starboard bulkhead adjoining the
the event of battery discharge or failure. The unit's forward steps. The unit also acts as a 24Vdc power
four charging steps are as follows: supply in the event of battery discharge or failure. The
unit's four charging steps are as follows:
1. Bulk Charge. This stage is activated each time
the charger is turned on. Full rated charger current is 1. Fast Charge. The charger delivers its maxi-
delivered to the battery banks until the bulk charge volt- mum amperage rating to the connected batteries for
age limit of 28.8Vdc is reached. When the charger is the fastest charge until the battery voltage is raised to
in bulk mode, the red LED on the Link 2000 display 28.8Vdc. When this voltage is reached, the charger
panel is on. will shift to absorption stage.
2. Acceptance Charge. During this stage, the 2. Absorption Charge. The charger maximizes
charge voltage is at maximum and the amperage is charge and holds the voltage at 29.4Vdc for a pro-
gradually reduced. When the acceptance amperage grammed time of 1 to 4 hours while letting the batter-
threshold is reached, the charger shifts to float charge ies determine the amount of amps they can accept.
mode. When the charger is in acceptance mode, the This mode creates activity in the batteries, reducing
orange LED on the Link 2000 display panel is on. sulfate buildup, and conditions the batteries for an ex-
tended life. After the programmed time has elapsed,
3. Float Charge. When the acceptance stage is the charger will shift to float mode.
terminated, charging current is secured. The unit moni-
tors the battery voltage as it drifts down from the bulk 3. Float Mode. The charger delivers a precision
charge voltage limit. When the voltage reaches the float 27.0Vdc finishing voltage that maintains each battery
voltage set point, the float charge stage is engaged. for short or long storage without overcharging the bat-
The float stage holds the voltage at 27.0Vdc for long- teries. In this mode, the charger will deliver its full rated
term battery maintenance. During the float stage, the power output for operating electrical equipment.
full output current of the battery charger is available to
operate any dc equipment on the system while main- 4. Recycle Mode. If there are very large loads
taining the float charge voltage. When the charger is in on the battery while the charger is on, the unit will
float mode, the green LED on the Link 2000 display recycle to fast charge mode, ensuring that batteries
panel is on. stay fully charged.
3-41
When the shore power cord is connected to a shore-
When the Voltage falls below 22.0 Volts, or if the AC based 110Vac or 220Vac supply, it also connects the
power is applied, the Fast Charge cycle will start. The boat's grounding system to the shore system ground.
fans on the unit will not operate continuously, but only The galvanic isolator monitor and the reverse polarity
as needed to control temperature. The charger is indicator may indicate when there is a break in the ac
equipped with an internal temperature sensor that will grounding system.
secure the charger in extreme heat. Refer to the
manufacturer's manual in table 1-2 for further infor- 3-28 PROPULSION ENGINE STARTING, IN-
mation. STRUMENTATION, AND ALARMS.
c. GFCI Receptacles. The boat is equipped with two The starting systems for the engines consist of the en-
110Vac GFCI receptacles. A ground fault circuit oc- gine starter motors with starter solenoids, engine start-
curs when a leaking electrical current follows a path to ing relays, electrical throttle senders with idle valida-
ground. If the current path runs through a person's tion switches and neutral safety lockout switches inte-
body, serious injury or electrocution can result. The gral to the marine gear control levers.
GFCI receptacle will trip and quickly stop the flow of
electricity to prevent serious injury or electrocution in The boat is equipped with a Diesel View display
the event of a ground fault. GFCI devices are designed (Cummins MerCruiser, SmartCraft Diesel View ver-
to protect personnel, not equipment. GFCI devices do sion 1.00).
not protect against circuit overloads, short circuits, or
electrical shocks. A GFCI receptacle does not protect The DieselView display is located on the port console.
against electrical hazards from equipment which is not The display provides a comprehensive boat informa-
connected to the GFCI. tion center. The Diesel View continuously monitors
boat sensor operating data, multiple engine operating
3-27.6 GROUNDING. All 110Vac and 220Vac elec- parameters, engine fault information, alarms and diag-
trical components on the boat are connected to a com- nostics, and engine preventative maintenance remind-
mon grounding system with the dc electrical system. ers. For additional information refer to the SmartCraft
operation manual listed in table 1-2.
3-42
Section XII.
COMMUNICATION, NAVIGATION, AND FORCE PROTECTION (SECURITY)
PACKAGE
3-29 GENERAL. f. Magnetic Compass.
Communication and navigation equipment consist of a g. Loud-hailer

VHF marine band radio bracket-mounted to the top of
the control console, a bracket-mounted radar display h. Horn.
in the overhead, and a flush-mounted 4-inch (101.5 mm)
compass on top of the console. The installed boat com- i. Searchlights.
munications and force protection equipment provide
multifunction and mission critical redundancy. The com- j. Navigation Lights.
munication and navigation equipment are integrated into
a networked system using NavNet, NMEA 0183, and 3-30 COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT.
RS-232 interface cabling.
The boat is equipped with a VHF radio for communi-
Communication and navigation equipment consists of cating with other vessels and a loud-hailer for voice
the following items: communication of information and instructions to other
vessels.
a. VHF/FM Marine Transceiver.
3-30.1 VHF RADIO. The VHF/FM Marine radio
b. Navigation Display Unit. (Standard Horizon QUEST-X, model GX1500S) (fig-
ure 3-33), surface-mounted on the port side of the con-
c. Radar Scanner. sole, operates in the frequency range of 156.025 to
163.275 MHz. The 12Vdc power to the radio is con-
d. GPS Receiver. trolled by a mini 7.5-amp circuit breaker on the 12Vdc
distribution panel on the control console.
e. Depth Sounder and Transducer.
Figure 3-33. VHF Radio
3-43
The VHF antenna (Shakespeare, Style 5202) on a re- b. Navigational side lights (Aqua Signal, model 41320)
attaching antenna mount (Shakespeare, model 4187) are installed in screens mounted on the port and star-
is bracket-mounted in the aft starboard corner of the board forward sides of the cabin roof.
cabin top. The cable for the antenna penetrates the
bacin top through a cable deck fitting inboard of the 3-32 FORCE PROTECTION (SECURITY)
antenna. The VHF radio is capable of Digital Selec- PACKAGE.
tive Calling (DSC), intercom operation, scanning, and
when connected to the optional 30 watt loud-hailer, has The electrical security package consists of a loud-hailer,
PA and listen-back capability with four fog horn, bell, siren/PA and blue response strobe light bar.
and horn signal modes of operation. It is equipped
with a submersible noise-canceling speaker microphone, 3-32.1 STROBE LIGHTBAR. A blue response strobe
a high and low voltage warning function, and GPS re- light-bar (figure 3-34) provides visual indication of the
peatability. The radio is equipped with immediate mode law enforcement mission of the boat. The power switch
keys on the panel including activation of the emergency for the strobe light is located on the 12Vdc breaker
channel (16/9 key), a NOAA weather key (WX key), panel.
and a distress key. The radio has a switchable Radio
Frequency (RF) output power key (H/L key) for 1 or
25 watts on the panel. A 16/9 key and channel up/
down keys are available on the microphone.
3-31 NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT.
The boat’s navigation equipment includes a marine ra-

Figure 3-34. Strobe Lightbar
dar, a compass, a boat horn and navigation lights.
3-32.2 SIREN/PA. The siren/PA system consists of
3-31.1 RADAR. A 4kW Furuno, model 1833 radar
a control head (figure 3-35), an amplifier and a mounted
display is bracket-mounted to the port side of the con-
100-watt speaker (figure 3-36). The control head, flush
trol console. A 24-inch closed array radome is bracket-
mounted on the console, is equipped with a Press-To-
mounted on the mast lower platform. The radar fea-
Talk (PTT) noise-canceling microphone. The control
tures a 7-inch high definition display.
head provides for an audible indication of the law en-
forcement mission of the boat with a selection of four
3-31.2 COMPASS. A magnetic compass is bracket-
signals: YELP, WAIL, PIERCER, and AIR HORN.
mounted on top of the control console. A compass light
The system may also be used as a PA or loud-hailer.
is provided within the compass and is controlled by the
The system power is supplied by the 12Vdc circuit
instrument light dimmer switch.
breaker panel.
3-31.3 BOAT HORN. A twin trumpet horn (Guest,
model 11018XLP) is bracket-mounted at the forward
end of the cabin roof on the port side.
ON MAN MAN HF
WAIL
3-31.4 NAVIGATION LIGHTS. The navigation lights
PA YELP
RAD T3
are controlled by a switch located on the 12Vdc circuit POWER FUNCTION SPK 1 SPK 2 VOL
breaker panel. The anchor light is independently con-

trolled by the anchor light switch located on the 12Vdc
circuit breaker panel.
a. A 360° white anchor (masthead) light (Aqua Sig- Figure 3-35. Siren/PA Control Panel
nal, model 40020-1) is installed on the top of the mast
located at the aft end of the cabin roof.
3-44
3-32.3 SEARCHLIGHT. An electrically-controlled
searchlight is mounted on the mast middle platform.
The searchlight is controlled by console mounted re-
mote control switchpads located both at the coxswain
and boat captain stations. Only one station is active at
a time by placing the station control selector switch in
the PORT or STBD position. This switch is located at
the coxswain station, directly under the searchlight re-
mote control switchpad. The system power is sup-
plied by the 12Vdc circuit breaker panel.
Figure 3-36. Siren/PA Speaker
3-45
Section XIII.
DAMAGE CONTROL AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
3-33 DAMAGE CONTROL AND SAFETY override switch is provided on the control panel in the
EQUIPMENT. event it is necessary to bypass the automatic system
and restart the engine in an emergency maneuvering
The boat is equipped with a limited amount of damage situation.
control equipment. Equipment consists of firefighting,
dewatering, and safety equipment. 3-34.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS.
There are two 1.5-pound (1.1-kg), portable, dry-chemical
3-34 FIRE FIGHTING. fire extinguishers mounted in the crew cabin. One is
mounted on the starboard side bulkhead in the aft cor-
Fire fighting equipment consists of an installed engine ner of the cabin and the other is mounted on the port
compartment fire suppression system and two portable side bulkhead aft of the control console.
fire extinguishers.
3-35 DEWATERING.
3-34.1 ENGINE COMPARTMENT FIRE SUP-
PRESSION SYSTEM. The engine compartment is fit- Dewatering equipment consists of the two electric au-
ted with an installed inert-gas fire suppression system tomatic bilge pumps in the engine compartment, and
which uses FE-241 (chlorotetrafluoroethane) suppres- the installed, manual bilge pump in the engine compart-
sant, a residue-free, colorless, nearly odorless, electri- ment. Refer to section VIII for information on this
cally-nonconductive gas, that is an effective medium equipment.
for extinguishing fires. The fire suppressant cylinder
control head is electrically connected to a relay termi- 3-36 SAFETY EQUIPMENT.
nal box mounted beneath the cabin control console. If
fire breaks out in the engine compartment, the engine Onboard safety equipment consists of a boathook and
and exhaust blower must be shut down immediately a throwable ring buoy.
because the compressed gas suppressant will not stall
the diesel engine. Continued operation of the engine 3-36.1 BOATHOOK. An 8-foot (2.4-m) extendable
and blower may remove the suppressant, creating the boathook is mounted in clips on the starboard bulkhead
possibility of reignition. The boat's automatic system above the aft crew seat.
(figure 3-37) responds when the extinguishing system
discharges and shuts down the engine and the engine 3-36.2 RING BUOY. A 24-inch (61-cm) ring buoy
compartment exhaust blower. An audible alarm and a is mounted on the forward face of the engine compart-
red LED on the Fireboy control panel on the console ment bulkhead at the aft end of the main deck on
provide indications that the system has discharged. An centerline.
3-46
CONSOLE
DISPLAY
FIREBOY
PRESSURE ES - 3000
SWITCH
1 11
2 12
3 13
4 14
5 15
6 16
ENGINE
7 17 FUEL SOLENOID
8 18
9 19
ENGINE
POWER
SWITCH
BATTERY
Figure 3-37. Engine Compartment Fire Suppression System
3-47
Section XIV.
SANITATION SYSTEM
3-37 GENERAL. the toilet bowl, seat, cover, flushing water holding tank
and hand-operated bellows pump. The lower section
The sanitation system consists of a Sealand, model contains the waste holding tank and the slide valve used
Sanipottie portable toilet stored below the port crew to drain the toilet bowl. The upper and lower sections
seat. are held together during normal use and storage by
two latches, one on each side.
The portable toilet is made up of two sections, an up-
per and a lower section. The upper section contains
3-48
Section XV.
TRAILER
3-38 GENERAL. sion arm is an integral part of the axle assembly. The
steel torsion bar, surrounded by four natural rubber
The aluminum, double axle, cradle/bunk style trailer is cords, is encased in the main structural member of
provided with a 12Vdc wiring system that supplies the axle beam. The wheel/hub spindle assembly is
power to submersible type trailer lights. The wiring attached to the torsion arm lever, which is fastened to
color codes are located on the winch stand. Brakes the rubber encased bar. A slight bend in the center
are hydraulic surge type with self-backing brake ro- portion of the axle during operation is normal.
tors on two axles. The trailer brake surge actuator
(Titan, model 20) is installed on the tongue of the trailer The hitch is a pintle type with a ball receiver. The size
and automatically synchronizes the trailer braking sys- of the ball hitch is 2-5/16 inch. The trailer is equipped
tem with the tow vehicle braking system. As the trailer with a 16-inch rim having a 6-lug wheel pattern. The
pushes against the tow vehicle the actuator compresses wheel Sure Lube Bearing Protection System allows
and applies force to the trailer master cylinder, which complete greasing of the outer and inner bearings,
supplies hydraulic pressure to the trailer brakes. which permits wet launching of the boat. Trailer side
guides are set for the beam of the hull at the stern.
The trailer is equipped with a torsion arm axle suspen- These guides are for loading purposes to be used as
sion system (Henschen Dura-Flex). The system at- an aid to center the hull perfectly on the trailer cradle.
taches directly to the trailer with brackets. The tor- Refer to table 3-17 for trailer characteristics.
Table 3-17. Trailer Characteristics

Item Data
Manufacturer ..................................................................................................Boat Master

Model No. ...................................................................................................2628-TH-K
GVWR ........................................................................................................12,000 pounds
Tire Size .......................................................................................................LT245/75R16-Radial
Tire Inflation Pressure .................................................................................80 psi (552 kPa)
Hitch Style ...................................................................................................Pintle
Hitch Ball Size .............................................................................................2-5/16 inch
Brake Fluid ..................................................................................................DOT 3
3-49/(3-50 blank)
3-49
CHAPTER 4
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Section I.
GENERAL
4-1 INTRODUCTION. operation. The chapter is arranged so that preopera-

tional conditions and procedures are presented, fol-
This chapter contains instructions for boat operation, lowed by operating instructions and procedures. Also
including engine starting, boat handling, and shutdown included in this chapter are emergency underway pro-
procedures. Individual procedures are provided for cedures and troubleshooting information.
separate boat systems within the content of overall boat
4-1
Section II.
PREPARATION FOR USE
4-2 PREOPERATIONAL CHECKOUT. NOTE
Before placing the boat in the water and starting the When preparing to start a new or over-
engine, complete the checks listed on the preopera- hauled engine, or an engine that has
tional checklist (table 4-1). The preoperational check- been in storage, perform all operations
list is designed to ensure that all systems are in work- listed in the engine manual.
ing order, the boat is seaworthy, all systems are aligned
to support boat operation, and safe, efficient boat op- The procedures outlined in the preoperational check-
eration is ensured. list ensure the boat is operational in normal weather
conditions. When the weather is subfreezing for an
NOTE extended period, additional precautions are required and
are listed in section IV of this chapter.
Failure to accomplish the checklist
items can lead to a problem that may
result in aborting the mission.
Table 4-1. Preoperational Checklist
General Boat Checks Completed
a. Ensure the boat drain plug is installed. a. _____

b. Inspect the hull for damage. b. _____
c. Batteries fully charged and shore power cable disconnected. c. _____
d. Check waterjet impeller for damage, wear, or deformation. d. _____
e. Inspect the waterjet impeller drive shaft and connections. e. _____
f. Inspect inflatable collar for damage. f. _____
g. Ensure inflatable tubes are inflated to 3 psi (21 kPa). g. _____
h. Inspect anodes on the waterjet and hull. h. _____
i. Raise the mast and lock into position. i. _____
j. Raise the VHF antenna and lock into position. j. _____
Emergency Gear
Completed
(Ensure all emergency equipment is in good working order)
a. Portable fire extinguishers (2). a. _____
b. Engine compartment mounted fire extinguisher (1). b. _____
c. Boathook (1). c. _____
d. Ring buoy (1). d. _____
e. Lantern (1). e. _____
f. Tube repair kit (1). f. _____
g. Life jackets (min. of 1 per person). g. _____
h. Anchor, chain, and rope. h. _____
i. Bow and stern mooring lines. i. _____
j. Manual bilge pump (1). Ensure that bilge and strainer are clean and free of
debris. j. _____
k. Mission essential gear and equipment is onboard and properly stowed. k. _____
l. Ensure all cargo is secure. l. _____
4-2
Table 4-1. Preoperational Checklist - Continued
Fuel System Completed
a. Strip the fuel tank prior to filling and placing into service. Close fuel
stripping valve. a. _____
b. Fill the fuel tank. b. _____
c. Drain water from the fuel filter/water separator. c. _____
d. Ensure all fuel supply valves are open. d. _____
e. Inspect all fuel lines and connections for signs of leaks, damage, or wear. e. _____
f. Dispose of contaminated rags and fuel/water in accordance with command f. _____
policy and guidelines.
Engine Systems Completed
a. Check the seawater strainer basket to ensure it is clean. Close the strainer. a. _____
b. Ensure the freshwater connection cutout valve is closed and the cap is
securely fastened. b. _____
c. Open the seacock. c. _____
d. Check the engine oil level and fill if applicable. d. _____
e. Check the engine coolant level and fill if applicable. e. _____
f. Check the marine gear oil level and fill if applicable. f.
g. Test steering. Check the steering hydraulic cylinder, and inspect the system for
leaks. Fill the hydraulic fluid reservoir if applicable. g. _____
h. Check waterjet steering nozzle for damage, wear, or deformation. h. _____
i. Ensure the gear/throttle lever is in neutral. i. _____
j. Check the waterjet reversing bucket hydraulic fluid reservoir level and fill if
applicable. j. _____
k. Check waterjet reversing bucket and hydraulic cylinder for damage, wear,
or deformation. k. _____
Electrical and Navigation Systems

(Place the electrical system control and distribution system components Completed
in the ON position).
a. Turn battery selector switches to correct position. a. _____
b. Distribution panel feeder circuit breakers. b. _____
c. Instrument panel circuit breakers. c. _____
d. Propulsion control circuit breakers. d. _____
e. Place the engine compartment blower breaker switch to the ON position. e. _____
f. Position the Start switch to ON and check the voltmeter reading (24Vdc). f. _____
g. Check the electric bilge pump strainers to ensure that they are not clogged. g. _____
h. Place the electric bilge pump switches in the MAN position and ensure
pumps run. h. _____
i. Place the electric bilge pump switches in the AUTO position during boat
operations. i. _____
j. Sound the horn to ensure that it is operational. j. _____
k. Place all light switches in the ON position to ensure navigation, compass, and k. _____
console lights illuminate.
l. Use the dimmer switch to ensure the instrument panel lights work. l. _____
4-3
Table 4-1. Preoperational Checklist - Continued
VHF Radio Completed
a. Ensure power is provided to the system. a. _____

b. Inspect the antenna and antenna connections. b. _____
c. Turn the system on and then adjust the volume and squelch. c. _____
d. Select an operational channel and obtain confirmation that the radio is
transmitting and receiving. d. _____
e. Ensure that radio procedures and operating instructions are on the boat. e. _____
Force Protection (Security) Package Completed
a. Inspect the strobe light to ensure that it is clean. a. _____

b. Place the strobe light bar breaker switch in the ON position and ensure that the b. _____
light flashes and is visible for 360°.
c. Place the loud-hailer and siren/PA breaker panel switches in the ON position. c. _____
d. Place the loud-hailer rotary knob power switch in the ON position. d. _____
e. Place the loud-hailer hail output control rotary knob in an acceptable
volume position, press the HAIL key, press the microphone PTT button, e. _____
and speak into the microphone.
f. Confirm that the voice transmission is clear and audible. f. _____
g. Press the loud-hailer FOG key sequentially to select the various signals,
pressing the microphone PTT button to ensure that all tones are audible. g. _____
h. Place the siren/PA power switch in the ON position. h. _____
i. Place the siren/PA control panel rotary knob in the PA position and
confirm that the voice transmission is clear and audible. i. _____
j. Place the siren/PA control panel rotary knob in each siren position and ensure
that all tones are audible. j. _____
k. Inspect all wiring connections and wiring to ensure that none are frayed
or damaged. k. _____
l. Inspect all connections and fittings to ensure that they are tight. l. _____
NOTE: This list of preoperational checks is not all inclusive.
4-4
4-3 FUEL SYSTEM. e. Close the ball valve in the fuel tank stripping pump
discharge line.
4-3.1 FUEL TANK. The fuel tank should be kept
full when the boat is operational. The capacity of the f. Close the fuel tank stripping valve.
tank is 200 gallons (757 liters). Ensure the fuel level is
checked and the tank filled prior to getting underway. g. Stow the discharge hose and nozzle in an upright
position on the stripping pump bracket on the aft side
4-3.2 FUEL TANK STRIPPING. of the fuel tank.
The fuel tank stripping connection is located at the

bottom of the aft side of the fuel tank. The connection WARNING
has a cutout valve at the fuel tank. The valve is con-
nected to a hose which connects to the rotary fuel strip-
ping pump. The discharge hose for the pump has a ball T
valve and hose barb installed on the end.
WARNING
To prevent injury or death, secure the

smoking lamp before stripping fuel.
Ensure no flame-producing equipment
is operating within 50 feet of the fuel-
ing area. Have fire fighting equipment
readily available. All fuel spills must
be cleaned up immediately.
h. Dispose of contaminated rags and fuel in accor-
dance with command policy and guidelines.
! CAUTION
4-3.3 FUEL FILLING PROCEDURE.
To prevent equipment damage, fuel
stripping should be done on a daily
basis; before running the engines and WARNING
before filling the tanks. Failure to re-
move water and sediment can cause
engine damage. Before taking on fuel, secure the
smoking lamp. Ensure no flame-pro-
a. Place a container under the discharge nozzle of ducing equipment is operating within
the stripping pump. 50 feet of the fueling area. Have fire
fighting equipment readily available. All
b. Open the ball valve in the fuel tank stripping pump fuel spills must be cleaned up immedi-
discharge line. ately.
c. Open the fuel tank stripping valve. a. Check fuel in the tank using the fuel gauge at the
control console.
d. Operate the rotary pump until clean fuel flows from
the nozzle. b. Strip contaminated fuel/water from the tank prior
to fuel filling in accordance with paragraph 4-3.2.
4-5
Water, tiny solids, asphaltenes, algae, and rust are fil-
WARNING tered from fuel by the Aquabloc pleated 10-micron el-
ement.
T NOTE
If an excessive amount of water and

debris are collected in the separator,
the fuel tank should be stripped and/
or emptied and cleaned.
4-3.4.1 Drain The Fuel Filter/Water Separator. Drain

the fuel filter/water separator using the following pro-
cedure:
WARNING
c. Remove the fuel fill cap located amidships on
the port side gunwale. Fill the tank with clean, water- To prevent injury or death, ensure ap-
free diesel fuel. propriate fire fighting equipment is
available. Take all necessary safety
d. Replace the fuel fill cap. precautions before draining the fuel fil-
ter/water separator. Do not smoke or
4-3.4 FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR. The allow any open flame in the vicinity of
bowl of the fuel filter/water separator will collect wa- the fuel system operations.
ter and other impurities that are in the fuel. The sepa-
rator must be frequently inspected to ensure the filter a. Place a suitably sized container under the drain
element remains free of debris. If operation is contin- petcock.
ued without cleaning, it will become impossible to feed
fuel to the engine and damage or seizure of the fuel b. Close the ball valve on the inlet side of the fuel
injection pump will result. filter/water separator.
The collection bowl must be drained prior to engine

operation or more frequently, depending upon the ! CAUTION
amount of fuel contamination. The separator will not
function properly if the bowl is not drained before the To prevent damage to equipment, do
level of the water and fuel contaminates reach the top not drain the fuel filter/water separa-
of the separator turbine. tor while the engine is running. Drain-
ing of the fuel filter/water separator
Figure 3-12 provides a cutaway view of the water sepa- while the engine is running can cause
rator internals. As fuel enters the separator, it moves an airlock in the fuel system, which
around and through a primary stage turbine centrifuge. could stop the engine.
Water droplets and larger solids spin out of the lighter
fuel and fall to the bottom of the collection bowl. Smaller
water droplets bead up along the sides of the chamber c. Loosen and open the petcock sufficiently to drain
and on the element. When heavy enough, they too fall water from the separator via the self-venting drain in
into the collection bowl. the bottom of the bowl.
4-6
d. Close and securely tighten the petcock. b. Read the lube oil level on the dipstick.
NOTE
WARNING
Normal lube oil system capacity is 3.5
gallons (13.2 liters).
c. If the oil level is normal, go to step e.
d. If the lube oil level is low, add additional lube oil to

bring the level up to normal in accordance with para-
graph 4-4.1.2.
e. Replace the dipstick in the dipstick tube.
4-4.1.2 Adding Lube Oil To The Engine. To add lube

oil to the engine, accomplish the following procedure:
a. Remove the lube oil system fill cap on top of the

engine.
e. Dispose of contaminated fuel and rags in accor-
dance with the current guideline policy. b. Add lube oil to the engine. Engine oil level is speci-
fied in table 4-2 and in the Cummins engine technical
4-3.4.2 Fuel Element Inspection. Inspect the 10-mi- manual listed in table 1-2.
cron element for debris by observation through the clear
outer cylinder. c. Perform a check of the lube oil level by following
the procedure in paragraph 4-4.1.1.
If debris is present the element must be replaced.
Operation of the engine with a clogged filter will pre- d. Continue to add lube oil and check level until a
vent the proper fuel flow to the engine and damage or satisfactory level is obtained.
seizure of the fuel injection pump will result.
e. Replace the lube oil fill cap on top of the engine.
Replace the 10-micron fuel element filter and O-rings
using the procedure provided in chapter 6. f. Wipe up any excess oil around the fill cap.
4-4 FLUID LEVELS. 4-4.2 CHECKING THE LUBE OIL IN THE MA-
RINE GEAR. Run the engine at idle until oil tempera-
All machinery systems fluid levels shall be checked ture reaches the normal operating range. Continue run-
prior to operation. Refer to tables 4-2, 4-3, and 4-4 for ning at idle with the marine gear in NEUTRAL and
fluid requirements and quantities. check the oil level with the dipstick. Level should be at
the full mark on the dipstick.
4-4.1 ENGINE LUBE OIL.
Add or remove oil as necessary to bring the oil to the
4-4.1.1 Checking The Oil In The Engine. Check the full mark on the dipstick.
lubricating oil level in the engine as follows:
4-4.3 ADDING FRESHWATER COOLANT TO
a. Withdraw the engine lube oil sump dipstick, located THE ENGINE. To add freshwater coolant to the en-
on the right side of the engine facing aft, from the dip- gine, proceed as follows:
stick tube.
4-7
Table 4-2. Fluid Level Requirements
Fluid Desired Level
Engine Oil ...................................................................................... FULL mark on dipstick.

Coolant ........................................................................................... 2 inches (50.8 mm) above the bottom of
the coolant recovery bottle
Marine Gear Oil ............................................................................. FULL mark on dipstick
Waterjet Steering Hydraulic Oil ..................................................... FULL mark on dipstick, within 1-inch of
top of reservoir
Table 4-3. Acceptable Fluids
Equipment Acceptable Fluid
Engine .................................................................................. Multi-Viscosity meeting Cummins Engineering

Standard (CES) i.e. 15W40, 20071, 20072,
or API CH-4
Engine Slide Cam Tappets ................................................... Category SG, SH, or SJ
Marine Gear ........................................................................ Motor Oil HD-30
Waterjet Steering Hydraulic Cylinder .................................. MIL-H-5606C or equivalent
Waterjet Reversing Bucket
Hydraulic Cylinder ............................................................... Dexron III
Table 4-4. Pressure, Temperatures, and Fluid Requirements
Item Data
Engine Lubricating system

Oil Type ............................................................................................ SAE 15W-40
Normal Operating Pressure Range .................................................. 30 psi to 65 psi (207 kPa to 448 kPa)
Oil Pressure
Low Idle (min.) ............................................................................. 10 psi (69 kPa)
Rate Speed (min.) ......................................................................... 30 psi (207 kPa)
Oil Temp (max.) ............................................................................... 250°F (120°C)
Coolant System
Modulated Thermostat Range (Standard) ........................................ 160°F to 185°F (71°C to 85°C)
Coolant Capacity .............................................................................. 5.4 gallons (20.6 liters)
Normal Temp Range ........................................................................ 181°F to 203°F (83°C to 95°C)
Coolant Temp (max.) ........................................................................ 205°F (96°C)
Pressure Cap (min.) ......................................................................... 15 psi (103 kPa)
Steering System
Hydraulic Fluid Type ......................................................................... MIL-H-5606C or equivalent
4-8
b. If the strainer basket requires cleaning, or cannot
WARNING be viewed because of cloudiness, refer to chapter 6
for the cleaning procedure.
Never open the cap on the engine 4-5.2 SEAWATER SUPPLY.

freshwater cooling system when the
engine is hot or has been recently run.
The system may be pressurized and ! CAUTION
contain coolant at temperatures which
will cause severe burns. The seawater strainer and hose to the
engine seawater pump should be full
of water whenever the boat is
! CAUTION launched and the engine is started prior
to reaching the water. A continuous
The engine shall not be running when supply of water should flow through
checking/adding coolant to the engine the engine whenever it is operating.
freshwater cooling system.
A continuous supply of water should flow through the
a. Open the fill cap on the engine expansion tank. engine whenever it is operated. An absence of water
will cause the impeller in the engine’s seawater pump
b. Add coolant to the engine freshwater expansion to seize up, engine damage, and exhaust piping failure.
tank fill cap until the level is at the bottom of the fill cap Whenever the boat is started, the seawater system
neck. should be full. Attach a water hose to the fill/flush
connection and fill the seawater strainer and seawater
c. Replace the fill cap on the expansion tank. system. Ensure the freshwater flush connection valve
is closed and the sea cock is open when the boat is
d. Observe the coolant level in the coolant recovery launched.
bottle. The plastic bottle is located on the front of the
engine. 4-6 BILGE PUMPING SYSTEMS.
e. The coolant level should be at the normal mark

for a cold engine. WARNING
f. If the fluid level is below the normal mark, open
the cap on the top of the recovery bottle. Add coolant
to the recovery bottle to bring the fluid level to the
normal mark.
g. Replace the cap on the coolant recovery bottle.
4-5 SEAWATER SYSTEM.
4-5.1 SEAWATER STRAINER. Inspect the sea-

water strainer prior to operation using the following
procedure:
a. Check the cleanliness of the seawater strainer by

viewing the strainer basket through the clear strainer
cylinder. 4-6.1 ELECTRIC BILGE PUMP. The boat is
equipped with two electric bilge pumps. The pumps
are wired for manual or automatic operation.
4-9
a. To check for proper automatic operation of the 4-8 INFLATABLE COLLAR.
float switches and pumps proceed as follows:
1. Place and hold each control panel bilge pump

! CAUTION
switch in the MANUAL (down) position.
The inflatable collar must be properly
2. Verify operation of each bilge pump. Each inflated at all times; if not damage to
red LED lamp should illuminate. the inflatable collar can result from
over or under inflation. Do not use a
3. Place each control switch in the AUTO (up) pressurized system; a manual tube in-
position. flation pump must be the only means
used to inflate the port and starboard
4. At each bilge pump, raise and lower the float collar compartments.
switch by hand.
Using the manual pump, ensure that the port and star-
5. Each pump should cycle on when the float is board chambers are properly inflated to 3 psi (21 kPa).
raised to approximately 2 1/2-inches or greater and Check daily and prior to operation. Inspect each valve
cycle off when the float is lowered to approximately to ensure that they are tight in the base. Ensure that
1 1/4-inch or less. the valve covers are in place and securely fastened to
the valve.
b. Each bilge pump switch should be in the AUTO
position for boat afloat operation. 4-9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
4-6.2 HAND-OPERATED BILGE PUMP. Check 4-9.1 BATTERY BANK VOLTAGE AND
the hand-operated bilge pump and its suction and dis- GAUGE LIGHTING.
charge hoses for obvious damage. Ensure the bilge in
the area of the suction hose is free of debris. Verify a. Close the battery disconnect switch. Refer to table
that the pump handle is properly stowed. 4-5 for battery bank selector switch settings.
4-7 STEERING SYSTEM. b. Toggle the engine start switch to the ON position.
Operate the steering wheel and check the movement c. Check for at least a 24Vdc reading on the
of the outboard engines for excessive backlash or bind- SmartCraft instrument control console voltmeters.
ing. The steering wheel should not move over 10° with-
out moving the engines. Ensure all tie bar connections d. Verify that the instrument background lights will
are secure. illuminate.
e. Operate the dimmer control to ensure the lighting

level can be adjusted.
Table 4-5. Battery Bank Selector Switch Settings
Ship Service Master Switch Boat Electrical System Operation Engine Battery Master Switch
Position: OFF System Secured Position: OFF

Position: 1 STBD BAT Normal Operation Position: 1 PORT BAT
Position: 2 PORT BAT Alternate Operation Position: 2 STBD BAT
Position: BOTH Parallel Operations Position: BOTH
4-10
4-9.2 NAVIGATION LIGHTS AND HORN. d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the de-
sired level. When OFF is selected, the lamp is extin-
a. Operate the navigation lights switch in the AN- guished.
CHOR and RUNNING positions to verify operation
of the lights. e. Press the ENT key to store the selected level.
b. Toggle the momentary horn switch to check the f. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation
horn operation. mode press the 16/9 key.
4-9.3 SHORE POWER. Ensure the shore power 4-11.2 LCD CONTRAST. This selection sets up the
cable is disconnected, the shore power receptacle cap display for best view ability for the varying mounting
is tightly secured and the cable is properly stowed prior locations.
to getting underway.
a. Press and hold down the CALL(MENU) key un-
4-10 ELECTRONICS AND FORCE PROTEC- til Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appears.
TION (SECURITY) PACKAGE.
b. Press the ENT key, then select CONTRAST (fig-
The security package provides visual and audible meth- ure 4-3) in the Radio Setup menu with the Channel
ods that allow the boat to be identified as conducting Selector knob.
special operations.
USA
01
4-11 RADIO SETUP. DIMMER
>CONTRAST
TIME SET
4-11.1 LAMP ADJUSTING. Allows setting up the TIME DISP A
backlight intensity or to turn it off.
Figure 4-3. Dimmer Contrast
til the Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appears. c. Press the ENT key.
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the de-
01
USA
sired level. The contrast level can be set from 00 to
> RADIO SETUP
DSC SETUP 31.
EXIT A
e. Press the ENT key to store the selected level.

Figure 4-1. Radio Setup Menu
f. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation
mode press the 16/9 key.
b. Press the ENT key, then select DIMMER (figure
4-2) in the Radio Setup menu with the Channel selec-
4-11.3 TIME OFFSET. This function sets the time
tor knob.
offset between local time and UTC. Time is displayed
when GPS position (LAT/LONG) is displayed by press
USA the F key followed by the 6 (NAV) key.
01
>DIMMER
CONTRAST
TIME SET
A
a. Press and hold down the CALL (MENU) key un-
TIME DISP
til the Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appears.
Figure 4-2. Dimmer Menu
b. Press the ENT key, then select TIME SET (fig-
c. Press the ENT key. ure 4-4) in the Radio Setup menu with the Channel
Selector knob.
4-11
USA USA
01 01
DIMMER
TIME DISP
CONTRAST
>UTC
>TIME SET
A LOCAL A
TIME DISP
Figure 4-4. Time Set Figure 4-7. Time Display UTC
c. Press the ENT key. e. Press the ENT key to store the selected setting.
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the time f. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation
offset from UTC (figure 4-5). mode press the 16/9 key.
USA
In the local time mode, the display shows the time by
01
TIME SET the 12-hour system (figure 4-8). The display shows
the time by the 24-hour system in the UTC mode (fig-
0:00 A ure 4-9).
Figure 4-5. Time Offset Display

BUSY USA
01
8:45PM
e. Press the ENT key to store the time offset. 15KTS 160°T
33°37.120N
A
118°09.582W
mode press the 16/9 key. Figure 4-8. Local Mode Display
4-11.4 TIME LOCATION. This function selects the

BUSY USA
01
time display between local time and UTC. Time is 20:45PM
displayed when GPS position (LAT/LONG) is displayed 15KTS 160°T
33°37.120N
by pressing the F key followed by the 6(NAV) key. 118°09.582W
A
a. Press and hold down the CALL(MENU) key un- Figure 4-9. UTC Mode Display
til Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appears.
4-11.5 TRUE AND MAGNETIC CHANGE. This
b. Press the ENT key, then elect TIME DISP. (fig- function allows customizing the GPS Course-Over-
ure 4-6) in the Radio Setup menu with the Channel Ground (COG) displayed on the LCD to be in True or
selector knob. Magnetic.

USA
01
DIMMER til Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appears.
CONTRAST
TIME SET
>TIME DISP A b. Press the ENT key, then select MAGNETIC (fig-
ure 4-10) in the Radio Setup menu with the Channel
Figure 4-6. Time Display Selector knob.
c. Press the ENT key.

USA
01
CONTRAST
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select UTC or TIME SET
TIME DISP
LOCAL (figure 4-7). >MAGNETIC A
Figure 4-10. Magnetic Display
4-12
c. Press the ENT key. f. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select ON (rep-
resenting Magnetic) or OFF (represending True) (fig- 4-11.7 SCAN TYPE. This selection selects the scan
ure 4-11). mode between Memory Scan and Priority Scan.
a. Press and hold down the CALL (MENU) key un-

USA
01
MAGNETIC
>ON
OFF A b. Press the ENT key, then select SCAN TYPE (Fig-
ure 4-14) in the Radio Setup menu with the Channel
Figure 4-11. Magnetic ON Display selector knob.
e. Press the ENT key to store the selected setting.

USA
01
TIME DISP
f. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation MAGNETIC
PRIORITY CH
mode press the 16/9 key. >SCAN TYPE A
4-11.6 PRIORITY CHANNEL SET. Allows selec- Figure 4-14. Scan Type
tion of the priority channel.
til RADIO STEP menu (figure 4-1) appears. d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select Priority
or Memory (figure 4-15).
b. Press the ENT key, then select PRIORITY CH
(figure 4-12) in the Radio Setup menu with the Chan- USA
01
nel Selector knob. SCAN TYPE
>PRIORITY
MEMORY A
USA
01
TIME SET
TIME DISP Figure 4-15. Priority Scan Type
MAGNETIC
A
>PRIORITY CH
Figure 4-12. Priority Channel
c. Press the ENT key. mode press the 16/9 key.
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the chan- 4-11.8 SCAN RESUME TIME. This function is used
nel to be a priority (figure 4-13). to select the time the radio waits after a transmission
ends before starting scanning.
USA
01
PRIORITY CH
16 A
b. Press the ENT key, then select SCAN RESUME
Figure 4-13. Priority Channel Selection (figure 4-16) in the Radio Setup menu with the Chan-
nel Selector knob.
4-13
USA
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select ON or
01
MAGNETIC OFF (figure 4-19).
PRIORITY CH
SCAN TYPE
A
>SCAN RESUME USA
01
KEY BEEP
Figure 4-16. Scan Resume >ON
OFF A
Figure 4-19. Key Beep On/Off
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the de-
sired resume time. The resume time can be set to 1 e. Press the ENT key to set the key beep condition.
sec, 2 sec, 3 sec, or OFF. In the OFF selection, the
scanner will resume after the other station stops trans- f. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation
mitting (figure 4-17). mode press the 16/9 key.
USA
NOTE
01
SCAN RESUME
>OFF Emergency alarm and beeps for DSC
1 SEC
2 SEC
A operation cannot be turned OFF.
Figure 4-17. Scan Resume Off 4-11.10 WX ALERT. This function allows the radio’s
NOAA Weather alert to be turned on or off. Default
e. Press the ENT key to store the selected setting. setting is ON.
f. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation a. Press and hold down the CALL(MENU) key un-
mode press the 16/9 key. til the Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appears.
4-11.9 KEY BEEP. This function allows the beep b. Press the ENT key, then select WX ALERT (fig-
tone when a key is pressed to be turned on or off. ure 4-20) in the Radio Setup menu with the Channel
Selector knob.
USA
01
SCAN TYPE
b. Press the ENT key, then select KEY BEEP (fig- SCAN RESUME
KEY BEEP
ure 4-18) in the Radio Setup menu with the Channel >WX ALERT A
Selector knob.
Figure 4-20. WX Alert Display
USA
01
PRIORITY CH c. Press the ENT key.
SCAN TYPE
SCAN RESUME
>KEY BEEP
A d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the de-
sired WX alert mode. The WX alert mode can be set
Figure 4-18. Key Beep Display to ON WX, ON SCAN, ON SCAN/WX or OFF (fig-
ure 4-21).
4-14
USA
g. Repeat step f and g until the name is complete
01
WX ALERT (figure 4-24). The name can consist of up to 12 char-
>OFF acters. If all 12 characters are not used, press the
ON WX
ON SCAN A ENT key to move to the next space. This method can
also be used to enter a blank space in the name. To
Figure 4-21. WX Alert OFF clear the previous letter, press the CLR key.

USA
68
CH NAME
mode press the 16/9 key. VERTEX
4-11.11 CHANNEL NAME CHANGE. This func- Figure 4-24. Channel Name Vertex
tion allows the naming of a channel from the default
name. h. Press and hold the ENT key to enter the name
and exit from the CH NAME menu. The LCD will
a. Press and hodl down the CALL(MENU) key un- return to the Radio Setup menu.
i. To enter the name of another channel, select
b. Press the ENT key, then select CH NAME (fig- NEXT then press the ENT key. Otherwise, select
ure 4-22) in the Radio Setup menu with the Channel EXIT then press the ENT key.
Selector knob.
j. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation
USA
01
SCAN RESUME
KEY BEEP 4-11.12 NAVNET DISPLAY UNIT.
WX ALERT
>CH NAME A
Figure 4-22. Channel Name Menu WARNING

The NavNet display unit is a naviga-
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the chan- tional tool that must be used in con-
nel to be named, then press the ENT key. junction with current charts for the
area of operation, visual checks, and
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob to scroll through common safe navigation practices.
the first letter of the channel name (figure 4-23). Failure to use all navigation tools and
aids could result in damage to the boat,
USA
other boats, and injury to personnel.
68
CH NAME
The NavNet display unit (figure 4-25) is a powerful
SHIP-SHIP navigation tool that will assist in confirming the boat’s
location using radar and GPS data. With the addition
Figure 4-23. Channel Name SHIP-SHIP of the depth sounder data, the coxswain will be able to
confirm bottom conditions and possibly make identifi-
f. Press the ENT key to store the first letter in the cation of items that are located on the bottom. This
name and step to the next letter to the right . information will assist the coxswain in making informed
decisions concerning the safe navigation of the boat.
4-15
The procedures to access and store information in the
ALARM NavNet display unit will differ depending on the menu
DISPLAY options. Consult the manufacturer’s manual listed in
TRACKBALL
SAVE/MOB CLEAR table 1-2 to determine the special features and detailed
MENU procedures to operate the NavNet display unit installed
ENTER on the boat.
KNOB
4-11.12.1 Keypad. The 10 labeled keys are follows:
SOFT KEYS ABC
1
JKL
4
DEF
2
MNO
GHI
3
PQR
DISPLAY
5 6
STU VWX YZ&

7 8 9
a. POWER/BRILL. A long press of the key turns

_‘#
0
GAIN
EBL/VRM the display power on or off.
POWER/
BRILL
A sequence of start-up screens will be displayed, when
CHART
HIDE/SHOW DRIVE the unit is turned on. A start-up unit check will be
automatically run to test the ROM, RAM, internal bat-
Figure 4-25. NavNet Display Unit tery, and backup data for proper operation. The re-
sults for each test will be displayed as OK or NG (No
The radar, GPS, and depth sounder data are integrated Good). If NG appears, perform the diagnostic test.
and displayed on the NavNet display unit. Refer to the operators manual. The unit will show the
last-used display after several seconds.
The radar system is mainly operated using the controls
on the NavNet display unit. The control pad (figure NOTE
4-26) consists of 10 labeled keys, five soft keys, an
enter knob, a cursor pad and a NavNet chart slot. The magnetron in the antenna unit
Whenever a key is pressed, a single beep confirms takes about one minute and thirty sec-
correct operation. Invalid operation causes the unit to onds to warm up before the radar can
sound three beeps. be operated. The time remaining for
warm up of the magnetron appears at
the center of the display, counting
down from 1:30 to 0:01.
DISP
Any time power is applied after a memory reset, the
SAVE
MOB
display provides the option of simulated operation of
the equipment. Push the ENTER knob to start the
ALARM CLEAR MENU
simulation mode, or press the CLEAR key to start nor-
mal operation.
RANGE
ABC DEF GHI To turn the unit off, press and hold the POWER/BRILL
1 2 3
key until the screen goes dark (approximately 3 sec-
JKL MNO PQR
4 5 6 onds). The network sounder will be turned off ap-
STU VWX YZ& proximately three minutes after turning off the display
7 8 9
unit power.
EBL _‘# GAIN
HIDE VRM
0
SHOW
POWER When the POWER/BRILL key is momentarily pressed
BRILL
a set of soft keys for adjustment of brilliance, contrast,
and hue appear. The last-used adjustment window
appears.
Figure 4-26. NavNet Display Control Panel

4-16
NOTE h. Electronic Bearing Lines/Variable Range Mark-
ers. Pressing this key displays the five Electronic Bear-
The brilliance of the LCD is adjusting Line (EBL) and Variable Range Marker (VRM)
able to match a wide variety of light- soft keys. These keys are an offset key, two EBL op-
ing conditions. However, the maxi- tion keys and two VRM option keys.
mum setting may not be sufficiently
bright to permit viewing the display i. GAIN. This key will provide either a sensitivity
with polarized sunglasses. adjustment of the radar receiver when the display unit
is in the radar screen mode or a sensitivity adjustment
b. DISP. Pressing the DISP (Display) key will show of the depth sounder when in the depth video display
icons for basic display screens and hot pages mode.
(arrangeable user displays) for operator selection.
Table 4-6 provides the screen type and display screens j. HIDE/SHOW. Depending upon the screen dis-
available. When a basic display screen is selected, a play mode in use, this key will hide or show soft keys
follow screen is shown with the icons for a set of com- or function keys.
bination display screens which correspond to the se-
lected basic display screen. 4-11.12.2 Soft Keys. Five soft keys are provided
along the right edge of the display. Label boxes on the
c. SAVE/MOB. Momentarily pressing this key reg- display to the left of the soft keys are associated with
isters the boat’s position as a waypoint. Pressing the these keys which provide various functions depending
key for three seconds or more marks the Man Over- upon the unit operating mode and screen display in use.
board (MOB) position. The soft keys are initially set to provide default opera-
tions. The operator may change these default settings
d. ALARM. This key opens or closes the alarm from an extensive choice supplied with the unit in pull-
menu. down menus. Pressing the HIDE/SHOW key will re-
move the soft key labels from the display screen.
e. CLEAR. This key clears data or erases a se-
lected mark. The menu of NavNet display functions available for
soft keys is provided in table 4-6. The default soft key
f. MENU. This key opens or closes the main dis- number for the NavNet display functions are listed.
play menu.
The menu of plotter display function soft keys are listed
g. RANGE. The RANGE key + or - will change the in table 4-7. The default soft key numbers for the
range scale which determines the size of the area, in NavNet plotter functions are listed.
nautical miles, displayed on the screen. The range set-
ting will also automatically adjust the range ring inter- The menu of sounder display function soft keys are
val. The range, range ring interval, and pulse length listed in table 4-8. The default soft key numbers for
appear at the top left-hand corner of the display. The the NavNet sounder display functions are listed.
maximum range setting for this equipment is 24 nmi.
Table 4-6. Screen Type and Display Screens

FULL COMBINATION OVERLAY
SCREEN SCREEN SCREEN
Radar Radar Radar plus Plotter
Plotter Plotter
Depth Sounder Depth Sounder
Nav. Data Compass/Highway
Nav. Data
Overlay
4-17
Table 4-7. Radar Function Soft Keys
Menu Item Soft Key Label Function Default Key No.
OFF -- Assigns no function.

HDG LINE OFF HL Turns heading line off. #1
MODE MOD Selects presentation mode.
GAIN GAI Shows gain sensitivity adjustment window.
A/C SEA SEA Shows manual or A/C SEA adjustment window.
A/C RAIN RAI Shows A/C RAIN adjustment window.
FTC FTC Displays FTC window. Adjust FTC with the
ENTER knob.
ECHO STRETCH ES Turns echo on/off.
PULSE LENGTH PLS Sets pulse length (long or short).
ZOOM ZOM Turns zoom on/off.
OFF CENTER SFT Press to shift display center to cursor location. #4
Press again to turn shift off and return cursor
to display center.
ECHO TRAIL TRL Starts/stops echo trails. #3

RINGS ON/OFF RNG Turns range rings on/off. #2
TLL OUTPUT TLL Outputs cursor position, in NMEA format, to
navigator.
GUARD ALARM ALM Displays alarm soft keys.
EBL EBL Switches control between EBL1 and EBL2
with each press.
VRM VRM Switches control between VRM 1 and VRM2
with each press.
TTM ON/OFF TTM Turns TTM (Tracked Target Message) data
on/off.
WPT ON/OFF WMK Turns waypoint marker on/off.
WATCHMAN WTM Turns watchman on/off.
ACQUISITION ACQ Acquires and tracks cursor-selected target.
(Not available on this NavNet unit)
STBY/TX TX Toggles between standby and transmit.
RADAR SOURCE RSR Selects source for radar picture. #5
D. BOX ON/OFF DBX Turns data boxes on/off.
CHANGE CNTRL CHG Changes display control in combination screen.
Note: When selecting CHG on a display, use the
same soft key number on all display for CHG.
4-18
Table 4-8. Plotter Function Soft Keys
Menu Item Soft Key Label Function Default Key No.

OFF --- Assigns no function.
ADD NEW WPT ADD Registers waypoint at cursor position. Place #4
cursor for waypoint location then press the
function key.
MOVE WPT MWP Moves selected waypoint to different position.
Select waypoint then press function key.
RULER RUL Measures range and bearing between two #3
points. Press START POINT soft key to
change starting point if necessary. Range and
bearing between two points appears at the top
of the screen.
GOTO WPT GWP Specify waypoint to set as destination. Enter
number in window and press the ENTER soft
key.
GOTO ROUTE GRT Specify route to follow. Enter number in the
window and press the ENTER soft key.
EDIT MK/LINE EML Displays mark & line menu. Press appropriate #2
soft key to access menu item.
TRACK ON/OFF TRK Each pressing stops or starts recording of #1
own ship track.
TTM ON/OFF TTM Turns TTM (target track) displays on/off.
DEL TGT TRACK DTT Erases all TTM track.
ALPHA LIST ALP Displays waypoint alphanumeric list. #5
LOCAL LIST LCL Displays waypoint local list.
ROUTE LIST RTE Displays route list.
D.BOX ON/OFF DBX Shows/hides data boxes.
CHANGE CNTRL CHG Changes display control in combination screen.
Note: When selecting CHG on a display, use the
same soft key number on all display for CHG.
4-19
4-11.12.3 ENTER Knob. The knob has two modes d. Place the siren/PA rotary knob in each siren posi-
of operation. Pushing the knob registers the selection tion and ensure that all tones are audible.
indicated on the display screen. Rotation of the knob
is used to select alphanumeric characters, adjust 1. The WAIL position produces a steady rise and
sounder or radar sensitivity, and choose menu items fall tone.
and function options.
2. The YELP position produces a fast rise and
4-11.12.4 Cursor Pad. The cursor pad mainly func- fall tone.
tions to move the display cursor across the screen for
measurement of range and bearing to a location when 3. The TONE 3 position produces a piercing tone,
in the radar mode or to a latitude and longitude position which is an extremely fast rise and fall tone.
when in the plotter mode. The cursor moves in the
direction of the arrow or diagonal corresponding to what 4. While the TONE 3 signal is operating, toggle
is pressed on the cursor pad. When using chart cards the Airhorn switch to the A/H position. A simulated
the cursor is used to display chart data by positioning it airhorn tone will be produced that overrides the TONE
over the chart symbol, port service icon, current or tide 3 signal. The airhorn signal will terminate when the
icon, or caution areas. toggle switch is released. Refer to the owner’s manual
listed in table 1-2 for additional operating instructions.
4-11.12.5 Chart Slot. Furuno, Nav-Chart, or C-MAP
chart cards may be used in the NavNet to display chart 4-11.15 STROBE LIGHT BAR. The strobe light bar
graphic data. Chart icons appear at the top of the will flash a minimum of 75 flashes per minute to pro-
screen, which advise if the proper chart has been se- vide a visual indicator that the boat is conducting spe-
lected or if the display unit range scale is too large or cial operations.
small.
a. Place the strobe light circuit breaker switch to the
4-11.12.6 Remote Controller. The NavNet remote ON position.
controller performs many of the same functions as the
display panel controls. The range of the controller is b. Ensure that the strobe light bar is operating and
nominally around 16-feet (5-meters). If the range de- the flashes are visible for 360°.
creases, replace the batteries in the unit.
c. Secure the strobe light circuit breaker switch.
4-11.13 MAGNETIC COMPASS. The magnetic
compass can be used at the coxswain’s discretion, for 4-11.16 SEARCHLIGHT. The searchlight may be
a check of electronic systems or in the event of a loss used to attract the attention of another vessel, and/or
of GPS data. assist with the identification of navigation aids
(NAVAIDS) and/or objects in the water.
4-11.14 SIREN/PA SYSTEM. The PA system will al-
low clear and concise instructions to be given to vessel a. Place the searchlight circuit breaker to the ON
crews at a distance. position.
a. Place the rotary switch on the control head to the b. Using the console remote controls, rotate the
PA position. searchlight from each station to ensure freedom of
movement and verify that light and controls are opera-
b. Hold the microphone approximately one to two tional.
inches from the mouth, press the PTT button and speak
slowly and clearly to test the volume strength of the c. Secure the searchlight circuit breaker switch.
PA system.
c. Adjust volume as necessary.
4-20
Section III.
OPERATIONS
4-12 NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURES. d. Ensure the throttle control/shift lever is in the NEU-
TRAL position.
4-12.1 ENGINE STARTING. To start the engine,
proceed as follows: e. Place the engine throttle control lever in the IDLE
position.
WARNING f. Place the engine power switch in the ON position

and verify the operation of the Diesel View display.
To prevent injury when starting the g. Wait for 30 seconds with the engine power switch
engine while the boat is in a boat skid in the ON position to allow the fuel transfer pump to
or on the trailer, ensure personnel are pressurize the system.
clear of the exhaust outlet at the stern
of the boat.
WARNING
! CAUTION
To prevent injury or death from an
The throttle selector shall be in the explosion, do not use starting aids, such
IDLE and NEUTRAL position prior as ether.
to any attempt to start the engines.
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
Do not rapidly increase engine speed
Do not engage the waterjet while the immediately after starting. Cold oil will
boat is in a boat skid or on the trailer not flow rapidly and oil starvation to
to avoid damage to the drive unit. critical engine components may result.
a. Ensure all preoperational checks have been satis- h. Push and hold the engine button until the engine
factorily completed. starts. Do not exceed 30 seconds.
NOTE
! CAUTION
The engine will not start until the ECM
Ensure the engine is receiving fresh detects the minimum cranking oil pres-
water coolant through the freshwater sure. Longer cranking time to start
hose connection when starting the boat the engine can occur after an extended
in the boat skid or on the trailer. shut down or oil change.
b. Ensure the engine battery master switch on the i. Wait at least two minutes between each attempt
engine compartment 24Vdc panel is in the ON posi- to start the engine.
tion.
j. If the engine does not start after four attempts or
c. Verify that all breakers on the console switch panel it starts, but does not run properly, refer to section VI
are in the ON position. for troubleshooting guide.
4-21
k. Immediately after the engine starts, check the en- 4-12.3 STARTING THE DIESEL VIEW. The Die-
gine oil pressure gauge on the control console. If low sel View display will show a series of five start-up
or no oil pressure is observed after 15 seconds of op- screens (figure 4-27) when the engine power switch is
eration, stop the engine and recheck the engine lube oil placed in the ON position.
system. Refer to troubleshooting procedures in sec-
tion VI.
l. When the engine is idling smoothly and all gauges, Cum

min
s
alarms, and indicator displays are normal, advance the DIESEL VIEW DISPLAYS SERVICE REMINDERS BASED
throttle until engine speed is between 900 and 1200

ONLY ON ACCUMULATED ENGINE HOURS. IT DOES NOT
PROVIDE SERVICES REMINDERS BASED ON THE PASSAGE
Smart Craft OF TIME (E..C. ANNUAL CHECKS).
DIESEL VIEW
rpm. PLEASE REFER TO YOUR OWNERS MANUAL FOR A
COMPLETE REVIEW OF NECESSARY ROUTINE
MAINTENANCE.
CONTRAST
►
m. Allow the engine to warm-up at this throttle rpm SELECT TO PAUSE
setting for 3 to 5 minutes.
STBD RUN-TIME 5 HRS 01 MIN
PORT RUN-TIME
n. When the engine temperature has reached nor- TOTAL FUEL
3 HRS 16 MIN
0.0 GAL
mal operating range, as indicated on the control con- DIESEL VIEW NAVIGATION AND DEPTH PAGES ARE TO BE
USED AS AID TO NAVIGATION AND ARE A REFERENCE
FRESHWATER #1 0%
AIR TEMP
sole gauge, return the throttle to the IDLE position. ONLY.
A CAREFUL NAVIGATION NEVER RELIES ON A SINGLE

78 °F
METHOD TO OBTAIN POSITION INFORMATION. USE ALL
SELECT TO PAUSE
AVAILABLE INFORMATION FROM NAVAIDS, VISUAL
SIGHTINGS, AND CHARTS.
4-12.2 DRIVE SYSTEM CHECK.

FOR SAFETY, ALWAYS RESOLVE ANY DISCREPANCIES
BEFORE PROCEEDING.
SELECT = ACCEPT 3:08 PM

RPM 0
0 RPM
WARNING
► FAVORITES PROPULSION VESSEL
Alert crew and passengers to expect NAV-FUEL SETTINGS SYSTEM
movement of the boat prior to initiat-

ing a drive system check.
Figure 4-27. Diesel View Display Start-Up Screens
a. Check mooring lines to ensure the boat is made
The start-up screens will normally end at the Home
fast to the pier. Check engine and waterjet by placing
Page. To change this ending point or for setting/cali-
the control lever into the AHEAD position and advanc-
bration procedures refer to the manufacturer’s manual
ing the engine control lever until the tachometer indi-
listed in table 1-2.
cates approximately 850-900 rpm. Check mooring lines
for strain and that waterjet wake is aft.
The Diesel View display uses icons and text selection
to perform all of the functions. The key pad includes a
b. Return the engine control lever to NEUTRAL.
trackpad with a select key and a home key.
When engine speed is in the low idle range (750 rpm)
lower the waterjet reversing bucket. Increase engine
a. The ARROW TRACKPAD controls up and down
speed to approximately 850-900 rpm. Observe moor-
and side-to-side movement for on-screen function
ing lines for proper direction of strain; ensure the
prompts.
waterjet wake is directed forward under the transom.
b. The SELECT key is used to select screen options
c. Return the engine control lever to NEUTRAL and
and confirm data entry.
the waterjet reversing bucket to the UP position. The
engine is now ready to answer engine orders.
c. The HOME key returns the display to the Home
Page, and functions as an ON/OFF switch for the Die-
sel View if the engine power switch is not used.
4-22
4-12.3.1 Diesel View Home Page. The Home Page 2. Propulsion.
(figure 4-28) is divided into upper and lower sections.
Use the track pad to highlight a parameter on the up- 3. Vessel.
per section or directory on the lower section. Press
the Select key to accept the selection and change the 4. Fuel.
screen.
5. Settings.
8
7 9 3 4 5 6. System.
6
3:08 PM
RPM ENG 72 2 Selecting any one of these directories will bring up a

ºF data display screen for that directory.
FAVORITES PROPULSION VESSEL
4-12.3.2 Data Display Screen. The data display screen
(figure 4-29) will appear when a directory is selected
NAV-FUEL SETTINGS SYSTEM
1 2
from the home page. The current directory menu icon
is displayed in the upper left corner of the display. A
ENGINE DATA window located at the bottom of the screen will dis-
RPM play pertinent information. When a problem is detected,
COOL TEMP
OIL PRESS the name of the offending alarm will appear in the in-
ENGINE OIL TEMP
BATT VOLT
formation window. The bottom left operation status
MAN TEMP box will change from a check to a flashing bell symbol.
INST FUEL
BOOST The bell symbol will continue to flash as long as the
PERCENT THROTTLE alarm condition exists. If there are multiple alarms,
PERCENT LOAD
BARO PRESS these will cycle on the display screen.
GEAR OIL PRESS
GEAR OIL TEMP
1 - ENGINE LINE 1. 8:15 AM

2 - ENGINE LINE 2. SENSOR
3 - ENGINE SYNCHRONIZATION INDICATOR.
4 - CRUISE 1, CRUISE 2. 0.0 SPEED
MPH
SENDING
SIGNAL
5 - CLOCK. PEAK SPEED AT RPM
6 - FLASHING BELL ICON - WARNING ALARM IS ACTIVATED. 0
7 - FLASHING FUEL ICON - LOW FUEL ALARM.
8 - SLOW IDLE INDICATOR.
AT PEAK
SPEED 0.0 MPH
►
► CHANGE PAGE
9 - VESSEL DATA.
Figure 4-28. Diesel View Display Home Page

Figure 4-29. Diesel View Data Display Screen
a. The top section of the home page displays engine
data and vessel data. The data is received from sen- 4-12.3.3 Propulsion Data Screens.
sors on the engine and from sensors installed on other
vessel equipment. a. The ENGINE RPM/SPEED screen (figure 4-30)
is selected from the propulsion directory and displays
The initial screen layout and default parameters that the engine rpm and the boat speed. The speed sensor
are displayed are configured during setup. Defaults sending the signal to the Diesel View is displayed in
for the engine data include engine rpm and engine tem- the window. The speed sensor is automatically se-
perature. Default for vessel data is water depth. lected based on what sensors are available.
b. There are six directories located across the bot- b. The PEAK SPEED AT RPM screen (figure
tom section of the home page. They are: 4-31) records the top speed the boat reaches and as-
sociated engine rpm as measured since the last reset.
1. Favorite. To reset the peak speed and corresponding rpm, press
and hold the Select button momentarily.
4-23
DIRECTORY MENU ENGINE TEMP FUEL FLOW
INDICATOR ICON
°F GPH
PM
PROPULSION 3:09 L
0.0 H L
0.0 H
AIR F
78 8:15 AM
VESSEL
550 RPM
BATTERY
DISPLAY OIL PRESSURE
SCREEN PSI
NAV-FUEL L
0.0 H L
0.0 H
SETTINGS 0.0 SPEED

MPH
SYSTEM ►
% LOAD
►
ALARM NOTICE INFORMATION

L
0.0 H L
0.0 H
CHANGE PAGE
►
►
WINDOW % THROTTLE
BOOST PRESSURE
ALARM NOTICE
L
0.0 H L
0.0 H NOTE: SCREEN DISPLAYS
NORMAL OPERATION FOUR PARAMETERS ON
A PAGE.
Figure 4-30. Diesel View Engine
RPM/Speed Screen Figure 4-32. Diesel View Engine Data Screens
3. ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE – Displays

3:09 PM current temperature of engine lubricating oil. The tem-
perature will vary depending on engine speed, engine
0 RPM
SENSOR
SENDING
load and coolant temperature.
0.0 SPEED
MPH
SIGNAL
4. BATTERY VOLTAGE – Displays voltage
►
► CHANGE PAGE
level (condition) of the battery bank. The system is
capable of monitoring battery voltage range of
8-32Vdc.
Figure 4-31. Diesel View Peak
Speed at RPM Screen 5. INTAKE MANIFOLD TEMPERATURE –
Displays current temperature of intake air manifold.
c. The ENGINE DATA screens (figure 4-32) are a Intake air temperature will vary depending on the en-
group of displays showing various engine data. This gine speed, engine load, seawater temperature and
data is transmitted via the high-speed harness connec- aftercooler efficiency.
tions. The data screens are updated as the data is
received. The data that can be displayed is as follows: 6. INSTANTANEOUS FUEL FLOW – Displays
instantaneous fuel consumption, in gallons per hour
1. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE – (gph), based on the current operation of the engine.
Displays current temperature of the fluid in the engine
cooling system. The temperature will vary with air 7. TURBO BOOST PRESSURE – Displays
temperature, seawater temperature, and engine oper- boost pressure being developed by the engine turbo-
ating conditions. charger. Data reported in inches of mercury (in/hg).
2. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE – Displays engine 8. PERCENT THROTTLE COMMANDED –

oil pressure when the engine is running. The oil pres- Displays current command throttle position. Valid
sure may vary with engine speed, ambient tempera- throttle percentage range is from 0% to 100%. Mini-
ture, and oil viscosity. While the engine is warming up, mum idle engine speed is commanded at 0% throttle.
the oil pressure will be higher than when the engine is Rated high idle engine speed is commanded at 100%
at normal operating temperature. throttle.
4-24
9. PERCENT ENGINE LOAD – Displays cur- c. The ALARM HISTORY screen will display all
rent load demand on the engine. Valid load percentage alarms that are active or have been active since the
range is from 0% to 100%. Engine load will vary de- last reset.
pending on commanded throttle and vessel displace-
ment, hull characteristics and propeller matching. d. The SYSTEM CALIBRATION screen allows
changes to the settings within the Diesel View. Enter-
10. AMBIENT AIR PRESSURE – Displays the ing the system calibration menu requires the engine to
ambient air pressure measured at the engine location. be shut down.
4-12.3.4 Vessel Data Screen. The vessel directory is For more information on the procedures to enter or
capable of providing several data screens; however, change the parameters held within the system direc-
the VESSEL STATUS screen (figure 4-33) is the only tory, refer to the manufacturer’s manual listed in table
one applicable to this boat. 1-2.
4-12.4 SMARTCRAFT TACHOMETER DIS-

PLAY. The SmartCraft Tachometers (figure 4-34) lo-
VESSEL STATUS cated in the center of the engine instrument panels on
1 STBD RUN-TIME 5 HRS 01 MIN the control console provide a variety of available infor-
PORT RUN-TIME
3 HRS 16
MIN mation in addition to the principal function of visual
2
indication of engine speed.
TOTAL FUEL 0.0 GAL
3 FRESH WATER #1 0%
FRESH WATER #1 0%
4 AIR TEMP 78 °F
3 4
5
RPM X
CHANGE PAGE 2
►
► 1000 6
1 7
0 8
1 - DISPLAYS RUNTIME IN HOURS. THESE VALUES ARE
OBTAINED DIRECTLY FROM THE ENGINE ECM.
2 - DISPLAYS THE TOTAL FUEL REMAINING (IF SENSOR
IS INSTALLED).
3 - DISPLAYS ADDITIONAL TANK LEVELS. FRESH WATER Figure 4-34. SmartCraft Tachometer
AND WASTE WATER (IF CONNECTED).
4 - DISPLAYS AIR TEMPERATURE AT SENSOR (IF CON- 4-12.4.1 Displays. The analogue tachometer needle
NECTED). indicates engine speed in rpm utilizing a pointer needle
Figure 4-33. Diesel View Vessel Status Screen on a backlit dial. The lower half of the face of the
tachometer contains an LCD display which provides
4-12.3.5 System Directory. The system directory con- digital information from the engine and the Diesel View
tains the following functions and associated screens: display.
a. The MAINTENANCE LOG screen keeps a 4-12.4.2 Controls. Touch controls on the face of the
record of the current engine run time at each service tachometer perform the following functions:
interval.
a. The Mode button scrolls through the following digi-
b. The ACTIVE ALARMS screen displays all ac- tal displays: engine hours, fuel used, tachometer (RPM),
tive alarms. When a problem is detected with the sys- fuel flow, power trim position, engine temperature, water
tem, the Diesel View will alert the operator to the po- temperature, oil temperature, oil pressure, battery volt-
tential problem by displaying the alarm icon and alarm age, range, and water depth. Some of these displays
data in the information window, located at the bottom may not be applicable to this boat. Pressing MODE
of the view screen. and holding it for 2 seconds will display the previous
screen and reverse the display rotation.
4-25
b. The + and - buttons are used for setting engine
speed in Troll mode. ! CAUTION
c. Troll control allows the operator to set and control All vessels must observe NO-WAKE
the idle speed of the engine without using the throttle and speed restricted zones to minimize
lever. This feature may not be available on this boat. damage to vessels and marinas while
transiting sensitive areas. Coordinate
4-12.4.3 Alarms and Warnings. The SmartCraft ta- with the U.S. Coast Guard, local offi-
chometer display will provide audible and visual alarms cials, and/or other affected parties if
and warnings under the following conditions. Engine it is necessary to conduct wake gen-
overheating, insufficient cooling system pressure, en- erating events in downtown harbors,
gine over speed, water in the fuel filter/water separa- restricted inland waters, or waterfront
tor, low oil pressure, low battery charging voltage, and communities.
loss of communication with the engine and the Diesel
View display unit. Refer to section VI for Diesel View NOTE
diagnostic codes.
Recommended cruising speed for op-
4-13 BOAT HANDLING. timum fuel economy and engine lon-
gevity is 80 percent of maximum
throttle setting. Running at continuous
WARNING full speed causes excessive wear and
strain on engine and drive components.
Never lower the waterjet reversing 4-13.1 CASTING OFF. After proper engine warm-up
bucket when the boat is planing. Do- and verification that all boat systems are operating
ing so will cause immediate and vio- within normal parameters, perform the following steps:
lent reverse thrust which may cause
injury to personnel and/or damage to a. Release and cast off the mooring lines between
equipment. dock and boat.
b. Retrieve and properly stow mooring lines.

! CAUTION
c. Proceeding with caution, use the steering wheel,
Avoid sudden increase in engine speed the engine throttle control, and the waterjet reversing
when operating at slow speed in shal- bucket control levers to maneuver the boat away from
low water. Avoid sharp turns when the dock.
operating in shallow water. Reduce
engine speed when traveling through 4-13.2 THROTTLE AND DIRECTIONAL CON-
floating debris. TROL. A lever on the control quadrant controls shift-
ing of the marine gear, and speed of the engine. For-
ward movement of the lever from NEUTRAL causes
! CAUTION
the engine rpm to increase and waterjet impeller to
move the boat forward. Speed is increased as the le-
The marine gear control must be placed ver is pushed forward. Astern movement of the con-
in the ahead position for boat steer- trol lever from NEUTRAL causes the waterjet impel-
age. ler to reverse the flow of water through the discharge
nozzle and to flush the waterjet sea chest. This does
not cause the boat to reverse. Boat astern operation is
caused by lowering the waterjet reversing bucket into
the flow of the impeller. Reverse speed is therefore
increased as the lever is pushed forward.
4-26
4-13.3 STEERING. Steering the boat is achieved by
directing the steering nozzle to port or starboard and WARNING
deflecting the waterjet stream. Increasing the throttle
setting increases the steering effect. Reducing the
throttle setting reduces steering ability. If the engine is Personnel must be seated and in-
stopped or the marine gear is in NEUTRAL, there is formed prior to performing an emer-
no waterjet flow and no steering ability. At idle speed, gency bucket stop. This is a violent
steering effect is reduced, but is sufficient to maneu- emergency maneuver which can re-
ver the boat at slow speeds. If throttle is decreased sult in death or injury to personnel and
during a turn, the boat will tend to continue in a straight damage to equipment.
line. To safely negotiate turns, maintain throttle set-
ting. If a tighter turn is required, increase the amount 4-13.7 REVERSE BUCKET STOPS. In an emer-
of throttle. gency situation, forward motion of the boat may be
stopped in a very short distance by fully lowering the
reversing bucket into the water stream without reduc-
! CAUTION ing the throttle setting. This maneuver converts for-
ward thrust from the waterjet drive to reverse thrust
In very shallow water, the waterjet immediately and causes very rapid deceleration of the
unit can ingest sand, mud, or stones. boat.
Resulting in impeller and bearing dam-
age. Navigate in shallow water with 4-13.8 MOORING. Ensure all lines are in proper re-
extreme caution and only at idle pair and readily available at the forward and aft moor-
speed. ing cleats. Perform the following steps:
4-13.4 ASTERN OPERATION. Full astern thrust is a. Steer the boat carefully to the desired location at
achieved by lowering the reversing bucket fully and the pier or slip.
directing the waterjet stream forward under the boat.
Steering is the opposite of ahead operation: turning the b. Cast lines to mooring bollards on the pier or slip.
wheel to port will result in the bow turning to star-
board; turning the wheel to starboard will result in the NOTE
bow turning to port.
Under normal conditions, two lines,
4-13.5 ZERO SPEED OPERATION. Zero speed is one aft and one forward are sufficient
achieved when the reversing bucket is lowered to a to secure the boat. However, in high
position where the water stream from the drive unit wind conditions, additional lines may
going astern equals the water stream going ahead and be required to secure the boat. Se-
the boat does not move astern or ahead. cure mooring lines only to mooring
cleats on the deck. Never secure to
NOTE handrails.
Zero speed operation is not related to c. Secure lines to the mooring cleats.
throttle position and should not be con-
fused with neutral setting of the ma- 4-13.9 ANCHORING. Drop the anchor using the fol-
rine gear control lever. lowing procedure:
4-13.6 DOCKING. Best results when docking are a. Layout and connect the anchor with the anchor
achieved with the boat in zero speed operation with chain and line.
the throttle open slightly more than 30%. Operate the
reversing bucket joystick to move the bucket up and b. Position the boat heading into the wind or seas at
down in small increments to move the boat ahead and the location where the anchor is to be dropped.
astern until docking is complete.
4-27
c. Move the engine control lever to NEUTRAL. 4-14 BILGE DRAINING.
4-14.1 BILGE DRAIN VALVES. The vessel has

WARNING three bulkheads: forward cabin bulkhead, aft cabin
bulkhead, and forward engine compartment bulkhead.
To prevent personnel injury or death,

exercise caution that legs and feet do ! CAUTION
not become entangled in anchor line
while line is paying out. In the event the boat is holed or a
catastrophic hull failure occurs, it is
imperative all drain valves remain
! CAUTION closed to prevent total vessel flooding.
Do not overrun the anchor line while Each bulkhead is fitted with a drain valve to drain water
lowering the anchor. To do so may foul aft to the transom for pumping overboard.
the anchor.
4-14.2 BILGE PUMPS.
d. Lower the waterjet reversing bucket.
4-14.2.1 Electric Bilge Pumps. Two electric bilge
e. Carefully position the engine control lever enough pumps in the engine compartment automatically drain
to engage the marine gear and cause the boat to slowly the bilge when water is present and the console con-
back down. trol switches are in the ON position.
f. Drop the anchor and pay out the anchor line until 4-14.2.2 Manual Bilge Pump. In the event that the
the anchor reaches bottom. With the boat moving slowly automatic bilge pumps fail, a manual pump mounted on
astern, continue to pay out the anchor line until a scope the starboard side of the engine compartment can be
of about six times the water depth is reached. Secure used to drain the engine compartment bilge. To oper-
the anchor line to the bitt. ate the manual pump, proceed as follows:
g. The anchor line will become taut and the anchor a. Remove the pump handle from the stowage clips
will set. When a moderate strain is achieved, move the located adjacent to the pump.
engine controls to the NEUTRAL position. The boat is
now anchored. Raise the waterjet reversing bucket to b. Insert the pump handle into the pump.
the UP position.
c. Pump with a side to side (port to starboard) mo-
4-13.10 WEIGH ANCHOR. Hoist the anchor using tion until the bilge is drained.
the following procedure:
4-14.3 BILGE DRAIN PLUGS. Two bilge plugs, lo-
a. Move the engine control forward and slowly head cated at the transom on the port and starboard side of
the boat towards the anchor location. Take in the an- the keel, may be removed when the boat is out of the
chor line to prevent slack. water. This will facilitate thorough draining of any bilge
water remaining in the boat.
b. When the anchor line is vertical, move the engine
controls to NEUTRAL and hoist the anchor. 4-15 TRIM TABS.
c. Disconnect the line and chain from the anchor. The boat is equipped with two trim tabs mounted at the
Stow the anchor line in the space provided, stow the lower outboard sides of the transom. The trim tab con-
anchor in the brackets provided in the bow storage trol panel is mounted on the console on the starboard
compartment, forward port bulkhead. side of the helm. The panel incorporates two momen-
4-28
tary contact, center-off switches which electrically ac- If one side of the boat is higher than the other while
tuate the hydraulic power units to move the tabs up or running, retract the trim tab on the higher side by mov-
down. An indicator panel on the starboard side of the ing the switch on that side forward momentarily. If the
control console shows the position of each trim tab. trim tab on the higher side is already fully retracted,
lower the trim tab on the lower side by moving the
The trim tab controls and the indicators are based on switch on the lower side forward momentarily until the
the position of the trim tabs, not on the position of the boat is riding level. Do not overtrim when performing
bow of the boat. The switch on the left side of the this operation.
panel controls the port trim tab and the switch on the
right side of the panel controls the starboard trim tab. 4-16 SUBFREEZING CONDITIONS.
Moving a switch towards the bow of the boat lowers
the tab on the same side of the boat as the switch and If the boat is removed from the water during subfreez-
lowers the bow on the opposite side of the boat. Mov- ing conditions and stored in davit stowage, on a cradle,
ing a switch towards the stern of the boat retracts the or on a trailer, all seawater must be drained from the
trim tab on the same side of the boat as the switch and engine, bilge, bilge pumping system, and seawater pip-
raises the bow on the opposite side of the boat. ing. Verify that the antifreeze coolant protection level
is sufficient for the expected temperature.
To lower the starboard bow, move the port switch aft
momentarily. This lowers the port trim tab which raises 4-16.1 ENGINE SEAWATER DRAINING. Use the
the port aft side of the boat and correspondingly low- following procedure to drain the engine seawater sys-
ers the bow on the starboard side. Moving the port tem:
switch forward raises the trim tab and returns the bow
to normal trim. The starboard trim tab switch performs a. Open the seawater drain petcock in the base of
the same operations on the port side of the boat. Manual the seawater strainer.
trim tab settings for various boat operating conditions
are provided in table 4-9. b. Remove the zinc plug from the heat exchanger.
Lower both trim tabs by moving both switches aft to- c. Remove the lower zinc plug from the aftercooler.
gether momentarily. Observe the trim tab position indi-
cators while operating the trim tabs. d. Remove the drain plug from the air box side of the
aftercooler. This will allow any condensation to drain.
Raise both trim tabs by moving both switches forward
together momentarily. Observe the trim tab position NOTE
indicators while operating the trim tabs to avoid opera-
tion of the hydraulic power units beyond full retraction Depending on the storage angle of the
of the cylinders. boat, engine hoses may need to be re-
moved to drain residual seawater from
Raise the windward side of the boat by moving the the engine. All seawater must be
leeward switch forward momentarily and raising the drained from pipes and hoses that are
leeward trim tab. If this action is not sufficient, move part of the engine seawater system.
the windward switch aft momentarily to lower the wind-
ward trim tab and raise the windward side of the boat. e. Remove the seawater inlet hose from the heat ex-
Do not overtrim when performing this operation. changer.
Lower both trim tabs by moving both switches aft to- f. Remove the inlet and outlet hoses from the sea-
gether momentarily. As the boat speed increases, re- water pump.
tract the tabs by moving both switches forward to-
gether momentarily until desired trim is achieved.
4-29
Table 4-9. Boat Operating Trim Conditions
Boat
Operating Trim Tab Effect on the Boat
Condition Operation
Head sea Lower both trim tabs by moving both This operation will bring the bow down while
bow down switches aft together momentarily. maintaining speed. This allows the hull of the
Observe thr trim tab position indicators boat to absorb the impact of the waves. This
while operating the trim tabs. adjustment will result in a more efficient and
smoother ride.
Following Lower both trim tabs by moving both This operation will bring both trim tabs up, decreas-
sea switches aft together momentariliy. ing the lift in the stern and will allow the bow to
As the boat speed increases, retract rise. If trim tabs are in the down position, the
the tabs by moving both switches forward bow may dig into the water. Be careful to raise
together momentarily until desired trim the trim tabs only enough to ensure the the bow
is acheived. does not dig in and that adequate downsea steer
ageway is maintained.
Windy chop Raise the windward side of the boat by This operation allows the windward side of the
moving leeward switch forward boat to rise and will minimize spray in the boat.
momentarily and raising the leeward
trim tab. if this action is not sufficient,
move the windward switch aft
momentarily to lower the windward
side of the boat. Do not overtrim when
performing this operation.
Shallow Water Raise both trim tabs by moving both These settings provides lift in the stern of the boat
switches forward together momentarily. initially and permits the boat to operate at minium
Observe the trim tab position indicators draft.
while operating the trim tabs to avoid
operation of the hydraulic power units
beyond full retraction of the cylinders.
Uneven If one side of the boat is higher than the This operation will lower the stern on the high
Load other while running, retract the trim tab on side and bring the boat level. If the trim tab on
the higher side by moving the switch the higher side is alreayd in the fully retracted
on that side forward momentarily. position, lowering the trim tab on the low side
If trim tab on the higher side is already will bring the boat level.
. fully retracted, lower the trim tabe on
the lower side by moving the switch on
the lower side forward momentraily until
the boat is riding level. Do not overtrim
when performing this operation.
4-30
g. Remove and inspect the seawater pump impeller. Use the following procedure to drain the hand-oper-
If the impeller is considered reusable, lubricate it with ated bilge pump suction hose:
glycerin or a non-petroleum based lubricant such as
silicone spray prior to placing the impeller into storage. a. Loosen the 1 1/2-inch hose clamp on the discharge
side of the suction strainer.
h. Install the aftercooler and heat exchanger zinc
plugs. Do not use thread sealant on the plugs. b. Remove the suction hose from the suction strainer
and fitting to permit draining the hose.
i. Loosen the heat exchanger seawater outlet hose
connection to the exhaust piping. Use the following procedure to drain the bilge pump
discharge hose:
j. Place a suitably sized container under the heat
exchanger seawater inlet. a. Loosen the two 1 1/2-inch hose clamps on the dis-
charge side of the hand-operated pump.
NOTE
b. Remove the discharge hose from the pump and
Use care not to permit excess anti- fitting to permit draining of the hose.
freeze solution to drain into the bilge.
4-17 HVAC SYSTEM OPERATION.
k. Pour a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water into
the heat exchanger outlet hose and through the heat The HVAC system and the heating/defrosting system
exchanger. This will fill any water pockets in the heat are separate systems. The HVAC system provides
exchanger. heating, cooling, and ventilation of the crew cabin
through the four vents outboard of the crew seats. The
heating/defrosting system provides heat and defrost-
! CAUTION ing through the vents on the tops of the consoles.
Use only the prescribed antifreeze in The crew cabin HVAC system is operated as follows:
the engine. Specific fluid type infor-
mation is provided in the planned main- 4-17.1 COOLING OPERATION.
tenance documentation for the boat.
The use of any other antifreeze can
have a damaging effect on nonmetal- ! CAUTION
lic components of the cooling system
or change the desired boiling point of The ball valve on the outboard side of
the fluid. the port engine marked CON-
DENSER must be placed into the open
4-16.2 ENGINE COOLANT SYSTEM DRAIN- position before operating the air con-
AGE. If the coolant system has not been adequately ditioning system. Failure to open the
protected with an antifreeze solution, then the system valve will lead to excessive cycling of
must also be drained. Refer to the MRC for the pro- the compressor and may result in pre-
cedure to drain the coolant from the engine. mature compressor failure.
4-16.3 BILGE PUMP PIPING DRAINAGE. Since NOTE

the hand-operated bilge pump discharge line is fitted
with a check valve, water may collect in the suction The port engine must be running in or-
hose and in the overboard discharge hose. der for the cabin air conditioning sys-
tem to operate.
4-31
a. Place the ball valve marked CONDENSER NOTE
mounted on the outboard side of the port engine into
the open position. Verify water flow through the con- The ball valves marked HEATER IN
densing unit at the overboard discharge on the upper and HEATER OUT must be in the
port side of the transom. OPEN position in order for the cabin
heating system to operate.
b. Place the 20-amp circuit breaker marked AC
BLOWER on the console 24Vdc panel into the ON a. Place the ball valves marked HEATER IN and
position. HEATER OUT located on the starboard forward side
of the engine immediately aft of the alternator in the
c. Operate the pushbutton switch marked AC on the OPEN position.
HVAC control panel (figure 4-35) by pushing it in until
it locks. b. Place the A/C blower circuit breaker on the 24Vdc
panel into the ON position.
HEATER BLOWER
CONTROL SPEED
0 I KNOB c. Operate the rotary blower speed selector switch
KNOB
II
on the right side of the control panel to select the blower
III speed which provides the desired amount of heated
AC air.
d. Operate the rotary thermostat control knob on the

AIR CONDITIONING
left side of the control panel to select the desired air
PUSHBUTTON temperature setting. Turn the knob clockwise to in-
crease the heat; turn the knob counterclockwise until it
Figure 4-35. HVAC System Control Panel stops to turn the heat completely off.
d. Operate the rotary blower speed selector switch
on the right side of the HVAC panel to select the blower e. Adjust the four air discharge grilles as necessary
speed which provides the desired amount of air circu- to provide the desired air circulation pattern.
lation.
NOTE
e. Adjust the four air discharge grilles as necessary
to provide the desired air circulation pattern. The ball valves marked HEATER IN
and HEATER OUT should be placed
NOTE in the CLOSED position when the
cabin heating system is not in opera-
The condenser cooling water ball valve tion.
should be placed in the closed position
when the cabin air conditioning sys- 4-17.3 DEHUMIDIFYING OPERATION. Dehumidi-
tem is not in operation. fying the crew cabin may be necessary during cool
weather with high humidity.
4-17.2 HEATING OPERATION.
NOTE
NOTE
Dehumidifying the crew cabin requires
The engine must be running in order operating the cabin air conditioning
for the cabin heating system to oper- system and the cabin heating system
ate. simultaneously.
4-32
a. Operate the cabin A/C system and the cabin NOTE
heater system following the steps in paragraphs 4-17.1
and 4-17.2. The ball valves on the outboard side
of the starboard engine marked
b. Operate the rotary blower speed selector switch HEATER IN and HEATER OUT
on the right side of the HVAC panel to select the blower must be in the OPEN position in order
speed which provides the desired amount of air circu- for the heater/defroster system to op-
lation in the cabin. erate.
c. Operate the rotary thermostat control on the left a. Place the ball valves marked HEATER IN and
side of the HVAC panel to select the desired air tem- HEATER OUT on the outboard side of the starboard
perature setting. Turn the knob clockwise to increase engine in the OPEN position.
the heat; turn the knob counterclockwise until it stops
to turn the heat completely off. b. Place the HEAT/DEFROST circuit breaker on the
24Vdc console panel in the ON position.
4-17.4 VENTILATING OPERATION. Air may be
circulated through the cabin utilizing the cabin HVAC c. Operate the blower speed selector rotary switch
system without the heater or air conditioner operating. on the heater/defroster control panel (figure 4-36) lo-
cated at the top of the starboard bulkhead adjacent to
a. Place the A/C blower circuit breaker on the 24Vdc the forward steps to select the blower speed which
panel in the ON position. provides the desired amount of heated air.
b. Operate the rotary selector switch on the right side

of the panel to select a blower speed which provides
HEATER
the desired amount of air circulation.
LOW MEDIUM
c. Adjust the four air discharge grilles as necessary
to provide the desired air circulation pattern. OFF HIGH
4-18 HEATING/DEFROSTING OPERATION.
The heater/defrosting system and the HVAC system

are separate systems. The heater/defrosting system HEATER CRAFT
provides heat and defrosting through the vents on the
tops of the consoles. The HVAC system provides heat- Figure 4-36. Heater/Defroster Control Panel
ing, cooling, and ventilation of the crew cabin through d. Adjust the two air discharge grilles on the tops of
the four vents outboard of the crew seats. the consoles to provide the necessary air circulation
pattern.
The heater/defrosting system is operated as follows:
NOTE
NOTE
The ball valves on the outboard side
The starboard engine must be running of the starboard engine marked
and at operating temperature for the HEATER IN and HEATER OUT
heater/defroster system to operate should be in the CLOSED position
properly. when the heater/defrosters system is
not in operation.
4-33
NOTE 4-20.2 VHF RADIO TRANSMISSION.
The heater/defroster system may be a. Perform steps a. through e. of paragraph 4-20.1.

used as a ventilation system by oper-
ating the system with the engine ball b. Before transmitting, monitor the channel to ensure
valves in the CLOSED position. it is clear.
4-19 COMMUNICATION AND NAVIGATION c. Press the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button. The TX
EQUIPMENT. indicator (figure 4-38) will be displayed in the LCD.
Communication and navigation equipment consist of a

VHF marine band radio bracket-mounted to the top of
the control console, a bracket-mounted radar display TX
in the overhead, and a flush-mounted 4-inch (10.2 mm)
compass on top of the console. The installed boat com-
Figure 4-38. TX Indicator
munications and force protection equipment provide
multifunction and mission critical redundancy.
d. Speak slowly and clearly into the microphone.
4-20 VHF RADIO OPERATION.
e. When the transmission is finished, release the PTT
button.
4-20.1 VHF RADIO RECEPTION.
4-20.3 TRANSMIT TIME-OUT TIMER (TOT).
a. Press and hold the VOL/PWR knob until the ra-
When the PTT button on the microphone is held down,
dio turns on.
transmit time is limited to 5 minutes. This limits unin-
tentional transmissions due to a stuck microphone.
b. Turn the SQL knob fully counterclockwise.
About 10 seconds before automatic transmitter shut-
down, a warning beep will be heard from the speaker(s).
c. Turn up the VOL knob until noise or audio from
The transceiver will automatically go to receive mode,
the speaker is at a comfortable level.
even if the PTT button is continually held down. Be-
fore transmitting again, the PTT button must first be
d. Turn the SQL knob clockwise until the random
released and then pressed again.
noise disappears.
4-20.4 SIMPLEX/DUPLEX CHANNEL USE. Re-
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the de-
fer to the VHF Marine Channel Chart in the
sired channel.
manufacturer’s manual listed in table 1-2.
f. When a message is received, adjust the volume to
4-20.5 INTERNATIONAL, USA, AND CANADA
the desired listening level. The busy indicator (figure
MODE.
4-37) will be displayed in the LCD indicating that the
channel is being used.
a. To change the modes, hold the 16/9 key and press
the WX key. The mode changes from International to
BUSY
Canadian to USA with each press of the WX key.
b. INTL will be displayed for International Mode,

CAN will be displayed for Canadian mode, and USA
Figure 4-37. Busy Indicator will be displayed on the LCD for USA mode.
4-34
c. Refer to the VHF Marine Channel Chart in the e. Press the WX key to stop the alert tone and re-
manufacturer’s manual listed in table 1-2 for all lo- ceive the weather report.
cated channels in each mode.
NOTE
4-20.6 NOAA WEATHER CHANNEL.
If the WX key is not pressed, the alert
NOTE tone will be emitted for 5 minutes and
then the weather report will be re-
National Oceanic and Atmospheric ceived.
Administration (NOAA) Weather NOTE
Channels are available in USA and
Canada only. The Weather Alert feature is also en-
gaged while the transceiver is receiv-
a. To receive a NOAA weather channel, press the ing on one of the NOAA weather
WX key from any channel. The transceiver will go to channels.
the last selected weather channel.
4-20.6.2 NOAA Weather Alert Testing. NOAA tests
b. Turn the Channel Selector knob on the radio or the alert system every Wednesday between 11AM and
Up/Down keys on the microphone to select a different 1PM. To test radio’s NOAA Weather alert feature,
NOAA weather channel. on Wednesday between 11AM and 1PM, setup the
radio as discussed in paragraph 4-20.6.1 and confirm
c. To exit from the NOAA weather channels, press the alert is heard.
the WX key. The transceiver returns to the last se-
lected channel. 4-20.7 EMERGENCY CHANNEL USE. Channel 16
is known as the Hail and Distress Channel. An emer-
4-20.6.1 NOAA Weather Alert. In the event of ex- gency is defined as a threat to life or property. In such
treme weather disturbances, such as storms and hurri- instances, be sure the transceiver is on and set to Chan-
canes, NOAA sends a weather alert accompanied by nel 16. Then use the following procedure:
a 1050Hz tone and subsequent weather report on one
of the NOAA weather channels. When the Weather a. Press the microphone PTT button and say “May-
Alert feature is enabled, the transceiver is capable of day, Mayday, Mayday. This is ___, ___, ___” (your
receiving this alert if the following is performed: vessel’s hull designation).
a. Program NOAA weather channels into the b. Then repeat once: “Mayday, ___” (your vessel’s
transceiver’s memory for scanning. Follow the proce- hull designation).
dure of paragraph 4-20.12.
c. Report your position in latitude/longitude, or by giv-
b. Press the SCAN key once to start memory scan- ing a true or magnetic bearing (state which) to a well-
ning or priority scanning. known landmark such as a navigation aid or geographic
feature (i.e.; an island or harbor entry).
c. The programmed NOAA weather channels will
be scanned along with the regular programmed chan- d. Explain the nature of your distress (sinking, colli-
nels. However, scanning will not stop on a normal sion, aground, fire, heart attack, life-threatening injury,
weather broadcast unless a NOAA alert is received. etc.).
d. When an alert is received on a NOAA weather e. State the kind of assistance your desire (pumps,
channel, scanning will stop and the transceiver will emit medical aid, etc.).
a loud beep to alert the user of a NOAA broadcast.
f. Report the number of persons onboard and condi-
tion of any injured.
4-35
g. Estimate the present seaworthiness and condition After a transmission, say OVER, and release the
of your vessel. microphone’s PTT button. When all communications
with the other vessel is completed, end the last trans-
h. Give your vessel’s description: length, color, and mission by stating your call sign and the word OUT.
other distinguishing marks. The total transmission Note that it is not necessary to state your call sign with
should not exceed 1 minute. each transmission, only at the beginning and end of the
contact.
i. End the message by saying OVER. Release the
microphone PTT button and listen. Remember to return to Channel 16 when not using
another channel. Some radios automatically monitor
j. If there is no answer, repeat the above procedure. Channel 16 even when set to other channels or when
If there is still not response, try another channel. scanning.
4-20.8 CALLING ANOTHER VESSEL. Channel 16 4-20.9 MAKING TELEPHONE CALLS. To make
may be used for initial contact with another vessel. a radiotelephone call, use a channel designated for this
However, its most important use is for emergency purpose. Channels available for such traffic are des-
messages. This channel must be monitored at all times ignated Public Correspondence channels on the chan-
except when actually using another channel. nel charts in the manufacturer’s manual. Call the ma-
rine operator and identify yourself by your vessel’s
It is monitored by the U.S. and Canadian Coast Guards name. The marine operator will then ask you how you
and by other vessels. Use of Channel 16 for hailing will pay for the call (telephone credit card, collect, etc.)
must be limited to initial contact only. Calling should and then link your radio transmission to the telephone
not exceed 30 seconds, but may be repeated three times lines.
at 2-minute intervals. In areas of heavy radio traffic,
congestion on Channel 16 resulting from its use as a The marine telephone company managing the VHF
hailing channel can be reduced significantly in US wa- channel you are using may charge a link-up fee in ad-
ters by using Channel 9 as the initial contact (hailing) dition to the cost of the call.
channel for nonemergency communications. Here,
also, calling time should not exceed 30 seconds but 4-20.10 OPERATING ON CHANNELS 13 AND 67.
may be repeated three times at 2-minute intervals. Channel 13 is used at docks and bridges and by ves-
sels maneuvering in port. Messages on this channel
Prior to making contact with another vessel, refer to must concern navigation only, such as meeting and
the channel charts in the manufacturer’s manual, and passing in restricted waters.
select an appropriate channel for communications af-
ter initial contact. For example, Channels 68 and 69 Channel 67 is used for navigational traffic between
are some of the channels available to noncommercial vessels.
boaters. Monitor your desired channel in advance to
make sure you will not be interrupting other traffic, By regulation, power is normally limited to 1 Watt on
and then go back to either Channel 16 or 9 for your these channels. Your radio is programmed to auto-
initial contact. matically reduce power to this limit on these channels.
However, in certain situations it may be necessary to
When the hailing channel (16 or 9) is clear, state the temporality use a higher power.
name of the other vessel you wish to call and then “this
is” followed by the name of your vessel and your call 4-20.11 DUAL WATCH (TO PRIORITY CHAN-
sign. When the other vessel returns your call, immedi- NEL). Dual watch allows the radio to monitor one
ately request another channel by saying GO TO then channel and the assigned Priority channel. By default
number of the other channel, and OVER. Then switch the priority channel is set to 16, however the priority
to the new channel. When the new channel is not channel may be changed.
busy, call the other vessel.
4-36
a. Adjust the SQL knob until the background noise
01
USA
disappears. SCAN TYPE
>PRIORITY
MEMORY A
b. Select the channel you wish to dual watch to Pri-
ority channel.
Figure 4-41. Priority or Memory Menu
c. Press the DW(IC) key. The display (figure 4-39)
will scan between the Priority channel and the channel e. Press the ENT key to store the selected setting.
that was selected in step b. If a transmission is re-
ceived on the channel selected in step b, the radio will f. To exit this menu and return to radio operation
dual watch between the working channel and the Pri- mode press the 16/9 key.
ority channel.
4-20.12.2 Memory Scanning (M-SCAN).
d. To stop Dual Watch, press the DW(IC) key again.
a. Adjust the SQL knob until background noise dis-
01
USA appears.
MEM
DW-16
A b. Select a desired channel to be scanned using the
VTS
Channel Selector knob. Press and hold the
Figure 4-39. Dual Watch SCAN(MEM) key for one second, MEM will appear
on the LCD (figure 4-42) which indicates the channel
4-20.12 SCANNING. Allows the user to select the has been programmed into the transceivers memory.
scan type from memory scan or priority scan. Memory
Scan scans the channels that were programmed into
01
USA
memory. Priority Scan scans the channels pro- MEM
grammed into memory with the priority channel.
A
VTS
4-20.12.1 Selecting the Scan Type. Figure 4-42. Memory Scan Indication
a. Press and hold own the CALL (MENU) key until c. Repeat step b for all the desired channels to be
Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appears. scanned.
b. Press the ENT key, then select SCAN TYPE (fig- d. To delete a channel from the transceiver’s
ure 4-40) in Radio Setup menu with the Channel Se- memory, select the channel then press and hold the
lector knob. SCAN(MEM) key for one second, MEM will disap-
pear in the LCD.
01
USA
TIME DISP
MAGNETIC e. To start scanning, just press the SCAN(MEM) key
PRIORITY CH
A momentarily. M-SCAN appears on the LCD (figure
> SCAN TYPE
4-43). Scanning will proceed from the lowest to the
Figure 4-40. Scan Type highest programmed channel number and will stop on
the channel when a transmission is received.
01
USA
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select PRIOR- M-SCAN
ITY or MEMORY (figure 4-41).
A
Figure 4-43. M-SCAN Menu
4-37
f. The channel number will blink during reception. display will show NO POSITION DATA (figure
4-46).
g. To stop scanning, press the 16/9 or WX key.
01
BUSY USA
4-20.12.3 Priority Scanning (P-SCAN). In the de- 8:45PM
15KTS 160º T
fault setting, Channel 16 is set as the priority channel. 33º 37.120N A
118º09.582W
a. Adjust the SQL knob until background noise dis-
Figure 4-45. Position Display
appears.
01
b. Select a desired channel to be scanned using the BUSY USA
INDIVIDUAL
Channel Selector knob. Press and hold the SCAN NO POSITION
(MEM) key for one second, MEM will appear on the DATA A
LCD which indicates the channel has been programmed
into the transceivers’s memory. Refer to figure 4-7. Figure 4-46. No Position Display
c. Repeat step b for all the desired channels to be NOTE

scanned.
When Channel 16 is selected only lat/
d. To delete a channel from the transceiver’s long will shown.
memory, select the channel then press and hold the
display. b. To hide the position information, press and hold
the H/L(NAV) key again.
e. To start priority scanning, press the SCAN(MEM)
key momentarily, P-SCAN appears on the LCD (fig- 4-21 DIGITAL SELECTIVE CALLING.
ure 4-44). Scanning will proceed form the lowest to
the highest programmed channel number and will stop Digital Selective Calling (DSC) is a semi-automated
on a channel when a transmission is received. method of establishing a radio. DSC has been desig-
nated as part of the Global Maritime Distress and Safety
System (GMDSS).
01
USA
MEM
P-SCAN CH16 This system allows mariners to instantly send a dis-
A tress call with GPS position (when connected to the
transceiver) to the Coast Guard and other vessels within
Figure 4-44. P-SCAN Menu
range of the transmission. DSC will also allow mari-
ners to initiate or receive Distress, Urgency, Safety,
f. To stop scanning, press the 16/9 or WX key.
Routine, Position Request, Position Send, and Group
calls to or from another vessel equipped with a DSC
4-20.13 NAVIGATION INDICATION. The trans-
transceiver.
ceiver has the ability to display Time, SOG, COG, and
position (LAT/LONG), when connected to a GPS re-
4-21.1 MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE IDENTITY
ceiver.
(MMSI).
a. Press and hold the H/L(NAV) key, the position
4-21.1.1 MMSI. MMSI is a nine digit number used on
information will be displayed on the LCD (figure
Marine Transceivers capable of using Digital Selec-
4-45). If the GPS receiver is not receiving a fix, the
tive Calling (DSC) for identification.
4-38
4-21.1.2 Programming the MMSI. 4-21.2 DSC DISTRESS CALL. The radio is capable
of transmitting and receiving DSC Distress messages
NOTE to all DSC radios. If connected to a GPS, the radio
may also transmit the Latitude, Longitude of the ves-
The MMSI can be input only twice. sel.
If the user needs to change the MMSI
more than twice, the transceiver will 4-21.2.1 Transmitting a DSC Distress Call.
require Factory Service.
NOTE
til the Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appears. To be able to transmit a DSC distress
call the MMSI number must be pro-
b. Turn the Channel Selector Knob to the left to se- grammed.
lect DSC Setup menu (figure 4-47).
In order for the boat’s location to be transmitted, a
GPS must be connected to the radio.
01
USA
RADIO SETUP
>DSC SETUP a. Lift the red spring loaded DISTRESS cover and
EXIT A
press the DISTRESS key. The DISTRESS menu (fig-
ure 4-49) will appear on the LCD.
Figure 4-47. DSC SETUP Menu
c. Press the ENT key, then select USER MMSI (fig-
01
USA DSC
ure 4-48) with the Channel Selector knob. DISTRESS
>UNDESIGNATE
CANCEL [CLR] A
01
POS REPLY USA
POS INPUT Figure 4-49. Distress Menu
DSC BEEP
>USER MMSI A
b. Press and hold the DISTRESS key. The radios
Figure 4-48. MMSI USER display (figure 4-50) will count down (5-4-3-2-1) and
then transmit the Distress call.
d. Press the ENT key. The display will show a se-
ries of dashes or the last MMSI number, if pro-
01
USA DSC
[DISTRESS]
grammed. PRESS AND
HOLD 3 SEC
A
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob or press the Up/ FOR TRANSMIT
Down key on the microphone to select the first num-
Figure 4-50. Distress Signal Display
ber of your MMSI, then press the ENT key to step to
the next number.
c. When the distress signal is sent, CH70 and TX
icon will appear on the LCD (figure 4-51). After the
f. Repeat step e to until the 9-digit MMSI is com-
message has been sent, the radio will sound a Distress
pleted.
Alarm.
g. When finished programming the number, press and
70
hold the ENT key to store the number in memory. TX USA DSC
SEND
DISTRESS
h. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation ALERT
Figure 4-51. Distress Signal Sent Display
4-39
d. The transceiver will watch for a DSC acknowl- b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the de-
edgment transmission (figure 4-52) on CH70 and also sired nature of distress category (figure 4-54).
receive calls on CH16.
01
USA DSC
DISTRESS
16
USA DSC >FIRE
WAITING FOR
A
ACKNOWLEDGE CANCEL [CLR]
CANCEL [CLR]
Figure 4-54. Nature Of Distress
Figure 4-52. DSC Acknowledgment
c. Press ad hold the DISTRESS key. The radios dis-
e. If an acknowledgment is received, select channel play will count down (5-4-3-2-1) and then transmit the
16 and advise of the boat’s distress situation. Distress call (figure 4-50).
f. If no acknowledgment is received, the distress call d. When the distress signal is sent, CH70 and TX
is repeated in 4-minute intervals until a DSC acknowl- icon will appear on the LCD (figure 4-51). After the
edgment is received or the distress call is canceled. message has been sent, the radio will sound a distress
alarm.
g. When a DSC Distress acknowledgment is re-
ceived, a distress alarm sounds and channel 16 is auto- e. The transceiver will watch for a DSC acknowl-
matically selected. The LCD shows the MMSI of the edgment transmission on CH70 and also receive calls
ship responding to the distress call (figure 4-53). on CH 16.
f. If an acknowledgment is received, select channel
16
BUSY USA DSC
7:45PM 16 and advise of the boat’s distress situation.
RECEIVED
ACKNOWLEDGE
USGC
g. If no acknowledgment is received, the distress call
is repeated in 4-minute intervals until a DSC acknowl-
Figure 4-53. Acknowledgment Received edgment is received or the distress call is canceled.
RECEIVED ACK: acknowledgment signal is received. h. When a DSC Distress acknowledgment is re-
RECEIVED RLY: relay signal is received from an- ceived, a distress alarm sounds and channel 16 is auto-
other vessel or coast station. matically selected. The LCD shows the MMSI of the
ship responding to the distress call (figure 4-53).
h. To cancel the DSC distress alarm signal from the
speaker, press any key. RECEIVED ACK: acknowledgment signal is received.
RECEIVED RLY: relay signal is received from an-
4-21.2.2 Transmitting a DSC Distress Call with other vessel or coast station.
Nature of Distress Call. The radio is capable of trans-
mitting a DSC Distress Call with the following Nature i. To cancel the DSC distress alarm signal from the
of Distress categories: UNDESIGNATED, FIRE, speaker, press any key.
FLOODING, COLLISION, GROUNDING, CAPSIZ-
ING, SINKING, ADRIFT, ABANDONING, PIRACY, 4-21.2.3 Cancel a DSC Distress Call. If a DSC dis-
MOB. tress call was sent by error the radio allows a mes-
sage that was sent in error to be cancelled (figure
a. Lift the red spring loaded DISTRESS cover and 4-55). Press the CLR key, then press the ENT key.
press the DISTRESS key. The DISTRESS menu (fig-
ure 4-49) will appear on the LCD.
4-40
4-21.3 ALL SHIPS CALL. The All Ships Call func-
16
TX USA DSC
TO SEND tion allows contact to be established with other vessel
DISTRESS
CANCEL
stations without having their ID in the individual calling
A
PRESS [CLR] directory. Also, priority for the call can be designated
as Urgency or Safety.
Figure 4-55. Distress Call Cancel
URGENCY Call: This type of call is used when a ves-
4-21.2.4 Receiving a DSC Distress Call. sel may not truly be in distress, but have a potential
problem that may lead to a distress situation. This call
a. When a DSC Distress call is received, an emer- is the same as saying PAN, PAN, PAN on channel
gency alarm sounds. Then channel 16 is automatically 16.
selected (figure 4-56).
SAFETY Call: This type of call is used to transmit
boating safety information to other vessels. This mes-
16
TX USA DSC
7:45PM
RECEIVED
sage usually contains information about an overdue
DISTRESS boat, debris in the water, loss of a navigation aid, or an
ACKNOWLEDGE important meteorological message. This call is the same
Figure 4-56. Received Distress Acknowledgment as saying SECURITY, SECURITY, SECURITY.
b. Press any key to stop the alarm. 4-21.3.1 Transmitting an All Ships Call.
c. Turn the Channel Selector knob to change the dis- a. Press the CALL(MENU) key. The DSC Opera-
play to show the position of the vessel in distress (fig- tion menu (figure 4-59) will appear.
ure 4-57).
69
TX USA DSC
>INDIVIDUAL
16
TX USA DSC GROUP
ACKNOWLEDGE ALL SHIPS
123456789 POS REQUEST
33”37, 120N
118”09.582W Figure 4-59. DSC Operation Menu
Figure 4-57. Vessel in Distress
b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select ALL
d. If the vessel distress data does not include posi- SHIPS (figure 4-60).
tion, the LCD will show UNDESIGNATE (figure
4-58).
69
TX USA DSC
INDIVIDUAL
GROUP
>ALL SHIPS
16
TX USA DSC
DISTRESS POS REQUEST
UNDESIGNATE
123456789 Figure 4-60. All Ships Call
NO POSITION
Figure 4-58. Distress Undesignate c. Press the ENT key. To cancel, turn the Channel
Selector knob to select EXIT.
NOTE
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the call,
Continue monitoring channel 16 as a URGENCY or SAFETY (figure 4-61).
coast station may require assistance
in the rescue attempt.
4-41
c. Turn the Channel Selector knob to view the MMSI
69
TX USA DSC
>URGENCY of the vessel transmitting the All Ships Call (figure
SAFETY 4-65).
EXIT
16
Figure 4-61. Urgency Call USA DSC
RECEIVED
ALL SHIPS
e. Press the ENT key to transmit the selected type URGENCY
123456789
of all ships DSC call (figure 4-62).
Figure 4-65. All Ships Call Transmitted
69
USA DSC
SEND
ALL SHIPS d. Monitor Channel 16 or traffic channel until the
YES [ENT] URGENCY voice communication is completed.
NO [CLR]
Figure 4-62. All Ships Call Transmitting 4-21.4 INDIVIDUAL CALL. The individual call fea-
ture allows the radio to contact another vessel with a
f. After the All Ships call is transmitted, the trans- DSC VHF radio and automatically switch the receiv-
ceiver will switch to CH16 (figure 4-63). ing radio to a desired communications channel. This is
similar to calling a vessel on CH16 and requesting to
go to another channel.
70
TX USA DSC
SEND
ALL SHIPS 4-21.4.1 Setting up the Individual/Position Call Direc-
YES [ENT]
NO [CLR] tory. The radio has a DSC directory that allows a
vessel or person’s name and the MMSI number asso-
Figure 4-63. All Ships Call Transmitted ciated with vessels to be stored.
g. Listen to the channel to make sure it is not busy, a. Press and hold down the CALL(MENU) key un-
then key the microphone and say PAN, PAN, PAN or til Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appears.
SECURITY, SECURITY, SECURITY depending on
the priority of the call. Give the boat’s call sign and b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select DSC
announce the channel to switch to for communications. SETUP (figure 4-47) menu.
4-21.3.2 Receiving an All Ships Call. c. Press the ENT key then select INDIV DIR with
the Channel Selector knob (figure 4-66).
a. When an all ships call is received, an emergency
alarm sounds. The radio will automatically switch to
01
USA
Channel 16 (figure 4-64). >INDIV DIR
INDIV REPLY
INDIV ACK A
INDIV RING
16
USA DSC
7:45PM
RECEIVED Figure 4-66. Individual Directory Menu
ALL SHIPS
URGENCY
d. Press the ENT key, then select ADD with the
Figure 4-64. All Ships Call Received Channel Selector knob (figure 4-67).
b. Press any key to stop the alarm.
4-42
m. To enter another individual address, repeat steps
01
USA
INDIV DIR d through l.
>ADD
EDIT A
DELETE n. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation
Figure 4-67. Add Individual Directory Menu
NOTE
e. Press the ENT key.
Selecting NEXT or EXIT will auto-
f. Turn the Channel Selector knob to scroll through matically save the name and MMSI
the first letter of the name of the vessel or person to number into memory.
reference in the directory.
4-21.4.2 Setting up Individual Reply. This function al-
g. Press the ENT key to store the first letter in the lows setting up the radio to automatically (default set-
name and step to the next letter to the right. ting) or manually respond to a DSC Individual call re-
questing to switch to a working channel for voice com-
h. Repeat step 6 and 7 until the name is complete, up munications. When MANUAL is selected the MMSI
to 11 characters. Press the ENT key to move the next of the calling vessel is shown allowing the opertaor to
space. This method can also be used to enter a blank view who is calling. This function is similar to caller
space in the name. To clear the previous letter, press ID on a telephone.
the CLR key.
i. After the eleventh letter or space has been en- til Radio Setup menu (figure 4-4) appears.
tered, press and hold the ENT key to advance to the
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity Number en- b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select DSC
try (figure 4-68). SETUP menu (figure 4-47).
c. Press the ENT key, then select INDIV REPLY
01
USA
NAME with the Channel Selector knob (figure 4-69).
VERTEX
MMSI
A
1_______
01
USA
INDIV DIR
>INDIV REPLY
Figure 4-68. MMSI Number Menu INDIV ACK
A
INDIV RING
j. Turn the Channel Selector knob to scroll through
numbers, 0-9. To enter the desired number and move Figure 4-69. Individual Reply
one space to the right press the ENT key. Repeat this
procedure until all nine spaces of the MMSI number d. Press the ENT key.
are entered.
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select AUTO
k. If a mistake was made entering in the name or the or MANUAL (figure 4-70).
MMSI number repeat pressing the H/L(NAV) key un-
til the wrong character is selected, then move the Chan-
01
USA
nel Selector knob to the correct the entry. INDIV REPLY
>AUTO
MANUAL A
l. To store the data entered, press and hold the ENT
key.
Figure 4-70. Auto Individual Reply
4-43
f. Press the ENT key to store the selected setting. b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select DSC
SETUP menu (figure 4-47).
g. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation
mode press the 16/9 key. c. Press the ENT key, then select DSC BEEP with
the Channel Selector knob (figure 4-73).
4-21.4.3 Setting up the Individual/Group Call Ringer.
When a Individual call or Group Call is received the
01
USA
radio will produce ringing tone for three minutes. The GROUP DIR
Individual call ringer time can be changed as follows: POS REPLY
POS INPUT A
>DSC BEEP
til Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appears. Figure 4-73. DSC Beep
b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select DSC d. Press the ENT key.
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select INDI-
c. Press the ENT key, then select INDIV RING with VIDUAL to disable the Individual Call ringer (figure
the Channel Selector knob (figure 4-71). 4-74), or GROUP to disable the Group call ringer and
press the ENT key.
01
USA
INDIV DIR
01
USA
INDIV REPLY DSC BEEP
INDIV ACK >INDIVIDUAL
>INDIV RING A
GROUP A
POS REQUEST
Figure 4-71. Individual Ring Figure 4-74. Indiviudal DSC Beep
d. Press the ENT key. f. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select ON or
OFF (figure 4-75).
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the ring-
ing time of the Individual Call (figure 4-72).
01
USA
INDIVIDUAL
ON
01
USA >OFF
INDIV RING A
>DEFAULT
5 RINGS
10 RINGS A Figure 4-75. Indiviudal OFF
Figure 4-72. Indiviudal Ring Default g. Press the ENT key to store the selected setting.
f. Press the ENT key to store the selected setting. h. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation
mode press the 16/9 key. 4-21.4.4 Transmitting an Individual Call. This feature
allows the user to contact another vessel with a DSC
4-21.4.3.1 Turning OFF The Call Ringer. The radio radio. This feature is similar to calling a vessel on
has the capability to turn off the Individual call ringer. CH16 and requesting to go to another channel.
a. Press and hold down the CALL(MENU) key un- 4-21.4.4.1 Preprogramming Call.
a. Press the CALL(MENU) key. The DSC Opera-
tion menu (figure 4-76) will appear.
4-44
DSC DSC
69 69
USA USA
>INDIVIDUAL SEND
GROUP INDIVIDUAL
ALL SHIP YES [ENT]
POS REQUEST NO [CLR]
Figure 4-76. DSC Operation Menu Figure 4-80. Send Individual Call
b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select INDI- g. After the INDIVIDUAL CALL is transmitted, the
VIDUAL DIRECTORY (figure 4-77). To cancel, se- transceiver will wait 8 seconds for the acknowledg-
lect EXIT with the Channel Selector knob or press the ment. If the reply signal is not received, the trans-
16/9 key. ceiver will transmit again.
DSC
h. After the second INDIVIDUAL CALL is trans-
69
USA
>MANUAL mitted, if the reply signal is not received, the display
VERTEX will be as shown in figure 4-81. To send the call again,
STANDARD
press the ENT key.
Figure 4-77. Individual Directory Manual
DSC
70
TX USA
SEND
c. Press the ENT key. The transceiver will beep, INDIVIDUAL
and the INDIVIDUAL DIRECTORY will appear. YES [ENT]
NO [CLR]
d. Turn the Channel selector knob to select the IN- Figure 4-81. Send Individual Vertex Call
DIVIDUAL you want to contact (figure 4-78).
i. When an indiviudal call acknowledgment is re-
DSC
ceived, the established channel is automatically changed
69
USA
MANUAL to the channel which is selected on step e and a ringing
>VERTEX tone sounds.
STANDARD
j. Press any key to listen to the channel to make

Figure 4-78. Individual Directory Vertex sure it is not busy, then key the microphone and call the
other vessel.
e. Press the ENT key, then turn the Channel Selec-
tor to select the operating channel you want to com- 4-21.4.4.2 Manual Calling. A MMSI number may be
municate on and press the ENT key (figure 4-79). entered manually to contact another station without
setting up the individual directory as follows:
DSC
69
USA
INTERSHIP CH
>06
a. Press the CALL(MENU) KEY. The DSC opera-
09 tion menu (figure 4-76) will appear.
10
Figure 4-79. Intership Channel b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select INDI-
VIDUAL. To cancel, select EXIT with the Channel
f. Press the ENT key again to transmit the individual Selector knob or press the 16/9 key.
DSC signal (figure 4-80).
c. Press the ENT key. The transceiver will beep,
and the Individual Directory will appear.
4-45
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select k. After the second Individual call is transmitted, if
MANUAL (figure 4-77) then press the ENT key. the reply signal is not receive send the call again, press
the ENT key. To exit the mode, press the CLR key.
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob to scroll through
numbers, 0-9. To enter the desired number and move l. When an individual call acknowledgment is re-
one space to the right press the ENT key. Repeat this ceived, the established channel is automatically changed
procedure until all nine spaces of the MMSI number to to the channel which is selected in step e and a ringing
be contacted are entered (figure 4-82). tone sounds.
USA DSC m. Press any key to listen to the channel to make
69
INPUT sure it is not busy, then key the microphone and call the
ID [9 DIGITS] other vessels you desire to communicate with.
567890123
4-21.4.5 Receiving an Individual Call. When receiv-

Figure 4-82. Manual MMSI Input ing an individual call, an acknowledgment must be sent
back to the calling station. The radio default setting is
f. If a mistake was made entering the MMSI num- Automatic, but has a selection that allows to manually
ber, repeat pressing the H/L(NAV) key until the wrong send a reply before the radio will switch to the re-
number is selected, then move the Channel Selector quested calling channel.
knob to the correct entry.
a. When an individual call is received, an individual
g. When finished entering the MMSI number, press call ringing alarm sounds. The radio automatically
and hold the ENT key. switches to the requested channel (figure 4-85).
h. Press the ENT key, then turn the Channel Selec-

USA DSC
06
tor knob to select the operating channel to communi- 7:45PM
cate on and press the ENT key (figure 4-83). RECEIVED
INDIV ACK
VERTEX
USA DSC
69
SELECT CH Figure 4-85. Individual Call Received
68
b. Press any key to stop the alarm.
Figure 4-83. Selecting An Operating Channel c. Press the PTT button on the microphone and talk
to the calling ship.
i. Press the ENT key again to transmit the individual
DSC signal (figure 4-80). 4-21.4.6 Setting Up the Call Waiting Function. This
function allows the radio to be setup to reply (ABLE)
j. After the Individual call is transmitted (figure or setup the radio to transmit a call that advises the
4-84), the transceiver will wait 8 seconds for the ac- calling vessel the person is UNABLE to reply to the
knowledgment. If the reply signal is not received, the call at this time. This function is similar to an answer-
transceiver will transmit again. ing machine. When setup to UNABLE and an indi-
vidual call is received the individual call from the other
TX USA DSC vessel is logged in the CALL WAITING directory for
70
SEND future review and call back.
INDIVIDUAL
567890123
Figure 4-84. Individual Call Transmit
4-46
b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select DSC c. Press the ENT key, then select GROUP DIR with
SETUP menu (figure 4-47). the Channel Selector knob (figure 4-88).
c. Press the ENT key, then select INDIV ACK with

USA
01
the Channel Selector knob (figure 4-86). INDIV REPLY
INDIV ACK
INDIV RING
A
USA >GROUP DIR
01
INDIV DIR
INDIV REPLY
>INDIV ACKN
INDIV RING A Figure 4-88. Group Directory Menu
Figure 4-86. Individual Acknowledgment d. Press the ENT key, then select ADD with the
Channel Selector knob (figure 4-89).
d. Press the ENT key.
USA
01
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select ABLE GROUP DIR
or UNABLE (figure 4-87). >ADD
EDIT
A
DELETE
USA
01
INDIV ACK Figure 4-89. Group Directory Add
>ABLE
UNABLE A e. Press the CALL(MENU) key.
Figure 4-87. Individual Acknowledgment Able f. Turn the Channel Selector knob to scroll through
the first letter of the name of the vessel to reference in
f. Press the ENT key to store the selected setting. the directory (figure 4-90).

USA
01
mode press the 16/9 key. NAME
S
MMSI
4-21.5 GROUP CALL. This feature allows the user 0_ _ _ _ _ _ _ A
to contact a group of specific vessels using DSC ra-
dios with Group call function to automatically switch to Figure 4-90. Name and MMSI Entry
a desired channel for voice communications.
g. Press the ENT key to store the first letter in the
4-21.5.1 Setting up a Group Call. For this fucntion to name and step to the next letter to the right.
operate the same Group MMSI must be programmed
into all the DSC VHF radios within the group of ves- h. Repeat steps f and g until the name is complete.
sels that will be using this feature. The group MMSI is The name can consist of up to 11 characters, if all 11
a 9 digit (first digit permanently set to 0) number that characters are not used, press the ENT key to move to
will allow other radios to call along with others to auto- the next space. This method can also be used to enter
matically switch to a working channel for voice com- a blank space in the name. To clear the previous letter,
munications. press the CLR key.
a. Press and hold down the CALL(MENU) key un- i. After the eleventh letter or space has been en-
til Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appears. tered, press and hold the ENT key to advance to the
MMSI number entry.
b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select DSC
4-47
j. Turn the Channel Selector knob to scroll through e. Press the ENT key, then turn the Channel Selec-
numbers, 0-9. To enter the desired number and move tor knob to select the operating channel to communi-
one space to the right press the ENT key. Repeat this cate on and press the ENT key.
procedure until all nine space of the MMSI number
are entered. f. Press the ENT key again to transmit the Group
Call signal.
k. If a mistake was made entering in the name or the
MMSI number repeat pressing the H/L(NAV) key un- g. After the GROUP CALL is transmitted (figure
til the wrong character is selected, then move the chan- 4-93), all the radios in the group will switch to the des-
nel knob to correct the entry. ignated channel.
USA DSC
69
l. To store the data entered, press and hold the ENT SEND
GROUP
key. YES [ENT]
NO [CLR] A
m. To enter another individual address, repeat steps
d through l. Figure 4-93. Group Call Transmitting
n. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation h. Listen to the channel to make sure it is not busy,
mode press the 16/9 key. then key the microphone and call the other vessels you
desire to communicate with (figure 4-94).
4-21.5.2 Transmitting a Group Call.
TX USA DSC
70
4-21.5.2.1 Preprogramming Call. SEND
GROUP
STANDARD A
a. Press the CALL(MENU) key. The DSC Opera-
tion (figure 4-76) menu will appear.
Figure 4-94. Group Call Standard
b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select GROUP
(figure 4-91). To cancel, select EXIT with the Chan- 4-21.5.2.2 Manual Calling. You may enter a MMSI
nel Selector knob or press 16/9 key. number manually to contact without the setting up the
Group call number.
USA DSC
69
INDIVIDUAL a. Press the CALL(MENU) key. The DSC OP-
>GROUP ERATION menu (figure 4-76) will appear.
ALL SHIP
POS REQUEST A
b. Turn the Channel Selector to select GROUP (fig-
Figure 4-91. DSC Group Menu ure 4-91). To cancel, select EXIT with the Channel
Selector knob or press 16/9 key.
c. Press the ENT key. The transceiver will beep,
and the GROUP DIRECTORY will appear. c. Press the ENT key. The transceiver will beep,
the GROUP DIRECTORY will appear.
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the
GROUP you want to contact (figure 4-92). d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select
MANUAL (figure 4-92) then press the ENT key.
USA DSC
69
MANUAL
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob to scroll through
VERTEX numbers, 0-9. To enter the desired number and move
>STANDARD A one space to the right press the ENT key. Repeat this
procedure until all nine space of the MMSI number
Figure 4-92. Standard Group Call which you want to contract are entered (figure 4-95).
4-48
USA DSC
d. Monitor the channel for the calling Group.
69
INPUT
ID [8 DIGITS] e. To respond, monitor the channel to make sure it is
056789123 clear, then press the PTT button on the microphone
and talk to the calling ship(s).
Figure 4-95. MMSI Number Entry
NOTE
f. If a mistake was made entering in the MMSI num-
ber repeat pressing the H/L(NAV) key until the wrong After a Group call is received, the time
number is selected, then move the Channel Selector the call was made and the ships MMSI
knob to correct the entry. or vessel name will appear on the
LCD.
g. When finish the entering the MMSI number, press
and hold the ENT key. 4-21.6 POSITION REQUEST. It is possible to poll
the location of another vessel and show the position of
h. Press the ENT key to transmit the Group Call sig- that vessel on the display of the radio. The polled po-
nal. sition of the vessel is shown on the display of the GPS
chart plotter for ease in navigating to the location of
i. After the GROUP CALL is transmitted, all the the polled vessel.
radios in the group will switch to the designated chan-
nel (figure 4-96). NOTE
USA DSC The other vessel must have an oper-
69
SELECT CH ating GPS receiver connected to its
DSC transceiver and must not have
74
its transceiver set to deny position re-
quests.
Figure 4-96. Select Channel
4-21.6.1 Setting Up Position Reply. The radio can be
j. Listen to the channel to make sure it is not busy, setup to automatically or manually send the boat’s po-
then key the microphone and call the other vessels you sition to another vessel. In the manual mode, the MMSI
desire to communicate with. or persons name will be shown on the display.
4-21.5.3 Receiving a Group Call. a. Press and hold down the CALL(MENU) key un-
til Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appear.
a. When a group call is received, the radio will pro-
duce a ringing alarm sound. b. Turn Channel Selector knob to select DSC SETUP
menu (figure 4-47).
b. The radio automatically switches to the requested
channel (figure 4-97). c. Press the ENT key, then select POS REPLY (fig-
ure 4-98) with the Channel Selector knob.
USA DSC
06
7:45PM
USA
01
RECEIVED
GROUP INDIV ACK
ROUTINE INDIV RING
GROUP DIR
A
>POS REPLY
Figure 4-97. Received Group Routine
Figure 4-98. POS Reply
c. Press any key to stop the alarm.
4-49
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select AUTO f. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select ON or
or MANUAL. In AUTO mode (figure 4-99), after a OFF (figure 4-102).
DSC POS request is received, the radio will automati-
cally transmit the vessels position. In the MANUAL
USA
01
mode, the display of the radio will show the requesting POS REQUEST
station. ON
>OFF A
USA
01
POS REPLY
Figure 4-102. POS Request Off
>AUTO
MANUAL A g. Press the ENT key to store the selected setting.
Figure 4-99. Auto POS Reply h. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation
f. Press the ENT key to store the selected setting.
4-21.6.2 Transmitting a Position Request to Another
g. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation Vessel.
4-21.6.2.1 Preprogramming Request.
4-21.6.1.1 Position Request Ringer. The radio has
the capability to turn off the Position Request ringer. a. Press the CALL(MENU) key. The DSC Opera-
tion menu (figure 4-76) will appear in the display.
til the Radio Setup menu (figure 4-1) appears. b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to selector POS
REQUEST (figure 4-103).
USA DSC
69
INDIVIDUAL
c. Press the ENT key, then select DSC BEEP with GROUP
ALL SHIP
the Channel Selector knob (figure 4-100). >POS REQUEST
Figure 4-103. Individual POS Request

USA
01
GROUP DIR
POS REPLY c. Press ENT key to show the Position Request di-
POS INPUT
>DSC BEEP
A rectory. This directory uses the INDIVIDUAL Di-
rectory information.
Figure 4-100. DSC Beep
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select a name,
d. Press the ENT key. then press the ENT key.
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select POS e. Press the ENT key to transmit the position re-
REQUEST (figure 4-101). quest DSC call.
USA
f. When the radio receives the position from the
01
DSC BEEP polled vessel it is shown on the radio display and also
INDIVIDUAL transferred to the GPS Chart Plotter.
GROUP
A
>POS REQUEST
g. If the radio does not receive a reply, the display
will be as shown in figure 4-104. To send again, press
Figure 4-101. POS Request the ENT key.
4-50
USA DSC USA DSC
69 69
VERTEX 567890123
NO REPLY NO REPLY
SEND [ENT] SEND [ENT]
EXIT [CLR] EXIT [CLR]
Figure 4-104. Vertex No Reply Call Figure 4-105. MMSI Number No Reply
NOTE i. When the radio receives the position from the

polled vessel it is shown on the radio display and also
If the radio does not receive position transferred to the GPS Chart plotter.
data from the polled vessel, the LCD
will show NO POSITION DATA. j. If the radio does not receive a reply, the display
will be as shown in figure 4-105. To send again, press
4-21.6.2.2 Manual Request. A MMSI number may the ENT key.
be manually entered to contact without setting up the
Individual/Position Call Directory. 4-21.6.3 Receiving a Position Request. When a posi-
tion request call is received form another vessel, a ring-
a. Press the CALL(MENU) key. The DSC Opera- ing alarm will sound and POS REQUEST will be shown
tion menu (figure 4-76) will appear in the display. in the LCD. Operation and transceiver function dif-
fers depending on POS REPLY in the DSC SETUP
b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select POS menu setting.
REQUEST (figure 4-103).
4-21.6.3.1 Automatically Reply.
c. Press the ENT key to show the position request
directory. This directory uses the Individual Directory a. When a position request call is received (figure
information. 4-106), a calling alarm sounds four times. Then re-
quested position coordinates are transmitted automati-
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the cally to the vessel requesting the position information.
MANUAL then press the ENT key.
USA DSC
21
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob to scroll through 7:45PM
numbers, 0-9. To enter the desired number and move RECEIVED
POS REQUEST
one space to the right press the ENT key. Repeat this 123456789 A
procedure until all nine space of the desired MMSI
number are entered. Figure 4-106. POS Request Received
f. If a mistake was made entering in the MMSI num- b. To exit from position request display, press any
ber repeat pressing the H/L(NAV) key until the wrong key.
number is selected, then move the Channel Selector
knob to correct the entry. 4-21.6.3.2 Manually Reply.
g. When finished entering the MMSI number, press a. When a position request call is received from an-
and hold the ENT key. other vessel, the LCD will be as shown in figure
4-106.
h. Press the ENT key to transmit the position re-
quest DSC call. Press the CLR key to exit (figure b. A ringing alarm sounds four times. Then select
4-105). type of reply function SEND or NO REPLY (figure
4-107) by using the Channel Selector knob.
4-51
USA DSC
f. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select ON or
21
URGENCY OFF (figure 4-109).
123456789
>SEND
NO REPLY A
USA
01
POS SEND
Figure 4-107. Urgency Reply ON
>OFF A
c. The radio display will show SEND or NO REPLY
allowing you to send your vessels location by using the Figure 4-109. POS Send OFF
Channel Selector knob.
g. Pres the ENT key to store the selected setting.
d. When SEND is selected, press the ENT key, the
boat’s position will be transmitted to the requesting ves- h. To exit this menu and return to the radio operation
sel. mode press the 16/9 key.
e. To exit from position request display, press the 16/ 4-21.7.2 Transmitting a DSC Position Send Call.
9 key.
4-21.7.2.1 Preprogrammable Calling.
4-21.7 POSITION SEND. This function is similar to
Position Request, however instead of requesting a po- a. Press the CALL(MENU) key. The DSC Opera-
sition of another vessel this function allows the boat’s tion menu (figure 4-76) will appear in the display.
position to be sent to another vessel. There must be an
operating GPS receiver connected for the radio to send b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the POS
the position. SEND (figure 4-110).
4-21.7.1 Setting up a Position Send Ringer. The radio USA DSC
68
has the capability to turn off the Position Send ringer. GROUP
ALL SHIP
POS REQUEST
a. Press and hold down the CALL(MENU) key un- >POS SEND
Figure 4-110. Group POS Send
Setup menu (figure 4-47). c. Press the ENT key to select the Individual Direc-
tory.
c. Press the ENT key, then select DSC BEEP with
the Channel Selector knob (figure 4-100). d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select a name
in the directory, then press the ENT key.
e. Press the ENT key to send your position to the
e. Turn the Channel Selector knob to selector POS selected vessel or the CLR key to exit (figure 4-111).
SEND (figure 4-108).
USA DSC
69
SEND
USA
01
POS SEND
DSC BEEP
YES [ENT]
GROUP
NO [CLR]
POS REQUEST
>POS SEND A
Figure 4-111. POS Send
Figure 4-108. POS Send
4-52
4-21.7.2.2 Manual Calling. You may enter a MMSI b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select DSC
number manually to contact without the Setting up the SETUP menu (figure 4-47).
Individual/Position Call Directory.
c. Press the ENT key, then select POS INPUT (fig-
a. Press the CALL(MENU) key. The DSC Opera- ure 4-112) with the Channel Selector knob.
tion menu (figure 4-76) will appear in the display.
USA
01
b. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select the POS INDIV RING
send (figure 4-110). GROUP DIR
POS REPLY
>POS INPUT
c. Press the ENT key to show the Position Send di-
rectory. This directory uses the INDIVIDUAL Di- Figure 4-112. POS Input
rectory information.
d. Press the ENT key. The transceiver will beep.
d. Turn the Channel Selector knob to select
MANUAL then press the ENT key. e. Enter your local time by the 24-hour system on
the UTC time. Use the ENT and H/L(NAV) key to
e. Enter the 9-digit MMSI number of the station to navigate to each column of the time, then use the Chan-
be contacted, then press the ENT key. nel Selector knob to select the desired numbers in each
column. Repeat for each column, to complete the time
f. Press the ENT key to send the position to the se- (figure 4-113).
lected vessel.
USA
01
4-21.7.3 Receiving a DSC Position Send Call. When POS INPUT
another vessel transmits the location to the radio the UTC 21:36
33▫37 . 120N
following will happen: 118▫09. 582W A
a. A ringing sound will be produced when the call is Figure 4-113. UTC Time Entry
received.
f. Enter the Latitude/Longitude of your vessel loca-
b. Press the 16/9 key to stop ringing. tion with the same procedure as described in step e.
c. The position from the calling vessel will be shown g. To store the data entered, press the ENT key. To
on the display of the radio and also transferred to any exit this menu and return to the radio operation mode
GPS chart plotter connected. press the 16/9 key.
4-21.8 MANUAL INPUTTING OF THE GPS LO- 4-21.9 SIREN/PA.

CATION (LAT/LONG). You may send the Latitude/
Longitude of the boat manually even if the radio is not 4-21.9.1 Siren/PA. The siren/PA is used to provide
connected the GPS receiver. amplification up to a 30 watt level through the hailer
speaker. Operation is as follows:
After the position is entered, transmitting a DSC Dis-
tress, Position Request, or Position Send will contain a. With the rotary switch in the radio repeat (RAD)
the manually entered position. position, a signal received on the VHF radio will be
simultaneously broadcast over the PA system loud
a. Press and hold down the CALL(MENU) key un- speaker.
til RADIO SETUP (figure 4-1) menu appears.
4-53
With the Rotary Switch in this Position; Pressing the e. When the rotary knob is in the WAIL (Wail Tone)
MAN switch will result in SI TEST. Refer to the position, a steady rise and fall tone (wail) is produced.
manufacturer’s manual listed in table 1-2.
With the Rotary Switch in this Position:
b. When the rotary switch is in the PA position the
siren is in a standby state where no tones have been (1) Pressing the MAN switch will change the
activated, but is waiting for another action to be taken siren tone to a yelp pattern (a fast rise and fall tone).
by the operator. This position is often the best choice
when public address is required. (2) Pressing the MAN switch a second time re-
turns it back to a wail tone.
With the Rotary Switch in this Position; Pressing the
MAN switch will result in a WAIL tone ramping up to f. When the rotary knob is in the YELP (Yelp Tone)
the peak frequency and ramping down to a stop at the position, a fast, rise and fall tone is produced. Pressing
lowest frequency when the MAN switch is released. the MAN switch will change the sire tone to a
PIERCER patter (an extreme fast rise and fall tone).
c. When the rotary switch is in the MAN (Manual Pressing the MAN switch a second time returns it back
Siren) position the siren is in a standby state where no to a YELP tone.
tones have been activated, but is waiting for another
action to be taken by the operator. This position is g. When the rotary knob is in the T3 (Piercer Tone)
often the best choice when manual operation of the position, an extremely fast, rise and fall tone is pro-
siren is desired. duced.
With the Rotary Switch in this Position; Pressing the With the Rotary Switch in the position; Pressing the
MAN switch will result in a WAIL tone ramping up to MAN switch will result in the AIRHORN tone until
the peak frequency and stopping when the MAN switch the MAN switch is released.
is released.
h. The 4-position slide bar controls three separate
d. When the rotary knob is in the Hands Free (HF) primary warning lightbar functions. The six pushbuttons
position, the tone functions are placed in a standby control secondary lightbar fucntions. Each slide bar
mode. Siren tones are actuated by a single tap on the and pushbutton combination has a colored LED indi-
MAN button. The first tap produces a WAIL tone (a cator for operating status display.
steady rise and fall tone). A second tap produces a
yelp tone (a fast rise and fall tone). A third tap pro- i. There are two, red LEDs on the control head, la-
duces a piercer tone (an extremely fast rise and fall beled SPK1 and SPK2. These LEDs act as diagnos-
tone). The next tap returns the siren to a wail tone and tic indicators to indicate specific fault conditions. If
the cycle repeats itself. Two quick, successive taps the LEDs are steadily illuminated while a tone is in
will stop the siren. use, there is no fault associated with the speaker out-
put. IF the LEDs show any other indication refer to
With the Rotary Switch in this Position; Pressing the table 4-10.
MAN switch will result in the HF cycle as described
above.
4-54
Table 4-10. Siren/PA Fault Diagnostics
Fault Condition Diagnostic Indicators Response
Under Voltage Speaker LED #2 will be in a double flash mode (2 quick flashes followed
by a longer pause) and the siren tones will not operate.
Over Voltage Speaker LED #1 will be in a double flash mode (2 quick flashes followed
by a longer pause) and the tones will not operate.
Speaker #1 Speaker LED #1 will be in a single flash mode (the LED will be on and off
Short Circuit an equal amount of time) and the siren tones will not operate.
Speaker #2 Speaker LED #2 will be in a single flash mode (the LED will be on and off
Short Circuit an equal amount of time) and the siren tones will not operate.
Speaker #1 Speaker LED #1 will be off (having a single speaker system will always
Open Circuit cause this condition for the speaker output not in use) all tones will continue to
operate.
Speaker #2 Speaker LED #2 will be off (having a single speaker system will always
Open Circuit cause this condition for the speaker output not in use) all tones will continue to
operate.
4-21.10 NAVNET SETUP AND OPERATION. The coxswain should use current charts, have knowl-
edge of the tide and current conditions, wind direction,
and the navigation aids that will be available for use in
WARNING conjunction with the NavNet display.
The following paragraphs provide the basic informa-

The NavNet simulation mode does not tion necessary to operate the NavNet display unit (fig-
provide real time navigation data. Op- ure 4-25). Consult the manufacturer’s manuals listed in
erating the NavNet in simulation mode table 1-2 to become familiar with the setup and opera-
could cause damage to the boat and tion of the NavNet display system special features.
injury to personnel.
a. The power on sequence procedure is as follows:
The radome, with the 24 nmi antenna, provides data to
the NavNet display to produce the radar picture. 1. Press and hold the POWER/BRILL key.
The depth sounder data is integrated by the network 2. The last used display will show after several
sounder into the NavNet display unit. The depth seconds.
sounder is capable of providing depth and bottom in-
formation. 4-21.10.1 Radar Picture. Description and setup infor-
mation for the radar display function of the NavNet
The GPS antenna/receiver installed on the boat is ca- unit is provided in the following paragraphs. A typical
pable of receiving and processing satellite signals that full screen radar display, shown by figure 4-114, iden-
are sent to the NavNet display to identify the position tifies the information that is available for presentation.
of the boat at a given moment in time. Both the soft keys and function keys are in the hidden
mode in the radar display screen shown.
4-55
RANGE/RANGE HEADING NORTH
RING INTERVAL LINE MAKER
TRAIL TIME
.250 .125 nm TRAIL 30m
TRAIL ELAPSED TIME
SP 02m30s
PULSELENGTH GUARD ZONE1
G1 IN
PRESENTATION H-UP GUARD ZONE 2
G2 OUT
MODE ECHO STRETCH
ES L
INTERFERENCE
ALARM IR L REJECTOR
ICON
BATTERY
ICON
NORTH MARKER
ZOOM
AREA
GUARD ZONE 2
CURSOR
GUARD
ZONE 1
VRM 1 (DOTTED)
VRM 2 (DASHED)
ZOOM RANGE RING
WINDOW
EBL1 (DOTTED)
EBL2 (DASHED)
EBL 1 BEARING
EBL1 EBL2 WAYPOINT
309.9°R MARKER
VRM 1 RANGE 17.0°R 320.1°R
VRM1 VRM2 0.18nm
0.158nm 0.225nm
CURSOR RANGE
EBL2 BEARING, AND BEARING
VRM2 RANGE
Figure 4-114. Radar Display
a. To place the radar in the transmit mode, highlight f. The selected screen will be shown with the pre-
and press the TX label on the RADAR STBY soft key selected data boxes. The six default data boxes are:
and then press the RETURN soft key.
1. Position (latitude and longitude).
b. The radar will automatically tune, if AUTO tun-
ing has been previously selected. 2. Course Over the Ground (COG).
c. Adjust display brilliance, panel brilliance, contrast 3. Speed Over the Ground (SOG).
and hue if required. Adjust the radar gain, A/C SEA,
A/C RAIN and FTC sensitivity, as required. Select 4. Trip Log.
the desired range scale and corresponding radar pulse
length. 5. Cursor Position.
d. Select the desired display screen. Press the DISP The D. Box soft key is used to hide the data boxes.
key and rotate the ENTER knob to select the icon for
a basic display screen, a hot page screen or a combi- g. Select one of the four radar presentation modes.
nation screen. Push the ENTER knob to activate the
screen. 1. North Up.
e. If in a combination display screen use the soft 2. True Motion.

keys, RADAR CONTRL or PLOTTER CONTROL,
to switch between the radar and plotter screens. Press 3. Head Up.
the HIDE/SHOW key to replace the soft key labels
with the preset function key labels. Refer to tables 4. Course Up.
4-3, 4-4 and 4-5 for the preset default function settings
and the other functions available.
4-56
h. The display picture may be shifted manually or l. The guard alarm allows the operator to set the
automatically, to expand the view field without switch- desired range and bearing for a guard zone. When
ing to a larger scale. The sweep origin can be manu- ships, islands or land masses violate the guard zone, an
ally shifted in any presentation mode to a point speci- audio alarm sounds and the offending target blinks to
fied by the cursor by up to 60% of the range in use in alert the operator.
any direction. The system can automatically shift the
sweep origin to an amount calculated using the boat
speed by pressing the AUTO soft key. The shift dis- ! CAUTION
tance is 60% of the range in use or less in the auto-
matic mode. The guard alarm should not be relied
upon as the sole means for detecting
i. The offset EBL is useful to predict a potential col- possible collision situations.
lision course and to measure the range and bearing
between two targets. The EBL capability is activated The system may not activate the alarm if not properly
by pressing the keyboard EBL/VRM key, which dis- adjusted. Boat personnel must use all means to detect
plays the five EBL/VRM soft keys. and prevent collision situations and not solely rely on
the guard alarm.
NOTE
NOTE
Multiple gradation paints the echo trails
thinner with time, like the afterglow A/C SEA, A/C RAIN, and GAIN con-
on an analog PPI radar. trols should be properly adjusted to be
sure the alarm system does not over-
j. Echo trials are a simulated afterflow of target ech- look target echoes.
oes that represent the target past movements relative
to the boat. The trail functions are actuated using the 1. When the ground alarm zone is set, the equip-
radar soft keys. The echo trail time, either a single or ment searches for targets inside the guard zone to de-
multiple graduation display, and the display color (blue, termine the guard alarm type. If a target is found in-
yellow, green, or white), may be selected using the ra- side the guard zone and the guard zone type becomes
dar soft keys. an Outward Guard Alarm, and any target exiting, the
guard zone will trigger an alarm. If no target is found
NOTE the guard zone type becomes an Inward Guard Alarm,
and any targets entering the guard zone will trigger the
This function magnifies not only tar- alarm. The guard alarm type is shown as G1 (G2) IN
gets but also sea clutter and radar in- or G1 (G2) OUT.
terference. Ensure sea clutter and
radar interference are properly sup- NOTE
pressed before activating the echo
stretch. When the radar range is less than the
guard zone range, G1 (G2) IN or G1
k. The echo stretch function magnifies small blips on (G2) OUT changes to G1 (G2) ***.
the display caused by reflected echoes from long range The guard alarm function is not avail-
targets. The echo stretch function magnifies these small able while this indication appears.
blips in all ranges. There are two types of echo stretch
available: ES LOW which stretches echoes in bearing
direction and ES HIGH which stretches them in both
range and bearing directions.
4-57
2. Any radar target violating the guard zone will o. Automatic Radar Plotting (ARP). The ARP func-
flash, the audio alarm sounds, and a red alarm icon tion of the radar can automatically track up to ten tar-
appears. Additionally the message TARGET EN- gets simultaneously. A number of features are avail-
TERED INTO GUARD1 (GUARD2) or TARGET able including target vectors, past target positions, clos-
LEFT FROM GUARD1 (GUARD2) is displayed at est point of approach (CPA) and time to closest point
the bottom of the screen, depending on the guard zone of approach (TCPA) alarms, and lost target alarm.
type. Press the control panel CLEAR key to silence Refer to the manufacturer’s manual listed in table 1-2
the alarm. for instructions, warnings, and cautions regarding the
use of these features.
NOTE
4-21.10.2 Plotter Display. The plotter display selected
If the radar is set to standby while the for viewing may be full screen (figure 4-115), overlay
guard alarm is active, the guard alarm screen, or a combination screen. The soft function
is cancelled. The guard alarm is keys are hidden in the plotter display screen shown.
redisplayed when the radar is set to
transmit again.
PRESENTATION MODE
(NORTH-UP)
3. A watchman function is available when boat per- NAV
DATA TRIP
sonnel need to be alerted to radar targets but continu- WINDOW DISTANCE
ous operation of the radar system is not otherwise re- 34° 22. 3456’N 359.9° M TRIP NU
quired. 080° 22. 3456’E 19.9kt 99.9 nm
16.0nm s a
v e
The watchman function periodically transmits radar SCALE S

I
M OWN
pulses for one minute to check for targets in a guard ICON
SHIP
MARK
zone. If a target is found in the zone, watchman is BAR
cancelled, the audio alarm sounds and the radar con-
tinues transmitting. If no target is found the radar goes
into standby, for the number of minutes selected on the
OWN
RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. WTCH appears WAYPOINT
WRECK SHIP
MARKER 002WP FISH
at the top left corner of the display screen when the TRACK
Watchman function is active.

WAYPOINT
NAME
m. A waypoint marker, showing waypoint position out-
put from the GPS may be inscribed on the radar dis-
play. This marker may be shown or hidden as desired. COURSE
BAR
WAYPOINT MARKER
n. A radar beacon (racon) is a radar transponder SHAPE & NAME
which emits a characteristic signal when triggered by
a ship’s radar, usually only in the X-band (3-centimeter
band). The signal may be emitted on the same fre- Figure 4-115. Full-Screen Plotter Display
quency as that of the triggering radar, in which case it
is superimposed on the boat’s radar display screen au- a. The data shown in the NAV data window changes
tomatically. depending upon the NAV soft key selected and the
position of the cursor.
The racon signal appears on the PPI as a radial line
originating at a point just beyond the position of the b. The icons in the icon bar represent the following
radar beacon or as a Morse code signal displayed radi- information, from left to right:
ally from just beyond the beacon.
4-58
1. North arrow direction marker. d. In the event of the GPS unit or connection cable
malfunction, the message NO POSITION DATA is
2. Chart cards installed and in operation. displayed.
3. Alarm indicator. e. To place the NavNet into the plotter operation

mode, press the control panel DISP key to show the
4. Track hold. screen selection window.
5. Chart offset. f. Rotate the ENTER knob to select PLOT, NAV or

OVRLY screens as desired.
6. Save.
4-21.10.3 Compass Display Screen. The compass
7. L/L offset. display screen (figure 4-116), is displayed at the bot-
tom half of the screen in the combination display mode.
8. Battery condition. The screen primarily provides steering information.
9. Simulation operating mode. a. The compass shows two triangles.
c. The OWN SHIP marker blinks when the unit loses 1. The black triangle shows the bearing to desti-
the GPS signal. The message NO GPS FIX! appears nation waypoint.
approximately 90 seconds after the positioning error
and is accompanied by the audio alarm. 2. The red triangle, which moves with the boat’s
course, shows own ship’s course.
RANGE TO
DESTINATION
SPEED OVER WAYPOINT
GROUND
SPEED
DESTINATION THROUGH
WAYPOINT WATER
RNG 99.9 nm ESTIMATED

003WPT
SOG 10.0kt SWT 10.0 kt TIME OF
TTG 0D 9H 59M ETA 23th 23:59 ARRIVAL AT
TIME-TO-GO TO DESTINATION
DPT BRG TMP
DESTINATION 45.2 ft 359.9°M 16.2 °F
BEARING WATER
SCALE TEMPERATURE
GAUGE (WHEN
SENSOR IS
DEPTH CSE CONNECTED)
50 359.9°M 10
GRAPH
RED ARROW GREEN ARROW
SHOWN WHEN SHOWN WHEN
DIRECTION TO DIRECTION TO
STEER IS LEFT STEER IS RIGHT
SHIP’S
XTE MONITOR COURSE (RED)
DESTINATION OWN SHIP MARKER
WAYPOINT (BLACK WHEN WITHIN
BEARING XTE RANGE, YELLOW
WHEN OVER RANGE)
Figure 4-116. Compass Display
4-59
b. The depth graph shows the latest 10 minutes of the vessel so the OWN SHIP marker stays at the cen-
depth data. The range of the depth graph is 50-feet ter of the XTE monitor.
and it is automatically adjusted with depth. When a
water temperature sensor is connected, a temperature Two soft keys are available for the XTE monitor:
graph of the latest 10 minutes of temperature data is
shown. 1. The EDIT XT-LMT soft key sets the range
for the XTE monitor scale.
c. The cross-track error (XTE) monitor is located
below the compass rose. The monitor provides a vi- 2. The RESET XTE soft key is displayed when
sual indication of the amount of bearing the boat is off the waypoint destination is set and permits a restart of
course and the direction to steer to return to course. the navigation function.
The OWN SHIP marker shows the direction and 4-21.10.4 Highway Display Screen. The highway
amount the boat is off course. It is shown in black display screen (figure 4-117), is displayed at the lower
when the amount of cross-track error is within the XTE half of the screen in the combination display. The
monitor range and yellow when the XTE monitor range screen primarily provides a graphic presentation of the
is exceeded. An arrow appears at the right or left of boat’s track along the intended course. It is useful for
the XTE monitor and it shows the direction to steer to monitoring the boat’s progress toward a waypoint.
return to the intended course. The arrow is shown in
red to steer left and green to steer right to return to a. The OWN SHIP marker shows the relation be-
course. To maintain course, the coxswain would steer tween the boat’s current course and the required course
to reach the waypoint.
RANGE TO
SPEED OVER DESTINATION
GROUND WAYPOINT
DESTINATION SPEED THROUGH

WAYPOINT WATER
RNG 99.9 nm
TIME-TO-GO 003WPT SOG 10.0kt SWT 10.0 kt
TO DESTINATION
TTG 0D 9H 59M ETA 23th 23:59
ESTIMATED
WPT003 TIME OF ARRIVAL
AT DESTINATION
DESTINATION INTENDED
WAYPOINT COURSE
OWN SHIP
MARKER
XTE
RANGE
0.9 nm 0.009 nm 0.9 nm
RED ARROW GREEN ARROW

DIRECTION DIRECTION TO
TO STEER XTE STEER
MONITOR
Figure 4-117. Highway Display
4-60
b. The XTE monitor shows the direction and amount b. The plotter display may be shifted on the screen
the boat is off course. The arrow, to the left or right of by positioning the cursor at the screen edge with the
the monitor, shows the direction to steer to return the trackball. The soft key CENTER returns the cursor
boat to the required course and the nautical miles the and OWN SHIP marker to the screen center, and turns
boat is off course. In figure 4-106 the coxswain would off the cursor.
steer right 0.009 nmi to return to course. To maintain
course the coxswain would steer the boat so the own c. Chart Cards. When a Furuno and NAVIONICS
ship marker stays aligned with the intended course line. chart card or C-MAPtrol chartpanel
card HIDE/SHOW
is inserted into the
1.chart
North-up.
card slot and thekey to isdisplay
boat thechart
near any plottergraphic
c. The soft keys available for the XTE monitors are soft on
data, a chart is displayed keys. Press If the
the screen. a wrong
EDIT XT-LMT and RESET XTE, previously de- 2.card
Course-up. modechart
is inserted or a wrong softscale
key isuntil the land
selected,
scribed. desiredInsert the
masses will appear hollow. pre-sentation
proper card and
3.select
Auto-up.
a suitable chart mode
scale. isChart
displayed. The at the
icons appear
4-21.10.5 Nav Data Display. The Nav Data display presentation modes
top of the display to help in the selection of a suitable
may be selected as a full-screen display (figure 4-118) chart scale. The chartavailable
icons have are:the following three
or half-screen display (figure 4-119). The data boxes meanings:
are labeled to provide ease of use. The coxswain may
select what navigation data to display and where it ap- 1. Proper card is not inserted or chart scale is
pears on the screen. If the appropriate sensor is not too small. Operate the RANGE key to adjust the chart
connected the data box data is shown with bars (--). scale.
The distance shown on the trip log can be reset to zero
using the control panel MENU key and the display soft 2. Chart scale is too large. Operate the RANGE
keys for SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, GENERAL key to adjust the chart scale.
SETUP, RESET TRIP LOG, and EDIT.
4-21.10.6 Plotter Display Operation.
POSITION a. Plotter display presentation mode. Press the con-

POSITION 34° 34. 5678’ N
120° 34. 5678’ W
WAYPOINT WPT POSITION
POSITION 34° 34. 5678’ N SOG SPEED
OVER
120° 34. 5678’ W 10.0 kt
SPEED GROUND
THROUGH STW COURSE
WATER 10.0 kt 101.6° M COURSE
BEARING TO BEARING RANGE
WAYPOINT 9.2° M 0.18 nm RANGE TO
WAYPOINT
DEPTH TEMP
DEPTH 1.3241 ft 18.2°C WATER
TEMPERATURE
Figure 4-118. Full-Screen Nav Data Display

3. Suitable chart scale is selected.
TRIP LOG TTG d. Chart Scale. Chart scale (range) may be selected
TRIP TIME-TO-GO
LOG 103 nm 0D 2H 30M
TO with the RANGE - or RANGE + key. The RANGE -
DESTINATION
ETA key expands the chart range. The RANGE + key
1 ST 1:25 ESTIMATED
TIME OF shrinks the chart range.
ARRIVAL AT
DATE TIME DESTINATION
CURRENT 2001
DATE FEB 1 01:27:05 CURRENT
TIME
Figure 4-119. Half-Screen Nav Data Display
4-61
NOTE 2. The equipment stores a total of 8,000 points
of track and marks. This amount may be distributed
When the display is expanded or as desired. The default setting is 2,000 points of track
shrunk beyond the range of the chart and 6,000 marks.
card in use the message NO CHART
appears, along with the appropriate When the track memory setting is changed, all tracks
chart icon. and marks in the memory are erased. If necessary the
data may be saved to a memory card.
e. Chart Symbols. The display will show chart sym-
bols which depict wrecks, buoys, anchorages, and other 3. OWN SHIP’S track and TARGET tracks can
nautical information. When a buoy or lighthouse is be erased three ways: collectively, by color, or by area.
selected by the cursor, the specific navigational data is
displayed. This data includes the range and bearing i. Marks and lines.
from the boat, the light visibility range in nautical miles,
the light time period and the type of light installed. Codes 1. Marks are useful for denoting important points
for the type of light include: such as a rendezvous point. Marks can be inscribed in
seven shapes and seven colors. The available colors
1. FL; Flashing. are: red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue, and white.
Figure 4-120 shows the seven mark shapes available
2. F; Fixed light. for display.
3. F FL; Fixed and flashing light.
4. MO; Morse code light.

Figure 4-120. Mark Shapes
5. Oc; Occulting light.
The mark is inscribed in the size and shape selected on
f. Port Service Icons. The service available in a the MARKS & LINES menu. The default mark at-
port may be displayed at the top of the screen when tributes are size (normal), color (yellow), and shape
using NavChart cards. (hollow circle).
g. Current (or tide) Data. Some NavChart cards 2. Lines may be inscribed to denote a larger area
provide for the calculation of current or tide data for than shown by a mark. Simple charts may also be
any date. The current date sunrise, sunset, moonrise, constructed using the line function. The line segment
moonset, and moon shape is also available in the data ends are terminated using the pre-selected mark shape.
screen. The four line styles available are: dot, continuous line,
dash, and dot-dash.
h. The boat’s track is plotted on the display using the
GPS navigational data. The default setting for the track 3. Lines and marks may be erased individually,
display is red. by area or all.
1. OWN SHIP or TARGET tracks may be turned NOTE

off, a different color selected or plotted by a time or
distance interval. The default setting is time. A shorter Erased lines and marks cannot be re-
time interval provides for better reconstruction of the stored.
track, but the storage time of the track is reduced.
When the track memory becomes full, the oldest track
is erased to make room for the latest.
4-62
j. Waypoints. In the navigation terminology, a way- 2. Routes may be created based on the boat’s
point is a particular location on a voyage whether it be track. Each route may contain 35 points. The route
a starting, intermediate, or destination point. A way- can be created automatically (by time or distance) or
point is the simplest piece of information the equip- manually. The method is useful to use to retrace a
ment requires to get the boat to a destination, in the previous track. The SAVE icon appears at the top of
shortest distance possible. the screen when a voyage-based route is being cre-
ated.
The NavNet has the capacity to store position infor-
mation for 999 waypoints. A waypoint may be entered NOTE
by one of the following five methods:
Recording of waypoints may be
1. At OWN SHIP position. stopped and saved at any time.
2. At MOB position. 3. When 35 waypoints have been entered the

following message is displayed: Total 35 WPTS have
3. By cursor. been already registered in the route. Stop creating voy-
age-based route. In this case, automatically creating
4. By range and bearing. voyage-based route stops.
5. Using the waypoint list which is developed by 4. Two routes may be connected into one new
manually entering points using their latitude and longi- route. However, the new route must not exceed the
tude. maximum of 35 waypoints.
Waypoint data that can be selected are colors (7 col- 5. A route waypoint list or a route waypoint dis-
ors), waypoint mark shape (16 shapes), name (1 to 6 played on the plotter may be inserted or removed using
characters), and comment (13 characters). Waypoint the control panel MENU key and WAYPOINTS/
data may be edited or erased from the waypoint list or ROUTES soft keys. The route is redrawn, eliminating
directly from the plotter display. An alphanumeric or adding the selected waypoint.
search function is available to find a specific waypoint
in the waypoint list. 6. An entire route may also be erased.
k. Routes. Often a trip from one place to another l. Navigation Using Quick Points. The quick point
involves several course changes, requiring a series of feature allows navigation to point(s) without retaining
route points (waypoints) which are used for naviga- the data indefinitely in the NavNet memory.
tion, one after another. The sequence of waypoints
leading to the ultimate destination is called a route. The 1. When navigating to a single quick point, a solid
NavNet can automatically advance to the next way- light-blue line with arrows connects between own ship
point on a route, to avoid manually changing the desti- and destination. The line is marked as QP<01>for a
nation waypoint repeatedly. Up to 200 routes maybe cursor-selected location or a waypoint name for a way-
stored. A route may have 35 waypoints. point selected location. Arrows on the line show the
direction to follow to get to the point. Range and bear-
1. A route may be constructed using existing ing from own ship to destination appear at the top of
waypoints from the established waypoint list or may the screen. The quick point is saved to the waypoint
be constructed directly on the plotter display, using ex- list as waypoint, QP01.
isting waypoints or new locations. Any new location
will be saved as a waypoint, under the newest empty
waypoint number.
4-63
2. When navigating to multiple quick points, a NOTE
solid, light-blue line runs between own ship and the
first waypoint and a dashed green line runs between If the alarm has been caused by more
the other waypoints. Quick points are numbered in than one alarm condition, the alarm
sequential order from QP<01> and are saved to the information window will also display
waypoint list. Range and bearing from own ship to the the message CONTINUE. Press the
first destination appear at the top of the screen. The NEXT INFO soft key to view the
quick points are saved as a route, under the name other alarm conditions that have been
Q<RTE (Quick Route). violated.
m. Navigation To Waypoints. A waypoint may be a. The alarms, which may be displayed on the plot-
selected from the plotter display or from the waypoint ter by pressing the control panel ALARM key, are:
list. A solid light-blue line will show the route from
own ship’s position to the selected waypoint. Way- 1. Arrival Alarm.
point data is displayed at the top of the screen.
2. Anchor Watch Alarm.
1. Some NavCharts and C-MAP cards have a
port service list which shows services available at ports 3. Proximity Alarm.
or harbors. The port or service may be selected as a
waypoint and the route established using the trackball 4. XTE Alarm.
and the ENTER knob.
5. Speed Alarm.
2. To navigate waypoints in reverse order, the
RVRSE ROUTE soft key is used. 6. Trip Alarm.
3. When steering to avoid an obstacle, or the boat 7. Bottom Alarm.

drifts off the intended course, two options to achieve
the waypoint destination are available. 8. Temperature Alarm.
(a) The system XTE monitor will display the Any of the alarm conditions and the associated audio
data to return directly to the original course track. buzzer may be individually enabled or disabled.
(b) Using the restart function, the navigation b. The audio alarm function may also be turned off.
system will provide a new track directly to the next Securing the audio alarm silences the buzzer for all
waypoint. This method eliminates the short course seg- plotter, radar, and depth sounder alarms.
ment to return to the intended track.
c. Arrival Alarm. The arrival alarm informs the cox-
4-21.10.7 Plotter Alarms. The plotter function of the swain that the boat is approaching a destination
NavNet display unit is equipped with navigation and waypoint. The area that defines an arrival zone is a
depth alarms to alert the crew to position or depth con- circle. The alarm will be released if the boat enters
dition changes. When an alarm setting has been vio- the circle from the outside. When the arrival alarm is
lated, the buzzer sounds and the red speaker icon is active a dashed red circle marks the arrival alarm area.
displayed on the screen. The speaker icon remains
red until the initial alarm condition is reset. The condi- d. Anchor Watch Alarm. The anchor watch alarm
tion that caused the alarm is shown on the alarm menu alerts the crew that the boat is moving when it should
display. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm be at rest. When the anchor watch is active, a dashed
and change the icon to the display background color. red circle with an X at its center marks the anchor
The speaker icon will remain on the screen until the watch area. The available anchor watch range is 0.001
reason for the alarm is eliminated. to 9.999 miles.
4-64
e. Proximity Alarm. The proximity alarm alerts the The display mode is selected using the control panel
coxswain when the boat nears a proximity marked DISP key, sounder display soft key, and DISPLAY
waypoint and a proximity alarm radius is set for that MODE soft key.
waypoint on the waypoint list. When the boat is within
a waypoint’s proximity alarm radius, the alarm sounds. 4-21.10.9 Sounder Display Data.
The proximity mark remains on the screen until the
waypoint is erased. The dashed red circle proximity a. Zero Line. The zero line or the transmission line
alarm radius is shown on the display. represents the transducer’s depth position.
f. XTE (Cross Track Error) Alarm. The XTE alarm b. Bottom Echo. Echoes from the bottom are nor-
warns the coxswain when the boat is off its intended mally the strongest and are displayed by a reddish-
course. When the XTE alarm is active two dashed brown color. However, the color and width will vary
red lines run parallel with the intended course to mark with bottom composition, water depth, frequency, and
the XTE alarm area on the display. sensitivity.
g. Speed Alarm. The speed alarm warns the cox- In a comparatively shallow depth, a high gain setting
swain when the boat’s speed is over or under a preset will cause a second or sometimes a third or a fourth
minimum or maximum value. An over/under value may echo to be displayed at the same interval between them
also be preset. below the first echo trace. This is because the echo
travels between the bottom and the surface twice or
h. Trip Alarm. The trip alarm informs the coxswain more in shallow depths. The color of the bottom echo
when the boat has traveled to a preset destination. can be used to help determine the density of the bot-
tom material (soft or hard). The harder the bottom,
i. Bottom Alarm. The bottom alarm sounds when the wider the trace. If the gain is set to show only a
the bottom echo is within the alarm range depth range single bottom echo on mud, a rocky bottom will show a
set. To activate the bottom alarm the depth must be second or third bottom return. The range should be
displayed. chosen so the first and second bottom echoes are dis-
played when bottom hardness is being determined.
j. Water Temperature Alarm. The boat is not cur-
rently equipped with a water temperature sensor. c. Surface Noise and Aeration. When the waters
are rough or the boat passes over a wake, surface
4-21.10.8 Network Sounder. The network sounder noise may appear near the zero line. As surface tur-
provides the NavNet display with the depth data ob- bulence is acoustically equivalent to running into a brick
tained from the hull mounted transducer. The data wall, the bottom echo will be displayed intermittently.
may be shown on the screen from seven display modes. Similar noise sometimes appears when a water tem-
These modes are: perature difference (thermocline) exist. In rough wa-
ters the display is occasionally interrupted due to be-
a. Single frequency. low-the-boat air bubbles obstructing the sound path.
This also occurs when the boat makes a quick turn or
b. Dual frequency. reverses movement.
c. Marker zoom. NOTE
d. Bottom zoom. Several functions of the depth sounder

include the capability to obtain data
e. Bottom lock. from intervening objects between the
hull transducer and sea bottom. Re-
f. Bottom discrimination. fer to the manufacturer’s manual listed
in table 1-2 for information and oper-
g. A-scope. ating procedures for these functions.
4-65
4-21.10.10 Depth Sounder Displays. A full screen 1. LF Picture. The sounder uses ultrasonic
depth single frequency display is provided by figure pulses to detect bottom conditions. The lower frequency
4-121. The remaining of the depth displays have the of the pulse, the wider the detection area. Therefore,
capability to show the data in a split screen. These the low frequency is useful for general detection and
combination data displays may be shown with a split judging bottom condition.
vertical or horizontal screen by using the SPLIT soft
key. 2. HF Picture. The higher the frequency of the
ultrasonic pulse the better the resolution. Therefore,
NOTE the high frequency is ideal for detailed observation of
intervening objects between the hull and sea bottom.
When using the vertically split plotter/
sounder display with dual frequency c. Marker Zoom Display. The marker zoom display
or zoom display, the depth scale for expands a selected area of the normal sounder picture
the left sounder screen is not displayed. to full vertical size of the screen on the left-half win-
Further, a last digit on the depth may dow. The portion of the display to expand is marked
be overlapped by the line which splits by the VRM, which is positioned and selected by the
the screen. ENTER knob. Once selected, the area between the
VRM and zoom marker is expanded. The length of
a. Single Frequency Display. The single frequency the segment is equal to one division of the depth scale.
display shows either the Low Frequency (LF) picture
or High Frequency (HF) picture. To select transmis- d. Bottom Zoom Display. The bottom zoom display
sion frequency, press the FREQ LF/HF soft key to expands bottom and bottom object echoes by the zoom
select LF (50 kHz) or HF (200 kHz). range selected on the sounder range setup menu. A
bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it
b. Dual Frequency Display. The dual frequency dis- is a soft, sandy bottom. A long echo tail means a hard
play provides both a LF picture and a HF picture. This bottom.
display is useful for comparing the same picture with
two different sounding frequencies.
DISPLAY MODE SOFT

MINUTE DEPTH SCALE KEYS
MARKER
TIME
ICONS 0° 30” 0 SOUNDER
S
I SINGLE
VARIABLE M
RANGE MARKER CROSS-HAIR

CURSOR SHIFT
52 50
INTERVENING AUTO/
OBJECT ECHO D. BOX
FREQ
LF/HF
100
DISPLAY
BOTTOM ECHO MODE
DEPTH
114
LF
200
TX FREQUENCY
Figure 4-121. Single Frequency Depth Display
4-66
e. Bottom Lock Display. The bottom lock display b. The gain is automatically adjusted to display the
provides a compressed normal picture on the right half bottom echo in reddish-brown, the default color selec-
of the screen and a 3- or 6-meter (10- or 20-feet) wide tion.
layer in contact with the bottom is expanded onto the
left half of the screen. This mode is useful for dis- c. Clutter, which suppresses low level noise, is auto-
criminating bottom objects from the bottom echo. The matically adjusted.
bottom lock range is selected from the SOUNDER
RANGE SETUP menu. NOTE
f. Bottom Discrimination Display. The bottom dis- Gain cannot be adjusted in the auto-
crimination mode displays the bottom echo to help de- matic sounder mode. The message
termine the bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with SOUNDER GAIN CANNOT BE
a short echo tail usually means it is a soft sandy bot- CHANGED IN AUTO MODE is dis-
tom. A long echo tail means a hard bottom. played if an attempt is made to adjust
the gain.
g. A-scope Display. The A-scope display is a com-
bination screen available for all presentation modes, 4-21.10.12 Manual Operation. A manual operation
including the single frequency display. The A-scope mode is available, if desired. Manual adjustment of
display provides the data vertically on the right side of the gain, range and range shifting is required to obtain
the screen. The display shows echoes at each trans- the required depth selection that is displayed on the
mission with amplitudes and tone proportional to their screen.
intensities. It is useful for estimating objects and sea-
bed composition. To turn on the A-scope display, press NOTE
the DISPLAY MODE soft key, select display mode
desired, then press the A-SCPE soft key to turn the A- On the dual-frequency display, the gain
scope display on or off as appropriate. For the mode can be independently set for LF and
except SINGE MODE, the screen must be split hori- HF. Use the FREQ LF/HF soft key
zontally to show an A-scope presentation. to select the frequency for which to
adjust gain.
4-21.10.11 Automatic Operation. The two types of
automatic sounder available are CRUISING and FISH- 4-21.10.13 Remote Control. A remote control unit
ING. The CRUISING mode is tracking the bottom (figure 4-122) for NavNet display is provided which
and uses a higher clutter rejection setting. Therefore, allows control of many of the control panel functions
weak object echoes may be erased by the clutter sup- available on the display unit. Refer to table 4-11 for a
pression circuit. listing of available control functions.
The automatic sounder function automatically selects 4-21.11 MAGNETIC COMPASS. The magnetic
the proper gain, range scale and clutter suppression compass can be used at the coxswain’s discretion, for
level according to depth. a check of electronic systems or in the event of a loss
of GPS data.
a. The depth range changes automatically to locate
the bottom on the lower half of the screen. The range 4-21.12 SIREN/PA SYSTEM The siren/PA control
jumps to one step shallower range when the bottom head has multiple functions and can be connected to
echoes reach a half way point of the full scale from other systems to increase its functionality.
top and to one step deeper range when they come to
the lower edge of the scale. 4-21.13 STROBE LIGHT BAR. The strobe light bar
identifies the boat as performing duties as established
by the command. Refer to paragraph 4-11.15 for op-
erational procedures.
4-67
d. Move the searchlight switch into the S (spot) and
F (flood) positions and verify searchlight operation.
FURUNO e. Repeat steps b. through d. for other remote con-
SAVE
trol switchpod
- RANGE + DISP MOB f. Secure the 24Vdc breaker switch.
ABC 1 DEF 2 GHI 3

4-22 SANITATION SYSTEM OPERATION.
4-22.1 GENERAL. The sanitation system consist of

JKL 4 MNO 5 PQR 6
a Sealand, model Sanipottie portable toilet mounted in
the head compartment.
4-22.2 PREPARING TOILET FOR OPERATION.

EBL/BRM _ ‘# 0 GAIN Prior to underway operations, complete the following
WPT-- -- CENTER procedures:
MARK
ENT
CNTL WARNING
ENT
Deodorant may be harmful or fatal if
swallowed. Avoid breathing of vapors
CLEAR MENU
for prolonged or repeated periods.
Contact with skin, eyes, and mucous
BRILL TONE TX/STBY ACQ
membranes should be avoided. Aller-
gic reaction may result from prolonged
ALARM HIDE/SHOW
or repeated contact with the skin.
SK1 SK2 SK3 SK4 SK5
! CAUTION
Never add holding tank deodorant to

Figure 4-122. Remote Control the waste holding tank by pouring di-
rectly into the toilet bowl.
4-21.14 SEARCHLIGHT. The searchlight may be
a. Set the portable toilet on its front side so the cap
used to attract the attention of another vessel, and/or
on the holding tank is in the vertical position. Remove
assist with the identification of navigation aids
the cap and add holding tank deodorant following in-
(NAVAIDS) and or objects in the water.
structions on the deodorant container. Replace the cap
firmly.
a. Place the 24Vdc searchlight circuit breaker on the
control console to the ON position.
b. Set the portable toilet in an upright position and
remove the cap located on the right rear side of the
b. Activate the port or starboard remote control
freshwater tank. Fill with fresh water to just below
switchpad using the position control switch at the cox-
the neck of the freshwater inlet. Depress the bellows
swain station.
pump to add water to the bowl.
c. Move the searchlight switch to the port and star-
board and up and down positions and verify search-
light movement.
4-68
c. Return the toilet to the stowage location under the b. Unlatch the upper unit by disengaging the slide
port storage box seat and secure for underway opera- latches and lifting from the holding tank.
tions.
c. Carry holding tank to a permanent toilet waste dis-
4-22.3 TOILET OPERATION. Add water prior to posal facility.
use by depressing the bellows on the back of the toilet.
To flush, open the slide valve on the base of the toilet d. Remove the cap and then empty contents into a
by pulling the handle out and pressing the bellows pump permanent toilet waste disposal facility. Press the air
one or more times. After flushing, close the slide valve relief valve while emptying the unit.
by pushing the handle all the way in.
e. Thoroughly rinse the tank and replace the cap.
4-22.4 EMPTYING THE HOLDING TANK. Upon
completion of underway operations, service the por- f. Reassemble the unit or prepare it for further use
table toilet as follows: as described in paragraph 4-22.2 above.
a. Make sure the slide valve handle is all the way in. g. Return the unit to the head compartment and mount
it in position.
4-69
Table 4-11 Remote Control Functions
Key Function
RANGE Same as RANGE key on display unit.
DISP Same as DISP key on display unit.
SAVE MOB Same as SAVE/MOB key on display unit.
Ten Keys Enter alphanumerics.
EBL/VRM Same as EBL/VRM key on the display unit.
GAIN Same as GAIN key on display unit.
WPT Displays “alphabet” WPT list on plotter display.
MARK ENT Same as MARK ENTRY soft key.
CENTER Returns own ship to screen center on plotter display.
CNTL Switches control between displays on combination displays.
ENT Same as ENTER knob on display unit.
CLEAR Same as CLEAR key on the display unit.
MENU Same as MENU key on display unit.
BRILL Adjusts display brilliance.
TONE Not used.
TX/STBY Toggles radar between standby and transmit.
ACQ Acquires radar target. (Requires radar source equipped with ARP.)
ALARM Same as ALARM key on the display unit.
HIDE/SHOW Same as HIDE/SHOW key on display unit.
SK1-SK5 Same as soft keys on display unit.

(Soft Keys)
4-70
Section IV.
SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES
4-23 NORMAL SHUTDOWN. 4-23.3 BILGE SYSTEM SHUTDOWN.
4-23.1 PROPULSION ENGINE SHUTDOWN.

WARNING
! CAUTION
Always allow the engines to idle for a

minimum of three to five minutes be-
fore shutdown. Serious engine dam-
age can result from shutting down an
engine before it is allowed to cool.
a. Place the engine throttle control levers in IDLE

position. Allow the engines to cool by running them for
three to five minutes at idle speed.
b. Depress the red STOP button on the engine start/

stop control panel and hold it until each engine has come
to a complete stop.
a. Ensure all bilges are drained before leaving the
c. Return the IGN switch on each engine start/stop boat.
control panel to the OFF position.
b. Place the electric bilge pump control switches to
4-23.2 FUEL SYSTEM SHUTDOWN. the OFF position. If the boat is to remain waterborne,
leave the control switches in the AUTO position.
a. Close the fuel supply line valve to the engine lo-
cated at each fuel filter/water separator. 4-23.4 COMMUNICATION AND NAVIGATION
EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN (RADAR, GPS, VHF
b. Close the main fuel valve located at the bottom of RADIO, SIREN/PA).
the fuel tank on centerline.
a. To secure equipment, either turn the component
c. Check each fuel filter/water separator and drain control knob or switch to the OFF position or hold down
off any water into a suitable container as necessary. the power key until the screen is blank, as appropri-
ate.
4-71
b. Turn off 24Vdc equipment circuit breaker/switches 4-23.6.1 Charging Batteries From A 110Vac Source.
on the control console. To charge the batteries from a 110Vac/60Hz shore
power source, perform the following steps:
c. Secure 12Vdc and 24Vdc circuit breaker/switches
for all components not in use on the circuit breaker a. Connect the boat to 110Vac/60Hz shore power
panels. following the steps and observing the warnings in para-
graph 4-16.
4-23.5 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SHUTDOWN.
b. Place the circuit breaker/switch labeled SHORE
1 on the shore master breaker panel in the ON position
! CAUTION
c. Place the circuit breaker labeled MAIN on the
To prevent equipment damage, do not 110Vac/60Hz shore power panel in the ON position.
place the bilge pump switches in the Verify the correct voltage is available by observing the
OFF position if the boat remains voltmeter at the top of the panel.
waterborne unless other provisions are
made to periodically pump the bilges. d. Place the circuit breaker labeled TRANSFER on
the 110Vac/60Hz shore power panel in the ON posi-
a. Ensure all switches on the control console and cir- tion.
cuit breaker panels are in the OFF position. Do not
place the bilge pump switches in the OFF position if e. Observe the Link 2000 display. A bulk charge volt-
the boat is to remain waterborne unless other provi- age of 28.8 volts should be indicated on the display
sions are made to periodically pump the bilges. when the BATTERY 1 key is pressed. Refer to the
troubleshooting section of this chapter if voltage is not
present.
! CAUTION
4-23.6.2 Charging The Batteries From A 220Vac
To prevent equipment damage, do not Source. To charge the batteries from a 220Vac/50Hz
shut the battery disconnect switches shore power source, perform the following steps:
off until the engines are secured.
a. Connect the boat to 220Vac/50Hz shore power in
b. After the engines have been shut down and the accordance with paragraph 4-16.
ignition switches secured, it is safe to secure the port
and starboard engine battery disconnect switches on b. Place the switch labeled SHORE 2 on the shore
the engine compartment panel. master breaker panel in the ON position.
c. Secure the ship's service battery switch and the c. Place the circuit breaker labeled MAIN on the
12Vdc converter switch on the engine compartment 220Vac/50Hz shore power panel in the ON position.
panel. Verify the correct voltage is available by observing the
voltmeter at the top of the panel.
d. If the boat is to remain waterborne, maintain power
to the bilge pumping system. Secure the power to the d. Place the circuit breaker/switch labeled BAT-
bilge pumping system if the boat will be stored ashore. TERY CHARGER on the 220Vac/50Hz shore power
panel in the ON position.
4-23.6 BATTERY CHARGING. After the boat's
electrical system is shut down, the boat's batteries may e. Observe the Link 2000 display. A bulk charge volt-
be maintained in a state of charge by connecting the age of 28.8 volts should be indicated on the display
boat to shore power. The onboard battery chargers will when the BATTERY 1 and the BATTERY 2 keys are
maintain the batteries in a fully charged condition. pressed. Refer to the troubleshooting section of this
chapter if voltage is not present.
4-72
4-24 COLD WEATHER SHUTDOWN. 4-25 SUBFREEZING CONDITIONS.
If there is a danger of freezing, seawater should be If the boat is removed from the water after operation
drained from the engines, and seawater piping. Refer in subfreezing conditions and stored out of the water,
to paragraph 4-13 for specific instructions for draining all seawater must be drained from the engines and sea-
the seawater system. Ensure the installed portable water piping.
bilge pump lines are free of water.
a. Open the petcocks on the marine gear oil coolers.
Diesel engines in service use a coolant that in-cludes
inhibited antifreeze, MIL-A-46513. This anti-freeze b. Open the petcock in the base of the A/C seawa-
consists of ethylene glycol and corrosion inhib-iting ter strainer.
chemicals (sodium borate, trisodium phosphate, and
an organic copper inhibitor). A mixture of ethyl-ene
glycol and distilled water has a lower freezing point ! CAUTION
than either water or ethylene glycol alone.
Use only the prescribed antifreeze in
the engine. Specific fluid types and
! CAUTION testing requirements are provided in
the planned maintenance documenta-
To prevent damage to equipment, tion for the boat. The use of any other
maintain the antifreeze concentration type of antifreeze can have a damag-
per PMS requirements. ing effect on nonmetallic components
of the cooling system or the desired
To prevent damage to the engine and associated equip- boiling point of the fluid.
ment, maintain the antifreeze concentration between
33 and 67%. Solutions of less than 33% concentration
do not provide sufficient corrosion protection. Con- ! CAUTION
centration greater than 67% adversely affect the freez-
ing point, boiling point and heat transfer rates. To prevent damage to equipment,
maintain the antifreeze concentration
Although antifreeze is essential in any climate ensure between 30 and 67%. Solutions of
the coolant system has the proper inhibited antifreeze less than 30% concentration do not
concentration to meet the expected temperature ranges. provide sufficient corrosion protection.
See table 4-12 for coolant mixtures. Concentrations greater than 67% ad-
versely affect freezing point, boiling
Normal concentration is 50 percent inhibited antifreeze point, and heat transfers.
in the mixture unless additional freeze protection is re-
quired. Never use more than 67% antifreeze under c. Ensure that the coolant system has enough anti-
any condition. freeze for the expected temperatures. See table 4-11
for coolant mixtures.
Table 4-12. Coolant Mixtures d. If the coolant system has not been adequately pro-
tected with an antifreeze solution then the system should
Percent of Volume Freezing Point
also be drained.
of Antifreeze °C °F
e. Remove the bilge drain plug located on the tran-
33 -17 1 som. Attach the drain plug to the steering wheel. Tag
40 -23 -10
a lifting pad eye or the bow eye if the boat is on a
50 -34 -30
trailer “CAUTION, BILGE DRAIN PLUG NOT IN-
67 -60 -77
STALLED.”
4-73
Section V.
EMERGENCY UNDERWAY PROCEDURES
4-26 EMERGENCY STOPPING. NOTE
In some hydraulic system failure situ-

WARNING ations it may be necessary to discon-
nect the hydraulic hoses from the re-
versing bucket actuating cylinder in
Personnel must be seated and in- order to raise and lower the bucket
formed prior to performing a reverse manually.
bucket stop. This is a maneuver which
can result in death or injury to person- a. Loop a rope around the arms of the reversing
nel and damage to equipment. bucket.
In an emergency situation, forward motion of the boat b. Take a strain on the rope to lift the bucket clear of
may be stopped in a very short distance by fully lower- the nozzle water stream.
ing the reversing buckets into the water stream with-
out reducing the throttle settings. This maneuver con- c. Secure the rope to the aft mooring bitt.
verts forward thrust from the waterjet drive to reverse
thrust immediately and causes very rapid deceleration d. With the bucket clear of the nozzle discharge, the
of the boat. An emergency stop maneuver may be boat will be able to proceed at speed to return to port
accomplished by performing the following: to have the fault checked and repaired.
a. Warn the crew and passengers that an emergency 4-27.2 MANEUVERING WITH A DEFECTIVE
stop is about to take place. REVERSING BUCKET. In an emergency, minimal
boat maneuvering capability may be accomplished by
b. Ensure that crew and passengers are seated and manually using the reversing buckets. With a rope
utilizing available grab rails and handholds. positioned around the bucket arms and the engine at
idle, allow the reversing bucket to be lowered under its
c. Move the waterjet drive unit reversing buckets to own weight.
the fully down position using the console controls. Im-
mediate and severe deceleration of the boat will occur. 4-28 ENGINE FAILURE.
4-27 REVERSING BUCKET HYDRAULIC 4-28.1 ONE ENGINE BREAKDOWN. In the event
FAILURE. of failure of either propulsion engine, proceed under
the power of the remaining engine as follows:
In the event of a mechanical or hydraulic system fail-
ure of a reversing bucket, the bucket mechanism may
be manually positioned. ! CAUTION
4-27.1 MANUALLY RAISING THE REVERSING Do not allow the drive shaft connected
BUCKETS. Use the following procedure to manually to the disabled engine to rotate while
raise the waterjet reversing buckets: underway. Severe damage to the ma-
rine gear can result.
4-74
Due to water flowing through the disabled waterjet 4-29 FUEL SYSTEM CONTAMINATION.
unit while underway on one engine, it is possible for
the waterjet main shaft to rotate. This will cause In the event that fuel contamination has entered the
rotation of the drive shaft and undesirable operation engines' fuel systems, the system must be cleared of
of the marine gear which can cause severe damage contamination before the engine scan be restarted.
due to lack of lubrication and overheating. To avoid Perform the following steps to clear the engine fuel
this situation, place the marine gear in neutral. systems:
a. Place the engine throttle control lever for the dis-

abled engine in the IDLE position. WARNING
b. Shut the fuel supply line cutout valve to the inop-
erable engine located at the fuel filter/water separator. To prevent personnel injury or death,
take all necessary precautions prior
c. Steer the boat in a manner to compensate for the to taking on fuel or performing
thrust of the operating engine. maintenance or repairs on any portion
of the fuel system. Do not smoke or
4-28.2 TWO ENGINE FAILURE. allow any type of hot work or open
flame in the vicinity. Ensure appro-
priate firefighting equipment is
WARNING available.
a. Fill the fuel tanks in accordance with paragraph

To protect personnel from possible in- 4-3.3.
jury or death, never secure towing
lines to lifelines, handrails, grab rails, b. Strip the fuel tank sumps in accordance with para-
or other deck hardware not designed graph 4-3.2.
for towing purposes.
c. Close the fuel filter/water separator isolation
In the event of failure of both propulsion engines dur- valves.
ing underway operations, it will be necessary to tow
the boat (paragraph 4-31). Shut down all systems per d. Replace the engine-mounted fuel filters in accor-
section IV of this chapter except for necessary elec- dance with procedures in chapter 6.
trical systems.
e. Drain the fuel filter/water separators in accordance
with paragraph 4-3.4.
4-75
f. Replace the fuel filter elements in the fuel filter/ 4-30 PORTABLE DEWATERING PUMP.
water separators in accordance with procedures in
chapter 6.
WARNING
g. Ensure the fuel supply cutout valve is open.
h. Open the fuel filter/water separator isolation valves. The portable pump must be secured
to the boat’s structure before use if
it is removed from its mounting
WARNING brackets while the boat is underway.
The pump is heavy and can cause
injury to personnel and damage to the
To prevent injury or death from an boats equipment if left unsecured on
explosion, do not use starting aids, such deck in a seaway.
as ether.
A diesel powered pump mounted in quick-release
i. Place the IGN switch into the RUN position for brackets on the port side of the well deck can also be
50 to 60 seconds to allow the transfer pump to pres- used for emergency dewatering of any compartment.
surize the system. Cycle the RUN switch to the ON Associated hoses are stowed in the mid void. The pump
position five times. can be used in its mounting brackets or transported to
the required location. Refer to manufacturer's instruc-
tions for pump operation.
! CAUTION
4-31 TOWING OPERATIONS.
Do not crank the starting motor in ex-
cess of 30 seconds. Allow a 2-minute
interval before cranking is resumed. WARNING
j. Place the throttle in the NEUTRAL position. At-
tempt to restart the engine by placing the ignition switch In the event the boat has sustained a
in the START position. catastrophic hull failure, to prevent in-
jury or death, all hands should don life-
k. If the engine will not restart after four 30-second saving equipment, contact the appro-
attempts, repair/replace the fuel transfer pump, the high- priate authority, then commence/con-
pressure fuel pump, or fuel injectors. tinue with emergency procedures.
! CAUTION WARNING
The engine must have adequate oil
pressure within 15 seconds after start- Towing procedures can be very haz-
ing to prevent engine damage. ardous, particularly in a seaway or in
adverse weather. All personnel must
l. Ensure adequate oil pressure. Idle the engine three work with caution and remain alert for
to five minutes before operating with a load. unsafe conditions. All boat personnel
shall wear life jackets. Additional
safety precautions may be dictated by
the situation.
4-76
Towing procedures can be very hazardous, particu-
WARNING larly in a seaway or in adverse weather. All personnel
must work with caution and remain alert for unsafe
conditions. All boat personnel must wear a flotation
To prevent injury or death, ensure all device. Additional safety precautions may be dictated
personnel remain clear of the bow or by the situation.
stern while conducting towing opera-
tions. When being towed or towing,
the towing line is subject to heavy strain WARNING
and can part.
a. Have personnel don life jackets. To prevent injury or death, all person-
nel must remain clear of the bow or
b. Ensure personnel are alert for unsafe conditions. stern while conducting towing opera-
tions. When being towed or while tow-
c. Brief personnel on their actions and responsibili- ing, the tow line is subject to strain and
ties during towing operations. may part.
4-32 ENGINE/WATERJET FAILURE.

! CAUTION
WARNING When towing, the engine and marine

gear are subject to overheating. If the
engine coolant or marine gear oil tem-
To protect personnel from possible in- perature rises above safe limits, re-
jury or death, never secure towing duce speed until the lube oil tempera-
lines to lifelines, handrails, grab rails, ture is acceptable.
deck cleats, or other deck hardware
not designed for towing purposes. a. Have personnel don life jackets.
4-33 MANUAL BILGE PUMP. b. Ensure personnel are alert for unsafe conditions.
A hand-operated bilge pump is provided for convenience c. Brief personnel on their actions and responsibili-
or for use in the event the electric bilge pump is inop- ties during towing operations
erative. The hand-operated pump operating handle is
stowed on the port side of the transom. Refer to para- 4-34.1 TOWING ANOTHER BOAT.
graph 4-14.2.2 to operate the hand-operated pump.
4-34 TOWING OPERATIONS. WARNING
WARNING All personnel must move into the cabin

or to the forward deck when towing
another craft with the aft cabin door
In the event the vessel has a cata- closed.
strophic hull failure, all-hands should
don lifesaving equipment, contact the The boat is equipped with a single bitt tow post mounted
appropriate authority, then commence/ on the aft deck at the transom. Towing is not permitted
continue with emergency procedures from the mooring bitts or lifting eyes. The tow bitt is
as required. the only acceptable location for the tow line.
4-77
4-34.2 BEING TOWED. When being towed the tow c. Push the control panel ENTER knob to select the
line should be attached to the forward mooring bitt. Do MOB position as the destination.
not use the trailering eyes that are welded to the stem.
NOTE
WARNING Pressing the control panel CLEAR

key will activate the SAVE function
and will only mark the current boat’s
To prevent personnel injury or death, position as a waypoint.
all personnel must move into the cabin
or to the aft deck while being towed. d. Depending on the screen presentation mode in use,
the MOB function picture (figure 4-123) will be shown
on a full screen radar, plotter, or overlay display. The
! CAUTION MOB function includes the following information:
Do not allow the drive shafts to rotate

while the boat is being towed. Severe MOB
MARK BOAT
damage to the marine gear can result. POSITION
M
Due to water flowing through the waterjet unit while
being towed, it is possible for the waterjet main shafts
MOB DATA
to rotate. This will cause rotation of the drive shafts BOX
and undesirable operation of marine gear which can M
O 301.5°
cause equipment damage. To avoid this situation, do B 0.49nm
not allow the drive shafts to rotate while being towed.
COURSE
LINE
4-35 MAN OVERBOARD (MOB) FUNCTION.
Figure 4-123. MOB Function
The NavNet plotter operation provides a MOB emer-
gency function for quick response to mark a man over- NOTE
board position on the display unit. The MOB function
may be used for any plotter mode, except while play- The MOB function picture is used to
ing back data or conducting a self-test on the NavNet illustrate the operation of the NavNet
unit. The MOB function requires GPS position data. unit. Standard procedure to re-cover
Use the following procedure to activate the MOB func- a man overboard employs the
tion: Williamson Turn maneuver.
a. Press and hold the control panel SAVE/MOB key 1. The mark M appears at the MOB waypoint
for three seconds. position.
NOTE 2. The boat current position icon is displayed.
Momentary pressing the SAVE/MOB 3. The shortest course line is shown between
key will only register own ship’s posi- own ship’s position and the MOB position.
tion as a waypoint.
4. A MOB data box is displayed providing the
b. The NavNet will assign and display a waypoint range and bearing to the MOB position from the boat.
number box, shift to a seconds count down box, and a
MOB confirmation box. e. To erase the MOB mark (M) from the plotter dis-
play, the corresponding waypoint must first be erased.
4-78
1. Place the cursor on the MOB mark (M). 6. To cancel the distress message use the Chan-
nel Selector knob and select CANCEL from the dis-
2. Press the control panel CLEAR key. tress menu, and then press the CALL/SET key or turn
the radio OFF.
3. Pushing the control panel ENTER knob will
erase the waypoint from the NavNet memory. b. Sending a Distress Call with the NATURE OF
DISTRESS. The NATURE OF the type of distress
4. Verify the cursor is on the MOB mark (M). may be sleected and transmitted with the position if
connected to a GPS and the MMSI if programmed
5. Press the CLEAR key. into the radio. The nature of distress can be FIRE,
FLOODING, COLLISION, or GROUNDING. To
6. Pushing the ENTER knob will erase the MOB transmit the NATURE OF DISTRESS call:
mark (M).
1. Remove the DISTRESS cover and press the
4-36 DISTRESS CALL. DISTRESS key to activate the Distress Call menu.
In the event that the boat suffers catastrophic damage, 2. Use the Channel Selector knob to select the
the VHF radio is used to transmit a distress call. With NATURE OF, and then press the CALL/SET key. The
the Digital Selective Calling (DSC) feature this dis- menu will show FIRE, FLOODING, COLLISION, and
tress message is transmitted every four minutes until GROUNDING.
an acknowledgment is received.
3. Use the Channel Selector knob and select the
a. Sending a Distress Call. nature of the problem.
1. Remove the red DISTRESS cover and press 4. Send the distress signal by pressing and hold-
the DISTRESS key to activate the distress menu. Press ing the CALL/SET key until the signal is sent.
and hold the DISTRESS key to send the signal.
5. The radio monitors Channels 17 and 70 until
2. The radio will automatically switch to Channel the message is acknowledged as received.
70 and once the message is sent an alarm will sound.
6. The message is repated at four minute inter-
3. The radio will monitor Channels 16 and 70 until vals until acknowledged.
an acknowledgment signal is received. The LCD will
display DISTRESS and WAITING. 7. To silence the alarm press any key.
4. When the Distress signal is acknowledged an 8. To cancel the distress message turn the VHF
alarm will sound and the radio automatically switches radio OFF. Turn the radio ON to continue normal op-
to Channel 16. To silence the alarm press any key. eration.
5. The distress message is transmitted every four

minutes until is it acknowledged.
4-79
Section VI.
TROUBLESHOOTING
4-37 GENERAL. tailed troubleshooting of specific equipment, refer to

the appropriate equipment technical manuals listed in
A list of problems/malfunctions, probable causes, and table 1-2. Corrective maintenance actions are described
corrective actions for boat systems, machinery, and in chapter 6.
electronic equipment is provided in table 4-13. For de-
Table 4-13. Troubleshooting Guide
Problem/Malfunction Probable Cause Corrective Action
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1. Light(s) will not operate. a. Switch(es) off. a. Turn switch(es) on.
b. Defective bulb(s). b. Replace bulb(s).
c. Defective lamp fixture(s). c. Replace lamp fixture(s).
d. Tripped circuit breaker(s). d. Reset breaker(s).
e. Faulty wiring. e. Check connection at terminal

boards and wiring harness.
2. Horn will not sound. a. Tripped circuit breaker. a. Reset circuit breaker.
b. Faulty horn. b. Repair or replace horn.
c. Faulty wiring. c. Repair wiring.
d. Defective switch. d. Replace switch.
3. Alternator not charging. a. Alternator inoperative. a. Refer to engine technical

manual.
b. Diode/voltage regulator b. Test and replace diode/voltage

inoperative. regulator if necessary. Refer to
engine technical manual.
c. Battery charging circuit fuse c. Replace fuse. Investigate cause

blown. of blown fuse.
4. Alternator output low or a. Voltage regulator not a. Refer to engine technical

unsteady. operating properly. manual.
b. Alternator brushes or brush b. Check alternator. Refer to

springs defective. engine technical manual.
4-80
Table 4-13. Troubleshooting Guide - Continued
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued
5. Batteries will not hold charge. a. Loose terminals or bad a. Clean and tighten terminals, as
connections. necessary.
b. Defective battery(s). b. Inspect, test, and replace if

required.
c. Intermittent short in c. Check cables and wiring.

electrical system.
d. Voltage regulator operating d. Test and replace, if necessary.

improperly. Refer to engine technical
manual.
PROPULSION SYSTEM
1. Starter will not crank engine. a. Batteries discharged. a. Check batteries and charge
or replace, if required.
b. Loose connections or b. Inspect all connections to the

defective wiring. starter, battery disconnect
switch, start switch, starter
solenoid switch, cable plugs
and receptacles, terminal
boards, neutral safety
switches, and battery. Check
for corrosion, loose fittings,
poor mounting surfaces, etc.
Check wiring for breaks or
damage. Tighten connections
or replace defective wiring.
c. Defective start switch. c. Check continuity across

terminals of switch in closed
position. Replace switch if
defective.
d. Defective solenoid. d. Replace solenoid.
e. Starter brushes worn. e. Refer to engine technical

manual, table 1-2.
4-81
PROPULSION SYSTEM - Continued
2. Engine turns over but fails to a. Fuel supply valve closed. a. Check fuel system alignment.
start.
b. Lack of fuel. b. Check fuel tank level.
c. Water, air, or impurities c. Strip fuel tank and clean fuel

in fuel system. system piping/components.
d. Clogged fuel filters. d. Replace filter elements. Refer to

engine technical manual,
table 1-2.
e. Fuel injection system e. Refer to engine technical manual,

malfunction. table 1-2.
f. Low battery voltage. f. Charge batteries.
g. Defective ECM. g. Replace ECM.
3. Engine runs irregularly. a. Clogged fuel filter a. Replace filter element. Refer
elements. to engine technical manual,
table 1-2.
b. Water, air, or impurities b. Strip fuel tank and clean

in fuel tank. fuel system components.
c. Engine fuel injection c. Refer to engine technical manual,

system malfunctioning. table 1-2.
4. Engine shuts off. a. Lack of fuel. a. Check fuel supply.
b. Water, air, or impurities b. Strip fuel tank and clean fuel

in fuel tank. system components.
5. Engine overheating. a. Low coolant level. a. Add coolant, investigate for

leakage.
b. Seawater strainer basket b. Check and clean strainer basket.

clogged.
c. Water temperature gauge c. Replace gauge or sending unit.

or sending unit defective.
4-82
5. Engine overheating - d. Poor coolant circulation. d. Refer to engine technical manual,

Continued table 1-2.
e. Air in coolant system. e. Refer to engine technical manual,

table 1-2.
f. Sea cock shut. f. Open sea cock.
g. Obstruction at seawater g. Check for and remove any

inlet strainer scoop. obstruction.
h. Water temperature indicator h. Replace temperature indicator

warning sending unit warning sending unit.
defective.
i. Diesel View unit defective. i. Repair or replace Diesel View.
j. Defective seawater or j. Refer to engine technical manual,

coolant pump impeller or table 1-2.
thermostat.
k. Freshwater flush valve open. k. Close valve.
6. Low lubricating oil pressure a. Lack of lubricating oil. a. Check oil level and fill crankcase
indicated. to proper level. Refer to engine
technical manual, table 1-2.
b. Defective sending unit. b. Replace the sending unit.
c. Faulty lube oil pump. c. Refer to engine technical manual,

table 1-2.
d. Diesel View unit defective. d. Repair or replace Diesel View.
7. Exhaust fumes. a. Leakage in exhaust line. a. Repair or replace exhaust line

or rubber joint coupler.
8. Abnormal engine sounds. a. Damaged exhaust hose or a. Check for holes or cracks
piping. and replace damaged hose
or piping.
b. Loose fittings or engine b. Tighten all clamps and fittings.

mounts. Inspect/repair engine mounts.
4-83
9. Drive shaft/waterjet a. Loose connections at a. Tighten connections.

vibration. engine or aquadrive U-joints
or shafting connections.
b. Damaged aquadrive b. Replace defective aquadrive

assembly. assembly unit.
c. Damaged impeller. c. Replace impeller.
10.Engine does not attain rated a. Engine fuel injection a. Refer to engine technical manual,
engine speed of 3000 rpm at system malfunctioning. table 1-2.
full throttle.
b. Boat abnormally loaded/ b. Check loading against full-load
overloaded. displacement, table 1-1.
c. Marine growth on bottom. c. Clean marine growth from hull.
d. Blocked turbocharger d. Replace filter element.

air filter.
e. Turbocharger faulty. e. Refer to engine technical

manual, table 1-2.
11. Sufficient fuel not available a. Fuel tank empty. a. Fill the tanks.
to engines.
b. Fuel supply line valve b. Check fuel system alignment.
partially closed.
c. Sludge in spin-on fuel filter. c. Replace spin-on fuel filter.

Refer to engine technical
manual, table 1-2.
d. Fuel filter/water d. Clean separator; replace

separator clogged. 10 micron filter element.
e. Broken lines or loose e. Replace broken lines; tighten

connections. loose connections.
12.Waterjet reversing bucket will a. Hydraulic back pressure is a. Repair or replace the back
not raise out of reverse with greater than 34 bar (500 psi). pressure valve.
high engine rpm and the relief
valve is opening.
4-84
13.Movement of waterjet a. Cylinder rod 180° out of a. Rotate the cylinder rod so that
reversing bucket not phase. the dot on the rod end is in the
synchronized with up position.
reversing control lever.
14.Waterjet reversing bucket a. Defective seals or O-ring in a. Replace reversing cylinder seals.
creeping down from the up reversing cylinder.
position.
15.High marine gear hydraulic oil a. High oil level. a. Pump out oil to the MAX mark
temperature. on the dipstick.
b. Low oil level. b. Add oil to the MAX mark on

the dipstick.
c. Plugged hydraulic oil cooler. c. Clean seawater passages in

cooler.
d. Lack of seawater cooling. d. Verify proper operation of

cooling water system.
16.Hydraulic oil on marine gear a. Loose fasteners or hose a. Tighten fasteners or hose
housing. connections. connections.
b. Loose hydraulic oil filter. b. Tighten oil filter by hand.
c. High oil level. c. Pump out oil to MAX mark on

dipstick.
17.Hydraulic oil and water a. Damaged hydraulic oil cooler. a. Replace oil cooler. Repair
marine gear internal
components, as required.
18.Marine gear shows high oil a. Heat exchanger too small. a. Replace present heat exchanger
temperature. with one of suitable capacity.
b. Insufficient flow of water to b. Replace valves and pipelines with

heat exchanger. others of larger internal
diameter.
c. Heat exchanger dirty. c. Clean heat exchanger.
4-85
18.Marine gear shows high oil d. Oil level too high or too low. d. Adjust level to between MIN and
temperature. - Continued MAX on dipstick.
e. Wrong type of oil. e. Drain gearbox and fill with

correct grade.
f. Clutches slipping. f. Check operating pressure.
g. Cavitation in oil pump. g. Add oil and/or inspect suction

lines.
19.Marine gear making excessive a. Cavitation in oil pump. a. Tighten all fittings and/or replace
noise. damaged pipelines; check suction
filter.
b. Incorrect bearing adjustment b. Check bearing end float and

(excessive end float). correct with shims as
necessary.
c. Bearings damaged. c. Overhaul gearbox and replace

damaged parts.
d. Worn gear teeth. d. Overhaul gearbox and replace

worn gears.
e. Flexible coupling wrong type e. Remove coupling and replace

or damaged. with a suitable type.
20.Marine gear will not shift to a. Solenoid valve not properly a. Adjust solenoid valve.
neutral. adjusted.
b. Clutch discs warped. b. Overhaul gearbox and replace

discs.
c. Clutch piston seized. c. Remove clutch and overhaul.
21.Marine gear difficult or a. Air in hydraulic circuit. a. Check oil level; correct air leaks
impossible to engage. in pipelines, drain aerated oil and
replace with fresh oil.
b. Clutch piston seized. b. Remove clutch and overhaul.
c. Pressure modulation system c. Check control valve.

defective.
4-86
21.Marine gear difficult or d. Solenoid valve not functioning. d. Repair or replace solenoid valve.
impossible to engage.
- Continued e. Internal oil leak. e. Check oil circuit.
f. Incorrect oil temperature. f. Check heat exchanger, seawater,

and water flow.
22.External oil leakage. a. Seals or shaft sealing surface a. Replace seals and/or shafts.
worn.
b. Breather blocked. b. Clean or replace breather and

inspect seat.
c. Oil dipstick leaking. c. Replace dipstick.
d. Plugs and fittings loose. d. Tighten all plugs and fittings.
e. Hoses damaged. e. Replace as necessary.
f. Gearcase leaking. f. Replace gaskets or sealant and

torque bolts to correct setting.
23.Oil level fluctuating. a. Inefficient or erratic oil/ a. Replace oil cooler.

cooling.
24.Engine rpm increases a. Debris caught in the intake a. Shift the marine gear to BACK-
(engine unloads) or lack of screen, impeller, or tail pipe FLUSH to clear the blockage.
thrust (rpm is high with loss stator vanes.
of boat speed).
b. Air is getting into the waterjet. b. Aerated water generated by the
boat’s bow wave is passing
directly aft to the waterjet intake.
c. Air entry through defective c. Repair water seal.

waterjet main shaft water
seal.
d. Air entry through loose d. Replace inspection cover O-ring

waterjet inspection cover. and tighten inspection cover fas-
teners.
25.Excessive noise and a. Debris caught in the intake a. Shift the marine gear to aft
vibration coming from the screen, impeller, or tail pipe position to clear the blockage.
waterjet. stator vanes.
4-87

.
25.Excessive noise and vibration b. Debris caught in the impeller b. Remove inspection cover and
coming from the waterjet. or tail pipe stator vanes. clear debris from waterjet.
- Continued
c. Worn marine bearing. c. Replace marine bearing.
d. Marine bearing water drain d. Clear the water drain hole in the
hole in tail pipe blocked. tail pipe cone.
e. Worn drive shaft U-joints. e. Repair or replace the drive shaft

U-joints.
26.Water leaking from under the a. Defective thrust bearing water a. Replace the water seal.
thrust bearing. seal.
27.Excessive high pitched rattling a. Blockage of unit. a. Refer to item 28.

or whine coming from the
waterjet. b. Faulty thrust bearing. b. Repair thrust bearing.
c. Cavitation is occurring. c. Refer to corrective actions for

cavitation, item 28.
28.Waterjet cavitation is a. Intake screen is blocked. a. Clear intake screen.

excessive.
b. Defective impeller. b. Check for blunt or damaged
impeller and replace.
c. Excessive impeller tip c. Repair or replace the impeller or

clearance. nozzle housing insert.
d. Boat load is too far aft or d. Readjust/reduce load.

overloaded.
e. Excessive speed for sea e. Reduce speed.

conditions.
29.Engine rpm gradually increasing a. Worn/blunt impeller or a. Repair or replace impeller and
over a period of time to attain excessive impeller tip impeller wearing ring.
a specified speed. clearance.
30.Sudden increase in engine rpm a. Air ingestion. a. Refer to item 24.

with no noticeable decrease in
thrust. b. Cavitation. b. Refer to item 28.
c. Faulty tachometer or sensor. c. Repair or replace tachometer or

sensor.
4-88
31.Waterjet thrust bearing a. Defective bearing or seal. a. Repair thrust bearing and
temperature greater than replace seal.
158°F + 9°F (70°C + 5°C).
32.Waterjet reversing bucket not a. Drive shaft not engaged. a. Shift marine gear out of the
moving. NEUTRAL position.
b. Reversing bucket jammed by b. Clear debris from bucket

debris. housing.
c. Control cable jammed. c. Check for loose cable linkage

connections, crimped or binding
cable conditions. Repair or
replace.
d. Control lever moves freely. d. Broken cable. Replace cable.
e. Hydraulic failure. e1.Check drive belt. Tighten or

replace.
e2. Low oil level. Refill oil reser-

voir.
e3. Blockage in system. Overhaul

and clean system.
f. Reversing bucket cylinder f. Replace cylinder rod.

rod bent.
33.Waterjet reversing bucket does a. Hydraulic back pressure less a. Repair or replace the back
not go fully down or does not than 34 bar (500 psi) at a flow pressure valve.
stay down with high engine rpm. of 9 liters pre minute
(2.4 gpm).
b. Clutches slipping. b. Check operating pressure.
HYBRID COLLAR
1. Will not maintain air a. Leaking inflation valve. a. Clean valve and reseal.
pressure. Replace valve as required.
b. Hole or tear. b. Make temporary repair using

patch kit.
4-89
STEERING SYSTEM
1. Steering wheel hard to turn. a. Fouled waterjet discharged a. Remove debris from vicinity
nozzle. of discharge nozzle.
b. Steering tiller shaft stiff. b. Check clearance on steering shaft

bushings. Refer to waterjet tech-
nical manual listed in table 1-2.
c. Grit between nozzle bushings c. Check and replace worn bush-

and nozzle. ings and sleeves. Refer to
waterjet technical manual listed in
table 1-2.
d. Corrosion build-up under d. Remove bushings and clean out

steering shaft or nozzle bores. Refer to waterjet techni-
bushings. cal manual listed in table 1-2.
e. Damaged mechanical linkage e. Refer to appropriate technical

at steering cylinder and manual listed in table 1-2.
waterjet tiller.
f. Damaged hydraulic line. f. Replace damaged section

of hydraulic line.
g. High viscosity oil used g. Drain fluid and replace with

in system. low viscosity hydraulic oil
specified in the technical manual
listed in table 1-2.
2. Steering jammed. a. Nozzle pivot bolts loose or a. Replace pivot bolt and torque to
bent. specifications. Refer to waterjet
technical manual listed in table
1-2.
b. Waterjet nozzle housing b. Repair or replace nozzle housing.

deformed by impact. Refer to waterjet technical
manual listed in table 1-2.
3. Steering wheel turns with no a. Hydraulic oil level low. a. Inspect and fill helm hydraulic
movement of hydraulic steering oil reservoir to proper level.
cylinder.
b. Broken/crimped b. Replace damaged section.
hydraulic line.
4-90
STEERING SYSTEM - Continued
3. Steering wheel turns with no c. Faulty steering cylinder. c. Replace steering cylinder.
movement of hydraulic steering
cylinder. - Continued d. Faulty helm unit. d. Replace helm unit.
4. Helm unit shows no definite a. Purging screw on cylinder a. Tighten purging screws.
stop in either direction. bleeder valve has been
left open.
5. Steering wheel takes excessive a. Air in system (if 1/2 a. Purge air from system.
turns going from hardover turn above limit).
in one direction to hardover in
the opposite direction.
6. System does not seem a. Air saturation in oil or oil a. Repurge air from system.
purged following purging foaming during purging.
on previous day.
7. Loss of fluid and pressure a. Fluid leak in system. a. Check all components and
in the helm. fittings. Repair as required.
8. Steering stiff and hard to turn, a. Restrictions in hose or fittings. a. Correct as required.
even when not underway.
b. Damaged hydraulic cylinder b. Replace hydraulic cylinder or
or bent operating mechanism. damaged operating mechanism.
NAVIGATION SYSTEMS
1. Navigation light(s) do not a. UNDERWAY LIGHTS a. Turn toggle switch to ON

illuminate. toggle switch off position.
b. Tripped 12Vdc or UNDER- b. Reset circuit breaker(s).

WAY LIGHTS circuit
breaker(s).
c. Defective lamp fixture(s). c. Replace lamp fixture(s).
d. Defective LED bulb(s). d. Replace bulb(s).
e. Faulty wiring. e. Check connections.
2. Compass bearings incorrect. a. Compensation rods bent or a. Repair/replace compensation

out of adjustment. rods and adjust.
4-91
NAVIGATION SYSTEMS - Continued
2. Compass bearings incorrect. b. Equipment has been added in b. Recalculate the compass devia-
- Continued in the immediate vicinity of tion card.
the compass.
3. Horn will not sound. a. Defective HORN switch. a. Replace HORN switch.
b. Tripped HORN circuit b. Reset HORN circuit

breaker. breaker on 24Vdc panel to ON.
c. Faulty horn assembly. c. Replace horn.
d. Faulty wiring. d. Repair wiring.
GPS/DEPTH SOUNDER
1. GPS lost satellite reception. a. Loose GPS antenna plug a. Inspect and tighten connection.
connection.
b. Faulty antenna/receiver cable. b. Replace faulty cable.
c. Blocked signal. c. Move boat to attain a clear view

of the sky.
d. Faulty antenna/receiver. d. Replace defective unit.
2. Antenna input shorted to a. Loose connections or a. Tighten connections or

ground. defective cable. replace antenna cable.
3. No GPS position data appears a. Internal problem in GPS a. Turn in defective unit for repair.
on NavNet display or on antenna/receiver.
VHF radio.
4. GPS position is not fixed a. Less than three satellites are a. Verify on the NavNet display
within three minutes of the being received. that three or more GPS satellites
unit receiving power. are being received.
5. Battery voltage high/low- a. Input voltage too high for the a. Check for proper voltage.
check connection. GPS.
6. Database error. a. Internal problem with NavNet a. Turn in for repair.

display unit.
4-92
GPS/DEPTH SOUNDER - Continued
7. Memory (RAM) failed, unit a. Internal NavNet problem. a. Turn in for repair.
needs repair.
8. Memory (ROM) failed, unit a. Internal NavNet problem. a. Turn in for repair.
needs repair.
9. Processor failed, unit needs a. Internal NavNet problem. a. Turn in for repair.
repair.
10.Past GPS reference data a. GPS receiver lithium battery a. Replace lithium battery.
not available when the unit failure.
is turned on.
11. Depth sounder data not a. Verify 24Vdc power supply a1.Ensure that the PH panel
displayed. to network sounder. power supply breaker on the
engine room 24Vdc panel is in
the ON position.
a2.Verify DEPTH SOUNDER

circuit breaker on the console
24Vdc panel is in the ON
position.
a3.Inspect power connection,

transducer connections and
cables.
a4.Replace the transducer.
a5.Turn in the network sounder

for repair.
12.Depth transducer readings a. Faulty connections. a. Inspect and tighten connections.

not being received accurately.
b. Faulty cable. b. Replace transducer cable.
13.Green LED fails to light on a. Power not available to unit. a. Turn DEPTH SOUNDER
network sounder. breaker switch to the ON
position.
b. Fuse blown. b. Replace fuse.
c. Network sounder inoperative. c. Turn in unit for repairs.
4-93
GPS/DEPTH SOUNDER - Continued
14.Green LED flashes on a. Loss of connection to a. Check wiring connections.

network sounder for three NavNet.
minutes after power up then b. Verify power supply to NavNet
lights continuously. display is on.
RADAR/NAVNET DISPLAY UNIT
1. NavNet display unit does a. Panel 24Vdc circuit breaker a. Place 24Vdc panel circuit breaker
not turn on. is off in engine room. in the ON position.
b. RADAR circuit breaker b. Place RADAR circuit

is off. breaker on the console 24Vdc
panel in the ON position.
c. Faulty display unit power c. Replace display unit power

switch. switch.
d. Display plug connections d. Clean display plug connectors

loose or corroded. and tighten into receptacle.
e. Defective cable(s). e. Replace cable(s).
f. Improper battery voltage. f. Check for battery voltage

between 10.8Vdc and 31.2 Vdc.
2. No depth display appears a. Network sounder cable a. Clean network sounder data
when DISP key is pressed. connection loose or corroded. cable connections and firmly
fasten.
b. No power to network b. Verify 24Vdc power is connected

sounder. to network sounder. Then
LED on the sounder should
flash every second.
3. NavNet display unit for depth a. Transducer cable loose. a. Tighten transducer cable.
data shows marks and
characters without a picture. b. Transducer defective. b. Replace transducer.
c. Mutual interference. c. Other video sounders of the same

frequency may be operate-
ing nearby.
4-94
RADAR/NAVNET DISPLAY UNIT - Continued
4. NavNet display unit trackball a. Dirty trackball. a. Clean trackball. Refer to

skips or moves abnormally. technical manual listed in table
1-2.
5. NavNet soft key RADAR TX a. No antenna signal. a1.Check the radome antenna cable
is pressed to show the radar connection for tightness.
picture but nothing is displayed.
a2.Turn in display unit for repair.
6. NavNet display sensitivity a. Magnetron may be defective. a. Turn in radome unit for repair.
remains poor after tuning
is adjusted.
7. GPS position is not fixed a. Faulty antenna connection. a. Verify all GPS antenna
within three minutes of the connections are tight.
unit receiving power.
b. Less than three satellites are b. Verify on the GPS status display
being received. that three or more satellites are
being received.
8. NavNet shows noise or inter- a. Loose ground connection. a. Inspect and tighten ground
ference for depth display. connections on the network
sounder, negative bus bar,
dynaplates, and lightning
protection plate.
9. Battery icon appears on a. Circuit board mounted a. Replace with lithium battery,
top of the display screen. battery service life is type CR2450-F2 ST2L.
about to expire.
AIR CONDITIONER
1. Will not start. a. A/C fan circuit breaker a. Turn on 24Vdc circuit breaker.
is off.
b. Blower control switch must b. Rotate the blower control switch

be turned to one of the from the OFF position to one of
three speeds for the A/C the three speeds available.
or heater control to operate.
c. A/C pushbutton on the c. Turn on 24Vdc circuit breaker.

console is in the OFF Push the A/C pushbutton down
position. until it locks in the ON position.
4-95
AIR CONDITIONER - Continued
1. Will not start. - Continued d. Compressor malfunction. d. Refer to A/C technical manual.
2. No cooling. a. Factory temperature set a. Lower factory set point.

point is above ambient Refer to A/C technical manual.
temperature.
b. Obstructed air flow around b. Clean condenser coils. Remove

condenser coils. obstructions in the vicinity of
the coils on the forward port side
of the engine compartment.
c. Engine hot coolant flow to c. Rotate the heater control knob to

heater heat exchanger. the OFF position.
3. No heating. a. Temperature set point is a. Raise set point temperature by

below ambient temperature. adjusting console mounted heater
control switch.
b. Engine coolant to the heat b. Open supply and return valves

exchanger supply or return to/from heat exchanger.
valves are closed.
4. Low air flow. a. Air flow is blocked. a. Remove any obstructions in return
air stream. Check for crushed
or restricted ducting. Clean heat
exchanger coils.
b. Cooling coil is iced. b. See item 5 below.
5. Cooling coil is iced. a. Improper air flow. a. Remove any obstructions in return
air stream. Check for crushed
or restricted ducting.
b. Humidity level too high. b. Close windows and doors.
c. Loss of refrigerant gas. c. Check for broken refrigerant gas

lines and loose connections.
Recharge A/C system with
R134a refrigerant.
BILGE PUMPING SYSTEM
1. Electric bilge pumps will not a. Bilge pump suction a. Clean suction strainer.
drain bilge. strainer clogged.
4-96
BILGE PUMPING SYSTEM - Continued
1. Electric bilge pumps will not b. Float stuck or switch b. Clean float. Ensure it moves
drain bilge. - Continued inoperative. freely. Check continuity across
terminals with switch in closed
position. Replace unit if defective.
c. Broken lines or loose c. Repair or replace broken lines or

connections. connections.
2. Electric bilge pump a. Faulty power supply. a. Check wiring, battery, fuses,
inoperative. connections, etc. Repair or
replace as necessary.
b. Tripped circuit breaker. b. Reset breaker.
c. Faulty pump. c. Replace pump.
3. Bilge area drains slowly a. Pump strainer clogged. a. Clean strainer.

with very little overboard
discharge. b. Broken lines or loose b. Repair or replace broken lines or
4. Hand-operated bilge pump a. Suction line clogged. a. Clean suction line.

inoperative.
b. Defective pump. b. Repair or replace pump.
c. Broken lines or c. Repair or replace.

loose connection.
VHF RADIO
1. No power. a. Poor power connection. a. Check power cable to

transceiver.
b. 12Vdc circuit breaker off b. Turn circuit breaker on.

or tripped. Investigate cause if tripped.
2. No sound from speaker. a. Squelch level is too high. a. Set squelch level to the
threshold point.
b. Volume level is too low. b. Adjust volume accordingly.
c. Speaker has been exposed c. Drain water, dry unit,

to water. replace if necessary.
4-97
VHF RADIO - Continued
2. No sound from speaker. d. Internal speaker is turned off. d. Turn internal speaker on in
- Continued SET mode.
3. Sensitivity is low. a. The attenuator is activated. a. Push the LO/DX button to

turn the function off.
4. Transmitting is difficult or a. Some channels are for low a. Change channel.

high power can not be power or receive only.
selected.
b. The output power is set to b. Push the H/L button to select
low. high power.
5. SCAN does not start. a. Memory channel is not a. Set the desired channels as
programmed. MEMORY channels.
6. Beep sounds do not function. a. Beep tone is turned off. a. Turn beep tone on in SET mode.
b. The squelch is open. b. Set squelch to the threshold

point.
7. Distress call can not be a. MMSI code is not a. Program the MMSI code.
transmitted. programmed.
FORCE PROTECTION (SECURITY) PACKAGE
1. Strobe light bar fails to come a. Faulty 24Vdc power panel a. Replace breaker switch.
on. breaker.
b. Bulbs burned out. b. Replace bulbs.
2. Siren/PA fails to sound. a. Loose/corroded speaker a. Inspect, clean, and tighten

3. Siren/PA system cannot a. Volume control. a. Adjust output volume.

be heard.
b. Faulty microphone. b. Replace the microphone.
c. Speaker connections. c. Ensure speaker connections

are tight and clean.
d. Faulty unit. d. Repair/replace the unit.
4-98
FROUCE PROTECTION (SECURITY) PACKAGE - Continued
4. Searchlight fails to illuminate. a. Bulb burned out. a. Replace the bulb.
b. Defective power supply. b. Inspect all switches that provide

power and place in the ON
position.
5. Searchlight fails to move. a. Remote control drive unit a. Replace drive unit.
defective.
b. Remote control switchpad not b. Activate correct remote control

activated for station attempting switchpad.
to position searchlight.
NOTE: This troubleshooting guide is not all-inclusive. For instructions and information that relate directly
to a system refer to the technical manual listed in table 1-2.
4-99
4-38 ENGINE FAULT INFORMATION. over any active screen. These fault conditions require
immediate attention.
When any engine fault is received by the Diesel View,
a fault code number is displayed. Other faults that my occur are considered minor faults.
The SYSTEM menu provides the information for mi-
There are two types of fault conditions, major and mi- nor fault conditions. Both major and minor fault code
nor. Major fault conditions will provide a visual pop-up numbers, explanation, and required action are described
in tables 4-14 and 4-15.
Table 4-14. Diesel View Major Fault Troubleshooting

Fault
Code Explanation Action Horn
Number
111 Internal ECM failure. Engine will not start. Diagnose Yes
ECM failure.
115 Input lost from both engine speed Replace engine speed sensors. Yes
sensors.
131 Throttle signal out of range high. Check throttle signal inputs. Yes
132 Throttle signal out of range low. Check throttle signal inputs. Yes
133 Remote/backup throttle signal Check remote throttle signal inputs. Yes
out of range high.
134 Remote/backup throttle signal out Check remote throttle signal inputs. Yes
of range low.
143/415 Low oil pressure. Stop engine. Damage may occur. Yes
Check oil level and look for leaks.
151 High coolant temperature. Reduce throttle. Damage may Yes

occur.
155 High intake manifold temperature. Reduce throttle. Damage may Yes
occur. Seawater pump flow may be
low. Check seawater strainer and
pump impeller.
214 High oil temperature. Reduce throttle. Damage may Yes

occur.
234 Engine overspeed. Shut engine start switch off Yes

immediately.
235 Low coolant level. Stop engine. Damage may occur. Yes
441 Low battery voltage. Check charging system and battery Yes
condition.
4-100
Table 4-15. Diesel View Minor Fault Troubleshooting
Fault
Number
121 One engine speed signal input Diagnose engine speed signal failure No
has failed. The second input when next at dock.
is now in use.
122 Intake manifold pressure Engine will continue to run No

sensor fault. Voltage high. using default value. Repair at dock.
123 Intake manifold pressure sensor Engine will continue to run No

fault. Input voltage out of using default value. Repair
range low. at dock.
124 Intake manifold pressure high. Reduce throttle. Check wastegate No

actuator for proper operation.
135 Oil pressure sensor fault. Input Engine will continue to run using No
voltage out of range high. default value. Repair at dock.
141 Oil pressure sensor fault. Input Engine will continue to run using No
voltage out of range low. default value. Repair at dock.
144 Coolant temperature sensor fault. Engine will continue to run using No
Input voltage out of range high. default value. Repair at dock.
145 Coolant temperature sensor fault. Engine will continue to run using No
Input voltage out of range low. default value. Repair at dock.
153 Intake manifold temperature sensor Engine will continue to run using No
fault. Input voltage out of range default value. Repair at dock.
high.
154 Intake manifold temperature sensor Engine will continue to run using No
fault. Input voltage out of range default value. Repair at dock.
low.
172 Rack is stuck causing excessive Engine shutdown. No

fueling.
187 ECM sensor internal power supply Sensor inputs for oil pressure and No
voltage low. coolant level may be out of range
low. Diagnose high current draw
or internal ECM power supply
failure.
4-101
Table 4-15. Diesel View Minor Fault Troubleshooting - Continued
Fault
Number
212 Oil temperature sensor fault. Engine will continue to run using No
221 Ambient air pressure sensor fault. Engine will continue to run using No
Input voltage out of range high. default value. Repair at dock.
227 ECM sensor internal power supply Sensor inputs for oil pressure and No
voltage high. coolant level may be out of range
low. Diagnose internal ECM power
supply failure.
237 Engine sync fault. Engine sync will not activate. No

Improper engine addressing or loss
of communications between engines.
254 Fuel shut off valve voltage low. Diagnose high current draw or No
internal ECM power supply failure.
255 Fuel shut off valve voltage high. Diagnose high voltage supply No
to the FSO circuit.
259 Fuel shut off valve stuck open. Rack is closed to stop fueling. No
285 Multiplex message timeout. Check connections between engine No

and helm control/display devices.
286 Multiplex message incomplete. Check connections between engine No

and helm control/display devices.
default value. Repair at dock.
311 Cylinder #1 injector fault. Repair immediately. No
4-102
Fault
Number
341 Data loss from ECM. Fault information and trip No

information may be inaccurate.
343 Internal ECM error. Diagnose at earliest convenience. No
346 ECM power down internal data Data including hours, fuel, duty No
store error. cycle, fault history since last power-
down is lost.
352 ECM sensor internal power supply Sensor inputs may be out of range No
voltage low. low. Diagnose high current draw or
internal ECM power supply
failure.
381 Error in intake air heater (relay Intake air heater won’t be energized. No
enable) number 1 circuit. White smoke and hard starting are
possible.
382 Error in intake air heater (relay Intake air heater won’t be energized. No
enable) number 2 circuit. White smoke and hard starting are
possible.
386 ECM sensor internal power supply Sensor inputs may be out of range No
voltage high. low. Diagnose short to high voltage
circuit.
387 ECM throttle sensor internal power Engine will only idle. Diagnose No
supply voltage high. short to high voltage circuit.
419 Intake manifold sensor fault. Engine will continue to run using No
4-103
Fault
Number
422 Coolant level sensor fault. Engine will continue to run using No
426 J1939 communications lost. Check J1939 datalink connections. No
431 Idle validation fault. Both circuits Diagnose simultaneous voltage on No

closed. both idle and off-idle circuits.
432 Idle validation fault. Throttle Diagnose validation switch position No

input and validation switches and throttle position.
do not agree.
433 Intake manifold pressure fault. In range failure. Diagnose false No

reading. Check ambient pressure
sensor reading.
434 ECM power-down failure. Power to ECM lost without proper No

start switch power-down. Wait at
least 1 minute after the start switch
is turned off before removing
power from ECM.
435 Oil pressure sensor fault. In range failure. Diagnose false No

reading. Check ambient pressure
sensor reading.
441 Battery voltage to ECM low. Check power circuits to ECM and No
battery condition.
442 Battery voltage to ECM high. Check power circuits to ECM. No
497 Engine sync fault. On/Off and Engine sync will not engage. No
complimentary switches are not Check switch signals back to ECM
in opposite states. inputs.
551 Idle validation fault. Both circuits Diagnose simultaneous lack of No

open. voltage on both idle and off-idle
circuits.
611 Hot shut down. Cool engine at idle out of gear No

prior to shutdown.
951 Power imbalance detected between Engine may run rough. Diagnose No
cylinders. fueling differences between
cylinders.
4-104
CHAPTER 5
HULL SPECIFICATIONS AND REPAIR
Section I.
DESCRIPTION
5-1 HULL CONSTRUCTION. 5-2 PAINTING.
The boat is constructed of welded aluminum alloy

and fitted with an inflatable foam collar. The hull is ! CAUTION
aluminum alloy plate welded to longitudinal members
and transverse frames. There are four transverse Mercury or mercury based com-
bulkheads welded into the hull which create four pounds will result in severe corrosion
watertight compartments. The bulkhead at the for- of this aluminum hull. Mercury in bilge
ward side of the crew cabin is not watertight. The will result in extreme corrosion. Do
well deck and the foredeck have hatches installed. not paint this hull with either mercury
Scuppers are provided in the port and starboard after or copper based paints. Do not paint
corners of the forward deck for water drainage areas purposely left unpainted. Keep
through the hull sides. mercury filled instruments, such as
thermometers, batteries, or ammuni-
The engine compartment, aft deck, cabin deck, tion having fulminate of mercury
recessed forward deck, and flush foredeck are alu- primers off the boat. Be certain that
minum plate welded over longitudinal stiffeners and no item brought on board or used for
transverse aluminum frames. There is a fuel tank repair or painting contains mercury or
access soft patch, two engine access hatches, an mercuric compounds.
engine compartment access hatch and a removable
deck section installed in the aft deck. The deck The decks, exterior hull, and cabin are painted haze
between the outboard-opening engine access hatches gray. The cabin interior and console are painted haze
is mounted to a through-bolted framework which, gray. A light grey insulated headliner material is
when removed, allows sufficient area to accomplish installed on the cabin interior bulkheads and in the
propulsion system maintenance or engine removal. overhead. The hull below the waterline is painted with
black antifouling paint. All exterior walking surfaces
The boat is constructed with an all-welded aluminum are covered with an antiskid deck coating.
4-person cabin at main deck level with a lower for-
ward section with seating accommodation for two Do not paint any label plates, deck fittings, or joiner
persons. The cabin construction includes tempered hardware. Do not paint name plates, cables, cable
safety plate clear glass for the front windows, port tags, or warning plates that are embossed, stenciled,
and starboard sliding safety glass windows aft of the or engraved.
console and fixed safety glass windows in the remain-
der of the cabin. A pipe arch with extends above and The waterjet drive should be painted with a copper-
aft of the waterjet nozzles and buckets. This structure free antifouling paint, suitable for aluminum hulls, in
also provides for protection of the waterjet compo- accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions in
nents when backing or during tow operations. table 1-2.
The collar is a track-mounted system that consists

of an inner air holding bladder, a mid layer of dense
polyethylene foam and an outside surrounding ure-
thane-coated fabric sheath.
5-1
5-2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION. All aluminum b. Hull, below the waterline: Antifouling black
surfaces should be etched or sandblasted then thor- marine paint.
oughly cleaned to bare metal. If not painted
immediately after cleaning, or if contaminated by oil c. Interior walking surfaces: Deck gray antiskid
or grease, the aluminum must be washed with a liquid rubber mats.
detergent cleaner, thoroughly rinsed with fresh water,
and allowed to dry completely before painting. d. Exterior walking surfaces: Deck gray spray-
on antiskid.
For touch-up painting when only small areas or spots
require painting, it is essential that the removal of old 5-3 CATHODIC PROTECTION.
paint be carried back around the edges of the spot
until an area of completely intact and adhering paint The underwater areas of the boat are protected from
film with no corrosion or blisters underneath is at- corrosion by two 5-pound (1.87 kg) zinc anodes. The
tained. Edges of tightly adherent paint around the area anodes are attached using stainless steel bolts to brack-
to be recoated must be feathered to attain a smooth ets welded on the transom. The submerged portion of
finish. the waterjet unit is protected with 5 internal and 5 ex-
ternal zinc anodes. The trim tabs each have two zinc
5-2.2 PAINT SPECIFICATIONS. anodes mounted on the upper surface of the tabs.
a. Hull, above the waterline, and cabin interior:

Haze gray, FED STD 595B, color 26270.
5-2
Section II.
REPAIR
5-4 REPAIR. MAN-010, Inspection and Repair Manual for Inflat-

able Tube Assembly, and in the PMS documentation.
To repair the hull, the framing and/or plating must Contents of the kit is provided in table 5-1. Add per-
be straightened and any rupture in the plating or sonnel safety equipment, hand tools, and a solvent
fractures to the framing must be welded to provide such as acetone to the kit.
watertight, structural integrity. The best method of
welding is MIG (metal inert gas) using welding filler 5-5 SOIL REMOVAL FROM ALUMINUM.
metal ER 5356. Hull maintenance and repair
procedures shall be in accordance with Technical
Manual, chapter 583, Boats and Small WARNING
5-4.1 WELDING. All welding procedures, inspec-
tions, welder qualifications, and nondestructive test Prior to cleaning aluminum,
personnel qualifications shall be as specified in Personnel Protective Equipment
Fabrication, Welding, and Inspection of Metal Boat (PPE) must be worn. Wear
and Craft Hulls, protective glasses or goggles to
protect the eyes from a solution spray
5-4.2 INFLATABLE COLLAR. The air pressure or splash. Protective clothing should
in the inflatable bladder should be maintained at 3 psi also be worn. Failure to comply may
(21 kPa) to prevent excessive flexing of the fabric result in injury to personnel.
sheath, which would result in damage to the collar
fabric. Detailed instructions on the maintenance, Clean aluminum with a painted-surface cleaner
inspection, and repair of the inflatable tube is provided (P-C-431) or with a 1% solution of a wetting agent
in the tube repair kit - (MIL-D-16791). Pressure wash using an acceptable
industrial cleaner. Flush the boat with fresh water
after cleaning.
5-3
Table 5-1. Tube Repair Kit Contents
Item Quantity
Glue, 8 oz (shelf life 2 years) 1

Catalyst, 8 oz 1
Goop, 1 oz 1
Sandpaper (80 grit), Sheet 1
Topping Valve, 690 BV 1
Pressure Relief Valve, PRV-7 1
Valve Tool, Halkey Roberts Adapter 1
Tube Patching Material, 6-inch X 1
36-inch
Brush, 1-inch wide 2
Measuring Cup, Small 1
Mixing Container 1
Instruction Sheet 1
Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 1
Chemical Reorder Sheet 1
Air, Foot Pump 1
Scissor, Small 1
Putty Knife 1
Grease Pencil 1
Masking Tape 1
Clean Cloth for Applying Solution 1
5-4
Section II.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
6-2 GENERAL.
! CAUTION
This section consists of procedures to accomplish rou-
tine maintenance. In addition, the planned maintenance Do not leave the drain open too long
procedures provide additional information including to prevent draining excessive amounts
specific materials and tools required to accomplish the of fuel.
procedures. Routine maintenance instructions for the
equipment listed below are contained in the technical a. Drain the water from the separator through the
manuals listed in table 1-2 and are not provided in this drain plug on the bottom of the bowl into a suitably
section. sized container.
a. Propulsion Engine.
WARNING
b. Marine Gear.
c. Waterjet.
6-3 FUEL SYSTEM.
6-3.1 FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR.
6-3.1.1 Purging Excess Water From Separator.
NOTE
Fuel oil tank head pressure will main-

tain the filter primed.
Inspect and drain the collection bowl daily before wa-

ter and fuel contaminants reach the top of the separa- b. Dispose of the contaminated fuel/water and rags
tor turbine. in accordance with current regulations and guidelines.
6-3.1.2 Fuel Filter/Water Separator Filter Element

WARNING Replacement. Replace the 10 micron filter element,
as required, and after a layup.
Before purging the fuel filter/water

! CAUTION
separator secure the smoking lamp.
is operating within 50-feet of the fuel If the engine is running when the filter
area. Have fire fighting equipment element is replaced, air will be drawn
readily available. All fuel spills, must into the fuel system.
a. Secure the engine and tag “OUT-OF-SERVICE.”
6-2
h. Fill the unit with clean fuel, install the new gaskets
b. Shut off the fuel supply valve to the fuel filter/ and replace the lid and T-handle. Snugly tighten by hand
water separator inlet. only.
i. Open the fuel supply valves, remove the engine

WARNING tag out, start the applicable engine, and inspect for leaks.
Before replacing the filter element se- WARNING

cure the smoking lamp. Ensure no
flame-producing equipment is operat-
ing within 50-feet of the fuel area.
Have fire fighting equipment readily
available. All fuel spills, must be
cleaned up immediately.
c. Remove the lid, lid gasket, and T-handle. Inspect

and clean the lid gasket seat. Dispose of the lid gasket
and T-handle O-ring.
! CAUTION
Exercise care when removing the fil-

ter element to ensure that fuel does
not leak into the bilge. j. Properly dispose of any contaminated fuel, rags,
and the filter elements in accordance with current ship-
d. Remove the filter element by holding the bail board guidelines.
handles and slowly pulling upward with a twisting mo-
tion. 6-3.2 ENGINE-MOUNTED FUEL FILTER RE-
PLACEMENT. To replace the engine-mounted fuel
e. Obtain a new 10-micron filter element with a new filter use the following procedure:
lid gasket and T-handle O-ring.
a. Shut off the fuel supply to the engine and tag
f. Install new element over the center return tube “OUT-OF-SERVICE.”
using a slow twisting motion.
g. Lubricate the lid gasket and O-ring with clean

motor oil or fuel.
6-3
WARNING WARNING
Before replacing the engine-mounted

fuel filter secure the smoking lamp.
is operating within 50-feet of the fuel
area. Have fire fighting equipment
readily available. All fuel spills, must
! CAUTION
Exercise care when removing the fil-

ter element to ensure that fuel does
not leak into the bilge.
f. Properly dispose of any spilled fuel, cleanup rags,
b. Clean the area around the filter. Using a filter and the used filter in accordance with current ship-
wrench, unscrew and remove the fuel filter. Exercise board guidelines.
care to avoid spilling fuel into the bilge.
g. Open the fuel supply valves, remove the engine
c. Fill the new fuel filter with clean fuel and apply a tag out, start the engine, and inspect for leaks.
small amount of fuel oil to lubricate the O-ring seal and
the rubber gasket seal. For detailed instructions on engine fuel filter replace-
ment, refer to the engine technical manual listed in table
d. Clean the gasket surface to the filter head and 1-2.
replace the O-ring.
6-3.3 FUEL TANK STRIPPING. Perform the fol-
e. Fill the new filter with clean fuel, and install by lowing in order to remove water or other contaminants
screwing on by hand until the filter gasket touches the from the fuel tank.
cover. Using a filter wrench tighten an additional one-
half turn.
6-4
6-4 CHANGING OIL.
WARNING
Engine and marine gear lube oil is changed using the
installed FLOCS systems.
Before commencing with the fuel tank
stripping operation secure the smok- 6-4.1 CHANGING ENGINE LUBE OIL.
ing lamp. Ensure no flame-producing
equipment is operating within 50-feet
of the fuel area. Have fire fighting ! CAUTION
equipment readily available. All fuel
spills must be cleaned up immediately. To prevent equipment damage, ensure
the engines are shut down and tagged
"OUT-OF-SERVICE." Engine opera-
WARNING tion without lube oil will result in se-
vere damage to the engines.
a. Ensure the engines are shut down and tagged

"OUT-OF-SERVICE."
b. Ensure the flow directional switch on the top of

the FLOCS unit for the engine to be drained is placed
in the discharge position.
NOTE
The discharge position is towards the

bow of the boat.
c. Open the cover on the aft side of the FLOCS unit

and turn the manifold valve handle marked ENG OIL
a. Open the fuel tank stripping pump cutout valve. 90° until it stops.
b. Position a suitable container under the stripping

pump discharge. ! CAUTION
c. Open the stripping pump discharge cutout valve. To prevent equipment damage, ensure
the oil change manifold valve for equip-
d. Operate the hand pump until clear fuel is being ment not being drained is in the
discharged. CLOSED position. If the valve is not
completely closed, unintended removal
e. Close the fuel tank stripping cutout valve. of lubricating oil from other equipment
can result.
f. Close the stripping pump discharge cutout valve.
d. Ensure the manifold valve connected to the ma-
g. Properly dispose of contaminated fuel/water in ac- rine gear lube oil sump marked TRAN OIL is closed.
cordance with current shipboard guidelines and policy.
6-5
e. Ensure the ball valve at the end of the discharge m. Remove the canister-type engine lube oil filter from
hose is in the open position. the filter housing on the front of the engine.
f. Place the end of the discharge hose into a suitably n. Fill a new canister filter with clean engine oil and
sized container. install it on the engine.
o. Remove the engine lube oil filler cap and refill the
! CAUTION engine with lube oil. The maximum engine lube oil ca-
pacity with a filter change is 3.5 gallons (13.2 liters).
To prevent an accidental spill of waste
oil, maintain control of the discharge
hose at all times during removal of ! CAUTION
waste oil.
To prevent equipment damage, ensure
g. Maintain control of the discharge hose at all times the dipstick is replaced in the same
during removal of waste oil to prevent an accidental engine it was removed from. The en-
spill. gines have dipsticks of unequal length.
Interchanging dipsticks may result in
h. Place the appropriate switch on one of the over- incorrect engine lube oil levels and
head FLOCS switch panels in the ON position and severe engine damage.
operate the pump until oil has stopped flowing from the
discharge hose. p. Verify the engine lube oil is at the high mark on
the dipstick.
! CAUTION q. Replace the lube oil filler cap.
To prevent equipment damage, ensure r. Repeat steps a. through q. for the other engine.
the dipstick is replaced in the same
engine it was removed from. The en- s. Clear the tags on the engines and test operate.
gines have dipsticks of unequal length. Add additional lube oil, if necessary, after brief opera-
Interchanging dipsticks may result in tion.
incorrect engine lube oil levels and
severe engine damage.
WARNING
i. Stop the pump and check the engine oil level with
the dipstick. If the dipstick indicates that there is oil in
the engine, continue pumping until the dipstick does not
show any oil.
j. Close the ball valve at the end of the discharge

hose and secure the hose in the clip provided on the
battery tray.
k. Close the oil change manifold valve to the engine

sump.
l. Replace the cover on the aft side of the FLOCS

unit.
6-6
t. Properly dispose of the used oil and any contami- f. Place the end of the discharge hose into a suitably
nated rags in accordance with command policy and sized container.
guidelines.
6-4.2 CHANGING MARINE GEAR LUBE OIL. ! CAUTION
To prevent an accidental spill of waste

! CAUTION oil, maintain control of the discharge
hose at all times during removal of
To prevent equipment damage, ensure waste oil.
the engines are shut down and tagged
"OUT-OF-SERVICE." Marine gear g. Maintain control of the discharge hose at all times
operation without lube oil will result in during removal of waste oil to prevent an accidental
severe damage to the marine gears. spill. The flow of oil may cause movement of the hose
and displace the hose from the container if it is left
a. Ensure the engines are shut down and tagged unattended.
"OUT-OF-SERVICE."
h. Place the appropriate switch on one of the over-
b. Ensure the flow directional switch on the top of head FLOCS switch panels in the ON position and
the FLOCS unit for the marine gear to be drained is operate the pump until oil has stopped flowing from the
placed in the discharge position. discharge hose.
NOTE
! CAUTION
The discharge position is towards the
bow of the boat. To prevent equipment damage, ensure
the dipstick is replaced in the same
c. Open the cover on the aft side of the FLOCS unit engine it was removed from. The en-
and turn the manifold valve handle marked TRAN OIL gines have dipsticks of unequal length.
90° until it stops. Interchanging dipsticks may result in
incorrect engine lube oil levels and
severe engine damage.
! CAUTION
i. Stop the pump and check the marine gear oil level
To prevent equipment damage, ensure with the dipstick. If the dipstick indicates that there is
the oil change manifold valve for equip- oil in the marine gear, continue pumping until the dip-
ment not being drained is in the stick does not show any oil.
CLOSED position. If the valve is not
completely closed, unintended removal j. Close the ball valve at the end of the discharge
of lubricating oil from other equipment hose and secure the hose in the clip provided on the
can result. battery tray.
d. Ensure the manifold valve connected to the ma- k. Close the oil change manifold valve to the marine
rine gear lube oil sump marked ENG OIL is closed. gear sump.
e. Ensure the ball valve at the end of the discharge l. Replace the cover on the aft side of the FLOCS
hose is in the open position. unit.
6-7
m. Remove the canister-type marine gear lube oil fil- Cleaning may be required more frequently depending
ter. on local operating conditions.
n. Fill a new canister filter with clean lube oil and a. Secure the engine and tag the engine “OUT-OF-
install it on the marine gear. SERVICE.”
o. Remove the marine gear lube oil filler cap and

refill the gear with lube oil. The maximum lube oil ca- ! CAUTION
pacity of the gear with a filter change is 1.32 gallons
(5.0 liters). Sea cock must be closed prior to ser-
vicing the seawater strainer. There is
p. Verify the marine gear lube oil is at the high mark danger of flooding if left open.
on the dipstick.
b. Close sea cock.
q. Replace the lube oil filler cap.
c. Unscrew cover tie rod wing nuts.
r. Repeat steps a. through q. for the other marine
gear.
! CAUTION
s. Clear the tags on the engines and test operate the
marine gear. Add additional lube oil, if necessary, after Exercise care when removing the
brief operation. cover to ensure that the gasket is not
damaged or lost.
WARNING d. Remove the cover and cover gasket.
e. Lift out the strainer basket.
f. Clean and rinse the strainer basket.
g. Reinstall the strainer basket.
h. Lubricate the rubber gasket with silicone grease.
NOTE
Do not tighten seawater strainer

cover more than snug.
i. Reinstall strainer cover, raise the hinged bolt into

place and hand-tighten both wing nuts.
t. Properly dispose of the used lube oil, filters, and
any contaminated rags in accordance with command j. Open the sea cock and check for leakage.
policy and guidelines.
k. Remove the engine tag out, start the engine, and
6-5 SEAWATER STRAINER. check strainer for leakage.
6-5.1 SEAWATER STRAINER CLEANING. 6-5.2 WINTERIZATION. Seawater strainers that

Clean the strainer basket as required and after layup. are subjected to freezing temperatures must be win-
6-8
terized to prevent damage to internal parts. To prop- 6-7 STEERING SYSTEM.
erly winterize the strainer drain the cylinder casing.
6-7.1 FILLING.
a. Secure the engine and tag the engine “OUT-OF-
SERVICE.” a. Remove the plug from the top of the helm. Refer
to figure 6-1.
! CAUTION b. Screw the threaded end of the filler tube into the
helm filler hole.
Sea cock must be closed prior to ser-
vicing the seawater strainer. There is c. Remove the cap from the oil bottle and holding
danger of flooding if left open. upright, screw into the filler tube bottle cap. Invert the
bottle with the fill tube attached to the helm and the
b. Close sea cock. bottle, make a vent hole in the bottom of the bottle.
c. Open drain plug on bottom of strainer basket cast- d. Fill the helm pump full of oil (oil should always be
ing. visible in the filler tube). Use an additional bottle at any
time throughout the procedure when oil drops in the
d. When strainer cylinder has been drained, replace filler tube.
drain plug into the bottom of the casting.
6-6 BILGE PUMPS.

STEERING
6-6.1 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED BILGE WHEEL
PUSH PIN
PUMP. The safe operation of the boat requires that FILLER PLUG
(REMOVED)
the installed 24Vdc bilge pump operates properly. Main-
tain the bilge pump as follows:
FILLER KIT
a. Inspect the suction strainer at the bottom of the HELM FILL PORT
bilge pump. The strainer shall be free of debris.
b. Clean the strainer by removing the strainer from

the base of the bilge pump by pressing the locking tabs
on each side of the base. This will release the upper
pump section from the lower stainer.
c. Reinstall the bilge pump upper section to the OIL IN

FILLER
TUBE
cleaned strainer. ASSEMBLY
PLASTIC
FITTING
d. Inspect all piping and hoses for damage, missing ONE WHEEL ROTATION
TOP OF HELM
hose clips and evidence of leaking. Repair or replace PUMP
ON HELM WILL DROP
FLUID THIS MUCH TO
as required. SET FLUID LEVEL
e. Test for automatic operation of bilge pump using

procedures of chapter 4.
Figure 6-1. Helm Filling Unit
6-9
6-7.2 PURGING.
WARNING
a. With the helm full (paragraph 6-7.1), turn the steer-
ing wheel clockwise until the cylinder rod is fully ex-
tended on the right side of the cylinder.
! CAUTION
Do not use vise grips or pliers to stop

the cylinder rod from moving. Dam-
age to the cylinder will result.
b. Open the right side bleeder.
c. Holding the cylinder rod to prevent it from moving

back into the cylinder, turn the steering wheel counter-
clockwise until a steady stream of air-free oil comes
out of the bleeder. Drain out approximately one-half j. Wipe up all hydraulic oil spills and dispose of any
bottle of oil or as required. used oil or contaminated rags in accordance with com-
mand policy and guidelines.
d. While continuing to turn the wheel, close the right
side bleeder and let go of the cylinder rod. k. Check fluid level after several hours of operation.
When the helm is not hard over, fluid level should be
e. Turn the steering wheel counterclockwise until the slightly lower than the fill hole.
cylinder rod is fully extended to the left. The steering
wheel will come to a stop. 6-7.3 FINAL SYSTEM CHECK AND PURGING.
It is recommended that the system be checked and a
f. Open the left bleeder. final purge be performed 24 hours after the initial purg-
ing. After this time, any leaks will be detected and any
g. Holding the cylinder to prevent it from moving back remaining small bubbles will have formed larger bubbles
into the cylinder, turn the steering wheel clockwise until which are more easily removed.
a steady stream of air-free oil comes out of the bleeder.
NOTE
h. While continuing to turn the wheel, close the left
side bleeder and let go of the cylinder rod. Fluctuation in the oil level and pres-
sure will occur when the system’s tem-
i. Remove the fill tube and bottle from the helm. perature changes.
Replace the fill cap.
Check for oil leaks and observe the gauge for a pos-
sible pressure loss.
6-10
6-8 CORROSION PROTECTION. water inlet and outlet headers of the aftercooler and
on the coolant heat exchanger.
Whenever dissimilar metals are in a conductive solu-
tion such as seawater, a chemical reaction takes place
causing an electrical current to flow between metals. ! CAUTION
This current flow causes galvanic corrosion and an
erosion of the most chemically active metal. Zinc plugs To prevent flooding, close the sea cock
are installed in seawater heat exchangers and zinc plates and tag “CLOSED” before removing
on the outdrive to provide a sacrificial metal to erode. any zinc plugs.
6-8.1 HULL ZINCS. Sacrificial anodes installed on a. Shut the sea cock and tag “CLOSED.”
the hull should be inspected often and replaced when
50% of their original surface area is gone. If anodes b. Using a wrench, remove the heat exchanger and
develop a deep, hazy film, thick coating, or severe aftercooler zinc plugs one at a time.
marine growth, they should be replaced. Mild marine
growth or a light film can be removed by cleaning the c. Inspect the zinc plugs. Install new plugs, if re-
anodes with nonmetallic sandpaper or a nylon brush. quired. Do not use thread compound or teflon tape on
the threads.
! CAUTION d. Clear the tag out and open the sea cock. Check
the seawater system for leaks and correct as neces-
Metal filings can inhibit the effective- sary.
ness of the anodes. Do not use steel
or metal tools to clean anodes. 6-9 COMMUNICATION.
6-8.2 WATERJET DRIVE. The anode condition 6-9.1 VHF RADIO CLEANING.
must be inspected at least every two months for a new
boat. Once the rate of anode consumption is estab- a. Ensure that the power is off.
lished the monitoring process can be adjusted. If the
anode is more than 50% consumed it must be replaced. b. Mix a solution of mild detergent and fresh water
If anodes develop a deep, hazy film, thick coating, or in a container.
severe marine growth, they should be replaced. Mild
marine growth or a light film can be removed by clean- c. Slightly dampen a lint-free cloth in the solution of
ing the anodes with nonmetallic sandpaper or nylon soap and water to wash the knobs, speaker area, mi-
brush. crophone, and microphone cord and the areas that are
exposed. Remove salt residue.
! CAUTION
d. Slightly dampen a clean, lint-free cloth in fresh
Metal filings can inhibit the effective- water to remove the soap residue.
ness of the anodes. Do not use steel
or metal tools to clean anodes. e. Use a dry, lint-free cloth to dry the VHF radio.
Refer to the waterjet technical manual for procedure 6-9.2 VHF RADIO INSPECTION.
to check the anode electrical circuit using an ohmme-
ter. a. Inspect the knobs to ensure that they are not bro-
ken and move freely.
6-8.3 ENGINE ZINC PLUGS. The three zinc plugs
on the engine should be replaced when the plug size is b. Inspect the keys to ensure that they move freely.
reduced by 50%. Zinc plugs are located on the sea-
6-11
c. Inspect the microphone mounting bracket to en- d. Slightly dampen a clean, lint-free cloth in fresh wa-
sure that the hardware is present and in serviceable ter and remove soap residue.
condition.
e. Use a dry, lint-free cloth to dry the display.
d. Inspect the microphone to ensure that the PTT
button, channel Up/Down buttons, and the 16/9 button NOTE
move freely. Ensure that the microphone is not cracked
or broken. Do not dry the LCD display with a
dry cloth. Clean the display in accor-
e. Inspect the antenna mount to ensure that the hard- dance with paragraph 6-11.3.
ware is present and in serviceable condition.
6-10.2 RADAR DISPLAY INSPECTION.
f. Inspect the distress button cover to ensure that it
moves freely. a. Inspect all knobs to ensure that they are not bro-
ken and move freely.
g. Inspect all connections to ensure that they are
present and fit correctly. b. Inspect all keys to ensure that they move in and
out freely.
h. Inspect all connections and hardware for signs of
corrosion and wear. c. Inspect all display unit connectors to ensure that
they are tight.
i. Inspect all cables, cable hangers, and wiring to
ensure that they are not frayed, kinked, or damaged. d. Inspect the ground terminal connection to ensure
that it is tight and that it is not corroded.
j. Inspect and tighten mounting bracket hardware.
6-10.3 LCD CLEANING. The display LCD will, in
6-10 NAVIGATION. time, accumulate a coating of dust or salt which will
tend to dim the display. To clean the LCD display, ac-
6-10.1 RADAR DISPLAY UNIT. complish the following procedures:
6-10.1.1 Cleaning the Radar Display. To clean the NOTE

radar display, accomplish the following procedures:
When cleaning the display, care must
a. Ensure that power to the display is switched off. be used to avoid scratching the LCD.
b. Mix a solution of mild detergent and fresh water a. Wipe the display carefully with a tissue moistened
in a container. with LCD cleaner.
c. Remove the salt residue using the solution of de- b. Wipe slowly with soft tissue in order to dissolve
tergent and water with a slightly damp, lint-free cloth. accumulated dirt and salt.
Wash the face, controls, and exposed areas of the dis-
play. c. Change tissue frequently so that salt or dirt will
not scratch the LCD.
NOTE
d. Allow the LCD to air dry in accordance with LCD
Do not wash the LCD display. Clean cleaner instructions.
the display in accordance with para-
graph 6-10.3.
6-12
NOTE d. Inspect the microphone to ensure that the PTT
button moves freely. Ensure that the microphone is
Do not dry the LCD with a dry cloth. not cracked or broken.
NOTE e. Inspect all connections to ensure that they are

present and fit correctly.
Do not use solvents such as thinner,
acetone, or benzene for cleaning. f. Inspect all connections and hardware for signs of
corrosion and wear.
6-11 FORCE PROTECTION (SECURITY)
PACKAGE. g. Inspect all cables, cable hangers, and wiring to
ensure that they are not frayed, kinked, or damaged.
6-11.1 SIREN/PA.
h. Inspect and tighten mounting bracket hardware.
6-11.1.1 Siren/PA Control Head Cleaning.
6-11.1.3 Siren/PA Speaker Cleaning.
a. Ensure that the power is off.
NOTE
b. Mix a solution of mild detergent and fresh water
in a container. Do not use a direct hose spray on the
front of any speaker when cleaning
c. Slightly dampen a lint-free cloth in the solution of this could result in damage to the
soap and fresh water to wash the rotary knob, push equipment.
buttons, microphone, microphone cord, and the areas
that are exposed. Remove salt residue. a. Clean the speaker and mounting brackets with a
mild soap and freshwater solution to remove all dirt
d. Slightly dampen a clean, lint-free cloth in fresh and salt residue.
water to remove the soap residue.
b. Rinse the speaker and mounting brackets with
e. Use a dry, lint-free cloth to dry the control head. fresh water to remove the soap residue.
6-11.1.2 Siren/PA Control Head Inspection. 6-11.1.4 Siren/PA Speaker Inspection.
a. Inspect the rotary knob to ensure that it is not bro- a. Inspect all mounting brackets and hardware for
ken and moves freely. signs of wear, corrosion, or cracked welds.
b. Inspect the pushbuttons to ensure that they move b. Inspect all speakers for cracks, chips, and other
freely. visible signs of damage.
c. Inspect the microphone mounting bracket to en- c. Inspect all wiring and wire hangers for signs of
sure that the hardware is present and in serviceable damage or wear.
condition.
6-13
6-11.2 SEARCHLIGHT. c. Inspect the sealed beam bulb for signs of cracks,
chips or moisture inside the bulb.
6-11.2.1 Searchlight Bulb Replacement.
d. Inspect the plug and receptacle and all other con-
nections for signs of damage, wear, or corrosion.
WARNING
6-12 ENGINE AND CONSOLE INSTRUMENTS.
Failure to tag out power supply 6-12.1 DIESEL VIEW DISPLAY UNIT.
switches to searchlight could result in
equipment damage or injury to person- 6-12.1.1 Diesel View Display Unit Cleaning.
nel.
a. Ensure that the control panel breaker for the GPS/
a. Tag out the control panel breaker to the search- DC is off.
light. Allow to cool for a minimum of ten minutes.
b. Mix a solution of mild detergent and water in a
b. Unscrew and remove the bezel holding the lens in container.
place.
c. Remove the display cover and clean.
c. Remove the lens.
d. Remove the salt residue from the LCD screen
d. Remove the old bulb by grasping the face of the using the solution of detergent and fresh water with a
bulb and pulling straight out. slightly damp, lint-free cloth.
e. Install the new bulb by inserting the bulb contacts e. Slightly dampen a clean lint-free cloth in fresh water
into the socket. Press firmly into place. to remove the soap residue.
f. Clean and replace the lens. f. Use a dry, lint-free cloth to dry the Diesel View
display unit.
g. Replace the bezel to the housing.
NOTE
h. Remove the searchlight power tag out. Test the
searchlight for proper operation. Do not use a dry cloth to wipe the dis-
play screen.
6-11.2.2 Searchlight Cleaning.
g. Reinstall the cover.
a. Clean the searchlight lens with a mild soap and
fresh water solution to remove all dirt and salt residue. 6-12.1.2 Diesel View Display Unit Inspection.
b. Rinse the searchlight lens with fresh water to re- a. Remove the cover and inspect the display unit
move the soap residue. mounting to ensure the hardware is present and in ser-
viceable condition. Tighten if needed.
6-11.2.3 Searchlight Inspection.
b. Inspect the engine harness and all other connec-
a. Inspect the mounting bracket and hardware for tions and hardware for signs of wear and corrosion.
signs of wear and corrosion.
c. Inspect all cables, cable hangers, and wiring to
b. Inspect the housing for cracks and other signs of ensure that they are not frayed, kinked, or damaged.
damage.
6-14
6-12.2 CONSOLE INSTRUMENTS AND CON- der should be marked with the recorded weight and
TROLS. date. If the cylinder is below minimum weight, it must
be replaced or serviced in accordance with manufac-
6-12.2.1 Console Instruments and Controls Cleaning. turers recommendations. Discharge of the suppression
To clean the console instruments and controls, accom- medium without the proper concentration may not ex-
plish the following procedures: tinguish the fire and could cause the extinguishing me-
dium to degrade into a hazardous material.
a. Ensure that power to the console instruments and
controls is switched off. 6-13.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS. The following rou-
tine checks shall be done on the installed fire extin-
b. Mix a solution of mild detergent and fresh water guishers:
in a container.
a. Check the pressure gauge on the nozzle assem-
c. Remove the salt residue using the solution of de- bly. The indicator needle shall be within the green op-
tergent and fresh water with a slightly damp, lint-free erable, fully charged area.
cloth. Wash the faces, knobs, and exposed areas of
the displays and controls. b. Replace or recharge any fire extinguisher that does
not display the pressure reading in the green area.
d. Slightly dampen a clean, lint-free cloth in fresh wa-
ter and remove soap residue. c. Weigh extinguisher monthly as per the MRC re-
quirements to verify accuracy of the gauge.
e. Use a dry, lint-free cloth to dry the faces, knobs
and exposed areas of the displays and controls. 6-14 MISCELLANEOUS.
6-12.2.2 Console Instruments and Controls Inspection. 6-14.1 ANCHOR, ANCHOR RODE, AND ANCHOR
LINE. There is no manufacturer recommended main-
a. Inspect all knobs and switches to ensure that they tenance for the anchoring gear. Routine inspection of
are not broken and move freely. the anchor is required to ensure proper movement of
the fluke/shaft pivot point. The anchor rode chain and
b. Inspect all keys to ensure that they move in and shackles shall be inspected for damage and replaced
out freely. as necessary. The anchor line shall be inspected for
worn strands and replaced as necessary.
c. Inspect all display unit connectors to ensure that
they are tight. 6-14.2 INFLATABLE HYBRID COLLAR.
d. Inspect all ground terminal connections to ensure 6-14.2.1 Cleaning The Collar. The collar should be
that they are tight and that they are not corroded. cleaned as follows:
6-13 SAFETY. a. Rinse with fresh water.
6-13.1 ENGINE COMPARTMENT FIRE SUP- b. Apply solution of mild soap and fresh water.
PRESSION SYSTEM. There is no manufacturer rec-
ommended maintenance for the installed engine com- c. Scrub with soft nylon brush.
partment fire suppression system. The cylinder must
be weighed annually. The total weight of the tank and d. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.
the total weight of the extinguishing medium is listed
on the tank and part of the label. The cylinder must be e. Repeat steps a. through d. once more.
physically removed and placed on a scale. The cylin-
6-15
NOTE c. Gently rotate the valves counterclockwise with the
valve wrench.
Wash the boat thoroughly after each
mission if operating in salt water. d. After removal, clean the threads on the valve and
in the base with fresh water and a soft rag.
6-14.2.2 Inspecting The Collar. Visually inspect the
collar for damage. Cuts and/or deep abrasions should e. Allow the valves and bases to air dry before reas-
be repaired prior to operating the boat. Minor scrapes sembly.
can lead to tube deterioration and excessive wear.
f. Reinstall the valves with valve wrench. Do not
6-14.2.3 Cleaning Collar Valves. overtighten.
g. Reinflate the collar to 3 psi (21 kPa).

! CAUTION
6-14.3 WATERJET DRIVE. Reduced thrust or steer-
Be certain that the air pressure used ing effect may be caused by debris obstructing the
to clean valves does not exceed 30 waterjet drive intake grate or entering the drive’s in-
psi (207 kPa). Always wear safety take tunnel. Foreign objects pulled into the drive such
glasses when performing this proce- as plastic bags can be cleared by reversing the marine
dure. gear and back-flushing the drive. Foreign objects such
as rope or fishing line which become entangled in the
a. Use compressed air to clean grit and sand from waterjet’s impeller can be removed through the inspec-
the valve area. tion plate located on the upper side of the drive be-
neath the hatch on the aft platform.
b. Remove the valves with a valve wrench.
6-16
Section III.
LUBRICATION
6-15 GENERAL. a. Lubricate the engine coupler splines through grease

fittings on the coupler. Apply approximately 8-10 pumps
The planned maintenance system procedures provide of grease from a hand-operated grease gun.
information including specific materials and tools re-
quired to accomplish the procedures. This section pro- b. Lubricate the transom shaft end roller bearing and
vides general lubrication instructions for the boat. Lu- U-joint cross and bearing through the grease fittings
brication information for the following equipment is con- that are located on the U-joint and tapered roller bear-
tained in the appropriate equipment technical manual ing yoke. Apply approximately 10-12 pumps of grease
listed in table 1-2. from a hand-operated grease gun.
a. Propulsion Engines. c. Lubricate both end U-joint drive shaft spline ends
through grease fittings on the shaft.
b. Marine Gear.
d. Lubricate the engine shaft end U-joint cross and
c. Waterjet Drive. bearing through the two grease fittings that are located
on the U-joint. Apply 3-4 pumps of grease from a
Every 90 days, apply a small amount of lightweight oil hand-operated grease gun.
to the hinge pivot points throughout the boat. Engine
lube oil may be used on the pivot points. e. Lubricate the waterjet drive thrust bearing by ap-
plying 8-10 pumps of grease from a hand-operated
6-16 DRIVE SHAFT. grease gun.
The boat has grease lubricated bearings and U-joints.
6-17
Section IV.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT
6-17 GENERAL FOR VHF RADIO, RADAR g. Replace the overhead console mounting plate.
DISPLAY, AND SIREN/PA SYSTEM.
6-17.2 VHF RADIO REINSTALLATION.
The two maintenance categories are preventive and
corrective. Preventive maintenance for the VHF ra- NOTE
dio, the siren/PA control head, and radar display will be
limited to cleaning and inspecting before, during, and Remove cable connection covers prior
after each use and as directed by PMS guidelines. Cor- to reinstallation of the cables.
rective maintenance procedures will be established by
the command and current policy. a. Remove the overhead console mounting plate.
6-17.1 VHF RADIO REMOVAL. b. Install the VHF radio in the mounting plate.
c. Install and tighten the mounting screws.

WARNING
d. Connect the 12Vdc input cable.
Failure to tag out power supply e. Connect the accessory cable.

switches to the VHF radio could re-
sult in damaging equipment or injuring f. Replace the overhead console mounting plate.
personnel.
g. Connect the microphone.
NOTE
h. Provide power to the system.
Tag out power switches in accordance
with current command policy and i. Confirm that the VHF radio is transmitting and
guidelines. receiving.
NOTE 6-17.3 RADAR DISPLAY REMOVAL.
Cover all cable connections to protect

from moisture and dirt. WARNING
a. Disconnect the microphone.
Failure to tag out power supply
b. Remove the overhead console mounting plate. switches to the radar system could
result in damaging equipment or injur-
c. Disconnect and label the 12Vdc input cable. ing personnel.
d. Disconnect and label the antenna cable and the NOTE

accessory cable.
Tagout power switches in accordance
e. Loosen and remove the mounting screws. with current command policy and
guidelines.
f. Remove the radio from the mounting plate.
6-18
NOTE 6-17.5 SIREN/PA SYSTEM CONTROL HEAD
REMOVAL.
from moisture and dirt.
WARNING
a. Disconnect and label all accessory cables.
b. Disconnect and label the 24Vdc input cable. Failure to tag out power supply
switches to the siren/PA system con-
c. Disconnect and label the radome input cable. trol head could result in damaging
equipment or injuring personnel.
d. Loosen and remove the mounting screw knobs
located on each side of the radar display. NOTE
e. Remove the radar display from the mounting Tagout power switches in accordance
bracket. with current command policy and
guidelines.
6-17.4 RADAR DISPLAY REINSTALLATION.
NOTE
NOTE
Remove cable connection covers prior from moisture and dirt.
to reinstallation of the cables.
a. Loosen and remove the mounting screws holding
a. Insert the radar display into the mounting bracket. the siren/PA system control head in place.
b. Install and hand-tighten the mounting screw knobs b. Disconnect the 12Vdc power cable and label.
on each side of the radar display.
c. Disconnect the speaker cable label.
c. Connect the power cable. Ensure a tight connec-
tion. 6-17.6 SIREN/PA SYSTEM CONTROL HEAD
REINSTALLATION.
d. Connect the radome input cable. Ensure a tight
connection. NOTE
e. Connect all accessory cables. Ensure all cables Remove cable connection covers prior
are tightly connected. to reinstallation of the cables.
f. Provide power to the radar system and ensure a. Connect the speaker cable.
proper operation in all modes.
b. Connect the 12Vdc power cable.
6-19
c. Install the siren/PA system control head into the e. Disconnect the battery cables from the engine.
console and secure in place with the mounting screws.
f. Close the sea cock for the engine.
d. Provide power to the siren/PA system and ensure
proper operation in all modes. g. Disconnect the seawater suction hose from the
engine-mounted seawater pump inlet and from the sea
6-18 PROPULSION ENGINE, MARINE GEAR, strainer outlet.
AND DRIVE SHAFT.
h. Drain the seawater system by opening the drain-
For detailed repair procedures, refer to the applicable age points on the engine.
technical manual listed in table 1-2.
i. Close the engine fuel supply valves at the fuel tank
6-18.1 PROPULSION ENGINE, MARINE GEAR, and the fuel filter/water separator. Disconnect the fuel
AND DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL supply and return lines and cap the lines to prevent
foreign material from entering the fuel lines.
WARNING j. Disconnect the rubber exhaust hose and the sea-

water inlet hose from the seawater mixing elbow.
To prevent injury or death, ensure the k. Remove the hose clamp attaching the exhaust hose
engine is shut down and tagged "OUT- to the supporting brace and remove the hose from the
OF-SERVICE" prior to commencing transom exhaust fitting.
removal.
l. Disconnect all engine control and instrumentation
a. Tag the engine controls on the control console wiring.
"OUT-OF-SERVICE."
m. Disconnect the FLOCS hoses from the valves at
b. Turn the engine battery bank disconnect switch the FLOCS pump unit. Plug the ends of the hoses and
off. Tag the switch "OUT-OF-SERVICE." secure them to the engine.
c. Remove the access ladder to the engine compart- n. Remove the bolts from the engine and marine gear
ment. mounts.
o. Remove the drive shaft guard and disconnect the

WARNING AquaDrive from the marine gear output flange and
from the waterjet driveshaft flange.
To prevent injury or death, ensure ex-

treme care and proper lifting devices WARNING
are used during handling. The equip-
ment is heavy.
To avoid injury to personnel and dam-
d. Using appropriate rigging methods, support the age to equipment, secure the flanged
center aft deck section between the engine hatches ends of the AquaDrive together when
and remove the bolts securing it to the aft deck frame. lifting.
Lift the center aft deck section from the frame and
remove it from the boat.
6-20
WARNING WARNING
To prevent injury or death, ensure ex- To prevent injury or death, ensure ex-
treme care and proper lifting devices treme care and proper lifting devices
are used during handling. The equip- are used during handling. The equip-
ment is heavy. ment is heavy.
p. Lift the AquaDrive unit out of the engine compart- c. Using appropriate rigging methods, lift the engine
ment in a horizontal position to prevent the splines from and marine gear into the engine room and set them on
separating. Injury to personnel and damage to equip- the engine girders. Move the engine forward until it is
ment can occur if the shaft splines separate during lift- in proper position.
ing.
d. Bolt the engine and marine gear onto their respec-
q. Ensure that all wiring and disconnected piping is tive mounts.
clear of the engine and that all loose wiring and piping
on the engine is secured so that it cannot foul equip-
ment or structure when being lifted. WARNING
WARNING To prevent injury or death, ensure ex-

treme care and proper lifting devices
To prevent injury or death, ensure ex- ment is heavy.
ment is heavy. WARNING
r. Using appropriate rigging methods, move the en-
gine aft to a point where it will clear the hatch opening To avoid injury to personnel and dam-
when lifted. age to equipment, secure the flanged
ends of the AquaDrive together when
s. Attach lifting gear to the engine and the marine lifting.
gear lifting points. Lift the engine and marine gear out
of the engine room. e. Lift the AquaDrive unit into the engine compart-
ment in a horizontal position to prevent the splines from
6-18.2 PROPULSION ENGINE, MARINE GEAR, separating. Injury to personnel and damage to equip-
AND DRIVE SHAFT INSTALLATION ment can occur if the shaft splines separate during lift-
ing.
a. Using appropriate rigging methods, attach lifting
gear to the engine and the marine gear lifting points. f. Reconnect the AquaDrive to the marine gear out-
put flange and to the waterjet driveshaft flange. Torque
b. Ensure that all wiring and disconnected piping is the bolts to 184 ft-lb (250Nm). Install the drive shaft
clear of the engine and that all loose wiring and piping guard.
on the engine is secured so that it cannot foul equip-
ment or structure when being lifted and installed in the g. Install the exhaust hose on the transom exhaust
boat. fitting. Attach the exhaust hose to the supporting brace
with the hose clamp.
6-21
h. Reconnect the exhaust hose and the seawater in- r. Using appropriate rigging methods, lift the center
let hose to the seawater mixing elbow. aft deck section onto the aft deck frame. Bolt the
center aft deck section to the aft deck frame.
i. Reconnect the battery cables to the engine.
s. Install the access ladder in the engine compart-
j. Close the seawater drainage points on the engine. ment.
k. Reconnect the seawater suction hose to the en- t. Remove the tag out and return the engine battery
gine-mounted seawater pump inlet and to the sea bank disconnect switch to the ON position.
strainer outlet.
u. Remove the tag out from the control console en-
l. Uncap and reconnect the fuel supply and return gine controls.
lines. Open the engine fuel supply valve at the mani-
fold.
! CAUTION
m. Reconnect all engine control and instrumentation
wiring. It is particularly important to properly
bleed the coolant system. Failure to
n. Reconnect the engine battery cables. do so can result in engine damage.
o. Reconnect the FLOCS system hoses to the valves v. Bleed the coolant system.
on the FLOCS pump unit.
w. Refer to the engine technical manual listed in table
p. Open the sea cock for the engine. 1-2 for start-up and check out procedures.
6-19 WATERJET DRIVE.

WARNING
6-19.1 EXTERNAL WATERJET COMPONENT
REMOVAL. The external waterjet drive components
To prevent injury or death, ensure ex- mounted to the transom can be removed without re-
treme care and proper lifting devices moving the engine and the marine gear. For detailed
are used during handling. The equip- repair procedures, refer to the applicable technical
ment is heavy. manual listed in table 1-2.
q. Using appropriate rigging methods, support the cen- a. Steering linkage removal.
ter aft deck section between the engine hatches and
remove the bolts securing it to the aft deck frame.
WARNING
! CAUTION
To prevent injury or death, ensure the
To prevent damage to equipment, en- engine is shut down and tagged "OUT-
sure the neoprene seal between the OF-SERVICE" prior to commencing
center deck section and the aft deck removal.
frame is in good condition and in proper
position when installing the center deck 1. Shut down the engines and tag "OUT-OF-SER-
section. VICE" at the control console.
6-22
b. Reverse bucket component removal.
WARNING
WARNING
are used during handling. The equip- To prevent injury or death, ensure ex-
ment is heavy. treme care and proper lifting devices
ment is heavy.
! CAUTION
1. Using appropriate rigging methods, support the
To prevent flooding the boat must be reverse bucket and disconnect the reverse cylinder pis-
removed from the water prior to re- ton from the bucket by removing the split pin from the
moving the waterjet components. connecting pin in the clevis on the reverse bucket arm.
2. Remove the boat from the water using the ap- 2. Withdraw the connecting pin from the clevis
propriate hoisting devices and place in a cradle or on a on the reverse bucket arm.
trailer.
c. Tail pipe removal.
3. Remove the transom pipe frame to provide ac-
cess for lifting straps to support the waterjet compo-
nents during removal. WARNING
4. If the port waterjet drive is being removed,
disconnect the steering cylinder piston rod from the To prevent injury or death, ensure ex-
steering arm. treme care and proper lifting devices
5. Remove the tie rod from the steering arm in ment is heavy.
the engine compartment and remove the steering arm
from the steering rod. 1. Using appropriate rigging methods, support the
reverse bucket, the steering assembly, and the tail pipe
6. Loosen the hardware on the steering crank at assembly. Remove the nuts and washers from the studs
the steering nozzle. securing the tail pipe to the transom plate.
7. Slide the steering shaft forward into the boat 2. Carefully withdraw and remove the tail pipe
until it is clear of the steering crank. together with the reverse and steering components from
the transom plate.
8. Remove the steering crank from the steering
nozzle. 3. Lower the tail pipe and attached components
onto an appropriate mobile work cart.
9. Slide the steering shaft aft and withdraw the
shaft from the boat.
6-23
6-19.2 INTERNAL WATERJET REMOVAL. The
internal waterjet unit in the engine compartment can WARNING
be removed only if the engine and marine gear are
removed. For detailed repair procedures, refer to the
applicable technical manual listed in table 1-2. For en- To prevent injury or death, ensure ex-
gine and marine gear removal, refer to paragraph treme care and proper lifting devices
6-18. are used during handling. The equip-
ment is heavy.
a. Remove the engine and marine gear from the en-
gine compartment. c. Using appropriate rigging methods, carefully lower
the waterjet drive unit straight down onto the mounting
b. Remove the external waterjet drive components studs in the intake block.
in accordance with paragraph 6-19.1.
d. Secure the waterjet drive unit in place using the
c. If the port waterjet drive is being removed, re- nuts and washers removed in paragraph 6-19.2.
move the steering cylinder from its mounting bracket
on the waterjet drive unit. Secure the cylinder and at- e. Remove excess sealant from inside and outside
tached hoses so they will not interfere with the waterjet the waterjet unit.
drive removal or become damaged.
f. If the port steering cylinder was removed, rein-
d. Remove the nuts and washers securing the base stall it on the mounting bracket on the waterjet drive
of the waterjet drive unit to the intake block in the hull. unit.
e. Remove the nuts and washers securing the 6-19.4 EXTERNAL WATERJET COMPONENT
waterjet drive unit to the transom plate. REINSTALLATION.
a. Tail pipe reinstallation.

WARNING
WARNING
are used during handling. The equip- To prevent injury or death, ensure ex-
ment is heavy. treme care and proper lifting devices
f. Using appropriate rigging methods, carefully lift ment is heavy.
the waterjet drive unit straight up off the mounting studs
and remove it from the boat. 1. Using appropriate rigging methods, raise the
tail pipe and attached components into position and care-
6-19.3 INTERNAL WATERJET INSTALLATION. fully install them onto the studs on the transom plate.
a. Clean all sealing material from the intake block in 2. Secure the tail pipe assembly into place using
the hull and the bottom of the transom mounting plate. the nuts and washers removed in paragraph 6-19.1.
Ensure the surfaces are free of oil or grease.
b. Liberally apply neutral cure RTV silicone sealant

to the top of the intake block and to the bottom of the
flange on the waterjet drive unit.
6-24
b. Reverse bucket component reinstallation.
2. Install the steering crank into the steering
nozzle.
WARNING
3. Slide the steering shaft aft and install it in the
steering crank.
treme care and proper lifting devices 4. Tighten the hardware on the steering crank at
are used during handling. The equip- the steering nozzle.
ment is heavy.
5. Install the steering arm onto the steering rod in
1. Using appropriate rigging methods, raise the the engine compartment. Install the tie rod onto the
reverse bucket into position and connect the reverse steering arm.
cylinder piston to the bucket by inserting the connect-
ing pin through the end of the piston rod and into the 6. If the port waterjet drive was removed, re-
clevis on the reverse bucket arm. connect the steering cylinder piston rod to the steering
arm.
2. Insert the split pin into the connecting pin in 7. Remove engine tag out.
the clevis on the reverse bucket arm.
8. When the boat is waterborne, test the steering
b. Steering linkage reinstallation. and reverse bucket operation in accordance with the
drive system check procedures in chapter 4.
1. Install the steering shaft and slide it forward
into the boat.
6-25/(6-26 blank)
6-25
CHAPTER 7
EMERGENCY AND DAMAGE CONTROL
7-1 INTRODUCTION. b. Remove the locking pin from the valve.
This section contains general information for emer- c. Direct the discharge nozzle at the base of the fire
gency situations, fire fighting, and damage control. with a side-to-side motion. The maximum range is ap-
Emergency operating procedures are covered in chap- proximately 5 feet (2 m) from the end of the nozzle.
ter 4, section V. Action to be taken in rough weather
and/or abandon ship conditions shall be determined by d. Release the lever to close the valve as soon as
the boat officer. conditions permit; continue to open and close the valve
as necessary. The valve can be opened and closed
7-2 FIRE FIGHTING. repeatedly without loss from leakage. However, after
each use the extinguisher must be serviced.
7-2.1 GENERAL. A definite fire fighting plan should
be established. This plan should generally describe dif- 7-2.3 INSTALLED FIRE EXTINGUISHER. There
ferent potential fire fighting situations and assign per- is an installed fire suppression system (Fireboy, model
sonnel to specific tasks within those situations. Each CG2-600) mounted in a fabricated bracket forward of
crew member should be familiar with the location of the transom on the starboard side of the engine com-
the fire extinguishers. Training shall be conducted to partment centerline. The extinguishing agent is FE-241,
ensure that each crew member can use and operate chlorotetrafluoroethane, which has been accepted by
the fire extinguisher. A safety plan should be estab- the EPA for use in unoccupied spaces. The extinguisher
lished so that unnecessary fire hazards such as fuel is connected to the Fireboy panel monitor located on
and oil spills, and flammable debris are eliminated. the console at the coxswain station. When one of the
IGN switches is placed in the ON position, the green
7-2.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS. There CHARGED LED indicator lamp on the monitor panel
are two 6-pound 3A:40B:C portable dry-chemical fire will be illuminated. If the system discharges automati-
extinguishers (Amerex, model B443) bracket-mounted cally, the green CHARGED LED will extinguish and
between the forward and aft seats on the port and the red DISCHG LED will illuminate. Additionally, the
starboard outboard cabin bulkheads. Each fire extin- panel will provide an audible warning of discharge.
guisher should be inspected and serviced in accordance
with PMS. Operate the fire extinguisher as follows: NOTE
The control console Fireboy panel does

WARNING not indicate an engine compartment
fire. The panel only provides visual and
audible indications of system dis-
Do not allow the fire extinguisher to charge.
touch energized electrical equipment
while fighting an electrical fire. 7-2.3.1 Automatic System Discharge. The extin-
guisher will automatically discharge when the tempera-
a. Carry the extinguisher in an upright position. Ap- ture in the engine compartment reaches 175°F (79.4°C).
proach the fire as closely as heat permits. The system automatically shuts down the propulsion
engines upon discharge.
7-1
e. Maintain a watch on the engine compartment. Fol-
WARNING lowing a system discharge, no automatic fire suppres-
sion will be available and the console Fireboy panel
will not operate normally.
in the event of an engine compartment f. Have the engine compartment fire suppression sys-
fire, immediately shut down the en- tem serviced as soon as possible following discharge.
gine to permit the fire suppression
agent to extinguish the fire. 7-3 LIFESAVING EQUIPMENT.
The FE-241 agent will not stall the engines. Continued

operation of the engines may deplete the compartment WARNING
of the agent and permit a possible reflash of the fire. If
the Fireboy panel indicates a system discharge and does
not automatically shut down the engines, immediately To prevent death or injury to person-
shut down the engines to permit the fire suppression nel, never hook a boathook into cloth-
agent to extinguish the fire. ing to retrieve a person from the wa-
ter. If the boathook inadvertently
7-2.3.2 System Override. The override switch on the catches the collar, strangulation can
console panel allows the engines to be restarted after occur. Sudden movement of the boat
automatic shutdown. or the person can cause injury. If the
boathook is used to retrieve a person
a. Wait several minutes before accessing the engine from the water, allow him to grasp the
compartment. hook on his own.
b. Have portable extinguishers ready and use care The boat carries a ring buoy for use in retrieving a man
when opening the engine room hatches. overboard. The ring buoy is mounted on the aft cabin
bulkhead on the port side. The telescoping 8-foot (2.4
c. Place the switch on the console fire suppression meter) aluminum boathook is mounted in clips outboard
system panel in the OVERRIDE position. of the starboard aft crew seat.
7-4 ROUGH WEATHER.

WARNING
The boat should not be operated at high speed in rough
seas. Excessive wave pounding can cause serious dam-
Do not restart the engines until the fire age to the hull and installed equipment. If operation
is completely out. must take place in rough sea conditions, all hatches
should be secured, all loose gear stowed, and extreme
d. Once the fire is completely out, restart the en- caution exercised in handling the boat. All crew and
gines. passengers must don survival equipment. Bilge pump
operation should be checked frequently to ensure re-
moval of excess water. Lifesaving equipment should
WARNING be readily available.
7-5 DAMAGE CONTROL.

maintain a watch on the engine com- Damage control aboard the boat is concerned with fire,
partment following a fire suppression collision, hull damage, and emergency repairs. Dam-
system discharge. age control may be necessary when moored or under-
7-2
way, and could involve the use of personnel and facili- that will cause damage to equipment and systems, or
ties of neighboring boats. Damage control requires a will seriously affect stability and buoyancy of the boat.
detailed knowledge of boat construction characteris- The electric and hand-operated bilge pumps can keep
tics, stability factors, and the use of tools and accesso- up with flooding caused by small holes or cracks in the
ries placed onboard for damage control. Basically, the hull. In extreme cases, when the bilge pumps cannot
control of damage depends on the ability and initiative keep up with the flooding, the engine-driven seawater
of the crew to take prompt corrective action. In an pump can be used to dewater the craft. However, the
emergency, ingenuity is an asset that may save not use of both bilge pumps should not be abandoned. If
only the boat but also the lives of personnel. The three possible, continue the pumping effort with both bilge
basic objectives of damage control are: pumps while aligning the seawater pump for dewater-
ing.
a. Take practical preliminary measures before dan-
ger occurs such as ensuring watertight integrity, re- The following steps are to be performed when using
moving fire hazards, maintaining damage control equip- the seawater pump for dewatering. Figure 7-1 shows
ment, and training personnel in first aid and damage a generic dewatering alignment using the engine sea-
control. water pump.
b. Minimize and localize damage that does occur by a. Secure the engine.
such measures as: controlling flooding, maintaining sta-
bility, combating fires, and administering first aid to b. Close the sea cock.
personnel.
c. At the sea cock discharge, loosen the hose clamps
c. Accomplish repairs or restoration of boat systems and disconnect the rubber hose which leads to the en-
as quickly as possible after damage occurs to restore a gine seawater pump.
safe margin of stability and buoyancy.
7-5.1 HULL DAMAGE AND EMERGENCY RE- ! CAUTION

PAIRS. Small holes in the hull may be plugged tempo-
rarily by stuffing them with cotton duck, rags, or a To prevent equipment damage, ensure
wooden plug. Large holes in the hull may be tempo- the seawater pump supply hose is sub-
rarily plugged with stuffing material, such as life vests, merged in water during the entire
jackets, seat cushions, and wedges. All other hull dam- emergency dewatering procedure.
age not occurring under emergency conditions should The engine-driven seawater pump
be repaired in accordance with chapter 5. Inflatable impeller will fail and the engine will
collar permanent repairs should be accomplished as overheat without a constant supply of
soon as conditions permit and air bladder pressurized seawater.
to 3 psi (21 kPa) using the hand inflation pump.
d. Submerge the seawater pump supply hose in the
7-5.2 DEWATERING. Damage to the hull, piping bilge water. Do not allow the hose to lose suction. En-
systems, or hoses can lead to flooding. Immediate sure the seawater pump supply hose remains sub-
action must be taken to isolate the source of flooding merged in water during the entire emergency dewa-
and dewater the boat before water levels reach a height tering procedure.
7-3
THRU-
HULL
FITTING
OPEN
CLOSED
Figure 7-1. Dewatering with Seawater Pump
consistent with dewatering the engine compartment

! CAUTION during the entire emergency dewatering procedure.
To prevent equipment damage, ensure 7-6 LOSS OF ELECTRICAL POWER.

no foreign object is allowed to enter
or block the hose. The engine-driven In the event of loss of electrical power to any equip-
seawater pump impeller will fail and ment or system, perform the following steps:
the engine will overheat without a con-
stant supply of seawater. NOTE
e. Ensure no foreign object such as a rag is allowed The design philosophy for the electri-
to enter or block the seawater pump supply hose dur- cal system is that short circuit protec-
ing the entire emergency dewatering procedure. tion is provided in a manner that cir-
cuit breakers closest to the affected
f. Restart the engine to allow the seawater pump to equipment open first.
take suction. Maintain engine rpm as low as possible
7-4
a. Upon loss of electrical power while in normal op- 7-7 LOSS OF ENGINE-DRIVEN ALTERNA-
eration investigate for cause. TOR.
b. Operate the ON/OFF control switch for the equip- In the event of a failure of the engine-driven alternator,
ments which lost electrical power. Determine if the secure all electrical equipment not critical to boat op-
switch was inadvertently opened. eration. Turn off console disconnect switches. Open
all breakers not critical to boat operation at the distri-
c. If the ECM circuit is affected operate the ON/ bution panels. Return console disconnect switches to
OFF toggle switch on the auxiliary circuit breaker panel the ON position.
and check for defective fuses.
7-8 ABANDONING THE BOAT.
NOTE
Unless there is an uncontrollable fire onboard and/or
The ECM circuit is protected by sev- the possibility of explosion, it is usually the best option
eral, automotive type spade fuses in to remain with the boat. Calm and common sense should
the wiring harness. prevail and every effort should be made to lighten the
boat by jettisoning as much weight as possible. Re-
d. Operate the main circuit breakers for the 12Vdc member that even a partially submerged boat presents
panels, the 24Vdc panel, the trim tab pumps, and a better target for search and rescue personnel than
Cummins converters. Determine if the main circuit an individual floating in open water.
breaker was inadvertently opened.
7-9 EMERGENCY SIGNALING.
e. If power is not restored to the affected compo-
nent/system, check the effected component or system Emergency signaling can be accomplished by the use
for damage. of flares. A hand lantern, the boat horn, and siren/
PA may also be used for signaling.
f. Inspect wiring from the affected component back
towards the control switch for damage.
g. When the cause of loss of power is determined

make repairs, if possible, and return the system to op-
eration.
7-5
7-5/(7-6 blank)
CHAPTER 8
MISCELLANEOUS
Section I.
HOISTING AND DOCKING
8-1 INTRODUCTION. 8-3 HOISTING.
When out of the water, the boat will normally be stowed Procedures for hoisting the boat from the trailer are as
on a trailer. The boat is equipped with three lifting pad follows:
eyes which are welded to the hull structure to provide
a means of attaching the lifting sling (figures 8-1 and a. Position the boat and trailer where the lifting hook
8-2). The lifting structural fittings and attachment hard- will be over the boat’s Longitudinal Center of Gravity
ware are tested for a hoisting weight of 21,000 pounds (LCG)(figure 8-1). Ensure there is sufficient room for
(9,525 kg). A tested and certified hoisting sling is deliv- the boom and boat to clear the pier and any obstruc-
ered with the boat. tions.
b. Ensure the transom drain plug is in place and any

WARNING openings to the sea are closed; secure or remove all
loose gear on the boat.
To prevent personnel injury or death, c. Remove the trailer tiedown straps from the boat
ensure only the boat sling supplied with and the trailering safety cable from the bow eye.
the boat is used for sling operations.
d. Attach the sling assembly to the crane hook.
Tags are attached to each sling leg to identify the leg
attachment point (e.g. fwd), the boat, and the date that e. Lower the sling over the boat. Have personnel
the sling was placed into service and certified for use. tend sling legs to prevent contact with the boat.
Slings for a given boat are not suitable for use on other
boats. f. Attach the forward sling leg to the forward pad
eye with the shackle provided. Ensure the shackle pin
The boat hoisting fittings have been tested to a 50% completely engages the shackle.
overload test of 31,500 pounds (14,303 kg). These tests
confirm that the hoisting fittings and slings were prop- g. Attach the after sling legs to the after pad eyes
erly specified and manufactured. The lift center is above with the shackles provided.
the aft deck and is located 11-feet, 5 15/16-inches for-
ward of the transom, measured at the deck. h. Take a light strain on the sling to ensure it tends
correctly and prevents the forward leg contact with
8-2 HOISTING SLING DESCRIPTION. the cabin.
The hoisting sling assembly is comprised of three poly- i. Attach two handling lines to the boat, forward to
ester, 3-ply, fiber web legs 3 inches wide connected to the mooring cleat on the bow and aft to the mooring
a master link at the top. The loose end of each leg has bitt on the pier side of the boat.
a screw-pin shackle for attachment to the boat. Refer
to figure 8-1 for the hoisting sling arrangement. j. Have personnel tending handling lines take a light
strain on the handling lines.
8-1
8-2
LCG
14”-8”
11”-5 15/16”
LIGHT BAR 24”-11”

15”-11 1/8”
SEARCH
LIGHT
HORN
NAV LIGHT
15”-3 1/8”
Figure 8-1. Hoisting Diagram, Profile View

3“ X 12” HIGH
DENSITY FOAM
LIFTING EYE
(P&S) AIR RIDE SEATS
(4 PLACES) HATCH
LIFTING EYE
ENG RM VENTS P/S FUEL TK

SOFT PATCH
MN ENG HATCH WT
DOOR
LCG DOWN
ENG RM
ACCESS
GUN
SLINGS TUB
MN ENG HATCH
SONABOUY
STORAGE (P&S)
Figure 8-2. Hoisting Diagram, Plan View

8-3
f. Attach the aft sling legs to the aft pad eyes.
WARNING
g. Take a light strain on the sling to ensure that it
tends correctly and the sling assembly does not con-
Never stand under a lifted load. tact the cabin, antennas, or mast-mounted equipment.
k. Take a heavy strain on the lifting hook, check the h. Shift from mooring lines to handling lines. Have
sling legs to ensure the load is equally distributed. Con- all personnel clear the boat.
tinue lifting until the boat just starts to lift off the trailer.
Stop the lift. Ensure there is no excess forward or lat-
eral movement of the boat relative to the trailer. WARNING
l. When the lift is steady on the sling, continue lifting
the boat clear of the trailer. Maintain a light strain on Never stand under a lifted load.
the handling lines to keep the boat parallel to the pier
while booming out. i. Commence the lift, maintaining a light strain on
the handling lines to keep the boat from swinging on
m. Lower the boat into the water. Maintain a light the hook.
strain on the lifting hook when the boat is waterborne.
j. Position the boat over the trailer and lower slowly
n. Secure the boat to the pier using the handling lines to ensure that the boat and trailer are properly aligned.
as mooring lines.
k. Maintain a light strain on the sling while inspecting
o. Slack the lifting hook to allow for removal of the the points of contact between the boat and trailer to
sling legs from the pad eyes. ensure that the boat is correctly seated in the trailer.
p. Have personnel in the boat tend the sling legs until l. Slack the lifting hook to relieve the light strain.
they are detached and lifted clear of the boat.
m. Gripe the trailer to the boat at the bow and stern
8-4 DOCKING BY CRANE. with gripes provided at six locations adjacent to the
frames.
Procedures for hoisting the boat out of the water are
as follows: n. When the boat and trailer are in their final stow-
age location, remove the slings, exercising care to pre-
a. Position the boat where the lifting hook will be vent the sling legs from damaging the boat.
over a point as close to the LGC as possible (see fig-
ure 8-1). 8-5 LAUNCHING BY TRAILER.
b. Ensure all loose gear is secure or removed and Procedures for launching the boat from the trailer into
the mast is down and secured. the water are as follows:
c. Attach the sling assembly to the crane hook.

! CAUTION
d. Lower the sling to the boat. Have personnel tend
to the sling legs to prevent contact with the boat. Ensure the launch ramp has adequate
water to float the boat.
e. Attach the single forward sling leg to the forward
lifting pad eye with the shackle provided. Ensure the
shackle pin completely engages the shackle.
8-4
boat does not float free of the trailer and cannot easily
! CAUTION be worked free by pulling on the handling lines the pro-
pulsion engine may be required to assist in launching of
Ensure the tow vehicle is sized cor- the boat.
rectly for the boat weight. If the ve-
hicle is under sized it may not be able ! CAUTION
to launch or recover the boat in a safe
manner. Back down slowly to prevent water
from building up and coming over the
a. Ensure the slope of the ramp is not a greater in- transom.
cline than the tow vehicle can overcome with the boat
loaded. i. As the boat is launched, observe how far the trailer
is in the water to make later recovery of the boat by
b. Ensure the water depth is deep enough to float the trailer easier.
the boat.
j. Move the tow vehicle and trailer from the launch
c. Check for underwater obstructions that may dam- ramp to make room for others to launch and recover.
age the boat or trailer.
8-6 RECOVERY BY TRAILER.
d. Allow the trailer bearings to cool before backing
into the water. Procedures for recovering the boat from the water with
the trailer are as follows:
e. Disconnect the electrical lighting connections to
the trailer before backing into the water.
! CAUTION
f. Observe hazards such as wind, tide, current, slip-
pery surfaces, etc. Take these factors into consider- Ensure launch ramp has adequate
ation prior to launching. water to float the boat.
g. Ensure the transom drain plug is installed.

! CAUTION
! CAUTION Ensure tow vehicle is sized correctly

for the boat weight. If the vehicle is
Do not disconnect the winch cable under sized it may not be able to launch
from the boat bow eye until the boat or recover the boat in a safe manner.
floats free from the trailer.
a. Ensure the slope of the ramp is not a greater in-
cline than the tow vehicle can overcome with the boat
! CAUTION loaded.
Block the wheels of the tow vehicle, b. Ensure the water depth is deep enough to float
to prevent it from being pulled into the the boat onto the trailer.
water as the boat backs down.
c. Check for underwater obstructions that may dam-
h. Prior to launching, remove the trailering straps. age the boat or trailer.
Back the trailer into the water sufficiently to float the
boat free of the trailer. Pay out the winch cable until it d. Allow the trailer bearings to cool before backing
goes slack and disconnect it from the bow eye. If the into the water.
8-5
e. Disconnect the electrical lighting connections to i. Pull the trailer and boat from the water.
the trailer before backing into the water.
j. Remove the transom drain plug and store at the
f. Back the trailer into the water, allow approximately coxswain’s station.
8 to 24 inches of the forward end of the bunk to be
exposed above the water. This may vary with differ- k. Gripe the boat to the trailer with the tie down strap
ent ramp slopes. across the transom.
g. Align the boat keel with the center of the trailer. l. Attach the safety cable to the bow eye.
Deploy and attach the winch cable.
m. Secure all loose equipment in the boat.
h. Use line handlers to align the boat to the trailer.
Slowly crank the winch to pull the boat onto the trailer. n. Secure the electrical and fuel systems.
Continue to operate the winch until the bow of the boat
rests securely against the bow stop.
8-6
Section II.
SHIPPING AND STORAGE
8-7 SHIPPING. thoroughly drained and allowed to dry. The engines,

marine gear, and waterjet unit are prepared for layup
An aluminum trailer is provided for transportation and in accordance with their technical manuals listed in
storage of the boat. The trailer is designed to contact table 1-2. The hull and all systems should be inspected
the boat on its longitudinal axes. The boat rests on for corrosion, damage, etc., and the necessary repairs
longitudinal bunks contacting the port and starboard made before layup.
hull bottom. The trailer is equipped with a winch used
to assist loading. The winch is not to be used as the 8-9 STORAGE.
only method of securing the boat to the trailer. A
2 1/2-inch (6.4 cm) web tiedown strap is provided 8-9.1 PRESERVATION FOR SHORT-TERM
for securing the boat to the trailer. Position the strap STORAGE. Prior to storage, the boat should be pre-
just forward of the transom and connect to the trailer pared as outlined in the layup procedures to provide
frame on the port and starboard sides. protection against damage and deterioration. Bilges
should be completely drained, steam or water cleaned,
and dried. The boat exterior should be washed with
! CAUTION fresh water. The seawater system should be flushed
with fresh water and dried. Surfaces with damaged
Tie down strap must pass over the or defective paint should be cleaned and repainted as
boat just forward of the transom to specified in chapter 5. All equipment, bearings, and
safely trailer the boat. moving parts should be lubricated in accordance with
the requirements of chapter 6 or the applicable equip-
To ensure secure transportation it is imperative the ment technical manual listed in table 1-2.
boat is loaded all the way forward on the trailer. The
bow must rest in the rubber bow stop. Always con- 8-9.2 PRESERVATION FOR LONG-TERM
nect the trailering safety cable into the boat’s trailering STORAGE. For long-term storage, prepare the boat
pad eye. as outlined in the preceding paragraph. Remove the
batteries from battery boxes. Coat the engines,
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the waterjet units, and exposed hardware with preserva-
frame of the towing vehicle. Safety chains must be tive. Drain, clean, and dry the fuel tank. Prepare in
short enough to keep the drawbar from contacting the accordance with the instructions in the engine, marine
ground, and cross beneath the tongue of the trailer. If gear, and waterjet unit technical manuals listed in table
the trailer becomes disconnected, the chains will sup- 1-2. Lubricate deck-mounted equipment as if for ser-
port the tongue and drawbar, and allow for a safe vice. Coat unpainted, untreated, exterior surfaces sub-
stop. Safety chains must be no longer than necessary ject to corrosion with protective preservative.
to provide enough slack for turning. They must never
drag on the ground. Crossing the safety chains also 8-9.3 DEPRESERVATION AND REACTIVA-
provides directional control to the trailer. TION. Reactivation of the boat and its systems is ac-
complished by reversing the preservation procedures.
8-8 LAYUP PROCEDURES. Remove preservative and protective coating from all
treated surfaces. Charge and reinstall the batteries.
Prior to layup, all piping systems must be drained. The Refill system fluid levels. Reactivate the engines, ma-
bilge drain plug should be removed and left open. The rine gear, and waterjet units in accordance with the
plug should be fastened to the helm to ensure replace- requirements of chapter 6 or the applicable equipment
ment prior to launching the boat. The bilge, bilge drain- technical manual listed in table 1-2. Ensure the bilge
age system, seawater system, and fuel tank must be plugs are replaced prior to launching the boat into the
water.
8-7
Section IV.
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
8-11 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN.

table 1-2 for a list of the technical manuals applicable
An illustrated parts breakdown is provided in this sec- to the boat and its installed equipment. The illustrated
tion for selected individual boat components. In some parts breakdown included in this manual is for the con-
cases, the applicable technical manual is not required venience of maintenance personnel. The figures are
to make minor repairs, however, if needed, refer to listed in table 8-2.
Table 8-2. List of Illustrated Parts Breakdown
Figure No. Title MFG Part No.
8-3 Seawater Strainer Perko 493 009 PLB

8-4 FLOCS Pump Jabsco 17820-0024
8-5 Steering System SeaStar HH5272
8-6 Sea Cock Perko 834 009 PLB
8-9
1
AN
LE
OC
14 E NT 2
OP
3
13
4
12
5
11
6
7
WATER STRAINER
15
PERKO
8
10
Figure 8-3. Seawater Strainer (Sheet 1 of 2)
8-10
Item Description CAGE Manufacturer
Code Part Number
0 Strainer, Seawater, Perko, 2 1/2-inch inlet/outlet 46576 493-010-PLB
1 Cover 46576 N/A
2 Cover, Hinged Bolt Wing Nut 46576 N/A
3 Cover, Hinged Bolt Washer 46576 N/A
4 Tie Rod, Nut 46576 N/A
5 Tie Rod, Washer 46576 N/A
6 Tie Rod 46576 N/A
7 Cylinder, Transparent 46576 493-010-99C
8 Cylinder Gasket, Rubber, Qty 2 46576 N/A
9 Casting, Bottom 46576 493-010-99B
10 Drain Plug, 1/4-inch NPT, Bronze 46576 N/A
11 Cover, Hinged Bolt, Qty 2 46576 N/A
12 Cover, Hinged Bolt Pin, Qty 2 46576 N/A
13 Casting, Top 46576 493-010-99A
14 Cover Gasket, Rubber 46576 N/A
15 Strainer, Basket 46576 493-010-99D
1, 14 Cover (1) and Gasket (14) 46576 493-010-99E
2, 3, 11 Cover, Hinged Bolt Assembly (Bolt (11), Pin (12),
and 12 Wing Nut (2), and Washer (3)), Qty 4 46576 493-010-99L
4, 5 and 6 Tie Rod Assembly (Rod (6), Nut (4), and Washer (5)), Qty 4 46576 493-010-99P
8 and 14 Gasket Kit, Rubber (Cover Gasket (14), Qty 1, and
Cylinder Gasket (8), Qty 2) 46576 493-010-99R
Figure 8-3. Seawater Strainer (Sheet 2 of 2)
8-11
8-12
6
5
8
14
13 7
12 9
11
10
Figure 8-4. FLOCS Pump (Sheet 1 of 2)

Code Part Number
0 Pump, Oil Change 31425 17820-0024
1 Boot, Toggle Switch 31425 98022-0000
2 Cover, Small Hinged 31425 17825-0000
3 Cover, Large Fixed 31425 17824-0000
4 Motor, 24 Volt EMC 31425 18753-0636
5 Manifold 31425 17822-0000
6 Valve, Ball (3 Places) 31425 98024-0000
7 Slinger 31425 6342-0000
8 Seal 31425 1040-0000
9 Body 31425 9154-0000
10 Screw Kit (3 Screws) 31425 98019-0020
11 Impellor 31425 9200-0023
12 Gasket 31425 9156-0000
13 End Cover 31425 11833-0000
14 Screw Kit (3 Screws) 31425 18753-0105
Figure 8-4. FLOCS Pump (Sheet 2 of 2)
8-13
1
2 3
1 1
2 2
2 CONSOLE
1
8
FILL PORT
4
HELM PUMP
BLEEDER VALVE
(2 PLACES)
CYLINDER ROD
CLEVIS 6
CLEVIS PIN
(2 PLACES)
STEERING ROD
CONNECTION TO
WATERJET
Figure 8-5. Steering System (Sheet 1 of 2)
8-14
Code Part Number
1 Fitting, Compr., 3/8-inch Tube to Pipe (QTY 4) COML 55510-KIT012477
2 Fitting, Compr., 3/8-inch Pipe to Hose (QTY 4) COML 54250-FIT017557
3 Steering Hose, 8-Feet (QTY 2) 0K9B6 55410HOS028025
4 Helm Pump 75251 HH5272
5 Steering Wheel 8H004 55120-WHE025756
6 Tiller and Tie Bar Kit EM221 45630-JET022050E
7 Steering Cylinder 0K9B6 HC5303
8 Steering Tubes, 20-Feet, SS (QTY 2) COML 13340-TUB021071
9 Steering Hose, 12-Feet (QTY 2) 0K9B6 55410-HOS028027
Figure 8-5. Steering System (Sheet 2 of 2)
8-15
Code Part Number
0 Sea Cock Assembly 06LW3 50M76-2

0 Sea Cock Assembly 06LW3 50M76-3/4
Figure 8-6. Sea Cock
8-16
TRIM PUMP GRD 12P-TPG(2)
TRIM PUMP GRD. 12P-TGP
TRIM PWR SUPPLY 12P-TPS (+)(2) 2-GA PORT ENG PWR SUPPLY 24P-EP(+) 20GA
NEMA BOX AT
TRANSOM
12-RED
TO AFT BILGE SW 12-BLACK TRIM
STBD CORNER - +
PORT CORNER
AT TRANSOM AT TRANSOM
12-WHITE PUMP TRIM PUMP
BLACK - BLACK
BROWN + BROWN
TRIM PUMP GRP 12P-TPG(1)

AFT BILGE
PUMP
STBD ENG. PWR SUPPLY 24P-ES(-) 6-GA
FLOAT SW
PORT ENG. PWR SUPPLY 24P-EP(-) 6-GA
2-GA
PORT TO STBD ENGINE PORT/STBD ENG BATTERY 24P-BP/S(-)
MAIN ENG. BONDING BLOCK JUMPER INVERTER BUS

12V NEG PORT SIDE ENG RM
PORT/STBD ENG. BATTERY 24P-BP/S(+)

WIRE (-) HULL BONDING
SHIP SER BATTERY 24P-BSS(+) 2/0

TRIM TAB
WIRE GRD GRN
24V MAIN ORG
STBD PWR SUPPLY 24P-ES(+) NEG PORT
ENG BONDING 20-GA
2-GA
BATTERY JUMPER
20GA
4/O BLK TYP
BRN YEL
24V MAIN
NEG.
LOCATED ENG. RM SHIP SER BATTERY 24P-BSS(-) 2-GA 10-A 10-A 16-GA
STBD SIDE 16-GA
20-GA 7
STBD BATT. MONITOR PORT BATT
16-GA
ENGINE ROOM DISTRIBUTION PANEL BREAKER MONITOR
LOCATED IN ENG RM JUST FORWARD OF ENG HATCHES BREAKER 16-GA
20GA
16-GA
16-GA
EMERGENCY PORT/STBD BATT.S AND ENGINES
TURN OFF ALL 110V AC MAIN PANELS PARALLEL SW# 1,2,3-ON SW # 4,5 OFF/ON 10-GA
TURN OFF 110V AC INVERTER AND 12V CONVERTER EMERGENCY STARTING BATTS FOR SHIP SERVICE PWR 50-AMP
BEFORE SWITCHING SHIP SERVICE ON-OR-OFF PARALLEL STBD. ENGINE ONLY FROM STBD BATTS ONLY
2-GA 24V FLOCS PUMP
24V SHIP SER 24P-SS(+)(2) TO START SW #1 - OFF SW # 2 - ON SW# 3, 4, 5 - OFF
TO CONSOLE SEE 50-AMP
BILGE PUMP FWD 24P-BLG 8-GA 12V CONVERTER SHIP SERVICE PARALLEL PORT ENGINE PORT E.C.M AT DIST PANEL
SHEET 3 ZONE G-21 24V SHIP STBD ENGINE
SWITCH # 5 SWITCH #4 SWITCH # 2 SWITCH # 1
AND H-21 BILGE PUMP AFT SERVICE SWITCH # 3 50-AMP 2-GA
#1 MAIN # 2 AUX
CONVERTER 2 PWR SUPPLY
50-AMP P ENG TO ENG SW 24P/SS(+)

24P-BLG 20-GA 20-GA
2-GA
8-GA 6-GA STBD E.C.M 2-GA
BATTERY CHARGER
24P-C2PS(+)(2)
12V MAIN
CONVERTER 150-AMP 50-AMP
6-GA LOCATED ENG RM
6-GA TRIM RESET 8-GA
STBD SIDE 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 TRIM PWR SUPPLY 12P-TPS (-)
150-AMP 80-AMP
FWD BILGE 2-GA
PUMP
A
6-G A PORT
50-AMP
6-G C BATTERY
C C C C
MONITOR HARNESS
50-AMP
CHRG
SHIP SERV.
AFT BILGE 24P-SSS/CSS(+) 6-GA BATTERY
PUMP 2-GA 50-AMP
50-AMP ISO. TO STBD ENG SW CHRG
24P-I/SES
CONVERTER 2 PWR SUPPLY 24P-C2PS(+)(2)
24P-SS(+)(1) 2-GA 20-GA PARALLEL TO SHIP SER. SW BATT CHARGER TO PORT ENG
24P-PS/SS(+) 2-GA SW 24P-CPS(+)(1) 20GA PORT ENG PWR SUPPLY 24P-EP(+)
BILGE PWR SUPPLY 24P-BG(+)
6-GA
STBD PWR SUPPLY 24-ES(+) SENG. TO PARALLEL SW.

20-GA 24P-SS/PS(+) 2-GA BATT. CHARGER TO SHIP SER. SW. 24P-CSS(+)(1)
6-GA
6-GA INVER. PWR SUPPLY 24P-IPS(+) 2-GA

CONV 1 12V SHIP SER REMOTE PANEL
BATT CHARGER TO SHIP SER SW.

ISOLATED CONVERTER ISO. TO SHIP SER BUSS 24P-I-SSB
BATT. CHARGER TO PORT ENG.

SUPPLY STBD ENG RM PORT END RM
6-GA REP #5
300A CLASS T FUSE

FLOCS PUMP FLOCS PUMP LOCATED UNDER DECK
12P-C1SS(+) FLOCS PUMPS BEHIND DIST PANEL
SW 24P-CPS (+)
BREAKERS LOCATED
24P-CSS (+)
ISOLATOR
UNDER DECK
DIST PANEL A2 A1
LOCATED STBD 10-GA 3
10-GA FLOCS PUMP PORT 24P-FPP(+)
FWD ENG RM 2 1
FLOCS PUMP STBD 24P-FPS(+)
6-GA
STBD ENG. TO ISO 24P-S(+) 6-GA PORT ENG TO ISO 24P-P(+) TO BATTERY MONITOR
ISOLATED CONVERTER 10-GA
2-GA 2-GA
6-GA
TO INVERTER
6-GA
CONV 2 12V SHIP SER. SUPPLY

12P-C2SS(+)
TRIM PWR SUPPLY 12P-TPS(+)
6-GA 5-GA
2-GA
12V TO MAIN GRD BUS UNDER CONSOLE
12V MAIN NEG 12V TO MAIN HOT BUS UNDER CONSOLE
12V SHIP SER 12P-SSP(+) 2-GA
FO-1. DC Electrical
FP-1/(FP-2 blank)
TO MAIN AC GRD BUS TRANSFER TO
STBD SIDE CONSOLE INVERTER INVERTER TO INVERTER
BREAKER PANEL 110P-IIP
INVERTER REMOTE PANEL

FREEDOM 25
INVERTER DISPLAY STATIC
AND BATT MONITOR
CHARGER TRANSFER AC OUT DISSIPATER
ENG RM DIST PANEL
CASCADE
ENG RM DIST PANEL GRD SYS INTERFACE
DC INPUT MOUNTED TO MAST
REMOTE MAST BONDED TO UNDER SIDE
PHONE LINE HARNESS TO MONITOR OF PILOTHOUSE ROOF
INVER. PWR SUPPLY 24P-IPS(+)(1) ON/OFF
2/0-RED
30-A CHARGER
INVER. PWR SUPPLY 24P-IPS(-)(1) 30-A TRANSFER 30-A RESET BUTTONS
10 GA GREEN
2/0-BLK 30-A ON INVERTER FACE
OUTPUT
12VDC PANEL-A PORT TACT SPEAKER 24P-16

NEMA BOX
12-RED DIMMER
12-BLACK PWR HD-SET RAD-INTERF
12-WHITE PORT
100-A
TACTICAL
MAIN AMPLIFIER
BREAKER SPEAKER
STBD TACT SPEAKER 24P-16
FWD
BILGE
TRIM IND
MANUAL
6-GA PWR HD-SET RAD-INTERF
PUMP
STBD
FLOAT SW GENTEX CRTL SW TACTICAL
CTRL
AMPLIFER
ON CONSOLE SPEAKER
GENTEX GENTEX TERM BLOCK

PORT GENTEX PWR PORT
INTERCOM
CONTROL
MAIN FWD
BOX
OFF BILGE SW
LIGHT
GENTEX GENTEX PWR STBD
6-GA
AUTO GRD
100-A
STBD
MAIN
MAIN INTERCOM
BREAKER
LIGHT OFF CONTROL
ENG RM DIST PANEL NAVNET BOX
AUTO GRD
DISPLAY VHF RADIO
AFT
PANEL C PWR 12P-PPS (+)

BILGE SW
JET ALARM PORT

JET ALARM STBD
TRIM GAUGE
TRIM GAUGE
FUEL GAUGE
24V PANEL - C
TRIM PWR (+)

NMEA
DASH LOCATION
FUEL SENDER
CIRCUIT # 1
12GA 1
BRN FIREBOY AUTOMATIC NO
12GA OEM 2
WHT ENGINE SHUTDOWN NC
12GA HARNESS BLK USE WITH FIREBOY SYSTEMS C
AT TANK 3 ONLY
PRESSURE SW
ENG STOP SW
CIRCUIT # 2
4 NOT TO BE PLACES NO NC
SENDER PORT GENTEX PWR
PORT JET ALARM (+) 5
PRESSURE SW
GROUND
IN BILGE NC
12-GA
RELAY SHOWN ENERGIZED C
STBD JET ALARM (+) 6 NO=NORMALLY OPEN TACT SPEAKERS
C= COMMON
FIREBOY 24P (+) 7
PORT IGN.
NC= NORMALLY CLOSED
2GA
CIRCUIT # 3
NO
ENG STOP SW NC
ENG RM DIST PANEL
TRIM PWR SUPPLY 24P PPS (+) 12GA 8
STBD IGN. NO NC
PORT
12-GA
C C
GEN IGN.
9 NC
CTRL BOX PORT

FUEL GA. 12V CRTL BOX STBD
12V POS BUS
PANEL A PWR 12P-PPS (+) 6-GA FIREBOY TO SPACE RESERVED
PANEL A PANEL B PWR 24P-PPS (+) 8-GA FOR PA COUPLER
PANEL B
12V SHIP SER 12P-SSP (+) PANEL D PWR 24P-PPS(+)
ENG RM DIST PANEL FIREBOY 24P (-)
BILGE SW PWR FWD 24P BSP (-) PANEL C GRD 24P-MCG (-)
BILGE SW PWR AFT 24P BSP (-) 8-GA
PANEL C 8GA
ENG RM DIST PANEL 24V SHIP SER 24P-SS (+) TRIM GAUGE 24P TRIM (-)
BILGE PUMP FWD 24P BSP (-)
PANEL D 8GA PORT JET ALARM (-)
CONTROL SW HARNESS COLORS
24V POS BUS STBD JET ALARM (-) BILGE PUMP AFT 24P BSP (-)
TERMINAL BLOCK GREEN
24V GRD BUS
FOR GENTEX WHITE
BLACK
8-GA BLUE
BILGE SW PWR FWD 24VSP)1)(+)
RED
ENG RM DIST PANEL 24VDC PANEL - D
8-GA PANEL D GRD 24P-MCG (-)
8-GA
8-GA
ORANGE
8-GA
12V GRD BUS

2-GA
SHIP SER GRD 12P-SSG(-) 12V GRD
ENG RM DIST PANEL
PANEL B GRD 12P MCG (-)
PANEL A GRD 12P MCG (-)
8-GA
PANEL D PWR SUPPLY 24P-PPS (+)

6-GA
SHIP SER GRD 24P-SSG (-)

ENG RM DIST PANEL
FO-2. 24Vdc Electrical (Sheet 1 of 3)

FP-3/(FP-4 blank)
12-GA 2-COND 12-GA 2-COND AIR RIDE SEATS
12-GA 2-COND 12-GA 2-COND
12P-2(+) VHF RADIO

RADIO VHF 12P-2 12-GA 2-COND STBD 12P-1(1)(+)
PORT 12P-1(2)(+)
STBD 12P-1 (+)
12P-5(+) 8-GA 2-COND 12-GA 2-COND 12-GA 2-COND
12P-7(+)
12P-4(+) 12P-8(+) PORT 12P-9(+) STBD 12P-1(2)(+)
COMPASS STBD 12P-9(+)
COMPASS 12P +
LIGHTBAR
12-BLACK
10-A 5-A 5-A 12P-10(+) 12-GA 2-COND HAILER SIREN
DIMMER 30-A
LOUD- COCKPIT 12V POWER
SEATS HAILER LTS POINT
PORT 12P-11(+)
PORT 12P-11 12-GA 3-COND
PANEL A PWR 12P-PPS(+) 10-A 5-A 10-A
100-A 10-A DOME LT PILOTHOUSE WHELEN SWITCH
FWD STBD12P-11(+)
VHF STROBE NAV LTS
RADIO LIGHT CABIN LT STBD12P-11(+)
R/W R/W R/W R/W
MAIN 10-A 10-A 5-A 12P-12(+) HAILER
BREAKER 10-A 12-GA 2-COND
ANCHOR DOME LT PILOT TRUNK
SPARE SPARE FANS LT HEAD FAN
R/W
HAILER SPEAKER
FAN FAN HAILER POWER

PIN E + 12-BLACK
12P-13 12-GA 2-COND FROM BREAKER
CENTEX PANEL 12P-4(+)
PIN G - HAILER GROUND GREEN
12P-14 12-GA 2-COND AN/PRC-17 12VDC POWER POINT LIGHTBAR
BLUE
PIN E +
12VDC POS PIN G- 12-WHITE

BUS PANEL B PWR 24P-PPS(+)
10-A 12P-15 DOUBLE LIGHTBAR WIRING DETAIL
10-A REMOTES 12-RED
SPOT. LT 12-BLACK
TACT-RADIO 1 GENTEX 12-GA 2-COND
OEM
HARNESS REV-DIODE SIDE LTS
5-A 12-GA 2- COND COMPT LT
10-A
12-BLACK
TACT-RADIO2 LT LT LT 12-BLACK
SPARE
ANCHOR LIGHT
12-BLACK
12-GA 2-COND WIPER
ROTARY 3SP/T TO WASHER BOTTLE

12-GA 2-COND 12-BLACK WIPER SWITCH
12-GA 2-COND TO WASHER BOTTLE LOW RED 14
24P-1(+)
12-GA 2-COND 14-GA COND 12-BLACK
24P-3(+) 12-GA WASH M
BLACK PARK BLACK GROUND
24P-4(+) 24P-5(+) 12-GA 2-COND 14-GA
24P-7(+) G 3
24P-8(+) 24P-12(+) 12-GA 2-COND 12-BLACK
1 2 FAST
24P-13(+) A/C SUMP FOR
AIR CONDITION BLOWER CONDENSATION RETURN TO PARK SLOW
12-GA POWER BREAKER ON
BLACK PANEL
RETURN TO HIGH GREEN
BREAKER ON PANEL 14-GA
PANEL C PWR 12P-PPS(+) DIMMER
100-A
MAIN
BREAKER
WIPER MOTOR WIRING DETAIL
20-A 10-A 10-A 20-A 10-A

SEARCH PORT HEAT/ SPARE HORN
LT WIPER DEFROSTER 12-BLACK
10-A 10-A 20-A 20-A 10-A

NAVNET
SPARE STBD A/C SPARE SPARE
WIPER BLOWER
12-GA-2-COND
10-A 10-A 20-A 5-A HORN
10-A
ENG ROOM
SPARE SPARE NAVNET DEPTH
LIGHT MOMENTARY SWITCH
24VDC POS
BUS
24P-15(+) 12-GA-2-COND 24V TO 12V

XDR SOUNDER
12-GA 2- COND
12-GA 2-COND
HARNESS
PANEL D PWR 24P-PPS (+)

10-A 10-A
PA COUPLER SPARE TRANSDUCER
AMP
10-A 5-A CABLE IN TO TACT SPEAKERS

SPEAKERS SPARE OVERHEAD
FOR FUTURE
INSTALLATION
OF COUPLER
TACT SPEAKERS
TERMINAL BLOCK

FP-5/(FP-6 blank)
HOT (BLACK) HOT (BLACK)
NEU (WHITE NEU (WHITE
GND (GREEN) GND (GREEN)
30-AMP 110V 60HZ 30-AMP 220V 50HZ

DOCK SIDE SHORE DOCK SIDE SHORE CONNECTION
CONNECTION
SHORE POWER SHORE POWER CABLE
CABLE
SHORE POWER
SHORE POWER
CABLE CONNECTION CABLE CONNECTION
SHORE SIDE SHORE SIDE
SHIP SIDE SHIP SIDE
POWER INLET ELECTRICALLY POWER INLET ELECTRICALLY
INSULATED FROM THE HULL 220P-SS50(G) INSULATED FROM THE HULL
GALVANIC BUS
110P-SS60(1)(G)
LOCATED STBD SHORE MASTER BREAKER
STAIRWELL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 220P-SS50(1)(+)
BEHIND REMOVABLE 110P-SS60(1)(+)
PANEL
30-A
30-A
220P-SS50(1)(N)
110P-SS60(1)(N)
12-GA
6-GA 6-GA
10P-SS60(2)(N)
50HZ 220V AC PANEL
220P-SS50(2)(N)
220P-SS50(2)(+)
110P-SS60(2)(+) 30-A AC CONTROL CENTER
6-GA
6-GA
GALVANIC MONITOR MAIN
LOCATED STBD STAIRWELL
BEHIND REMOVABLE PANEL (-)
2-GA
2-GA
2-GA
(-)
INVERTER/BATTERY
MONITOR
LOCATED PORT SIDE DASH
GALVANIC ISOLATOR 6-GA

60 HZ 110V AC PANEL
BEHIND REMOVABLE PANEL 110P-SS60(3)(+) 30-A AC CONTROL CENTER
REMOTE PANEL 110P-SS60(3)(N)
CLASS T FUSE PORT HARNESS MAIN AC GND BUS
LOCATED STBD STAIRWELL MAIN
SIDE ENG RM FWD GRD TO DOOR FRAME
BEHIND REMOVABLE PANEL
(-)
300-A
(-)
+
24VDC BATTERY -
BANK +
6-GA-3COND
OEM HARNESS TRANSFER
- 110P-TI
GRN ORG
6-GA-3 COND
WHT 110-IIP
INVERTER TO INVERTER BREAKER PANEL 110P-IIP

YEL
BRN 30-A
SEE REF # 2
MAIN
CHARGER TRANSFER AC OUT (-)
INVERTER GND BUS

CASCADE (-)
GRD
TO MAIN AC GND BUS DC INPUT SYS INTERFACE
STBD SIDE CONSOLE REMOTE
+ -
TO INVERTER REMOTE PANEL
ON/OFF
INVERTER 60HZ 110V
2-GA 30-A CHARGER
30-A TRANSFER 30-A RESET BUTTONS AC CONTROL CENTER
2-GA
30-A OUTPUT ON INVERTER FACE

FP-7/(FP-8 blank)
60 HZ 110V AC PANEL
50HZ 220V AC PANEL AC CONTROL CENTER
30-A
AC CONTROL CENTER
30-A
MAIN 20-A
(-N) PORT PORT PREHEAT 110P-3
(-)
PREHEAT 12-GA. 3 -COND
10-A
MAIN (-)
(-N)
SPARE 20-A 20-A
(-N) STBD 12-GA 3-COND
(-)
(-) (-N)
TRANSFER PREHEAT
20-A
20-A
(-) (-N) BATTERY (-)
(-N)
SPARE 10-A
CHARGER 15-A
(-N)
(-)
(-N)
SPARE (-) SPARE
10-A 20-A
(-N)
(-) SPARE
STBD PREHEAT 110P-4

(-N)
(-) SPARE
110P-T1
TO INVERTER
SPARE 220P-4 12-GA. 3-COND
SPARE 220P-5
MAIN AC GND BUS 12-GA. 3-COND
BEHIND REMOVABLE PANEL
INVERTER 60HZ 110V GFCI

AC CONTROL CENTER 12-GA. 3-COND TEST PILOTHOUSE REC 110P-1 CARLON BOX CARLON BOX
RESET
GFCI IN ENG RM IN ENG RM
12-GA. 3-COND TEST
30-A
RESET
ENG ROOM REC 110P-2 WIRES TERMINATED INSIDE BOXES
FOR FUTURE USE
10-A
MAIN PORT ENG PREHEAT
(-N)
(-) SPARE
15-A 10-A
(-N)
(-)
(-N) P HOUSE (-) SPARE
OUTLET
STBD ENG PREHEAT
15-A 10-A
(-N)
(-N) ENG ROOM (-) SPARE
(-)
OUTLET
FO-3. AC Electrical
FP-9/(FP-10 blank)
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
12Vdc Battery Characteristics ................................................................................... T3-7

12Vdc Panel A ............................................................................................................ F3-26
12Vdc Panel A ............................................................................................................ T3-11
12Vdc Panel B ............................................................................................................ F3-27
12Vdc Panel B ............................................................................................................ T3-12
24Vdc Distribution Panel Circuit Breakers ................................................................ T3-8
24Vdc Electrical (Sheet 1 of 3) .................................................................................. FO-2
24Vdc Panel C ............................................................................................................ F3-24
24Vdc Panel C ............................................................................................................ T3-9
24Vdc Panel D ........................................................................................................... F3-25
24Vdc Panel D ........................................................................................................... T3-10
34-Foot Patrol Boat, Exterior Profile .......................................................................... F2-1
34-Foot Patrol Boat, Plan Exterior View .................................................................... F2-2
34-Foot Patrol Boat .................................................................................................... F1-1
34-Foot Patrol Boat, Transom View ........................................................................... F2-3
110Vac/60Hz Shore Power Panel ............................................................................... F3-30
220Vac/60Hz Shore Power Panel .............................................................................. F3-31
Abandoning The Boat ................................................................................................. 7-8

AC Electrical System ................................................................................................. 3-27
AC Control Components ...................................................................................... 3-27.3
AC Distribution .................................................................................................... 3-27.2
AC Equipment ...................................................................................................... 3-27.5
AC Power Sources .............................................................................................. 3-27.1
Other AC Control Components ............................................................................ 3-27.4
AC Electrical .............................................................................................................. FO-3
Acceptable Fluids ....................................................................................................... T4-3
Acknowledgment Received ........................................................................................ F4-53
Add Individual Directory Menu .................................................................................. F4-67
Adding Freshwater Coolant To The Engine ............................................................... 4-4.3
Aft Deck ..................................................................................................................... 2-2.5
Air Conditioning .......................................................................................................... 3-24.2
Air Intake Preheater ................................................................................................... 3-19.2
All Ships Call ............................................................................................................... F4-60
All Ships Call Received .............................................................................................. F4-64
All Ships Call Transmitted ........................................................................................... F4-63
All Ships Call Transmitted ........................................................................................... F4-65
All Ships Call Transmitting .......................................................................................... F4-62
Index-1
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
A - Continued
All Ships Call ............................................................................................................... 4-21.3

Anchor Locker ............................................................................................................ 2-4.1
Anchor, Anchor Rode, And Anchor Line .................................................................... 6-14.1
Anchoring .................................................................................................................. 4-13.9
AquaDrive Coupling ................................................................................................... F3-7
Aquadrives .................................................................................................................. 3-5
Astern Operation ........................................................................................................ 4-13.4
Auto Individual Reply ................................................................................................. F4-70
Auto POS Reply ......................................................................................................... F4-99
Battery Bank Voltage And Gauge Lighting ................................................................ 4-9.1

Battery Bank Selector Switch Settings ....................................................................... T4-5
Beep Beep Display ..................................................................................................... F4-18
Being Towed ............................................................................................................... 4-34.2
Below Deck Compartments ....................................................................................... 2-4
Anchor Locker ..................................................................................................... 2-4.1
Well Deck Storage Compartment ........................................................................ 2-4.2
Bilge Draining ............................................................................................................. 4-14
Bilge Drain Plugs ................................................................................................. 4-14.3
Bilge Drain Valves ................................................................................................ 4-14.1
Bilge Pumps ......................................................................................................... 4-14.2
Electric Bilge Pumps ..................................................................................... 4-14.2.1
Manual Bilge Pump ....................................................................................... 4-14.2.2
Bilge Pumps ................................................................................................................ 6-6
Electrically Operated Bilge Pump ........................................................................ 6-6.1
Bilge Pump Controls ................................................................................................... 3-22.2
Bilge Pump Piping Drainage ....................................................................................... 4-16.3
Bilge Pumping System ................................................................................................ 1-4.7, 4-6
Electric Bilge Pump .............................................................................................. 4-6.1
Hand-Operated Bilge Pump ................................................................................. 4-6.2
Boathook ..................................................................................................................... 3-36.1
Boat APLs .................................................................................................................. T8-1
Boat Handling ............................................................................................................. 4-13
Anchoring ............................................................................................................. 4-13.9
Astern Operation .................................................................................................. 4-13.4
Casting Off ........................................................................................................... 4-13.1
Docking ................................................................................................................ 4-13.6
Mooring ................................................................................................................ 4-13.8
Reverse Bucket Stops .......................................................................................... 4-13.7
Index-2
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
B - Continued
Boat Handling - Continued
Steering ................................................................................................................ 4-13.3
Throttle And Directional Control .......................................................................... 4-13.2
Weigh Anchor ....................................................................................................... 4-13.10
Zero Speed Operation .......................................................................................... 4-13.5
Boat Horn .................................................................................................................. 3-31.3
Boat Operating Trim Conditions ................................................................................. T4-9
Boat Trim Tabs ........................................................................................................... 3-7
Trim Tab Actuators .............................................................................................. 3-7.1
Trim Tab Controls ................................................................................................. 3-7.2
Busy Indicator ............................................................................................................. F4-37
Cabin Interior Equipment And Fittings ........................................................................ 2-3.6

Casting Off ................................................................................................................. 4-13.1
Cathodic Protection .................................................................................................... 5-3
Change Oil .................................................................................................................. 6-4
Changing Engine Lube Oil .................................................................................... 6-4.1
Changing Marine Gear Lube Oil .......................................................................... 6-4.2
Channel Name Change ............................................................................................... 4-11.11
Channel Name Menu .................................................................................................. F4-22
Channel Name SHIP-SHIP ........................................................................................ F4-23
Channel Name Vertex ................................................................................................ F4-24
Checking The Lube Oil In The Marine Gear ............................................................. 4-4.2
Cold Weather Shutdown ............................................................................................. 4-24
Communication Console ............................................................................................. 2-3.4
Compass Display ........................................................................................................ F4-116
Communication Equipment ......................................................................................... 3-30
VHF Radio ........................................................................................................... 3-30.1
Communication ........................................................................................................... 6-9
VHF Radio Cleaning ............................................................................................ 6-9.1
VHF Radio Inspection .......................................................................................... 6-9.2
Communication And Navigation Equipment ............................................................... 4-19
Communication, Navigation, And Force Protection (Security) System ...................... 1-4.11
Compass ..................................................................................................................... 3-31.2
Connections ................................................................................................................ 3-25.2
Console Instruments And Controls ............................................................................. 6-12.2
Construction Drawings ............................................................................................... T1-3
Control Console Instruments and Controls ................................................................. F3-6
Control Console .......................................................................................................... 2-3.3
Index-3
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
C - Continued
Control Panel .............................................................................................................. 3-24.1
Controls ....................................................................................................................... 3-21.4
Coolant Mixtures ......................................................................................................... T4-12
Coolant System Flow .................................................................................................. 3-16.2
Coolant System Performance Data ............................................................................ T3-5
Cooling Operation ....................................................................................................... 4-17.1
Corrosion Protection ................................................................................................... 6-8
Engine Zinc Plugs ................................................................................................. 6-8.3
Hull Zincs ............................................................................................................. 6-8.1
Waterjet Drive ...................................................................................................... 6-8.2
Crew Cabin Exterior Arrangement ............................................................................. 2-2.4
Crew Cabin Interior .................................................................................................... 2-3.1
Crew Seating .............................................................................................................. 2-3.5
Cummins Diesel Engine QSB5.9M ............................................................................ F3-2
Damage Control And Safety Equipment ..................................................................... 3-33

Damage Control .......................................................................................................... 7-5
Dewatering ........................................................................................................... 7-5.2
Hull Damage And Emergency Repairs ................................................................ 7-5.1
DC Electrical .............................................................................................................. FO-1
DC Electrical System ................................................................................................. 3-26
Control Components ............................................................................................. 3-26.3
Equipment ............................................................................................................. 3-26.4
Ground System ..................................................................................................... 3-26.5
Power Distribution ................................................................................................ 3-26.2
Power Sources ..................................................................................................... 3-26.1
Dehumidifying Operation ............................................................................................ 4-17.3
Depreservation And Reactivation ............................................................................... 8-9.3
Dewatering ................................................................................................................. 3-35
Dewatering With Seawater Pump .............................................................................. F7-1
Diesel View Data Display Screen .............................................................................. F4-29
Diesel View Display Home Page ............................................................................... F4-28
Diesel View Display Start-Up Screens ...................................................................... F4-27
Diesel View Display Unit ........................................................................................... 6-12.1
Diesel View Engine Data Screens .............................................................................. F4-32
Diesel View Engine RPM/Speed Screen ................................................................... F4-30
Diesel View Major Fault Troubleshooting ................................................................... T4-14
Diesel View Minor Fault Troubleshooting ................................................................... T4-15
Diesel View Peak Speed at RPM Screen .................................................................. F4-31
Index-4
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
D - Continued
Diesel View Vessel Status Screen .............................................................................. F4-33

Digital Selective Calling .............................................................................................. 4-21
Receiving An All Ships Call ........................................................................... 4-21.3.2
Transmitting An All Ships Call ....................................................................... 4-21.3.1
DSC Distress Call ................................................................................................ 4-21.2
Cancel A DSC Distress Call .......................................................................... 4-21.2.3
Receiving A DSC Distress Call ..................................................................... 4-21.2.4
Transmitting A DSC Distress Call With Nature Of Distress Call .................. 4-21.2.2
Transmitting A DSC Distress Call ................................................................. 4-21.2.1
Group Call ............................................................................................................ 4-21.5
Manual Calling ............................................................................................... 4-21.5.2.2
Preprogramming Call ..................................................................................... 4-21.5.2.1
Receiving A Group Call ................................................................................. 4-21.5.3
Setting Up A Group Call ................................................................................ 4-21.5.1
Transmitting A Group Call .............................................................................. 4-21.5.2
Individual Call ....................................................................................................... 4-21.4
Manual Calling ............................................................................................... 4-21.4.4.2
Preprogramming Call ..................................................................................... 4-21.4.4.1
Receiving An Individual Call .......................................................................... 4-21.4.5
Setting Up Individual Reply ........................................................................... 4-21.4.2
Setting Up The Individual/Group Call Ringer ................................................ 4-21.4.3
Setting Up The Individual/Position Call Directory ......................................... 4-21.4.1
Setup Up The Call Waiting Function ............................................................. 4-21.4.6
Transmitting An Individual Call ...................................................................... 4-21.4.4
Magnetic Compass ............................................................................................... 4-21.11
Manual Inputting Of The GPS Location (Lat/Long) ............................................ 4-21.8
Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) .......................................................... 4-21.1
MMSI ............................................................................................................ 4-21.1.1
Programming The MMSI .............................................................................. 4-21.1.2
NavNet Setup And Operation .............................................................................. 4-21.10
Automatic Operation ..................................................................................... 4-21.10.11
Compass Display Screen ............................................................................... 4-21.10.3
Depth Sounder Displays ................................................................................ 4-21.10.10
Highway Display Screen ............................................................................... 4-21.10.4
Manual Operation .......................................................................................... 4-21.10.12
Nav Data Display .......................................................................................... 4-21.10.5
Network Sounder ........................................................................................... 4-21.10.8
Plotter Alarms ................................................................................................ 4-21.10.7
Plotter Display Operation .............................................................................. 4-21.10.6
Plotter Display ............................................................................................... 4-21.10.2
Index-5
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
D - Continued
Digital Selective Calling - Continued

NavNet Setup And Operation - Continued
Radar Picture ................................................................................................. 4-21.10.1
Remote Control .............................................................................................. 4-21.10.13
Sounder Display Data .................................................................................... 4-21.10.9
Position Request ................................................................................................... 4-21.6
Automatically Reply ....................................................................................... 4-21.6.3.1
Manual Request ............................................................................................. 4-21.6.2.2
Manually Reply .............................................................................................. 4-21.6.3.2
Position Request Ringer ................................................................................. 4-21.6.1.1
Preprogramming Request .............................................................................. 4-21.6.2.1
Receiving A Position Request ........................................................................ 4-21.6.3
Setting Up Position Reply .............................................................................. 4-21.6.1
Transmitting A Position Request To Another Vessel ..................................... 4-21.6.2
Position Send ........................................................................................................ 4-21.7
Manual Calling ............................................................................................... 4-21.7.2.2
Preprogrammable Calling .............................................................................. 4-21.7.2.1
Receiving A DSC Position Send Call ............................................................. 4-21.7.3
Setting Up A Position Send Ringer ................................................................ 4-21.7.1
Transmitting A DSC Position Send Call ......................................................... 4-21.7.2
Searchlight ............................................................................................................ 4-21.14
Siren/PA ............................................................................................................... 4-21.9
Siren/PA ......................................................................................................... 4-21.9.1
Siren/PA System ................................................................................................... 4-21.12
Strobe Light Bar ................................................................................................... 4-21.13
Dimmer Contrast ........................................................................................................ F4-3
Dimmer Menu ............................................................................................................. F4-2
Discharge Fittings ....................................................................................................... 3-21.3
Distress Call Cancel ................................................................................................... F4-55
Distress Call ................................................................................................................ 4-36
Distress Menu ............................................................................................................. F4-49
Distress Signal Display ............................................................................................... F4-50
Distress Signal Sent Display ....................................................................................... F4-51
Distress Undesignate .................................................................................................. F4-58
Docking By Crane ...................................................................................................... 8-4
Docking ....................................................................................................................... 4-13.6
Drain The Fuel Filter/Water Separator ....................................................................... 4-3.4.1
Drainage ..................................................................................................................... 3-22.4
Drive Shaft .................................................................................................................. 6-16
Drive System Check ................................................................................................... 4-12.2
DSC Acknowledgment ............................................................................................... F4-52
Index-6
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
D - Continued
DSC Beep .................................................................................................................. F4-73, F4-100

DSC Group Menu ....................................................................................................... F4-91
DSC Operation Menu ................................................................................................. F4-59, F4-76
DSC SETUP Menu .................................................................................................... F4-47
Dual Watch ................................................................................................................. F4-39
Electric Bilge Pump .................................................................................................... 3-22.1, 4-6.1, F3-18

Electric Bilge Pump Controls ...................................................................................... F3-19
Electrical Label Plates And Markings ........................................................................ 3-25.3
Electrical Systems ....................................................................................................... 1-4.10, 4-9
Battery Bank Voltage And Gauge Lighting .......................................................... 4-9.1
Navigation Lights And Horn ................................................................................. 4-9.2
Shore Power ......................................................................................................... 4-9.3
Electronics And Force Protection (Security) Package ............................................... 4-10
Emergency Signaling ................................................................................................... 7-9
Emergency Underway Procedures ............................................................................ 4-26
Emptying The Holding Tank ....................................................................................... 4-22.4
Engine And Console Instruments ................................................................................ 6-12
Console Instruments And Controls ....................................................................... 6-12.2
Console Instruments And Controls Cleaning ................................................. 6-12.2.1
Console Instruments And Controls Inspection ............................................... 6-12.2.2
Diesel View Display Unit ..................................................................................... 6-12.1
Diesel View Display Unit Cleaning ............................................................... 6-12.1.1
Diesel View Display Unit Inspection ............................................................. 6-12.1.2
Engine Combustion Air And Exhaust Systems ........................................................... 1-4.5
Engine Combustion Air Intake System ....................................................................... 3-19
Air Intake Preheater ............................................................................................ 3-19.2
Intake System Operation ...................................................................................... 3-19.1
Engine Compartment Fire Suppression System .......................................................... F3-37
Engine Compartment Fire Suppression System .......................................................... 3-34.1
Engine Coolant And Preheater Systems ..................................................................... 1-4.3
Engine Coolant System ............................................................................................... 3-16.1
Engine Cooling Systems Flow Diagram ...................................................................... F3-14
Engine Exhaust System .............................................................................................. 3-20
Engine Failure ............................................................................................................. 4-28
One Engine Breakdown ....................................................................................... 4-28.1
Two Engine Failure .............................................................................................. 4-28.2
Engine Fault Information ............................................................................................. 4-38
Engine Fuel Supply Diagram ....................................................................................... F3-13
Index-7
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
E - Continued
Engine Fuel Supply ...................................................................................................... 3-13
Fuel Injection Pump .............................................................................................. 3-13.2
Fuel Transfer Pump .............................................................................................. 3-13.1
Engine Instrument and Control Panel ......................................................................... F3-3
Engine Instrument And Control Panels ....................................................................... 3-3.2
Engine Lube Oil .......................................................................................................... 4-4.1
Engine, Marine Gear, And Reverse Bucket Controls ................................................. 3-3.1
Engine Starting ............................................................................................................ 4-12.1
Engine/Waterjet Failure .............................................................................................. 4-32
Exterior Arrangement ................................................................................................. 2-2
Aft Deck .............................................................................................................. 2-2.5
Crew Cabin Exterior Arrangement ...................................................................... 2-2.4
Foredeck ............................................................................................................... 2-2.1
Hull ....................................................................................................................... 2-2.7
Transom ................................................................................................................ 2-2.6
Walkways ............................................................................................................. 2-2.3
Well Deck ............................................................................................................. 2-2.2
External Waterjet Component Reinstallation .............................................................. 6-19.4
External Waterjet Component Removal ..................................................................... 6-19.1
Fast Lube Oil Change System .................................................................................... 1-4.6, F3-17

Fire Fighting ................................................................................................................ 3-34, 7-2
Engine Compartment Fire Suppression System ................................................... 3-34.1
Installed Fire Extinguisher .................................................................................... 7-2.3
Portable Fire Extinguishers .................................................................................. 3-34.2, 7-2.2
Automatic System Discharge ........................................................................ 7-2.3.1
System Override ............................................................................................ 7-2.3.2
FLOCS Pump ............................................................................................................. F8-4
Fluid Level Requirements ........................................................................................... T4-2
Fluid Levels ................................................................................................................. 4-4
Adding Freshwater Coolant To The Engine ......................................................... 4-4.3
Checking The Lube Oil In The Marine Gear ....................................................... 4-4.2
Engine Lube Oil .................................................................................................... 4-4.1
Adding Lube Oil To The Engine .................................................................... 4-4.1.2
Checking The Oil In The Engine ................................................................... 4-4.1.1
Force Protection (Security) Package ......................................................................... 6-11
Searchlight ............................................................................................................ 6-11.2
Searchlight Bulb Replacement ....................................................................... 6-11.2.1
Searchlight Cleaning ...................................................................................... 6-11.2.2
Index-8
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
F - Continued
Force Protection (Security) Package - Continued
Searchlight - Continued
Searchlight Inspection .................................................................................... 6-11.2.3
Siren/PA ............................................................................................................... 6-11.1
Siren/PA Control Head Cleaning ................................................................... 6-11.1.1
Siren/PA Control Head Inspection ................................................................. 6-11.1.2
Siren/PA Speaker Inspection ......................................................................... 6-11.1.3
Siren/PA Speaker Inspection ......................................................................... 6-11.1.4
Force Protection (Security) Package ......................................................................... 3-32
Searchlight ............................................................................................................ 3-32.3
Siren/PA ............................................................................................................... 3-32.2
Strobe Lightbar ..................................................................................................... 3-32.1
Foredeck ..................................................................................................................... 2-2.1
Forward Crew Cabin .................................................................................................. 2-3.7
Fuel Cetane Number ................................................................................................... 3-15.2
Fuel Filter And Water Removal .................................................................................. 3-11
Fuel Filter/Water Separator ........................................................................................ 3-12, F3-2
Engine Fuel Filter ................................................................................................. 3-12.1
Fuel Lubricity Additive ................................................................................................ T3-3
Fuel Lubricity And Viscosity ....................................................................................... 3-15.1
Fuel Return System .................................................................................................... 3-14
Fuel Block Connection ......................................................................................... 3-14.1
Fuel Oil Cooler ..................................................................................................... 3-14.2
Fuel Stripping Pump .................................................................................................... 3-10, F3-11
Fuel System Characteristics ....................................................................................... T3-2
Fuel System ................................................................................................................ 1-4.2, 4-3, 6-3
Engine-Mounted Fuel Filter Replacement ............................................................ 6-3.2
Fuel Filter/Water Separator .................................................................................. 6-3.1
Fuel Filter/Water Separator Filter Element Replacement .............................. 6-3.1.2
Purging Excess Water From Separator ......................................................... 6-3.1.1
Fuel Filter/Water Separator .................................................................................. 4-3.4
Drain The Fuel Filter/Water Separator .......................................................... 4-3.4.1
Fuel Element Inspection ................................................................................. 4-3.4.2
Fuel Filling Procedure ........................................................................................... 4-3.3
Fuel Tank Stripping ............................................................................................... 6-3.3
Fuel Tank Stripping ............................................................................................... 4-3.2
Fuel Tank .............................................................................................................. 4-3.1
Fuel System Contamination ........................................................................................ 4-29
Fuel System Diagram ................................................................................................. F3-10
Fuel Tank .................................................................................................................. 3-9
Full-Screen Nav Data Display .................................................................................... F4-118
Index-9
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
F - Continued
Full-Screen Plotter Display ......................................................................................... F4-115
General For VHF Radio, Radar Display, And Siren/PA System ................................ 6-17
Radar Display Reinstallation ................................................................................ 6-17.4
Radar Display Removal ....................................................................................... 6-17.3
Siren/PA System Control Head Reinstallation ...................................................... 6-17.6
Siren/PA System Control Head Removal ............................................................. 6-17.5
VHF Radio Reinstallation ..................................................................................... 6-17.2
VHF Radio Removal ............................................................................................ 6-17.1
Group Call .................................................................................................................. 4-21.5
Group Call Standard .................................................................................................... F4-94
Group Call Transmitting .............................................................................................. F4-93
Group Directory Menu .............................................................................................. F4-88
Group Directory Add .................................................................................................. F4-89
Group POS Send ......................................................................................................... F4-108
Group POS Send ......................................................................................................... F4-110
Half-Screen Nav Data Display .................................................................................. F4-119

Hand-Operated Bilge Pump ....................................................................................... 4-6.2
Heater/Defroster Control Panel ................................................................................. F4-36
Heater/Defroster System Diagram ............................................................................ F3-23
Heater/Defroster ........................................................................................................ 3-24.5
Heating, Ventilation, And Air Conditioning System ..................................................... 1-4.9
Heating/Defrosting Operation ..................................................................................... 4-18
Heating ....................................................................................................................... 3-24.3
Helm Filling Unit ......................................................................................................... F6-1
Helm Unit .................................................................................................................. 3-23.1
Highway Display ......................................................................................................... F4-117
Hoisting Diagram, Plan View ..................................................................................... F8-2
Hoisting Diagram, Profile View .................................................................................. F8-1
Hoisting Sling Description ........................................................................................... 8-2
Hoisting ....................................................................................................................... 8-3
Hull Construction ........................................................................................................ 5-1
Hull Damage And Emergency Repairs ...................................................................... 7-5.1
Hull Structure Features ............................................................................................... 1-3
Index-10
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
H - Continued
Hull .............................................................................................................................. 2-2.7

HVAC System Control Panel ..................................................................................... F4-35
HVAC System Diagram ............................................................................................. F3-22
HVAC System Operation ........................................................................................... 4-17
Cooling Operation ................................................................................................. 4-17.1
Dehumidifying Operation ..................................................................................... 4-17.3
Heating Operation ................................................................................................ 4-17.2
Ventilating Operation ............................................................................................ 4-17.4
Illustrated Parts Breakdown ....................................................................................... 8-11

Individual Acknowledgment Able ............................................................................... F4-87
Individual Acknowledgment ........................................................................................ F4-86
Individual Call Transmit .............................................................................................. F4-84
Individual Call Received ............................................................................................. F4-85
Individual Call ............................................................................................................. 4-21.4
Individual Directory Manual ....................................................................................... F4-77
Individual Directory Menu .......................................................................................... F4-66
Individual Directory Vertex ......................................................................................... F4-78
Individual DSC Beep .................................................................................................. F4-74
Individual OFF ............................................................................................................ F4-75
Individual POS Request .............................................................................................. F4-103
Individual Reply .......................................................................................................... F4-69
Individual Ring Default ............................................................................................... F4-72
Individual Ring ............................................................................................................ F4-71
Inflatable Collar .......................................................................................................... 4-8
Intake System Operation ............................................................................................ 3-19.1
Interior Arrangement .................................................................................................. 2-3
Cabin Interior Equipment And Fittings ................................................................. 2-3.6
Communication Console ....................................................................................... 2-3.4
Control Console .................................................................................................... 2-3.3
Crew Cabin Interior ............................................................................................. 2-3.1
Crew Seating ........................................................................................................ 2-3.5
Forward Crew Cabin ........................................................................................... 2-3.7
Upper Section ....................................................................................................... 2-3.2
Intership Channel ........................................................................................................ F4-79
Inverter 110Vac Load Panel ....................................................................................... F3-32
Inverter 110Vac Panel ................................................................................................ T3-16
Index-11
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
Key Beep .................................................................................................................... 4-11.9

Key Beep On/Off ....................................................................................................... F4-19
Label Plates And Markings ........................................................................................ 1-5

Lamp Adjusting ........................................................................................................... 4-11.1
Launching By Trailer .................................................................................................. 8-5
Layup Procedures ....................................................................................................... 8-8
LCD Cleaning ............................................................................................................. 6-10.3
LCD Contrast ............................................................................................................. 4-11.2
Lifesaving Equipment ................................................................................................. 7-3
Link 2000 Display ....................................................................................................... F3-28
Link 2000 Display Functions ....................................................................................... T3-13
List of Illustrated Parts Breakdown ............................................................................ T8-2
Local Mode Display .................................................................................................... F4-8
Loss Of Electrical Power ........................................................................................... 7-6
Loss Of Engine-Driven Alternator .............................................................................. 7-7
Low Ambient Operations Acceptable Engine Fuel ..................................................... T3-4
Magnetic Compass ..................................................................................................... 4-11.13

Magnetic Compass ..................................................................................................... 4-21.11
Magnetic Display ........................................................................................................ F4-10
Magnetic ON Display ................................................................................................. F4-11
Man Overboard (MOB) Function ............................................................................... 4-35
Manual Bilge Pump .................................................................................................... F3-20
Manual Bilge Pump .................................................................................................... 3-22.3, 4-33
Manual Inputting Of The GPS Location (Lat/Long) .................................................. 4-21.8
Manual MMSI Input ................................................................................................... F4-82
Marine Gear ................................................................................................................ 3-4
Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) ................................................................. 4-21.1
Mark Shapes ............................................................................................................... F4-120
Memory Scan Indication ............................................................................................. F4-42
Metric Conversion Factors ......................................................................................... 1-8, T1-5
Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................. 6-14
Anchor, Anchor Rode, And Anchor Line ............................................................. 6-14.1
Inflatable Hybrid Collar ........................................................................................ 6-14.2
Cleaning Collar Valves ................................................................................... 6-14.2.3
Index-12
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
M - Continued
Miscellaneous - Continued
Inflatable Hybrid Collar - Continued
Cleaning The Collar ....................................................................................... 6-14.2.1
Inspecting The Collar ..................................................................................... 6-14.2.2
Waterjet Drive ...................................................................................................... 6-14.3
MMSI Number Entry ................................................................................................. F4-95
MMSI Number Menu ................................................................................................. F4-68
MMSI Number No Reply ........................................................................................... F4-105
MMSI USER .............................................................................................................. F4-48
MOB Function ............................................................................................................ F4-123
Mooring ....................................................................................................................... 4-13.8
M-SCAN Menu .......................................................................................................... F4-43
Name and MMSI Entry .............................................................................................. F4-90

Nature Of Distress ..................................................................................................... F4-54
NavNet Display Control Panel ................................................................................... F4-26
NavNet Display Unit .................................................................................................. F4-25
Navigation .................................................................................................................. 6-10
LCD Cleaning ...................................................................................................... 6-10.3
Radar Display Inspection ..................................................................................... 6-10.2
Radar Display Unit ............................................................................................... 6-10.1
Cleaning The Radar Display .......................................................................... 6-10.1.1
Navigation Equipment ................................................................................................. 3-31
Boat Horn ............................................................................................................. 3-31.3
Compass ............................................................................................................... 3-31.2
Navigation Lights ................................................................................................. 3-31.4
Radar .................................................................................................................. 3-31.1
Navigation Lights And Horn ....................................................................................... 4-9.2
NavNet Setup And Operation ..................................................................................... 4-21.10
NavNet Display Unit .................................................................................................. 4-11.12
No Position Display .................................................................................................... F4-46
Normal Shutdown ....................................................................................................... 4-23
Battery Charging .................................................................................................. 4-23.6
Bilge System Shutdown ........................................................................................ 4-23.3
Charging Batteries From A 110Vac Source ......................................................... 4-23.6.1
Charging The Batteries From A 220Vac Source .................................................. 4-23.6.2
Communication And Navigation Equipment Shutdown (Radar, GPS,
VHF Radio, Siren/PA) ................................................................................... 4-23.4
Index-13
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
N - Continued
Normal Shutdown - Continued
Electrical System Shutdown ................................................................................. 4-23.5
Fuel System Shutdown ......................................................................................... 4-23.2
Propulsion Engine Shutdown ................................................................................ 4-23.1
Normal Starting Procedures ....................................................................................... 4-12
Drive System Check ............................................................................................ 4-12.2
Engine Starting ..................................................................................................... 4-12.1
Starting The Diesel View ..................................................................................... 4-12.3
Diesel View Home Page ............................................................................... 4-12.3.1
Data Display Screen ...................................................................................... 4-12.3.2
Propulsion Data Screens ............................................................................... 4-12.3.3
Vessel Data Screen ....................................................................................... 4-12.3.4
System Directory ........................................................................................... 4-12.3.5
SmartCraft Tachometer Display .......................................................................... 4-12.4
Alarms And Warnings .................................................................................... 4-12.4.3
Controls .......................................................................................................... 4-12.4.2
Displays ......................................................................................................... 4-12.4.1
Onboard Technical Documentation ............................................................................ 1-6

Operational Systems ................................................................................................... 1-4
Bilge Pumping System .......................................................................................... 1-4.7
Communication, Navigation, And Force Protection (Security) System ................ 1-4.11
Electrical Systems ................................................................................................ 1-4.10
24Vdc-12vdc Electrical System ..................................................................... 1-4.10.1
120Vac Electrical System .............................................................................. 1-4.10.2
220Vac Electrical System .............................................................................. 1-4.10.3
Engine Combustion Air And Exhaust Systems ..................................................... 1-4.5
Engine Coolant And Preheater Systems .............................................................. 1-4.3
Fast Lube Oil Change System .............................................................................. 1-4.6
Fuel System .......................................................................................................... 1-4.2
Heating, Ventilation, And Air Conditioning System .............................................. 1-4.9
Propulsion System ................................................................................................ 1-4.1
Sanitation System ........................................................................................... 1-4.12
Seawater Cooling System .............................................................................. 1-4.4
Steering System ............................................................................................. 1-4.8
Trailer ............................................................................................................. 1-4.13
Other AC Control Components .................................................................................. 3-27.4
Other Documentation ................................................................................................. 1-7
Index-14
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
P
Painting ....................................................................................................................... 5-2
Paint Specifications .............................................................................................. 5-2.2
Surface Preparation ............................................................................................. 5-2.1
Plotter Function Soft Keys .......................................................................................... T4-8
Portable Dewatering Pump ........................................................................................ 4-30
Portable Fire Extinguishers ......................................................................................... 3-34.2
POS Input ................................................................................................................... F4-112
POS Reply .................................................................................................................. F4-98
POS Request .............................................................................................................. F4-101
POS Request Off ....................................................................................................... F4-102
POS Request Received .............................................................................................. F4-106
POS Send OFF ........................................................................................................... F4-109
POS Send ................................................................................................................... F4-111
Position Display .......................................................................................................... F4-45
Position Request ......................................................................................................... 4-21.6
Preoperational Checklist ............................................................................................. T4-1
Preoperational Checkout ............................................................................................. 4-2
Preparing Toilet For Operation ................................................................................... 4-22.2
Preservation For Long-Term Storage ......................................................................... 8-9.2
Preservation For Short-Term Storage ......................................................................... 8-9.1
Pressure, Temperatures, and Fluid Requirements ...................................................... T4-4
Principal Characteristics ............................................................................................. 1-2
Priority Channel Set .................................................................................................... 4-11.6
Principal Characteristics ............................................................................................. T1-1
Priority Channel .......................................................................................................... F4-12
Priority Channel Selection ........................................................................................... F4-13
Priority or Memory Menu ........................................................................................... F4-41
Priority Scan Type ...................................................................................................... F4-15
Propulsion Engine, Marine Gear, And Drive Shaft ..................................................... 6-18
Propulsion Engine, Marine Gear, And Drive Shaft Installation ............................ 6-18.2
Propulsion Engine, Marine Gear, And Drive Shaft Removal ............................... 6-18.1
Propulsion Engine ....................................................................................................... 3-3
Engine Instrument And Control Panels ................................................................ 3-3.2
Engine, Marine Gear, And Reverse Bucket Controls ........................................... 3-3.1
Propulsion Engine Starting, Instrumentation, And Alarms .......................................... 3-28
Propulsion System Characteristics .............................................................................. T3-1
Propulsion System ....................................................................................................... 1-4.1, F3-1
P-SCAN Menu ........................................................................................................... F4-44
Pump ........................................................................................................................... 3-21.1
Index-15
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
R
Radar Display ............................................................................................................. F4-114
Radar Display Inspection ............................................................................................ 6-10.2
Radar Display Reinstallation ....................................................................................... 6-17.4
Radar Display Removal .............................................................................................. 6-17.3
Radar Display Unit ..................................................................................................... 6-10.1
Radar Function Soft Keys .......................................................................................... T4-7
Radar .......................................................................................................................... 3-31.1
Radio Setup ................................................................................................................. 4-11, F4-1
Channel Name Change ........................................................................................ 4-11.11
Enter Knob .................................................................................................... 4-11.12.3
Cursor Pad ..................................................................................................... 4-11.12.4
Chart Plot ....................................................................................................... 4-11.12.5
Remote Controller .......................................................................................... 4-11.12.6
Key Beep ............................................................................................................. 4-11.9
Lamp Adjusting .................................................................................................... 4-11.1
LCD Contrast ....................................................................................................... 4-11.2
Magnetic Compass ............................................................................................... 4-11.13
NavNet Display Unit ............................................................................................ 4-11.12
Keypad .......................................................................................................... 4-11.12.1
Soft Keys ....................................................................................................... 4-11.12.2
Onboard Equipment ....................................................................................... 4-11.17
Priority Channel Set ............................................................................................. 4-11.6
Scan Resume Time .............................................................................................. 4-11.8
Scan Type ............................................................................................................. 4-11.7
Searchlight ............................................................................................................ 4-11.16
Siren/PA System ................................................................................................... 4-11.14
Strobe Light Bar ................................................................................................... 4-11.15
Time Location ....................................................................................................... 4-11.4
Time Offset .......................................................................................................... 4-11.3
WX Alert .............................................................................................................. 4-11.10
Received Distress Acknowledgment .......................................................................... F4-56
Received Group Routine ............................................................................................. F4-97
Recommended Fuel .................................................................................................... 3-15
Fuel Cetane Number ............................................................................................ 3-15.2
Fuel Lubricity And Viscosity ................................................................................ 3-15.1
Low Temperature Operation ................................................................................ 3-15.3
Recommended Diesel Fuel .................................................................................. 3-15.4
Recovery By Trailer ................................................................................................... 8-6
Remote Control ........................................................................................................... F4-122
Remote Control Functions .......................................................................................... T4-11
Reverse Bucket Stops ................................................................................................ 4-13.7
Index-16
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
R - Continued
Reversing Bucket Hydraulic Failure ........................................................................... 4-27
Maneuvering With A Defective Reversing Bucket .............................................. 4-27.2
Rough Weather ........................................................................................................... 7-4
Safety Equipment ........................................................................................................ 3-36

Boathook .............................................................................................................. 3-36.1
Ring Buoy ............................................................................................................. 3-36.2
Safety Precautions ...................................................................................................... 1-9, 3-25.1
Safety .......................................................................................................................... 6-13
Engine Compartment Fire Suppression System ................................................... 6-13.1
Fire Extinguishers ................................................................................................. 6-13.2
Sanitation System Operation ....................................................................................... 4-22
Emptying The Holding Tank ................................................................................. 4-22.4
Preparing Toilet For Operation ............................................................................. 4-22.2
Toilet Operation .................................................................................................... 4-22.3
Sanitation System ........................................................................................................ 1-4.12
Scan Resume .............................................................................................................. F4-16
Scan Resume Off ....................................................................................................... F4-17
Scan Resume Time ..................................................................................................... 4-11.8
Scan Type ................................................................................................................... 4-11.7, F4-14, F4-40
Screen Type and Display Screens .............................................................................. T4-6
Sea Cock ..................................................................................................................... F8-6
Searchlight .................................................................................................................. 3-32.3, 4-11.16,
4-21.14
Seawater Cooling System ........................................................................................... 1-4.4
Seawater Strainer ....................................................................................................... F3-15, F8-3
Seawater Suction System ........................................................................................... F3-16
Seawater System Flow ............................................................................................... 3-17.2
Seawater System ........................................................................................................ 3-17.1, 4-5
Seawater Strainer ................................................................................................. 4-5.1
Seawater Supply ................................................................................................... 4-5.2
Select Channel ............................................................................................................ F4-96
Selecting An Operating Channel ................................................................................. F4-83
Send Individual Call .................................................................................................... F4-80
Send Individual Vertex Call ......................................................................................... F4-81
Shipping ....................................................................................................................... 8-7
Shore Master Breaker Panel ...................................................................................... F3-29
Shore Power Panel 110V/60Hz .................................................................................. T3-14
Shore Power Panel 220V/60Hz .................................................................................. T3-15
Index-17
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
S - Continued
Single Frequency Depth Display ................................................................................. F4-121
Siren/PA Control Panel ............................................................................................... F3-35
Siren/PA Fault Diagnostics ......................................................................................... T4-10
Siren/PA Speaker ........................................................................................................ F3-36
Siren/PA System Control Head Reinstallation ............................................................ 6-17.6
Siren/PA System Control Head Removal ................................................................... 6-17.5
Siren/PA System ......................................................................................................... 4-11.14
Siren/PA ...................................................................................................................... 3-32.2, 4-21.9
SmartCraft Diesel View Display ................................................................................ F3-5
SmartCraft Tachometer .............................................................................................. F3-4
SmartCraft Tachometer .............................................................................................. F4-34
Soil Removal From Aluminum .................................................................................... 5-5
Standard Group Call .................................................................................................... F4-92
Starting The Diesel View ............................................................................................ 4-12.3
Steering System .......................................................................................................... 1-4.8, 4-7, 6-7
Filling .................................................................................................................... 6-7.1
Final System Check And Purging ......................................................................... 6-7.3
Purging ................................................................................................................. 6-7.2
Steering Cylinder ......................................................................................................... 3-23.2
Steering Linkage ......................................................................................................... 3-23.3
Steering System Characteristics ................................................................................. T3-6
Steering System Diagram ........................................................................................... F3-21, F8-5
Storage ....................................................................................................................... 8-9
Depreservation And Reactivation ........................................................................ 8-9.3
Preservation For Long-Term Storage .................................................................. 8-9.2
Preservation For Short-Term Storage .................................................................. 8-9.1
Strobe Light Bar ......................................................................................................... 4-11.15
Strobe Lightbar ........................................................................................................... 3-32.1, F3-34
Subfreezing Conditions ................................................................................................ 4-16, 4-25
Bilge Pump Piping Drainage ................................................................................ 4-16.3
Engine Coolant System Drainage ......................................................................... 4-16.2
Engine Seawater Draining .................................................................................... 4-16.1
Technical Authorities ................................................................................................... T1-4

Technical Manuals ...................................................................................................... T1-2
Time Display ............................................................................................................... F4-6
Time Display UTC ...................................................................................................... F4-7
Time Location ............................................................................................................. 4-11.4
Time Offset Display .................................................................................................... F4-5
Index-18
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
T - Continued
Time Offset ................................................................................................................. 4-11.3

Time Set ...................................................................................................................... F4-4
Toilet Operation .......................................................................................................... 4-22.3
Towing Operations ...................................................................................................... 4-31, 4-34
Being Towed ........................................................................................................ 4-34.2
Towing Another Boat ........................................................................................... 4-34.1
Trailer Characteristics ................................................................................................. T3-17
Trailer .......................................................................................................................... 1-4.13
Transom ...................................................................................................................... 2-2.6
Trim Tab Actuators ..................................................................................................... 3-7.1
Trim Tab Control Panel ............................................................................................... F3-8
Trim Tab Controls ....................................................................................................... 3-7.2
Trim Tab Position Indicator Panel ............................................................................... F3-9
Trim Tabs .................................................................................................................... 4-15
Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................................................. T4-13
True And Magnetic Change ........................................................................................ 4-11.5
Tube Repair Kit Contents ........................................................................................... T5-1
TX Indicator ................................................................................................................ F4-38
Upper Section ............................................................................................................. 2-3.2

Urgency Call ............................................................................................................... F4-61
Urgency Reply ............................................................................................................ F4-107
UTC Mode Display .................................................................................................... F4-9
UTC Time Entry ......................................................................................................... F4-113
Valves ......................................................................................................................... 3-21.2

Ventilating Operation ................................................................................................... 4-17.4
Ventilation ................................................................................................................... 3-24.4
Vertex No Reply Call .................................................................................................. F4-104
Vessel in Distress ........................................................................................................ F4-57
VHF Radio Cleaning ................................................................................................... 6-9.1
VHF Radio Inspection ................................................................................................ 6-9.2
VHF Radio Operation ................................................................................................. 4-20
Calling Another Vessel ......................................................................................... 4-20.8
Dual Watch (To Priority Channel) ........................................................................ 4-20.11
Emergency Channel Use ..................................................................................... 4-20.7
International, USA, And Canada Mode ............................................................... 4-20.5
Index-19
INDEX
Paragraph,
Figure (F),
Table (T),
Subject Numbers
V - Continued
VHF Radio Operation - Continued
Making Telephone Calls ....................................................................................... 4-20.9
Navigation Indication ............................................................................................ 4-20.13
NOAA Weather Channel ..................................................................................... 4-20.6
NOAA Weather Alert .................................................................................... 4-20.6.1
NOAA Weather Alert Testing ....................................................................... 4-20.6.2
Operating On Channels 13 And 67 ................................................................ 4-20.10
Simplex/Duplex Channel Use ............................................................................... 4-20.4
Scanning ............................................................................................................... 4-20.12
Selecting The Scan Type ............................................................................... 4-20.12.1
Memory Scanning (M-Scan) ......................................................................... 4-20.12.2
Priority Scanning (P-Scan) ............................................................................ 4-20.12.3
Transmit Time-Out Timer (Tot) ............................................................................ 4-20.3
VHF Radio Reception .......................................................................................... 4-20.1
VHF Radio Transmission ..................................................................................... 4-20.2
VHF Radio Reinstallation ........................................................................................... 6-17.2
VHF Radio Removal .................................................................................................. 6-17.1
VHF Radio .................................................................................................................. 3-30.1, F3-33
Walkways ................................................................................................................... 2-2.3

Waterjet Drive ............................................................................................................ 6-19
External Waterjet Component Reinstallation ........................................................ 6-19.4
External Waterjet Component Removal ............................................................... 6-19.1
Internal Waterjet Installation ................................................................................ 6-19.3
Internal Waterjet Removal ................................................................................... 6-19.2
Waterjet Drives ........................................................................................................... 3-6
Components .......................................................................................................... 3-6.1
Controls ................................................................................................................ 3-6.3
Operation .............................................................................................................. 3-6.2
Well Deck .................................................................................................................. 2-2.2
Well Deck Storage Compartment ............................................................................... 2-4.2
WX Alert Display ....................................................................................................... F4-20
WX Alert OFF ............................................................................................................ F4-21
WX Alert ..................................................................................................................... 4-11.10
Index-20

Boat Information Book 34&#39; Seaark

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Boat Information Book 34&#39; Seaark

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BOAT INFORMATION BOOK

34-FOOT PATROL BOAT

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

CHAPTER 3 - SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

CHAPTER 5 - HULL SPECIFICATIONS AND REPAIR

CHAPTER 7 - EMERGENCY AND DAMAGE CONTROL

Chapter/Paragraph Title Page

1. GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................................................................. 1-1

Section I. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 1-1

1-1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................ 1-1

Section II. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................. 1-3

1-3 HULL STRUCTURE FEATURES ................................................................... 1-3

Section III. SUPPORT DATA ............................................................................................. 1-6

1-6 ONBOARD TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION .......................................... 1-6

Section IV. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................... 1-21

1-9 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................... 1-21

2. GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS ............................................................................................. 2-1

2-1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 2-1

Chapter/Paragraph Title Page

2. GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS - Continued

2-2.1 FOREDECK ...................................................................................................... 2-1

3. SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS ......................................................................... 3-1

Section I. GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-1

3-1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 3-1

Section II. PROPULSION SYSTEM ................................................................................. 3-2

3-2 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-2

Chapter/Paragraph Title Page

3. SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS - Continued

Section II. PROPULSION SYSTEM - Continued

3-7.1 TRIM TAB ACTUATORS ............................................................................... 3-8

Section III. FUEL SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 3-10

3-8 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-10

Section IV. ENGINE COOLANT AND PREHEATER SYSTEMS .................................. 3-18

3-16 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-18

Section V. SEAWATER COOLING SYSTEM .................................................................. 3-20

3-17 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-20

3-18 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-22

Chapter/Paragraph Title Page

3. SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS - Continued

Section VI. ENGINE COMBUSTION AIR AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS - Continued

3-19.2 AIR INTAKE PREHEATER ............................................................................ 3-22

Section VII. FAST LUBE OIL CHANGE SYSTEM ........................................................... 3-23

3-21 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-23

Section VIII. BILGE PUMPING AND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS ........................................ 3-24

3-22 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-24

Section IX. STEERING SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 3-26

3-23 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-26

Section X. HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ........... 3-28

3-24 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-28

Section XI. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ............................................................................... 3-31

3-25 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-31

Chapter/Paragraph Title Page

3. SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS - Continued

Section XI. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - Continued

3-25.3 ELECTRICAL LABEL PLATES AND MARKINGS ..................................... 3-31

Section XII. COMMUNICATION, NAVIGATION, AND FORCE PROTECTION

3-29 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3-43

Section XIII. DAMAGE CONTROL AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT .................................. 3-46

3-33 DAMAGE CONTROL AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT .................................. 3-46

Chapter/Paragraph Title Page

3. SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS - Continued

Section XIII. DAMAGE CONTROL AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT - Continued

3-34.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ............................................................ 3-46

Boat Information Book 34' Seaark

Boat Information Book 34' Seaark